NEAX 2000 IPS

NEAX 2000 IPS
NDA-24349
ISSUE 4
STOCK # 152050
®
NEAX 2000 IPS
INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER
Request For Proposal (RFP)
Reference Guide
January 2005
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or
features, at any time, without notice.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. and
shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
NEAX® and Dterm® are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Microsoft® is a registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Intel® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All
other product references and/or company references are registered trademarks or
trademarked for their respective products and/or company.
The NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide has been developed to
provide technical information on the NEAX2000 IPS, which is required when responding to the
majority of questions asked on Request For Proposals. The information provided has been
compiled from a variety of available documentation and has been consolidated into a single
manual. For this reason, it may be necessary to gather additional information from other
supporting documentation to fulfill the Request For Proposal (RFP) requirements.
Information concerning questions not covered in this guide, corrections and/or comments are
most welcome and should be sent to:
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
NEAX2000 Product Management
6535 North State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Copyright 2004
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A
Chapter 1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................1
Overview of NEC ...................................................................................................................................................1
Components............................................................................................................................................................3
Computers ..............................................................................................................................................................4
Communications.....................................................................................................................................................4
Global Citizenship ..................................................................................................................................................4
Social Contributions ...............................................................................................................................................5
Preserving the Environment ...................................................................................................................................5
Promoting Volunteer Activities..............................................................................................................................6
Developing Good Community Relations ...............................................................................................................6
Supporting the Arts, Culture and Sports.................................................................................................................7
Saving International Cultural Assets ......................................................................................................................7
Global Resources....................................................................................................................................................7
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc....................................................................................................................................9
Vertical Markets ...................................................................................................................................................11
Corporate Philosophy ...........................................................................................................................................11
NEAX®2000 IPS Introduction..............................................................................................................................12
NEAX® 2000 IPSDM Introduction ........................................................................................................................16
NEAX® 2000 IPSDMR Introduction.......................................................................................................................17
NEAX 2000 IPS Competitive Benefits ................................................................................................................18
Advantages ...........................................................................................................................................................18
Stands Alone System Capacity.............................................................................................................................20
IP Remote Network Capacity ...............................................................................................................................26
Chapter 2 System Architecture .............................................................................................1
Hardware Architecture ...........................................................................................................................................1
NEAX® 2000 IPS System Configuration ...............................................................................................................5
NEAX® IPSDM/IPSDMR System Configuration ......................................................................................................12
Software Architecture...........................................................................................................................................16
Chapter 3 System Highlights.................................................................................................1
Processors ...............................................................................................................................................................1
Reliability and Availability ....................................................................................................................................4
System Traffic ........................................................................................................................................................8
System Specifications...........................................................................................................................................16
System Compliance ..............................................................................................................................................24
Chapter 4 Equipment List ......................................................................................................1
Module/Installation Hardware................................................................................................................................1
Circuit Cards...........................................................................................................................................................3
Chapter 5 Station Equipment ..............................................................................................15
Terminal Line Up .................................................................................................................................................15
Analog Terminals .................................................................................................................................................16
Dterm Series i (IP) Terminals .................................................................................................................................17
Dterm Series i (TDM) Multi-line Digital Terminals...............................................................................................19
Dterm Series E (Multi-line Digital Terminals) .......................................................................................................22
Dterm Cordless Terminals ......................................................................................................................................29
INASET................................................................................................................................................................33
Dterm PS III Wireless Handset ...............................................................................................................................36
Dterm SP20 SoftPhone ...........................................................................................................................................37
Dterm SP30 SoftPhone ...........................................................................................................................................39
Dterm Extenders......................................................................................................................................................44
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page i
Chapter 6 Trunking.................................................................................................................1
Type of Trunks .......................................................................................................................................................1
Trunk Card Specifications ......................................................................................................................................2
System Trunking Capacity .....................................................................................................................................7
Least Cost Routing (LCR)......................................................................................................................................9
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position .............................................................................1
Attendant Console (SN716) ...................................................................................................................................1
Business Attendant System (BAS) .........................................................................................................................8
Chapter 8 System Administration .........................................................................................1
System Administration ...........................................................................................................................................1
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) ............................................................................................................2
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) ......................................................................................................2
System Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................................5
Self Diagnostic/System Messages ..........................................................................................................................5
Remote Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................................6
MA4000 Management System ...............................................................................................................................7
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions ............................................................................................1
Business/Hotel/Data Feature List ...........................................................................................................................1
Business/Hotel/Data Feature Descriptions .............................................................................................................5
CCIS Feature List .................................................................................................................................................34
CCIS Features Descriptions .................................................................................................................................35
ISDN Feature List.................................................................................................................................................41
ISDN Feature Descriptions...................................................................................................................................42
Q-SIG Feature List ...............................................................................................................................................44
Q-SIG Feature Descriptions .................................................................................................................................44
Wireless Feature List............................................................................................................................................45
Wireless Feature Descriptions ..............................................................................................................................47
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces...................................................................1
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ..........................................................................................................1
Message Center Interface (MCI) ............................................................................................................................7
Property Management System (PMS) ....................................................................................................................9
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface ................................................................................1
System Outline .......................................................................................................................................................1
User Application Processor (UAP).........................................................................................................................1
OAI UAP Applications...........................................................................................................................................2
OpenWorX: Attendant Statistics............................................................................................................................5
OpenWorX: Business Attendant System (BAS).....................................................................................................6
OpenWorX: Business Receptionist (BR)..............................................................................................................10
OpenWorX: Dialer...............................................................................................................................................11
OpenWorX: Location Status Information (LSI) ..................................................................................................12
OpenWorX: Message Reader (MR).....................................................................................................................12
OpenWorX: Short Text Messaging......................................................................................................................13
OpenWorX: Incoming Call Assistant (ICA)........................................................................................................14
OpenWorX: Group Call Forward Control (GCFC) ..............................................................................................15
OpenWorX: Personal Call Assistant (PCA)..........................................................................................................16
OpenWorX: Name Display ...................................................................................................................................19
OpenWorX: Multiple CCIS Node Configuration .................................................................................................19
OAI Application Software Development .............................................................................................................20
System Specifications...........................................................................................................................................20
Page ii
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with MIS .......................................................1
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) .......................................................................................................................1
Basic ACD..............................................................................................................................................................1
Basic ACD Features ...............................................................................................................................................2
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business .................................................................................................................3
CallCenterWorX MIS .............................................................................................................................................6
QueWorX4.0 .........................................................................................................................................................14
QueWorX Server Information & PBX Requirements...........................................................................................17
QueWorX Packaging............................................................................................................................................17
Professional Services for QueWorX .....................................................................................................................18
Chapter 13 Voice over IP (VoIP) ............................................................................................1
VoIP Solutions .......................................................................................................................................................1
Extended Enterprise IP Solution ............................................................................................................................1
IP Station ................................................................................................................................................................3
IP Station ................................................................................................................................................................3
CCIS Networking via IP.......................................................................................................................................14
H.323 Connection.................................................................................................................................................18
FAX and Modem over IP .....................................................................................................................................21
Remote PIM over IP.............................................................................................................................................25
Planning and Installation ......................................................................................................................................30
System Conditions/Limitations (Peer-to-Peer IP) ................................................................................................34
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS) ................................................1
CCIS and ISDN ......................................................................................................................................................3
Digital and Analog CCIS........................................................................................................................................4
IP CCIS...................................................................................................................................................................5
Centralized Billing..................................................................................................................................................8
Centralized E911 – CCIS .....................................................................................................................................10
Call Set Up Times ................................................................................................................................................11
Look Ahead Routing ............................................................................................................................................11
Shared Trunk Facilities and Alternate Routing ....................................................................................................12
Centralized System Maintenance and Administration .........................................................................................13
Centralized Call Accounting/Billing Systems ......................................................................................................14
Centralized Voice Processing / Messaging ..........................................................................................................15
Centralized Attendant Consoles ...........................................................................................................................15
Uniform Numbering Plans ...................................................................................................................................16
CCIS Feature Chart ..............................................................................................................................................16
System Capacity ...................................................................................................................................................18
Required Equipment.............................................................................................................................................19
IP Specifications...................................................................................................................................................21
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN) .........................................................1
ISDN Primary Rate Interface .................................................................................................................................1
PRI Services & Features.........................................................................................................................................1
Event Based CCIS ..................................................................................................................................................7
Business Feature List..............................................................................................................................................8
ISDN Network Requirements for Layer One (1) ...................................................................................................9
Supported Network Services (Trunk provisioned only).........................................................................................9
ISDN PRI Specifications ......................................................................................................................................10
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) .........................................................................................................................17
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) .........................................................................................................................18
Documentation .....................................................................................................................................................21
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
Issue 4
Page iii
Chapter 16 Wireless System..................................................................................................1
NEAX 2000 IPS Wireless Communication System (WCS)...................................................................................1
Wireless Roaming ..................................................................................................................................................3
Wireless – Short Text Message Notification (OAI) ...............................................................................................7
System Description...............................................................................................................................................12
Wireless Specifications ........................................................................................................................................15
UTAM Regulations and Reason for Existence.....................................................................................................19
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System .............................................................................................1
Features ..................................................................................................................................................................3
Hotel System Capacity .........................................................................................................................................12
System Specifications...........................................................................................................................................12
Station Equipment ................................................................................................................................................13
Chapter 18 Call Accounting...................................................................................................1
AIMWorX™ ...........................................................................................................................................................1
Configurations ........................................................................................................................................................4
The AIMWorX Manager.........................................................................................................................................6
Integrating AIMWorX modules ..............................................................................................................................6
Supported Operating Systems ................................................................................................................................9
PC/Server Minimum Requirements........................................................................................................................9
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems .................................................................................1
Voice Mail Integration ...........................................................................................................................................1
Message Center Interface (MCI) ............................................................................................................................4
NEAXMail AD-8 ...................................................................................................................................................6
NEAXMail AD-120 .............................................................................................................................................14
NEAXMail AD-64 ...............................................................................................................................................20
NEAXMail IM-16 ................................................................................................................................................36
Chapter 20 System Documentation ......................................................................................1
NEAX 2000 IPS Documentation List ....................................................................................................................1
Page iv
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
Overview of NEC
NEC Corporation was founded in 1899. NEC worldwide is built on a strong tradition and global
heritage. NEC was created out of a joint venture between Western Electric from America and a
Japanese investment group. Japan’s first joint venture combined the technology and
manufacturing techniques of the Bell Company with the vision of Japanese investors to form
one of the oldest, established telecommunications companies in the world. NEC is one of only
a small number of companies within the world that have successfully pioneered technology
and delivered products within every major evolution of business communications systems.
NEC has a total workforce of over 202,000 people. At least 10% of NEC’s employees are
either scientists or engineers. In Japan, NEC has eight major plants in or near Tokyo and 53
consolidated subsidiaries throughout Japan. NEC has 57 major plants at overseas subsidiaries
and affiliates in 19 countries. NEC’s marketing network consists of approximately 420 sales
offices in Japan. Overseas, NEC has 114 marketing and service subsidiaries and affiliates in
30 countries, with 22 liaison offices in 22 countries. There are seven R&D facilities in Japan
and three subsidiaries in the United States and Germany. NEC is truly committed to the linking
of people and information through technology, with over 15,000 different products distributed
worldwide.
NEC, recognized as a worldwide leader in high technology, is one of the few companies
capable of offering a full spectrum of products and systems in computers, communications,
and semiconductor devices.
NEC first established a United States presence over 30 years ago when it opened a sales
office in New York in 1963. Since that time, NEC has broadened its operations in the United
States by expanding into manufacturing, research and software development operations, by
employing 7,000 people and by establishing extensive marketing, sales and service networks
nationwide with revenues exceeding $5.9 billion.
In 1993, NEC introduced a new corporate logo:
. The logo represented the beginning of
a dynamic era in the life of a company with a distinguished past. The changing dynamics of
domestic and international markets mandate that the world’s leading companies evolve with
those changes. In response to this evolution, NEC is building a more responsive business
based on the steadfast foundation of the traditional NEC business philosophy. NEC.s
organization has become a recognized leader in linking people and information through
technology. The logo evolved from the simple abbreviation of Nippon Electric Company, in the
late 1890.s, into a dynamic symbol featuring the traditional NEC letters with bold, sharp lines
expressing technology and confidence, combined with gentle curves that are associated with
humanity and friendliness. The logo has a holistic design that each letter expresses an
independent character and at the same time represents the harmony of the logo as a whole or
unit. NEC blue has been designated as the corporate color. This subtle blue was selected to
symbolize human intelligence, life, and the protection of the environment.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction
The Invention Age
NEC began its solid tradition with some of the first manual telecommunications systems in Japan.
During the Invention Age, NEC had achieved the following:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
In 1900 - NEC began manufacturing its own products
In 1903 - NEC manufactured the first battery phone in Japan
In 1923 - NEC entered the radio transmission field
In 1927 - NEC began automatic switching manufacturing
In 1938 - NEC began manufacturing crossbar switching systems
The Industrial Age
The Industrial Age in America brought great strides in business communication systems with the
development of the electro-mechanical system. NEC successfully delivered step-by-step, crossbar,
and cross-reed technology to the world marketplace. During this era;
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
In 1950 - NEC began manufacturing some of the world’s first semiconductors
In 1952 - NEC won the Deming prize awarded in communications
In 1956 - NEC introduced step-by-step, cross-reed technology, and crossbar telephone
switching systems to the world marketplace.
In 1959 - NEC developed one of the first transistorized computers
In 1963 - January 17, 1963 NEC entered the American marketplace with a sales office in
New York
In 1965 - NEC became a world innovator in digital transmission equipment
The Electronic Age
NEC entered the Electronic Age with solid-state technology, stored program control, and digital
switching throughout the 1970’s and 1980’s.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Page 1-2
In 1972 - NEC developed the world’s first 10K single element LSI chip
In 1976 - NEC introduced the first skinny wire system
In 1978 - NEC introduced the first digital hybrid, the Electra-100
In 1979 - NEC entered the personal computer market
In 1980 - NEC patented its Distributor Processor design (US Patent # 4,210,782). This
little known patented process, invented by Kazunori Fujita, ushered in a new era of
business communications systems through the use of distributed processing, modular
building block concept, and fully integrated voice and data switching. Out of this patent
came NEC’s premier flagship product, the NEAX2400 IMS
In 1983 - NEC introduced the NEAX2400 IMS
In 1983 - NEC introduced one of the world’s first super computers
In 1985 - NEC introduced the Electra IMS
In 1986 - NEC created one of the first 4MBit processor chips
In 1988 - NEC opened the Software Development Center in the U.S. market
In 1989 - NEC introduced the NEAX1400 IMS
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
The Information Age
Once again, NEC is delivering powerful communications systems. Systems that interface
today’s computers and telephones deliver a broad spectrum of integrated answers to today’s
modern communication challenges.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
In 1993 - NEC introduced the world’s first 64M DRAM samples
In 1993 - NEC introduced the NEAX2400 ICS
In 1994 - NEC introduced the NEAX2000 IVS
In 1997 - NEC introduced the NEAX1000 IVS
In 1998 - NEC introduced the NEAX2400 IMX
In 1999 - NEC introduced the NEAX2000 IVS2
In 1999 - NEC introduced the NEAX EXPRESS
In 2000 - NEC introduced the NEAX2400 IPX
In 2001 - NEC introduced the NEAX2000 IPS
In 2002 - NEC introduced the NEAX2000 IPSDM
In 2002 - NEC introduced the NEAX2400 IPXi
In 2003 - NEC introduced the NEAX2000 IPSDMR
In 2004 - NEC introduced the Univerge SV7000
NEC continues to focus its activities on the integration of computers and communications. NEC
research and development, production, marketing, and service based on this integration
positioned it to meet diversifying needs in worldwide markets.
Worldwide Leadership
NEC is committed to the linking people and information through technology, with over 15,000
different products distributed worldwide. Innovative, award-winning products featured in top
publications form the foundation for NEC’s leadership in these high-tech industries.
Components
NEC is the world leader in integrated components with billions of dollars in annual sales. NEC
provides major processors and component chips to other leading manufacturers of
communications, computers and electronic equipment.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Very Large Scale Integrated (VLSI) memories
Micro and Mini computers
Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC)
Semiconductors
A broad spectrum of other electronic components
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Computers
Among the world’s leaders in the manufacture and sales of computers, NEC has billions of
dollars in annual sales, provides the broadest selection of computers and the networking
products to connect them.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Mainframe computers ƒ
Personal Computers ƒ
Computer terminals
ƒ
Business computers
Computer peripherals
Software
Communications
NEC is one of the world’s top suppliers in the production and distribution of communications
equipment. With billions of dollars in sales, NEC is not the largest manufacturer of
communications products, but offers the broadest spectrum of products and a demonstrated
commitment to the total integration and networking of those products.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Telephone company switching systems
Network transmission systems
Business communication systems
Broadcast equipment
Space electronics
Global Citizenship
Worldwide in scope, NEC links people with the local communities across the street, throughout
a nation, and around the world with caring and involvement through its corporate sponsorships
and the individual efforts of its employees. Realizing that businesses and communities must
work together in harmony, NEC has emerged as a global citizen working to fulfill the social and
economic goals of communities and countries around the globe through its corporate
commitments and dedication of its employees. Each NEC affiliate responds to its obligation to
reinvest some of its profits into local communities and link business with social responsibility.
Environment
The world becomes smaller through technology. It is rapidly moving from a world of independent
nations to a global community. Based on this premise, NEC has drawn up the NEC Eco Action
Plan 21, a strategy to involve the company in the solving of global community environmental
problems. The objective of the plan is to develop corporate activities that will contribute to building
an economic society that exists in harmony with the environment. The NEC commitment to global
environmental security is further demonstrated through support in dollars, equipment, and
manpower for worthwhile environmental programs that provide a higher quality of life to all earth’s
creatures.
Page 1-4
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
Community
NEC and its employees are active in worldwide, national, regional, and local community affairs
through the dedication of their time and resources. NEC affiliates and their employees donate
time, money, and equipment to help meet everyday and emergency needs of the healthcare
and other social communities. In addition, the NEC businesses and their people give freely of
their time, effort, and contributions to help meet the needs of local business groups, fraternal,
and other social organizations.
Education
Through worldwide efforts, NEC soundly supports the education of citizens and nations around
the world through financial grants, volunteer work, donations of equipment, and the sharing of
knowledge. Specifically, the NEC Foundation of America is dedicated to encouraging and
supporting the efforts of creative and effective non-profit organizations in the United States and
their staffs, clients, and volunteers who, like NEC, work to develop and share the benefits of
technology with society in order to help improve the quality of human life.
Social Contributions
As a global corporation, NEC aims at achieving a higher level of coexistence with society. We
will also strive to become an outstanding corporation respected by all those related to us and
fully capable of offering high standards. In order to achieve this, we appreciate the great
importance of contributing to society as a good corporate citizen and walk hand in hand with
the world toward a better society.
Preserving the Environment
Satellite Tracking of Cranes Migration Routes
A conference to conclude the Ramsar Treaty - an international agreement regarding protecting
the world’s major wetland areas as habitat for waterfowl - was held in the city of Kushiro in
Hokkaido in June 1993. In commemoration, NEC has already embarked upon comprehensive
research programs into the migration routes and habitats of the crane. A reflection of our deep
concern for preserving the earth’s environment, we are the sole sponsors of this project, which
is being supported by the extensive “Computer and Communications Technology” amassed
over the years.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Major Aspects of the Research
Small homing devices, linked to a communications satellite, are attached to the cranes in order
to trace their migration routes, stopover points, breeding grounds and their final destinations.
Once the major habitats are determined, their environmental conditions over the last 10 years
are analyzed in order to study changes in the earth’s environment.
As field studies continue, they are correlated with analytical data on the environment in an attempt
to predict the cranes’ future selection of environments and conditions in the wetland areas.
Promoting Volunteer Activities
The International Beach Clean Up
The International Beach Clean Up grew out of a proposal from CMC (Center for Marine
Conservation) in the United States. The activities do not merely concentrate on cleaning up
each area. In order to devise strategies to stop the sources of environmental pollution, research
is being conducted into the type and extent of the pollution. Japan began its participation in the
program 1990 and is conducting clean up campaigns under the auspices of the National Clean
Up Office. Activities are conducted during the spring and autumn, the major one being the
“International Beach Clean Up Day” held nationwide on September 22nd. It was launched with
about 1,000 people participating and today has grown into an event with tens of thousands of
people working on beaches and other locations throughout the country. In addition to
cooperating with the events, NEC also promotes the activities to its employees and encourages
their voluntary participation.
Developing Good Community Relations
NEC Super Tower Concert
The atrium at NEC’s head office in Mita, Tokyo, also serves as a venue for concerts for
employees of the NEC Group, with residents of the surrounding Mita area especially welcome.
This is just one of the ways NEC contributes to the local community. Since starting in July 1991
four concerts have been organized featuring a variety of programs, each one has been very
favorably received.
Page 1-6
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
Relief for Victims of Mt. Unzen Eruption and Other Natural Disasters
After the eruption of the Mt. Unzen volcano* and the disaster in the Fugen Mountains occurred,
NEC wasted no time in rushing large quantities of badly needed household appliances (such as
washing machines, dryers and fans) to the victims. It also provides relief to victims of the
cyclone disaster in Bangladesh and the huge floods in China.
(* Mt. Unzen suddenly erupted on November 17, 1990, after lying dormant for over two
centuries. Approximately 15,000 people were killed, and loss of property and possessions was
extensive. Living in special shelters, the former residents are still attempting to recover from
their losses.)
Supporting the Arts, Culture and Sports
Wheelchair Tennis
NEC supports wheelchair tennis competitions, popular all over the world, and believes that the
disabled should be able to enjoy sporting events along with their family and friends. NEC
sponsors the NEC International Wheelchair Tennis Tour, organized by the International
Wheelchair Tennis Federation (IWTF). In Japan, it also sponsors the NEC National Invitational
Wheelchair Tennis Championship, offering an opportunity for top-ranking players from all over
the country to compete together.
Saving International Cultural Assets
NEC also supports the restoration of old works of art stored overseas. It organized the
restoration work done in Japan since the spring of 1992 on old Japanese paintings previously
stored in the Freer Gallery of Art, in the Smithsonian Institute in Washington DC. Parts of the
work were completed in August of that year and the work still continues. It is also studying
requests for restoration work from various other institutions such as the Boston Museum of Art.
Feeling that preserving the environment involves preserving the art that also beautifies man’s
surroundings, NEC firmly believes in its support of this important restoration work.
Global Resources
The primary elements in a company’s ability to respond to marketplace, buyer, and customer
demands are the scope of its resources and strategy by which it uses those resources. NEC
has established a worldwide network of human, physical, financial, and intellectual resources.
These are deployed through localized operations, strategically located, professionally staffed,
and thoroughly equipped. This enables NEC to deliver leading edge products and innovative
services to businesses with hundreds of locations across the country or one location across
town.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-7
Chapter 1 Introduction
People
NEC has a global network of dedicated employees with offices in many countries. Our
experienced management, engineers, installers, trainers, and staff pride themselves in a high
level of job performance and customer support. More than 7,000 employees in the U.S. help
maintain NEC’s technological leadership with fresh ideas and the energy to turn them into
reality.
Facilities
The physical resources of the company are the tangible assets that allow it to respond to your
system’s needs and your communication demands in a timely and effective manner. NEC takes
pride in maintaining smooth working facilities with all resources required to provide the highest
level of system service and client support. NEC has invested millions of dollars in facilities,
tools, equipment, and inventory located in hundreds of corporate locations, direct offices,
distributors, and affiliates worldwide to create one of the broadest multi-level support systems in
the industry.
Assets
NEC’s ability to manufacture and market its offerings depends in large part on its ability to
remain profitable. With a substantial revenue base worldwide, NEC has built a strong financial
and operational base -- a strong foundation of support our customers can depend on.
Innovation
Top training, knowledge, experience, and creativity are the hallmarks of intellectual excellence
and of NEC’s professional staff. Our telecom experts combine the skills and desire needed to
provide the highest level of responsiveness to a system’s service needs and your company’s
communication support requirements.
Page 1-8
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Established
1963, as a subsidiary of NEC Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Headquarters
6535 North State Highway 161
Irving, Texas 75039-2402
PHONE: (214) 262-2000
Revenues
Employees
$3.7 billion
2,800+
Sales & Marketing
Network
65 offices in 20 states throughout the United States, Puerto Rico
and Canada.
Manufacturing
Facilities
HILLSBORO, OREGON
Fiber Optic Transport Systems
Digital Loop Carrier Systems
Very Small Aperture Terminals (Satellite) (VSATs)
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Switching Systems
Digital PBXs
Digital Multiplex Systems
Automotive Electronic Systems
Cellular Telephone and Pagers
TECNOLOGIAS NEC DE MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.
Cellular Telephones and Pagers
Development
Activities
DALLAS, TEXAS
Advanced Switching
Computer Telephony Software
Radio & Satellite Communications Software
Wireless Communication Products
HERNDON, VIRGINIA
Transmission Software & Firmware
SAN JOSE, CALIFORNIA
Transmission Software
HILLSBORO, OREGON
Transmission Hardware & Software
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-9
Chapter 1 Introduction
Major Product
Areas
PUBLIC NETWORKING
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Switching
Broadband Access Systems
Digital Loop Carrier Systems
Fiber Optic Transmission Systems
Microwave Radio Systems
Network Management Systems
Satellite Communications Systems
SONET Transport Systems
Internet Access Systems
Narrowband Wave Division Multiplexing Systems
Personal Access Communications System (PACS) Infrastructure
Equipment
CORPORATE NETWORKING
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Switches
Audio/Video Teleconference Systems
Telemedicine Products
Distance Learning Products
Data Communications Products
Key Telephone Systems
Local Area Network (LAN) interconnectivity
Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Systems, Software and
Peripheral Products
COMMUNICATIONS TERMINALS
Analog & Digital Telephones
Cellular Mobile Telephones
Facsimile Equipment
Narrowband & Broadband Personal Communications Services
(PCS) Products
Numeric & Alphanumeric Pagers
Enhanced Wireless Products (messaging, voice, data &
accessories)
Scope Of Business
Development, manufacturing, sale, service and support of
Telecommunications Products and Network Management
Systems to the public and private sectors.
Engineering and Marketing of Integrated Computer and
Communications (C&C) Systems and Networks including
Broadband Multimedia Products.
Customization
of
ATM
Switching
Systems,
Business
Communication Systems, Data Communications, Radio and
Transmission Equipment.
Page 1-10
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
Vertical Markets
The NEAX®2000 IPS is a full-featured IP based communications system that addresses the
telecommunications market by providing a rich feature set of both Key and PBX features. The
NEAX2000 IPS is positioned to provide a more cost effective solution for the small to medium
size business, hotel property or networked environment. The NEAX2000 IPS provides
unparalleled investment protection by allowing the user to take full advantage of today and
tomorrow’s technology advancements. The following is a list of some of the markets the
NEAX2000 IPS easily adapts to fit customer requirements.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Business
Telemarketing
Communication
Tenant Services
Education
Health Care
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Legal
Hospitality
Financial
Government
Transportation
Corporate Philosophy
C&C is NEC’s answer to the challenges of today and the future. NEC’s C&C philosophy, born
out of the marriage between COMPUTER technology and COMMUNICATION technology,
crystallizes over 90 years in the telecommunications engineering and more than 25 years of
development in computers. Through C&C, NEC is able to meet the challenges of the future
today. In 1993, NEC had modified its corporate philosophy to reflect their vision of the future:
“NEC strives through C&C to help advance societies worldwide toward deepened mutual
understanding and the fulfillment of human potential”.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-11
Chapter 1 Introduction
NEAX®2000 IPS Introduction
In the modern information-based economy, timely access to accurate information is an
essential resource for every successful organization. In many cases it is the primary
commodity being created, bought, or sold and anything less than the best communication
system puts your organization at a disadvantage. The complex interconnections of voice,
print, and data communications demand a powerful but elegant system capable of taking you
through the 21st century.
The NEAX 2000 IPS (Internet Protocol Server) is a full-featured IP based communications
system providing a rich feature set with pure Voice over IP (VoIP) communications (peer to
peer connections), across corporate Local and Wide Area Networks (LAN and WAN). Dterm IP
telephones are designed to provide a converged infrastructure at the desktop, with a 100 Base
T Ethernet connection to the LAN and built-in hub for a PC connection to the telephone itself.
The system can provide peer-to-peer connections between Dterm IP telephones with voice
compression, offering existing Dterm Series i telephone features. On the WAN side, the system
can provide peer-to-peer connections over IP networks with the voice compression, on a CCIS
basis (CCIS over IP) or Remote PIM (Remote PIM over IP).
The NEAX 2000 IPS can provide legacy station/trunk interfaces to support the existing Time
Division Multiplexing (TDM) based infrastructure, such as analog telephones, analog networks,
and digital networks (T1/E1, ISDN etc.). At maximum configuration, the system can provide
1020 ports for IP and legacy devices, and 256 ports for Application cards. Communications
between legacy stations/trunks and Dterm IP telephones/IP networks are made via IP PAD,
which converts packet-based voice data to TDM-based voice data, and vice versa. Both peerto-peer connections and TDM-based connections are controlled the Main Processor (MP)
card. The MP card incorporates a built-in Device Registration Server (DRS) and a single
interface point of IP connection to IP telephone, MATWorX, and OAI/ACD servers.
NEAX 2000 IPS users have access to hundreds of service features that are used in building
unique telephony applications that enhance productivity, reduce operating costs and improve
communications efficiently. The innovative modular hardware and software design allows
efficient, effective growth within each module from its minimum to its maximum configuration.
The NEAX 2000 IPS software design is as advanced as its hardware. It ensures the system
will support evolving applications and have the reliability needed to compete in today's world
and into tomorrow's. The software is designed with modularity in mind. Together, these
modular building blocks allow customers to initially buy what they need and add capacity and
capabilities as the business demands, resulting in a greater degree of cost control for new
installations and for upgrades to features, capacities and the software versions.
Page 1-12
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
The illustration below shows a typical system layout.
NEAX 2000 IPS
NEAX 2000 IPS
MATWorX
(Via IPT:CCIS)
PSTN
CCIS over IP
LC/DLC
COT
Internet
/Intranet
IP-PAD
MATWorX
(via RS232C)
PSTN
MP
DRS
IPT(H.323
Handler)
H.323 GK
Router
Router
NEAX IPSDM
Switching Hub (100Mbps)
Dterm IP
Switching
Hub
Router
MATWorX
(via LAN)
Dterm
OAI
Server Assistant
DHCP
Server
Dterm IP
Remote PIM over IP
with Survivability
Client PC
Dterm IP
Client PC
Dterm
INASET
Dterm SP30
Station to Station Connection
For Dterm IP to Dterm IP connection (Peer to Peer connection), the voice data is transmitted and
received directly between Dterm IPs on the LAN. For Dterm Legacy terminal connection, the IP-PAD
card and VCT card are required to transmit and receive the voice data. These cards are used to
control and convert the voice data. The MP card in either of the connections above manages the
control signals.
CCIS Connection
Dterm IP to Dterm IP connection (Peer to Peer connection) via CCIS is available only when the
destination office is NEAX 2000 IPS or NEAX 2400 IPX. The system provides only Point to
Multipoint connection.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-13
Chapter 1 Introduction
Maintenance
MATWorX IPS is used as the maintenance program for the NEAX 2000 IPS. Direct connection (RS232C), Modem connection and LAN (TCP/IP) connections are available to connect to the MAT
(Maintenance Administration Terminal).
Hybrid System of IP (peer-to-peer connection) and TDM Switching
The NEAX 2000 IPS supports both pure IP switching (peer-to-peer connections) and Time Division
Switching (TDM). The pure IP switching is provided for communications between Dterm IPs and for
CCIS/Remote PIM connections with another NEAX 2000 IPS/ NEAX IPSDM/2400 IPX (CCIS over IP or
Remote PIM over IP). On the other hand, the TDM switching is provided for communications between
legacy stations/trunks. Connections between Dterm IP/CCIS or Remote PIM over IP and legacy
stations/trunks are made via IP PADs, which converts packet-based voice data to TDM-based voice
data, and vice versa.
Built-in DRS (Device Registration Server) on MP
The NEAX 2000 IPS incorporates DRS (Device Registration Server) on MP, which provides a Login/Log-out management of Dterm IP including Registration, Authentication. Also the built-in DRS can be
inter-worked with DHCP server to provide easy administration of IP address.
Reduced Hardware with IP based Architecture
The Dterm IPs accommodated in a LAN do not require DLC card because they can be interfaced directly
with the LAN and connected with peer-to-peer basis. When Dterm IP is connected with station/trunk,
which is accommodated in TSW, the speech path between LAN and TSW is made via IP PAD under
the call processing control of MP. The number of Dterm IPs can be simply expanded by adding the
terminal itself and IP PADs if traffic volume is increased. With this system architecture, the hardware
such as DLC, PIM, Power Supply etc. is reduced and easy cost effective move, add, change is
realized.
Office Data Backup Enhancement
The office data of NEAX 2000 IPS is stored in Flash ROM.
Various Installation Methods
To meet the specific needs of the customers’ environment, the NEAX 2000 IPS provides the following
installation methods:
Floor Standing Installation
Wall-mounting Installation
IEC standard 19-inch Rack-mounting Installation
Page 1-14
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
Unified Circuit Card Size
All the circuit cards for NEAX 2000 IPS are designed in one size (PN-type), and installed in the PIM.
This maximizes the efficiency of slot utilization of the PIM.
High Density Line/Trunk Cards
Major line/trunk cards used in NEAX 2000 IPS are provided with 8 circuits per card. This allows the
physical system size to be compact.
Universal Slot
One PIM provides 12 card slots for Line/Trunk (LT). Also, these card slots can be used for Application
Processor (AP) cards without complicated limitations. As this makes easy quotation and installation,
more number of AP cards can be mounted in one PIM.
DC/DC Power Supply for –48V
The PIM houses optional DC/DC Power Supply for the cards which require –48V power such as CSI
card used for interface of Cell Station (CS) of wireless system. Since this power supply is mounted in
the space under the AC/DC power, additional Power Module/card slots are not required.
Extended Application Processor (AP) Port Capacity
The NEAX 2000 IPS provides a maximum of 256 AP ports and it is independent of the 512 phyical
ports for legacy Line/Trunk (LT), therefore, more AP cards can be used in the system such as T1/E1
digital link, etc.
Dual MP System
The system complies with dual control system on Main Processor.
Note: Since the system employs Cold Standby processing in MP changeover, the calls in progress are
terminated as a result of the MP changeover. Also, during the MP changeover, the call originating/receiving and
service feature access are not effective. (It takes about 30 to 60 seconds to complete the MP changeover.)
Remote PIM over IP with Survivability
The NEAX 2000 IPS can have a PIM installed at a remote site through an IP network. At the main site,
the NEAX 2000 IPS/NEAX IPSDM is installed and NEAX 2000 IPS/NEAX IPSDM/ NEAX IPSDMR is
installed at the remote site. The main site controls call processing and service feature access for
station users located at both the main and remote sites. When the Remote PIM cannot be connected
with main site due to the IP network and/or main PBX failure, the Remote PIM initializes the system and
re-starts operation by its own Main Processor (survival mode). In the survival mode, almost all service
features are provided to the station users accommodated in Remote PIM. When the IP network/main
PBX recovers, the Remote PIM can be restored to normal mode with a system initialization by manual
operation or automatically (Selectable by system data setting).
ƒ
ƒ
IPSDM with CP24-A MP
IPSDMR with CP31-A MP
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-15
Chapter 1 Introduction
NEAX® 2000 IPSDM Introduction
The NEAX IPSDM (Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model) is equipped with all the features
and functions of the NEAX 2000 IPS, with a smaller space requirement. It is a full-featured
PBX that supports advanced networking, pure peer-to-peer IP telephony connectivity and
traditional TDM switching capabilities. Designed primarily for pure converged IP networks, the
NEAX IPSDM can also accommodate a mixed (i.e., TDM and IP) converged IP network or
standalone solution.
The NEAX IPSDM supports up to 952 peer-to-peer IP stations and 40 TDM ports in a single
modular chassis. Up to three chassis can be stacked providing maximum capacity of 120
legacy TDM ports while still supporting as many as 828 peer-to-peer IP stations or more
depending on the amount of TDM stations used. It uses the same CPU, line/trunk cards,
application processor cards and software of the NEAX 2000 IPS and comes equipped for 19”
rack mounting. It offers superior port density; each chassis only occupies two Rack Units (2RU).
Characteristics of the NEAX IPSDM
Compact and Small Size MODULAR CHASSIS
One MODULAR CHASSIS provides 6 card slots /40LT ports and up to 3 MODULAR CHASSIS can be
used per system. (24 virtual LT ports are available per MODULAR CHASSIS in addition to 40LT ports.)
2 types of MP (Main Processor)
MP can be selected from the following options by customer requirements.
1) PN-CP24-A for IPSDM, the same MP as the NEAX 2000 IPS.
2) PN-CP31-A for IPSDMR , the following functions are removed from the CP31: DAT / DK00 / 1 RS232C
Port for MAT / MN Alarm Indication
Power Failure Transfer (PFT)
Power Failure Transfer (PFT) for the IPSDM is provided with PZ-4PFTA card. The PZ-8PFTB for the
NEAX 2000 IVS2 / IPS is not available for the IPSDM.
IPSDM Installation Methods
Wall Mount Installation is not available. The NEAX IPSDM can be installed on the desktop or into the
19-inch rack.
Page 1-16
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
NEAX® 2000 IPSDMR Introduction
The NEAX IPSDMR (Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model Remote) is a NEAX IPSDM that
has been optimized for Remote PIM over IP applications. The NEAX IPSDMR uses the SPNCP31 as the Main Processor. The SPN-CP31 is a cost down CPU to compete with Mitel
3100, NBX25, and CISCO 2600 Series. This system targets users who have up to 15
relatively small offices that accommodate 10-30 extensions at the Remote Site.
The MP card at Remote Site has the same system data as that at Main Site, because Remote
Site automatically gets the data from Main Site at the time of setup. In normal operation, Main
Site automatically copies the system data to Remote Site through the network once a day.
Because the CP31 is a cost down CPU, the following options that are built-in on the CP24 are
not available with the CP31:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
No built-in modem.
No built-in DAT.
Only one RS Port.
No built-in DK (external/relay key).
No MN Alarm Indication
System Outline
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The MP card at Main Site controls system processing, and Remote Site follows the Main
Site.
Remote Site can accommodate most terminals and trunks such as Dterm, Single-Line
telephone, PS, Dterm IP, COT, ISDN, etc. The Attendant Concole, Dterm Attendant postion,
Add-on Module and DSS/BLF are not supported at the Remote Site.
Local Switch (TDSW) at Remote Site controls connections within the Remote Site if possible.
In the case of connections between Main-Remote and Remote-Remote, the voice path is
connected via Peer-to-Peer or IP-PAD.
If the communications between Main-Remote are interrupted, the Remote Site survives by
itself after the system reset.
Advantages
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The system regards the terminals accommodated in both Main Site and Remote Site as the
extensions in the same office. Therefore, the service transparency is superior to CCIS.
Remote PIM over IP has no limitation of distance between Main and Remote.
Remote Site has a switching function at local. This provides the effective configuration of C.O.
line. In addition, the Remote Site can accommodate AP cards. This is an advantage to
accommodate ISDN lines especially.
The Remote Site survives by itself even if the link between Main and Remote is disconnected.
Therefore, the impact to users at Remote Site will be smaller if the link between Main and
Remote is disconnected.
This feature can reduce the bandwidth used on the WAN that is connected to CO lines at
Remote Site, rather than Dterm IP at remote location or the Media Converter (MC)
accommodation.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-17
Chapter 1 Introduction
NEAX 2000 IPS Competitive Benefits
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Advanced Technology (complete IP system on one card)
Pentium Equivalent AMD CPU
PSTN Gateway (requires trunk cards)
Supports Both IP & TDM
Both TDM & IP Totally Non-Blocking
H.323 Connectivity
Smaller Foot Print
Low Power Consumption
Wide Selection of IP and TDM Terminals
Economical Incremental Licensing Costs
Reduced Hardware Costs
Survivability at the Remote Site
Advantages
The NEAX 2000 IPS provides a unique set of advantages to users who seek an advanced
information system that is both flexible and dependable. Through the use of state-of-the-art
computer controlled telecommunications technology, NEC is able to provide the following
advantages:
(1) Full-Featured System – NEAX 2000 IPS station users have access to more than 300 service
features that enhance user productivity, reduce operating costs, and improve communication
efficiency. In addition, the control, network and interface positions of the NEAX 2000 IPS can
accommodate features, services and subsystems as required by specific applications.
(2) Network Integration - The NEAX 2000 IPS offers business, industries, hospitals and
hotel/motels the ability to access an extensive array of information processing and management
services by serving as the central controller of an integrated information network. The NEAX
2000 IPS reflects the philosophy of NEC Corporation to integrate C&C technology, and can
provide many voice and non-voice services.
(3) Flexible Line Size - Innovative Modular hardware and software design allows the NEAX
2000 IPS to efficiently serve from 48 ports up to 1020 ports in a main plus remote environment.
Modularity gives the system the ability to expand from its minimum configuration to its maximum
capacity as the need arises. This unique expansion capability allows the system to grow in a
cost affective manner as the user requirements expand. Your initial system investment is
protected through growth capability.
(4) Energy Saving and Space Savings - Through employment of state-of-the-art technology in
the system circuitry design, NEC has been able to reduce power consumption. As a result, the
current consumption of the system has been reduced to 50% of that of any conventional
electronic PBX systems. This energy saving oriented system design allows for the use of much
smaller capacity main power equipment and air conditioning equipment. In parallel with the
energy savings, the space requirement for the system has been reduced to one third when
compared with that of a conventional electronic PBX system.
(5) Building Block Configuration - In a conventional switching system, various kinds of
equipment are mounted in a cabinet group and are connected to each other by use of
connecting cables. The NEAX 2000 IPS, however, uses a building block modular design. When
Page 1-18
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
installing the system, the required blocks are placed on top of each other in a building block
formation and interconnected by round bus cables.
(6) Flexible Interface Ports - The NEAX 2000 IPS employs a Universal Port architecture that has
the flexibility to accommodate station terminal equipment, trunks and adjunct processors. This
universality allows the NEAX 2000 IPS to optimize use of slot space and lower expansion costs.
(7) High Reliability - The NEAX 2000 IPS is designed and manufactured to provide the highest
level of system reliability. The NEAX 2000 IPS is designed with such features as: remote
maintenance, distributed call processing, error-correcting memory, battery backup, and
automatic system alarm indications to insure unsurpassed reliability. Only the finest
components have been used. In addition, through the employment of LSI and custom LSI and
VLSI technology, the number of component parts has been greatly reduced, thus lessening
possible failures and insuring continuous operation.
(8) Intelligent Attendant Console - The NEAX 2000 IPS attendant console, SN716 Desk
Console, is a compact, desktop unit equipped with non-locking keys, Light Emitting Diodes, and
a 4 x 40 character Liquid Crystal Display. The LED’s provide continuous information relative to
the status of calls in progress. The display provides station and trunk identification, class of
service and the number of calls waiting. The LCD changes with different call states and instructs
the user which Multifunction keys are available for each state. Keys such as Busy Verify, DND
Override, etc. only appear when needed. The Multi-function Keys reduce the number of different
buttons and greatly simply operation.
(9) Intelligent Digital Multifunction Terminal - In addition to supporting conventional station
equipment, the NEAX 2000 IPS can be equipped with the Dterm series digital electronic
multifunction terminals. The Dterm terminals are intelligent microprocessor controlled terminals,
which enhance the feature capabilities offered by the system and provide the service of
conventional key telephones over 1-pair wiring. The Dterm instrument may be equipped with an
interface adapter to allow simultaneous voice and data switching, without compromising the
voice communication system.
(10) Ease of Installation - Because the NEAX 2000 IPS uses pre-assembled modules and plugin type circuits packs, it is easy to install. Wiring connections, both internal and external, are
made through simple-to-use standard plug-ended cables. In addition, with each unit and system
having been fully factory tested prior to shipment, potential obstacles to easy installation have
been held to a minimum.
(11) Ease of Maintenance - Because the system is constructed with first quality components,
reliability is high and operation is trouble free. However, if a minor fault occurs, the selfdiagnostic programs will detect the fault, and automatically make the needed corrections. If the
problem is beyond the internal correction capabilities of the system, the self-diagnostic
programs will automatically print the nature of the fault and the involved unit is identified on the
man-machine interface equipment. The faulty plug-in unit can then be quickly replaced with little
or no interruption of service.
(12) Flexible Numbering Plan - The NEAX 2000 IPS provides flexible numbering assignment to
meet all forms of network integration service.
(13) Future Capabilities - Because the NEAX 2000 IPS uses a stored program control,
performance enhancements and new features can be easily incorporated by simple changes in
software. The NEAX 2000 IPS can be upgraded by using the most current software release and,
when necessary, additional hardware. This means that the system will not become obsolete.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-19
Chapter 1 Introduction
(14) Cost Controls - With telecommunications costs growing, it is becoming increasingly
important to control them. The NEAX 2000 IPS makes it possible for you to get a firm grasp on
telecommunications costs. Through the use of such features as least cost routing, class of
service and detail call recording, cost reduction and control are possible.
Stands Alone System Capacity
LT Card
IPS System Capacity (Single MP System)
Capacity Per PIM
Note
Item
PIM1 PIM2 PIM3 PIM4 PIM5 PIM6
(No. of Ports)
64
128
192
256
320
384
(No. of Cards)
(No. of Ports)
AP Card
(No. of Cards)
Total Number of Lines (Single Line Tel. + Dterm)
IP PAD
(No. of Channel)
12
24
36
48
60
72
PIM7
448
PIM8
512
84
96
Max. 256 ports per system
12
64
128
192
64
256
24
320
128
384
448
512
256
192
Standard
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
Long
48
96
144
192
240
288
336
384
Standard
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
Long
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
Dterm IP/Dterm IP INASET (PTP Connection)
Dterm PS
Cell Station (CS) / Zone Transceiver (ZT)
952
888
824
632
568
504
16
32
48
760
696
512
64
80
96
112
128
ISDN Station
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
Loop Start
64
128
192
256
256
256
256
256
DID w/4DIT
48
96
144
192
240
256
256
256
2W E&M
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
Max. 127
DTI: 10, CCIS: 8
8
8
12
24
6
12
18
24
24
24
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
Max. 16 conference groups per system
Max. 4 conference groups per system
Max. 2 conference groups per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
Max. 8 cards per PIM
Max. 32 circuits per system
16
32
8
192
Single Line Telephone
(Lines)
Dterm (Lines)
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
Tie Line Trunk (Lines)
4W E&M
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
1.5M
DTI/CCIS Digital Link
2MI
1.5M/2M (PRT)
ISDN
2BRT (card)
4BRT (card)
IP Trunk
PFT Connections
3-Party Conference
6-Party
6-/10-Party Conference
10-Party
32-Party Conference
Built-in Router
DTMF Sender
DTMF Receiver
Attendant Consoles
Page 1-20
24
8
64
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
IPS System Capacity (Single MP System cont’d)
Capacity Per PIM
Item
PIM1
term
Attendant Terminal (D
ATT Position)
SMDR Interface
PMS Interface
ACD / MIS or OAI Interface
Remote PIM over IP (Number of PIM at Remote
Site)
DID Dial Conversion
Call Forwarding-Outside Set
Authorization. Code / Forced Account Code /
Remote Access to System(DISA)Code
Message Reminder Set
Name Display / Guest Name Display
Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) Set
MP built-in SMDR Call Record
Note:
PIM2
PIM3
PIM4
PIM5
Note 1
PIM6
PIM7
PIM8
Max. 8 sets per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Up to 15 (depending on network)
1000
496
3000
1024
512
10000
1280
System Capacity is for Main site only. For Total System Capacity see IP Remote Network System Capacity.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-21
Chapter 1 Introduction
IPS System Capacity (Dual MP System)
Capacity Per PIM
Item
(No. of Ports)
LT Card
(No. of Cards)
(No. of Ports)
AP Card
(No. of Cards)
Total Number of Lines (Single Line Tel. + Dterm)
IP PAD
(No. of Channel)
Standard
Single Line Telephone (Lines)
Long
term
Standard
D
(Lines)
term
term
Long
IP INASET (PTP Connection)
D
IP/D
term
D
PS
Cell Station (CS) / Zone Transceiver (ZT)
ISDN Station
Loop Start
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DID w/4DIT
2W E&M
Tie Line Trunk (Lines)
4W E&M
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
1.5M-AMI
DTI/CCIS Digital Link
2M-AMI
1.5M/2M (PRT)
ISDN
2BRT (card)
4BRT (card)
IP Trunk
PFT Connections
3-Party Conference
6-Party
6-/10-Party Conference
10-Party
32-Party Conference
Built-in Router
DTMF Sender
DTMF Receiver
Attendant Consoles
Page 1-22
Note
PIM1
PIM2
PIM3
PIM4
PIM5
PIM6
PIM7
PIM8
64
11
128
23
192
35
256
47
320
59
384
71
448
83
512
95
11
64
23
128
64
44
64
128
92
128
Max. 256 ports per system
24
192
256
320
384
128
192
192
256
320
384
140
188
236
284
192
256
320
384
22
952
46
888
70
824
16
16
32
32
48
48
64
44
22
22
128
92
46
46
192
140
70
70
448
512
256
448
512
332
380
448
512
142
632
166
568
190
504
96
96
112
112
128
128
256
256
256
256
188
236
256
256
94
118
142
166
94
118
142
166
Max. 127
DTI: 10, CCIS: 8
8
8
11
23
24
6
12
18
24
24
24
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
Max. 16 conference groups per system
Max. 4 conference groups per system
Max. 2 conference groups per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
Max. 8 cards per PIM
Max. 32 circuits per system
16
32
8
256
256
190
190
64
94
118
760
696
512
64
80
64
80
24
8
64
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
IPS System Capacity (Dual MP System, Cont’d)
Capacity Per PIM
Item
PIM1
term
Attendant Terminal (D
ATT Position)
SMDR Interface
PMS Interface
ACD / MIS or OAI Interface
Remote PIM over IP (Number of PIM at Remote
Site)
DID Dial Conversion
Call Forwarding-Outside Set
Authorization. Code / Forced Account Code /
Remote Access to System(DISA)Code
Message Reminder Set
Name Display / Guest Name Display
Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) Set
MP built-in SMDR Call Record
Note:
PIM2
PIM3
PIM4
PIM5
Note 1
PIM6
PIM7
PIM8
Max. 8 sets per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Up to 15 (depending on network)
1000
496
3000
1024
512
10000
1280
Capacity is for Main site only. For Total System Capacity see IP Remote Network System Capacity.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-23
Chapter 1 Introduction
IPSDM System Capacity
Capacity Per MC
Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS
LT card
2
3
No. of ports
40
80
120
No. of cards
5
10
15
Note 1
1
No. of ports
AP card
Max. 256 ports per system
No. of cards
Total number of lines (Analog Single Line Telephone +
Dterm)
IP-PAD
No. of channel
4LC w/RGU Card
Analog Single Line Telephone
8LC
(Lines)
Note 2
Long Line
Dterm(Lines)
D
term
IP/D
D
term
PS
term
5
10
15
40
80
120
32
20
40
64
40
80
Not Available
96
60
120
Standard
40
80
120
Long Line
10
20
30
952
888
824
IP INASET (PTP Connection)
512
Cell Station (CS) / Zone Transceiver (ZT)
12
24
36
ISDN Station
8
16
24
Loop Start
40
80
120
DID w/4DIT
20
40
60
2W/4W E&M
10
20
30
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
Max. 127
1.5M
5
DTI: 10, CCIS: 8
2M
5
8
1.5M/2M(PRT)
5
8
2BRT (card)
5
10
15
4BRT (card)
5
10
15
IP Trunk
1
2
3
PFT Connections
4
8
12
DTI/CCIS Digital Link
Note 3
ISDN
3-Party Conference
6-/10-Party Conference
32-Party Conference
Page 1-24
Max. 16 conference groups per system
6-Party
Max. 4 conference groups per system
10-Party
Max. 2 conference groups per system
Max. 8 conference groups
5
per system
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
IPSDM System Capacity (Cont.)
Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS
Built-in Router
Capacity Per MC
1
3
Max. 5 cards per MODULAR CHASSIS
DTMF Sender
Max. 32 circuits per system
DTMF Receiver
16
SN716 Desk Console
Attendant Terminal (D
2
32
8
term
ATT Position)
Max. 8 per system
SMDR Interface
Max. 1 Interface port per system
PMS Interface
Max. 1 Interface port per system
ACD / MIS or OAI Interface
Max. 1 Interface port per system
DID Dial Conversion
1000
Call Forwarding-Outside Set
Authorization Code / Forced Account Code / Remote
Access to System(DISA) Code
Message Reminder Set
496
3000
Name Display / Guest Name Display
512
1024
Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) Set
10000
MP built-in SMDR Call Record
1280
Note 1:
Each Modular Chassis has 24 Virtual LT Ports that can only be used to expand the PAD channels from 8 to
32 using the 8IPLA w/24IPLA.
Note 2:
When 8LC card is used, the 4LC w/RGU is required which does not provide Message Waiting indicator.
Note 3:
The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less.
(Each trunk line and DTI channel are required to assign the “Trunk Number” by system data
programming and maximum number of system parameter for “Trunk Number” is 256.)
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-25
Chapter 1 Introduction
IP Remote Network Capacity
Total System Capacity (Main plus Remote)
Item
Capacity
LT Ports
AP Ports
Analog Single Line Tel. + Dterm
IP PAD
(No. of Channel)
term
term
D
IP/D
IP INASET (PTP Connection)
Dterm PS
Cell Station (CS) / Zone Transceiver (ZT)
ISDN Station
1020
256
980
256
952
512
128
128
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
256
Tie Line Trunk (Lines)
2W/4W E&M
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
DTI/CCIS Digital Link
1.5M/2M
1.5M/2M (PRT)
ISDN
2BRT (card)
4BRT (card)
IP Trunk
PFT Connections
3-Party Conference
6-Party
6-/10-Party Conference
10-Party
32-Party Conference
Built-in Router
DTMF Sender/Receiver
Attendant Consoles
Attendant Terminal (Dterm ATT Position)
SMDR Interface
PMS Interface
ACD / MIS or OAI Interface
Remote PIM over IP
DID Dial Conversion
Call Forwarding-Outside Set
Authorization Code / Forced Account Code / Remote
Access to System(DISA)Code
Message Reminder Set
Name Display / Guest Name Display
Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) Set
MP built-in SMDR Call Record
Page 1-26
192
127
DTI: 10/CCIS: 8 Links
8
24
24
8
64
Max. 16 conference groups
Max. 4 conference groups
Max. 2 conference groups
Max. 8 conference groups
1 per Site
Max. 32 circuits
8
Max. 8 sets
Max. 1 interface port
Max. 1 interface port
Max. 1 interface port
Up to 15 (depending on network)
1000
496
3000
1024
512
10000
1280
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 1 Introduction
IPSDMR Capacity
Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS
LT card
Note 1
AP card
IP-PAD
Analog Single Line Telephone
(Lines)
Note 2
Dterm(Lines)
D
term
IP/D
term
No. of ports
No. of cards
No. of ports
Capacity Per MC
1
2
40
80
5
10
Max. 256 ports per network
No. of cards
5
10
No. of channel
4LC w/RGU Card
8LC
Standard
32
20
40
40
64
40
80
80
Long Line
10
20
IP INASET (Peer to Peer Connection) Note 3
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DTI
ISDN
128
Loop Start
40
80
DID w/4DIT
20
40
2W/4W E&M
10
20
1.5M
5
10
1.5M(PRT)
5
8
5
10
4
8
4BRT (card)
PFT Connections
Note 1:
Each Modular Chassis has 24 Virtual LT Ports that can only be used to expand the PAD channels from
8 to 32 using the 8IPLA w/24IPLA.
Note 2:
When 8LC card is used, the 4LC w/RGU is required which does not provide Message Waiting
indicator.
Note 3:
Remote PIMs Support up to 2 Virtual PIMs for assignment of Dterm IP/Dterm IP INASET only.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 1-27
Chapter 1 Introduction
IPS PIMMD (As Remote PIM) Capacity
Capacity Per PIM
1
2
64
128
8
16
Max. 256 ports per network
Number of PHYSICAL PIMS
LT card
AP card
IP-PAD
Analog Single Line Telephone
(Lines)
Dterm(Lines)
No. of ports
No. of cards
No. of ports
No. of cards
12
24
No. of channel
32
64
8LC
64
128
Standard
64
128
Long Line
24
Dterm IP/Dterm IP INASET (Peer to Peer Connection) Note
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DTI
ISDN
PFT Connections
Note:
Page 1-28
48
128
Loop Start
64
128
DID w/4DIT
48
96
2W/4W E&M
24
48
1.5M
10
1.5M(PRT)
8
4BRT (card)
6
12
8
16
Remote PIMs Support up to 2 Virtual PIMs for assignment of Dterm IP/Dterm IP INASET only.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
The NEAX®2000 IPS family consists of the NEAX 2000 IPS, NEAX IPSDM, and the NEAX
IPSDMR. These NEAX® Internet Protocol Servers fuses existing NEC technologies with
dynamic advancements in hardware and software to satisfy the most stringent system
requirements. NEC's modular design, sensible migration, comprehensive network solutions,
and the ability to customize functionality to match specific business applications are just a few
of the NEC benchmarks that the new IVS builds upon.
NEAX® 2000 IPS users have access to hundreds of service features that enhance productivity,
reduce operating costs, and improve communications efficiently. The innovative modular
hardware and software design allows efficient, effective growth within each module from its
minimum to its maximum configuration. This is achieved by a unique building block
architecture allowing growth without the loss of existing hardware or software.
Voice and Data Switching
The NEAX® 2000 IPS systems support advanced applications such as Tandem Networking,
Centralized Attendant Service, Direct Digital Interface and other voice features. The system's nonblocking architecture and distributed processor control hierarchy are designed to support the traffic and
control the load generated by voice and data switching. Station users may perform simultaneous voice
and data transmission at speeds up to 19.2Kbps over universal 1-pair wiring without the use of
modems. Proprietary Digital Instruments (Dterm) may be provided to increase system flexibility and
eliminate the need for conventional multiple line stations with their associated control equipment and
cable plant requirements.
Hardware Architecture
The NEAX® 2000 IPS systems employ the latest advancements in Large Scale Integration
(LSI) circuits and component manufacturing techniques to create a highly reliable and
serviceable communications system. The IPS has changed from NEC's traditional PROM
based CPUs to a Flash ROM based for system software and RAM for data programming. The
NEAX® 2000 IPS architecture consists of three major functional components: Distributed
Controller, Digital Switching Network, and Port Interface.
(1) Distributed Controller - The Distributed Controller is composed of distributed
multiprocessing units, generic memory, database instructions, system interface, and interface
ports for system maintenance and administration.
(2) Digital Switching Network - The Digital Switching Network consists of a non-blocking digital
time division switch, allowing all ports to be used simultaneously.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 2-1
Chapter 2 System Architecture
(3) Port Interface - The Port Interface provides access to the public and private network for
various types of terminal devices, including digital and analog telephones, data terminals,
computers and subsystems such as Voice Mail Systems, Data Switch Networks, and related
communication and information services.
Hardware Design
The NEAX® 2000 IPS hardware is designed to provide the best of the following:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Flexibility
Capacity
Reliability
Optimum use of space
Minimal environmental requirements
Ease of installation and maintenance
A unique modular design is employed throughout the NEAX® 2000 IPS. As additional equipment
modules are required, they are stacked on top of each other, rather than mounting the equipment in
conventional frames or cabinets. This innovative method reduces installation time, avoids the use of
bulky frames and provides for manageable future expansion, virtually eliminating the possibility of
outgrowing your NEAX® 2000 IPS.
Fusion of RAM and ROM Programs
The NEAX® 2000 IPS incorporates the flexibility of Random Access Memory (RAM) for Office Data
Memory and Flash ROM that contains the operating system. This fusion of divergent memory
technologies results in high performance 32-bit processing reliability in system operation as well as fast
recovery time in case of system power loss. This unique configuration provides improved efficiency for
updates to the generic program by floppy disk, and simplifies upgrades for system features and
capabilities throughout its life.
Main Processor (MP) with Integrated Functionality
The NEAX® 2000 IPS Main Processor (MP) is a heart of pure IP connections and TDM-based
connections. The MP employs a high-speed CPU, which is equivalent with Pentium. With this
processing power and System On Chip (SOC) technology, the MP integrates Device Registration
Server (DRS), AP01 (OAI) functions*, which are provided by an additional card in the previous IVS2.
Also, by means of today's advanced LSI technology, the MP card size is minimized and On-board
Ethernet Interface Card is mounted on MP without using an additional slot space in PIM. This interface
card is linked with LAN for call control processing of Dterm IP and inter-work with MATWorX and OAI
server. (*RS-232C interface, Authorization Code service and FLF facility are deleted.)
Application Processors
The processing architecture of the NEAX® 2000 IPS allows the system to be configured with
Application Processors that provide processing capacity for a specific application or multiple
applications. These EPROM-based processors support applications such as:
Page 2- 2
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
Open Applications Interface (OAI), which connects to external computing devices to support a wide
range of host computer-supported features.




ACD Processor for call center applications
SMDR for call accounting
Hotel Processor for Hospitality applications
Message Center Interface (MCI)
These application processors provide the power and flexibility to meet specific users’ applications and
traffic needs.
Integration
In addition to the application processors manufactured by NEC, the NEAX® 2000 IPS systems also
deliver an open architecture for integration with other manufacturers. Interface processors and
specifications for communicating with computing devices support this integration. These computing
devices enable such service features as network and facilities management, call center applications,
call accounting, property management, voice mail, maintenance access terminals, and management
information systems for ACD reports and monitoring.
Unified Circuit Card
All the circuit cards for NEAX® 2000 IPS are designed in one size (PN-type), and installed in the PIM.
This maximizes the efficiency of slot utilization of the PIM.
High Density Line/Trunk Cards
Major line/trunk cards used in NEAX® 2000 IPS are provided with 8 circuits per card. This allows the
physical system size to be compact.
Universal Slot
One PIM provides 12 card slots for Line/Trunk (LT). Also, these card slots can be used for Application
Processor (AP) cards without complicated limitation. As this makes easy quotation and installation,
more number of AP cards can be mounted in one PIM.
DC/DC Power Supply for –48V
The PIM houses an optional DC/DC Power Supply for the cards which require –48V power such as the
CSI card used for interface of Cell Station (CS) of a wireless system. Since this power supply is
mounted in the space under the AC/DC power, additional Power Module/card slots are not required.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 2-3
Chapter 2 System Architecture
SN716 Attendant Console
The SN716 Attendant Console connection is available through one twisted-pair cable when using an
AC adapter. When using the PN-PW00, one twisted-pair cable is required for voice/data and one pair
is required for power from the PW00 to the Console.
Analog/Digital Telephones
The analog/digital telephone connection is available through one twisted-pair cable.
IP Telephones
The IP telephones can communicate with other IP telephones over the LAN, on a peer-to-peer
connection basis. The Main Processor (MP) provides call control with an Ethernet adapter card. Voice
packets are transmitted between IP telephones over the LAN (not through Time Division Switch). Voice
compression of G.729a (8 kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3 kbps/6.3 kbps) is available for these connections.
The IP telephones can communicate with legacy stations and trunks (including H.323 trunks) via an IPPAD that converts voice packet data to PCM signals. Call control signals are transmitted to the MP over
the LAN, while voice packets are transmitted via the IP-PAD. The number of IP-PADs depends on the
traffic volume of connections between the IP Enabled Dterm and legacy stations and trunks.
Page 2- 4
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
NEAX® 2000 IPS System Configuration
The NEAX® 2000 IPS consists of single or multiple Port Interface Modules (PIM) depending on
the system configuration, and there are two types of PIMs; “Physical” PIM and “Virtual” PIM.
The Physical PIM is “hardware” PIM which is used to accommodate an MP, FPs, IP PADs,
legacy LT cards, AP cards, and power supply units. One Physical PIM provides up to 64 LT
ports and up to 8 Physical PIMs can be accomidated in a Stand Alone system. The Virtual
PIM is a “software” PIM and provides up to 64 ports per Pim for use by system programming
as Dterm IP telephones, Wireless PS stations or Peer to Peer (PTP) CCIS trunks. The system
consists of up to 16 PIMs, by the combination of Physical PIMs and Virtual PIMs, thus
providing 1020 ports. When the use of Virtual PIMs exceeds 8 then the number Physical PIMs
is reduced by one for each additional Virtual PIM required.
The illustration below shows examples of 1020-port configuration by the combination of TDM
LT ports, Dterm IP telephones, Wireless PS stations and Peer to Peer (PTP) CCIS trunks.
Example 1
Example 2
PIM #3 PIM #7
PIM #11 PIM #15
PIM #3 PIM #7
PIM #11 PIM #15
PIM #2 PIM #6
PIM #10 PIM #14
PIM #2 PIM #6
PIM #10 PIM #14
PIM #1 PIM #5
PIM #9 PIM #13
PIM #1 PIM #5
PIM #9 PIM #13
PIM #0 PIM #4
PIM #8 PIM #12
PIM #0 PIM #4
PIM #8 PIM #12
448 LT ports +
64 IP-PADs
252 Dterm IPs +
128 Wireless +
128 PTP CCIS
192 LT ports +
64 IP-PADs
PIM
PIM
Physical PIM
Virtual PIM
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
508 Dterm IPs +
128 Wireless +
128 PTP CCIS
Page 2-5
Chapter 2 System Architecture
Module and Installation Hardware
The NEAX 2000 IPS is comprised of up to 8 Port Interface Modules (PIMs). For installing the PIMs in
various installation methods, additional installation hardware is required.
Modules
(1) Port Interface Module (PIM)
A PIM provides 13 card slots for common control, Line/Trunk (LT), and Application Processor (AP)
cards. It also houses an AC/DC Power Supply, DC/DC Power Supply (for -48V), and batteries for
protection from short-term (about 30 min.) power interruption.
Four champ connectors for Line/Trunk (LTC 0 to 3) are located at the lower front side of the PIM.
A PIM provides a maximum of 12 card slots for Line/Trunk (LT) and Application Processor (AP) cards.
At maximum configuration, the system is comprised of 8 PIMs.
There are two types of PIM (PIMMD and PIMMF) depending on the system type as follows.
Type of PIM
PIM MD
PIM MF
Single MP System
Used for PIM 0-7
Not used
Dual MP System
Used for PIM 1-7
Used for PIM 0
PIM MD (PIM3)
PIM MD (PIM7)
PIM MD (PIM3)
PIM MD (PIM7)
PIM MD (PIM2)
PIM MD (PIM6)
PIM MD (PIM2)
PIM MD (PIM6)
PIM MD (PIM1)
PIM MD (PIM5)
PIM MD (PIM1)
PIM MD (PIM5)
PIM MD (PIM4)
PIM MD (PIM0)
PIM MD (PIM4)
PIM MF (PIM0)
(Single MP System)
(Dual MP System)
Unit Configuration
Battery Module (BATTM)
The BATTM is an optional module for installing optional long-term (about 3 hours) backup batteries.
The BATTM is designed to accommodate batteries covering up to a 4-PIM system (2 BATTMs support
maximum system configuration).
The BATTM is available for Floor Standing Installation or 19 inch Rack-mounting. (When the system is
Wall-mounted, the BATTM cannot be installed with the PIM.)
Modules
Abbrev
PIMMD
Description
SN1617 PIMMD
PIMMF
SN1658 PIMMF
BATTM
SN1619 BATTMB
Page 2- 6
Remarks
Single MP System: PIM 0 - PIM 7
Dual MP System: PIM 1 – PIM 7
Single MP System: Not used
Dual MP System: PIM 0
1 per STACK, Max.2 per system
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
Installation Hardware
Base/Top Assembly
The Base/Top Assembly includes a Base Unit and a Top Cover for the PIM. One Base/Top Assembly is
required for each PIM stack. The Base Unit also serves as the AC power distribution panel for up to a
four PIM configuration.
Hanger Assembly
The Hanger Assembly is used for Wall-mounting Installation. One set of Hanger Assembly is required
for each PIM.
19 inch Bracket
The 19-inch Bracket is a set of hardware used for 19-inch Rack-mounting Installation. The 19-INCH
RACK BRACKET (A) is installed on both sides of the PIM. One set of 19 inch Bracket (A) is required
for each PIM. The 19-INCH RACK BRACKET (B) is installed at the BASE of stack. One 19-INCH
BRACKET (B) is required for each stack.
If the system is 2 PIM or more configurations with 19-INCH BRACKET (B), one set of 19-INCH
BRACKET (A) is also required for the topmost PIM.
Optional Brackets
The Mounting Bracket is used for Floor Standing Installation. Without Mounting Bracket, 1.1G
shockproof is provided for 1 to 3-module stack and 0.5G shockproof is provided for 4 or more module
stack. To enhance the shockproof capability to 1.1G, one set of Mounting Bracket is required for each 4
or more module stack and attached to the topmost PIM.
The I/F Bracket is used for Floor Standing Installation to joint the neighboring topmost PIM in 6 PIM or
more configurations. One set of I/F Bracket is required for multiple stacks.
The Base Tray Assembly is used for Floor Standing Installation for stationary equipment (UL complied).
One set of Base Tray Assembly is required for each stack.
Abbrev
Top Cover
Base/Top
ASSEM
Hanger Assem
19 inch Bracket
Mounting Bracket
I/F Bracket
Base Tray
Installation Hardware
Description
Quantity
TOP COVER ASSEM
1/STACK (BASE ASSEM is local supply)
SN1545 BASERE
1/STACK
HANGER ASSEM (UL)
19 INCH RACK BRACKET (A)
19 INCH RACK BRACKET (B)
MOUNTING BRACKET
I/F BRACKET ASSEM
BASE TRAY ASSEM
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
1/PIM (Wall-mounting Installation)
1/PIM (19 inch Rack-mounting Installation)
1/STACK (19 inch Rack-mounting Installation)
OPTION (1/STACK)
OPTION (1/SYSTEM)
OPTION (1/STACK)
Page 2-7
Chapter 2 System Architecture
NEAX 2000 IPS SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY
AC/DC Power Supply
The AC/DC Power Card is mounted in the left side of each PIM. The AC/DC Power card provides
power to all circuit cards, which reside in the PIM. AC power requirements are as follows:
Input Voltage: 90 to 132 Vrms or 180 to 264 Vrms (selectable by switch) 50/60 Hz
AC/DC Power Card
Name Code
PZ-PW121
Qty
1 per PIM
Remarks
AC/DC Power Supply Input:100 V/200 V
Output:+5 V,-27 V,+90V, CR
DC/DC Power Unit
The DC/DC Power Unit is mounted under the AC/DC Power Card and generates -48 V power for the
circuit cards that need such power.
DC/DC (-48V) Power Card
Name Code
PZ-PW122
Qty
1 per PIM
Remarks
DC/DC Power Supply, Input: -27 V, Output: -48 V
Battery Backup
Internal Short-term option
For customers requiring battery backup, short-term and/or long-term options are available. Two 3.4AH
batteries are required per PIM, and installed inside of each PIM. Backup time is approx. 30 minutes
when PHS (Wireless PS) is not accommodated and approx. 10 minutes when PHS (Wireless PS) is
accommodated in the system.
Internal Battery Option
Name Code
PWR CA-A
BATT CA INT
Qty
1 per (2) PIMs
1 per PIM
Remarks
DC Power Cable (-27v input)
Internal Battery Cable
External Long-term option
Two 24AH batteries are required per each 2 PIMs, and installed inside of Battery Module in a stack
basis. Backup time is approx. 3 hours when PHS (Wireless PS) is not accommodated and approx. 2
hours when PHS (Wireless PS) is accommodated in the system. The batteries are varied depending
on the requested backup time. The battery shall be locally provided.
Name Code
PWR CA-A
BATT CA EXT
Page 2- 8
External Battery Option
Qty
(No. of PIM) –1= up to 4PIM
(No. of PIM) –2= 5 to 8PIM
1/Stack
Remarks
DC Power Cable (-27v input)
External Battery Cable
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
Cabling
The internal and external cabling for the NEAX 2000 IPS is as follows:
Internal Cabling
BUS Cable
The BUS Cable provides a connection between PIMs for I/O Bus, PCM Bus, and Alarm Bus extension
in a multiple-PIM configuration.
Bus Cable
Name Code
48-TW-0.7 CONN CA
Qty
(No. of PIM)-1
Remarks
0.7 m (2.3ft.)
Power Control Cable
The Power Control Cable provides a connection between the MP and the AC/DC Power Supply for
controlling battery backup function and MJ/MN alarm indication.
Power Control Cable
Name Code
PWR CNT CA-D
Qty
1/PIM
PWR CNT CA-E
1/PIM
Remarks
Power control cable (for PIMI-PIM7):
BWB - PZ-PW121/122 (Included in
PIM)
Power control cable (for PIM0)
BWB - PZ-PW121/122 (Included in
Base and PIM for Dual System)
DC Power Cable
The DC Power Cable provides a connection between the AC/DC Power Supplies for extending the 27
VDC input in a multiple-PIM configuration, when battery backup option is required.
Power Cable (Internal Battery Option)
Name Code
PWR CA-A
BATT CA INT
Qty
1/2 PIM
1/PIM
Remarks
DC Power Cable (-27v input)
Internal Battery Cable
Power Cable (External Battery Option)
Name Code
PWR CA-A
BATT CA EXT
Qty
(No. of PIM) –1= up to 4PIM
(No. of PIM) –2= 5 to 8PIM
1/Stack
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Remarks
DC Power Cable (-27v input)
External Battery Cable
Page 2-9
Chapter 2 System Architecture
AC Cord
The AC cord provides a connection between the AC/DC Power Card and Base Unit.
AC Cord
Name Code
AC CORD-B-U
AC CORD-D-U
Qty
1/PIM
1/BASE
Remarks
AC power cable (Included in PIM)
AC power cable for BASE (Included in BASE)
External Cabling
IP Connection
MP with PZ-M606-A and IP PAD
Name Code
IP TRK BUS CA
Qty
1/VCT
Remarks
IP TRK BUS Cable 0.1m (0.33ft)
(Included in SPN-16VCTA IP PAD)
IP Trunk (H.323, CCIS over IP w/IVS2)
Name Code
IP TRK BUS CA
Qty
1/VCT
Remarks
IP TRK BUS Cable 0.1m (0.33ft)
(Included in SPN-4VCTI-A, or
SPN-4VCTI-B.)
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) (RS-232C)
Direct Connection
MAT Cable (Direct)
Name Code
Qty
MAT CA-T
MAT CA-P
1/MAT
1/MAT
Remarks
RS-232C cable, 2m (6.6ft.)
RS-232C cable, 4m (13.1ft.)
Remote connection
Remote connection is available via an internal modem in the MP or an external modem.
MAT Cable
Name Code
Qty
RS NORM-4S CA-A
1/MAT
Remarks
RS-232C cable, 4m (13.1ft.)
Built-in SMDR/MCI on MP
The MP card provides RS-232C interface ports for SMDR/MCI connection.
No. 0/1 Port: Async. : 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
Page 2- 10
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
Connection to SMDR is made on a port basis by a front cable.
Cable for Built-in SMDR/MCI on MP
Name Code
Qty
RS RVS-4S CA-C
1/SMDR
RS NORM-4S CAA
1/SMDR
Remarks
RS-232C cable, 4m (13.1ft.)
MP-DTE
RS-232C cable, 4m (13.1ft.)
MP-DCE (MODEM)
SMDR (W/AP00)/PMS
Hotel Printer/MCI
CCIS Centralized SMDR
The PN-AP00-B card provides 4 RS-232C interface ports for SMDR, PMS, CIS Printer, Hotel Printer,
MCI and Centralized SMDR. Connection to SMDR, PMS or Printer is made on a port basis by a front
cable.
Cable for AP00
Qty
1/SMDR or
PMS
1/SMDR or
PMS
1/Printer
Name Code
RS RVS-4S CA-C
RS NORM-4S CAA
RS PRT-15S CA-A
Remarks
RS-232C cable, 4m (13.1ft.)
PN-AP00 - DTE
RS-232C cable, 4m (13.1ft.)
PN-AP00 - DCE (MODEM)
RS-232C cable, 15m (49.2ft.)
PN-AP00 - Printer
External Alarm Display
The NEAX 2000 IPS can provide an optional external alarm display unit (ALM DSPP) to indicate
Power-ON/OFF, Major Alarm, and Minor Alarm status.
External Alarm Display Panel
Name Code
ALM DSPP
Qty
1/System
Remarks
External Alarm Display Panel
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
CCIS Trunk Interface (CCT)
The DTI/PRI/CCT connection is available through twisted-pair cable via the MDF.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 2-11
Chapter 2 System Architecture
NEAX® IPSDM/IPSDMR System Configuration
NEAX IPSDM Modular Chassis (MC)
The NEAX IPSDM consists of from one to three MODULAR CHASSIS depending on the system
configuration. The MODULAR CHASSIS provides 40 LT ports in hardware slots and provides 64 ports
in software port allocation (40LT ports and 24 virtual ports). There are 2 types of MODULAR
CHASSIS; "Physical MODULAR CHASSIS" and "Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS ". The Physical
MODULAR CHASSIS is a “hardware MODULAR CHASSIS” and is used to accommodate an MP, FPs,
IP PADs, legacy LT/AP cards, and power supply units. The Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS is a “software
MODULAR CHASSIS” and is used to accommodate IP stations by system data programming. The port
capacity of the Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS is varied depending on the number of Physical MODULAR
CHASSIS.
One MODULAR CHASSIS provides 6 card slots including one card slot for Main Processor
(MP)/Firmware Processor (FP) and other 5 slots for Line Trunk (LT)/Application Processor (AP) cards;
40LT ports and 24 virtual LT ports; AC, LTC, BUS cable connectors and power switch which are
located at the rear side of MODULAR CHASSIS. The following illustration shows MODULAR CHASSIS
hardware configurations, software port allocation, face layout, and rear view of MODULAR CHASSIS
for IPSDM.
IPSDM MODULAR CHASSIS Hardware Configuration
1 MODULAR CHASSIS
2 MODULAR CHASSIS
Virtual
MODULAR
CHASSIS
(952 IP Ports)
3 MODULAR CHASSIS
Virtual
MODULAR
CHASSIS
(824 IP Ports)
Virtual
MODULAR
CHASSIS
(888 IP Ports)
MC-2
MC-1
MC-0
40
LT ports
24 Virtual
LT ports
MC-0
40
LT ports
40
LT ports
24 Virtual
MC-1
LT ports
24 Virtual
MC-0
LT ports
40
LT ports
40
LT ports
40
LT ports
24 Virtual
LT ports
24 Virtual
LT ports
24 Virtual
LT ports
256 AP Ports per System
MODULAR CHASSIS Software Port Allocation
Page 2- 12
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
NEAX IPSDMR Modular Chassis (MC)
There are 2 types of MODULAR CHASSIS; "Physical MODULAR CHASSIS" and "Virtual MODULAR
CHASSIS ". The Physical MODULAR CHASSIS is a “hardware MODULAR CHASSIS” and is used to
accommodate an MP, FPs, IP PADs, legacy LT/AP cards, and power supply units. The NEAX IPSDMR
can consist of one or two MODULAR CHASSIS depending on the system configuration. The Physical
MODULAR CHASSIS provides 40 LT ports in hardware slots and provides 64 ports in software port
allocation (40LT ports and 24 virtual ports). The Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS is a “software
MODULAR CHASSIS” with a port capacity of 64 ports. A maximum of two Virtual MODULAR
CHASSIS can be assigned per remote site for a total of 128 ports used to accommodate IP stations by
system data programming. The maximum number of Remote Sites is 15. This system locates the
maximum of 64 FP/AP cards per system, at multiple Remote Sites. The number of FP/AP cards
accommodated at one Remote Site should be a maximum of eight including the MP built-in FP. If more
than eight FP/APs are assigned, the system does not operate normally.
The following illustration shows MODULAR CHASSIS hardware configurations, software port allocation,
face layout and rear view of MODULAR CHASSIS for IPSDMR.
IPSDMR MODULAR CHASSIS Hardware Configuration
1 MODULAR CHASSIS
2 MODULAR CHASSIS
Virtual
MODULAR
CHASSIS
(128 IP Ports)
Virtual
MODULAR
CHASSIS
(128 IP Ports)
MC-1
MC-0
40
LT ports
24 Virtual
LT ports
MC-0
40
LT ports
40
LT ports
24 Virtual
LT ports
24 Virtual
LT ports
256 AP Ports per System
MODULAR CHASSIS Software Port Allocation
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 2-13
Chapter 2 System Architecture
Modular Chassis (MC) Installation
The MODULAR CHASSIS can be installed on the desktop or into the 19-inch rack only.
Modular Chassis (MC) and Bracket
The following table shows the name and specification number of MODULAR CHASSIS and bracket.
The bracket is selected depending on the installation method (Desktop or 19" Rack).
Modular Chassis
Qty
Description
SN-1653 IPSMF
N
Remarks
Modular Chassis (Molded Cover)
Bracket
Qty
Description
RACK MOUNT KIT(U)
N
JOINT BRACKET KIT(U)
N
Remarks
1/Modular Chassis for 19” rack-mounting installation
1/Expansion Modular Chassis for desktop-setting
installation
Cabling
Description
BUS Cable / AC Cord
Qty
Remarks
BUS-0.4 CA-PA
1 per Expansion MODULAR CHASSIS
BUS cable
AC CORD-E-U
1 per MODULAR CHASSIS
AC Cord
Description
BATT CA-P5
Page 2- 14
PFT and Battery cable
Qty
1 per MODULAR CHASSIS
Remarks
PFT and Battery connection
cable 5m (15ft). Cable for
connecting Battery to 4PFT of
AC/DC Power
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
System Power Supply and cooling fan
AC/DC Power Supply
The AC/DC Power Card is mounted in the rear side of each MODULAR CHASSIS. The AC/DC Power
card provides power to all circuit cards, which are resided in the MODULAR CHASSIS.
AC power requirements are as follows:
Input Voltage: 85 to 264VAC, 50/60 Hz (Auto sensing 100V/200V selection)
Description
PZ-PW131
AC/DC Power Card
Qty
Remarks
1 per MODULAR CHASSIS
AC/DC Power Supply
Output:+5 V, 5.5A, -27 V, 3A
Back-up Power
UPS or battery backup (with external battery) is available for backup power for AC power failure.
In case of battery backup, sealed type battery should be used. The open type battery is not
available because of AC/DC power specifications.
Cooling FAN
The cooling FAN is mounted at the right side of each MODULAR CHASSIS. The FAN should be
replaced every 4 years in order to ensure the cooling system.
Description
109P0624H
7D09 FAN
Cooling FAN
Qty
1/MODULAR CHASSIS
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Remarks
Page 2-15
Chapter 2 System Architecture
Software Architecture
The NEAX 2000 IPS systems offer very attractive system starting points. Listed below are the
System/Expansion Packages available with the NEAX 2000 IPS family.
System Packages
NEAX 2000 IPS System Packages
Description
Remarks
IP Starter 8 Seat System PKG-B
IP Starter Kit Package.
ICS VS PIMMD (UA)
ICS VS BASE-C (UA)
SPN-CP24B (CPU)
PZ-M606-A
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B
64 PORT SYS SOFTWARE
KEY KEEPER (FD)
8 SEAT LICENSE
MATWorX IPS
48 Port Basic System Package (IPS)
SPN-CP24 (CPU)
ICS VS PIMMD (UA)
ICS VS BASE-C (UA)
MATWorX IPS
Back-Up CPU 8 Seat (IP) SYS PKG (IPS)
ICS VS PIMMF (UA)
ICS VS BASE-C (UA)
SPN-CP27A (CPU)
SPN-CP27A (CPU)
PZ-M606-A
PZ-M606-A
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B
64 PORT SYS SOFTWARE
KEY KEEPER (FD)
8 SEAT LICENSE KEY
MATWorX IPS
Back-Up CPU 64 Port (TDM) SYS PKG (IPS)
ICS VS PIMMF (UA)
ICS VS BASE-C (UA)
SPN-CP27A (CPU)
SPN-CP27A (CPU)
64 PORT SYS SOFTWARE
MATWorX IPS
Supports up to 8 IP Dterm’s, 64 LT Ports,
5 T1’s /E1’s, Remote PIM’s, 5 ISDN-PRI
DCH’s, 48 ISDN-BRI Trunks.
NEC Customer Software License Agreement
Required.
Supports up to 48 LT Ports & 1 T1.
No NEC Customer Software License
agreement required
Package is equipped with 64 TDM ports and
8 IP. Provides matching CPU cards with the
same CPU number. With matching CPU’s,
only one set of software is needed.
NEC Customer Software License Agreement
Required.
Package is equipped with 64 TDM ports
License for each CPU. Provides matching
CPU cards with the same CPU number.
With matching CPU’s, only one set of
software is needed.
NEC Customer Software License Agreement
Required.
Page 2- 16
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 2 System Architecture
NEAX IPSDM System Packages
Description
IPS DM 8 Seat IP SYS PKG-A
Remarks
Provides for up to 32 Legacy ports and 952 IP
stations per system. Comes with 8 IP Seat
Licenses. Additional IP Seat Licenses are
required beyond 8.
IPS DM PIMMF
AC CORD-E-U
Rack Mount Kit
SPN-CP24B (CPU)
PZ-M606-A
SPN-8IPLA IP-PAD-B
64 Port Sys Software
Key Keeper (FD)
8 Seat Licenses
24 Port Patch Panel
MATWorX IPS
NEC Customer Software License Agreement
Required
Adds 40 additional Legacy ports for a total of 72
and supports up to 892 IP station per system
IPS DM Expansion Module 1
IPS DM PIMMF
AC CORD-E-U
Rack Mount Kit
Joint Bracket Kit
BUS-0.4 CA-PA
Key Keeper (FD)
LT Port 48/64 to 256
24 Port Patch Panel
Adds 40 additional Legacy ports for a total of
112 and supports up to 828 IP station per
system
IPS DM Expansion Module 2
IPS DM PIMMF
AC CORD-E-U
Rack Mount Kit
Joint Bracket Kit
BUS-0.4 CA-PA
PN-CP19
24 Port Patch Panel
IP Remote PIM Packages(DMR)
Description
NEAX IPS DMR System Pkg-A
IPS DM PIMMF
SPN-CP31 (CPU)
PZ-M606-A
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD
AC CORD-E-U
Rack Mount Kit
24 Port Patch Panel
IP REMOTE PIM-B (IPS)
ICS VS PIMMD (UA)
ICS VS BASE-C (UA)
ICS PN-CP24
PZ-M606-A
NEAX IPS DMR Expansion Module
IPS DM PIMMF
AC CORD-E-U
Rack Mount Kit
Joint Bracket Kit
BUS-0.4 CA-PA
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Remarks
DMR Package for Remote PIM.
Provides DM Chassis for Remote PIM over IP.
The 8IPLA PAD card is provided.
Remote PIM Site License required.
IPS Package for Remote PIM.
Provides IPS PIM that can be used as Remote
PIM over IP.
Remote PIM Site License required.
Adds another DM PIMMF to provide five card
slots for 40 additional TDM ports.
Page 2-17
Chapter 2 System Architecture
Software Keys/Licenses
The NEAX 2000 IPS systems offer both TDM Software Keys and Peer-to-Peer Seat Licenses, which
are designed with modularity in mind. This approach allows customers a greater degree of cost-control
for new installations and for upgrades to features, capacities and software series itself.
Description
Generic Program
64 Port Sys Software
Remarks
Basic Business/Hotel/Motel Features for:
64 LT Ports, 5 T1’s /E1’s, Remote PIM’s, 5 ISDN-PRI DCH’s, 48
ISDN-BRI Trunks.
NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required
Key Keeper (Parent Capacity Option)
Key Keeper (FD)
Floppy Disk that holds selected Key files from below
Capacity Option (used w/Key Keeper)
LT– 64 Port
Expands LT Ports from 64 to 1020 Ports in increments of 64.
CCIS Link (1)
Adds support for one CCIS Link
CCIS Link (4)
Adds support for four CCIS Link
CCIS Link (8)
Adds support for eight CCIS Link
IPT Card (1)
IPT Card (4)
IPT Card (8)
Adds support for one IP trunk card
Adds support for four IP trunk card
Adds support for eight IP trunk card
Event Based CCIS (ECCIS) Key
Wireless Software Key
Wireless Software Key 8 PS
T1/E1 6 to 10
ISDN DCH 5 to 8
IP Remote PIM 1 Site License
Dterm IP Software Seat Licenses
8 Seat License Key
Adds Event Based CCIS capability
Adds Wireless with support of 128 ZT’s and 256 PS’s
Adds 8 Wireless ports each key above the initial 256
Expands T1/E1 capacity between 144 to 240 channels
Expands capacity between 5 DCH Cards and 8 DCH cards
Adds IP Remote Capability and is required for each Remote Site
Soft-Phone 4 Seat License
Each Soft-Phone 4 Seat License can support up to four
simultaneous sessions via the SP-20 Soft-Phone. The SP20
Soft-Phone also requires IP 8 Seat License. To support eight
simultaneous soft-phone sessions would require eight SoftPhone Licenses and 8 IP Seat Licenses.
Each SP-30 4 Seat License can support up to four simultaneous
sessions via the SP-30 Soft-Phone. The SP30 Soft-Phone also
requires IP 8 Seat License. To support eight simultaneous softphone sessions would require eight Soft-Phone Licenses and 8
IP Seat Licenses.
SP-30 4 Seat License
Page 2- 18
Dterm IP termainls are controlled by the CPU and do not use
digital line cards! Instead they require Dterm IP seat licenses. The
licenses are available in 8 seat increments and are cumulative.
For example, if you have 8 existing Dterm IP Seats and need a
total of 16, you can simply add another 8-seat license to reach
the total of 16 seats.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Processors
The NEAX2000 IPS, IPSDM, and IPSDMR are distributed multiprocessor systems. Their control
system consists of a Main Processor (MP), Firmware Processors (FP), and Application
Processors (AP). Both the FP and APs execute their predetermined functions under the control
of the MP.
Main Processor (MP)
Name Code
PN-CP24
Remarks
Main Processor Card for NEAX 2000 IPS and IPSDM.
One card is required per system.
PN-CP27
Main Processor Card for NEAX 2000 IPS Dual MP System.
One card is required per system.
PN-CP31
Main Processor Card for NEAX 2000 IPSDMR.
One card is required for each Remote Site.
PZ-M606
Ethernet Control Card:
• Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit/receive a signal
of TCP/IP protocol.
• 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-1
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Major specifications and functionality of the NEAX IPS MPs are shown below:
PN-CP24-B
PN-CP27-A
Item
PN-CP31-A
Central Processing
ElanSC520
System Memory
Flash ROM (8MB), SDRAM (32MB)
Network Switching
1,024 × 1,024 Time Division Switch
3-Way Conference
16 sets of 3-way conference circuitry
DTMF Signal Sender
32 circuits (digit 0 to 9, *, and # are generated)
Music-on-Hold
10 types are available Note
Mini Jack
1 for External Music Source for Music on Hold Note
Audible Tone Generator (DTG)
Available
Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO)
2 ports (Source/Receiver)
Built-in SMDR
Available
Built-in MCI
Available
Built-in FP0
Available
BS00 Function
Available
DTMF Receiver
4 circuits
AP01 Function
Available
Built-in DRS
Available
MAT Interface
----Direct Connection
1 port
1 port
Remote Connection
1 port
Not Available
w/Built-in MODEM
External Alarm Indication
MJ and MN
MJ only
DAT
2circuits (120 seconds per circuit) Not Available
DK00
2 circuits (relay drive x1,
Not Available
external key scan x1)
Application Key Program
In EPROM
In Flash ROM
Built-in DRS (Device Registration Server)
Note: In case of Dterm IP, the synthesized melody is provided built into IP adapter on the phone
Firmware Processor (FP)
Firmware Processors (FP) are required when more than two PIMs/Modular Chassis (MC) are used.
The FP provides supervision and status analysis of line/trunk ports, which reside in the MC or PIM.
The FP provides the bus interface for I/O Bus, PCM Bus, and Alarm Bus in a multiple-PIM
configuration. The major specifications of the FP are shown below:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Central Processor Unit: 16-bit (25 MHz)
Memory: Program Area (384 kb), Work Area (384 kb)
BS01 Function
Name Code
PN-CP15
PN-CP19
Page 3- 2
Remarks
Firmware Processor Card for use with the NEAX 2000 IPS.
Firmware Processor Card for use with the NEAX 2000 IPSDM.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Application Processor (AP)
Application Processors communicate directly to the MP, bypassing the FP. Features such as SMDR,
Property Management System (PMS), Digital Trunks (T1), CCIS, etc. are Application Processors.
System Capacity for Application Processor Card:
ƒ
ƒ
Maximum of 24 cards per system
Maximum of 256 ports per system
There are several different AP cards. The table below provides a list of APs and their functions.
Application Processor (AP) Cards
AP CARD
SPN-24DTAC (AP)
SPN-30DTC (AP)
SPN-24PRTA (AP)
SPN-24PRTA QSIG(AP)
SPN-24CCTA (AP)
SPN-2BRTC (AP)
SPN-4BRTA (AP)
SPN-SC00 CCH (AP)
SPN-SC01 DCH (AP)
SPN-SC03 8ICH (AP)
SPN-SC03 8CSH (AP)
SPN-SC01 QSIG (AP)
SPN-AP00B MRC (AP)
SPN-4RSTB (AP)
SPN-4RSTB-911 (AP)
SPN-4RSTC (AP)
SPN-IPTB-A (AP)
SPN-IPTB-B (AP)
SPN-CFTC (AP)
SPN-AP00B DBM (AP)
SPN-SC01 DCH-Q (AP)
Function
24 Channel Digital Trunk Interface with built-in CSU
30 Channel Digital Trunk Interface with A/U Law conversion
24 Channel PRI Trunk with built-in D-Channel Handler (DCH)
24 Channel PRI Trunk with built-in QSIG D-Channel Handler (DCH)
24 Channel CCIS Trunk with built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH)
2 circuit BRI (Trunk)
4 circuit BRI (Trunk)
Common Channel Handler for CCIS Signaling
D-Channel Handler for ISDN Primary Rate Access
D-Channel Handler for BRI
CS (ZT) Handler (CSH) for S-Interface/U-Interface
Q-SIG Protocol Handler
SMDR, PMS, H/M Printer & MCI Port
4 circuit MF Receiver for T1 trunks with ANI
4 circuit MF Receiver for enhanced E911
4 circuit ID Number Receiver for Analog Caller ID (Class SM)
IP Trunk for VoIP (P-MP)
IP Trunk for VoIP (H.323)
32-Party Conference
Data Base Memory, Wireless Roaming
Q931a Protocol Handler for Wireless Roaming
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-3
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Reliability and Availability
Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)
The MTBF represents the minimum time frame in which a failure of any common equipment --such as
processors, memory, switching, and etc. - may cause a partial system outage. The following table
shows the MTBF in hours and in years for each card and terminal.
Reliability and Availability Chart
Reliability
Description
Availability
Fit
MTBF
years
MTBF
Minute
MTTR
Minute
ICS VS PIMMD (BWB)
1868
61.1
32136156
60
99.999813%
SPN-CP24A MP
11849
9.63
5064995
45
99.999112%
SPN-CP24B MP
10798
10.6
5575176
45
99.999193%
SPN-CP31A MP
10700
10.7
5627772
45
99.999200%
PN-CP27A MP
10798
10.6
5575176
0.3
99.999995%
SPN-CP15 FP
3060
37
19460520
5
99.999974%
PZ-M606-A
1269.2
89.94
47304842
10
99.999979%
PZ-PW121
13850
8.2
4312872
5
99.999884%
PZ-PW122
5780
19.8
10414008
10
99.999904%
PZ-PW131
13350
8.6
4523256
15
99.999668%
PN-8LCAA
1934
59
31031640
5
99.999984%
PN-8COTS
3312
34.5
19092348
5
99.999974%
PN-4DATC
5490
20.79
10934708
5
99.999954%
PZ-8PFTB
1439
79.3
41708628
5
99.999988%
PN-CFTB
941
121
63641160
5
99.999992%
PN-CFTC (AP)
6000
19.8
10414008
5
99.999952%
PN-IPTB-B (AP)
5757
19.83
10429787
5
99.999952%
1435.3
79.54
41834858
5
99.999988%
4467
25.6
13464576
5
99.999963%
SPN-4VCTI-B
PN-4LCAA
Page 3- 4
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Reliability and Availability Chart (Cont.)
Reliability
Description
Availability
Fit
MTBF
Years
MTBF
Minute
MTTR
Minute
PN-2ILCA
5849
19.5
10256220
5
99.999951%
PN-8DLCP
1848
61.77
32488549
5
99.999985%
PN-2DLCN
856
133.36
70142026
5
99.999993%
PN-M10
1750
65.23
34308371
5
99.999985%
PN-DK00
1274
89.6
47126016
5
99.999989%
PN-4LLCB
1792
63.7
33503652
5
99.999985%
PN-AP00B MRC-C (AP)
5196
22
11571120
5
99.999957%
PN-SC03-B 8ICH(AP)
6816
16.75
8809830
5
99.999943%
PN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A/B
2674
42.69
22453232
5
99.999978%
PN-20DTB
2965
38.5
20249460
5
99.999975%
SPN-32IPLAA IP PAD-D
11112
10.3
5417388
5
99.999908%
SPN-32IPLAA IP PAD-C
11112
10.3
5417388
5
99.999908%
SPN-SC00 CCH-D(AP)
8816
12.95
6811182
5
99.999927%
PN-30DTCC-A(AP)
3504
32.58
17135777
5
99.999971%
SPN-24PRTA (AP)
4625
24.7
12991212
5
99.999962%
PN-24CCTA
4625
24.7
12991212
5
99.999962%
PN-8RSTG
133
858.31
4.51E+08
5
99.999999%
6566.4
17.39
9146444
5
99.999945%
4082
28
14726880
5
99.999966%
7790.4
14.3
7521228
5
99.999934%
PZ-M537
346
329.9
17409276
10
99.999943%
PZ-M542
1464
78
41024880
10
99.999976%
PZ-4PFTA
751
152
79945920
10
99.999987%
13680
8.3
4365468
30
99.999313%
PN-4BRTA-A(AP)
SPN-PRTA-QSIG (AP)
SN716 DESK CON-B
IPS DM PIMMF
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-5
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Reliability and Availability Chart (Cont.)
Reliability
Description
MTBF
years
MTBF
Minute
MTTR
Minute
Availability
Fit
DTR-1-1 TEL
1359
84
44180640
5
99.999989%
DTR-1HM-1 TEL
2718
42
22090320
5
99.999977%
DTR-2DT-1 TEL
9927
11.5
6048540
5
99.999917%
DTR-8-1 TEL
8154
14
7363440
5
99.999932%
DTR-8D-1 TEL
10378
11
5785560
5
99.999914%
DTR-16D-1 TEL
10976
10.4
5469984
5
99.999909%
DTR-32D-1 TEL
12614
9.05
4759938
5
99.999895%
ITR-8D-2 TEL
14269
8
4207680
5
99.999881%
ITR-16D-2 TEL
14269
8
4207680
5
99.999881%
DCR-60-1P Console
9593
11.9
6258924
5
99.999920%
AD(A)-R Unit
2857
39.95
21012102
10
99.999952%
AP(R)-R Unit
6668
17.12
9004435
10
99.999889%
AP(A)-R Unit
6406
17.82
9372607
10
99.999893%
CT(A)-RP Unit
8154
14
7363440
10
99.999864%
IP-R Unit
12144
9.4
4944024
10
99.999798%
DCU-60-1
9593
11.9
6258924
5
99.999920%
DTP-8-1 TEL
8272
13.8
7258248
5
99.999931%
DTP-8D-1 TEL
10570
10.8
5680368
5
99.999912%
DTP-16D-1 TEL
11083
10.3
5417388
5
99.999908%
DTP-32D-1 TEL
12826
8.9
4681044
5
99.999893%
DTP-1-2
3110
36.7
19302732
5
99.999974%
DTP-1HM-2
4494
25.4
13359384
5
99.999963%
Page 3- 6
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Mean Time To Repair (MTTR)
The Mean Time To Repair has been studied with the following conditions:
1. A mid to high-level technical person will attend to the site for the detection of the fault and
replacement of the faulty circuit board.
2. All critical circuit boards for replacement are stocked at each Fault Dispatch Center (FDC).
3. All non-critical circuit boards for FDCs are stocked at NEC. The calculation result of the MTTR is
1.0 hour.
Reliability Calculations
The following information is to show you how to calculate the reliability for the system you are
configuring. Remember that these calculations are used to determine a partial system outage.
Reliability Calculation
1Defect
1FIT
1FIT=
109
MTBF=
=
TotalFITS TotalFITS
1,000,000,000Hours•Parts
System Calculation
To calculate the MTBF of a single system, obtain the sum of the FITs from each component.
For example: Assume you have a complete system that consists of two components:
Item A FIT=31,700, Item B FIT=80,000
TotalFit = 31,700 + 80,000 = 111,700
109
MTBF=
= 8952.55 Hours
111,700
8,952.22 Hours
= 1.02 Years
8,760Hours / Year
Availability Calculations
Availability=
MTBF
MTBF+MTTR
=.9XXXXX
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-7
Chapter 3 System Highlights
System Traffic
In regards to the traffic capacity of electronic PABX, two kinds of descriptions are usually
employed. One is Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCA), which relates to the ability of the Central
Processor Unit (CPU). Another is the traffic handling capacity per line that relates to the
handling capacity of each station. This technical information herein offers the traffic data for
both cases.
Traffic Load
Traffic load is expressed as the quantity of traffic during the busy hour, the busiest one-hour period of
the day for traffic. Traffic can be measured in minutes, hours, hundreds of call seconds (CCS), or
Erlangs.
CCS--one CCS is equal to 100 seconds of telephone time, or 1/36 Erlang.
Erlang--one Erlang is equal to one hour of telephone time or 36 CCS.
CCS units are convenient when traffic is measured in small increments. For telephone traffic, a typical
business generates about 6 CCS per telephone during the busy hour (1/6 Erlang).
Busy Hour
The hour during the day when traffic is highest is called the busy hour. Since this is the period when
users are most likely to encounter blockage, the traffic load during the busy hour is the load you need to
plan for. Traffic tables show the amount of traffic that can be handled during the busy hour. Within the
busy hour, peaks will occur when blockage will be higher than the design objectives. It's not
economical, however, to design a network to handle absolute peaks. Most networks are designed to
cause some traffic to be blocked or overflow to other services.
One way to establish the load during the busy hour is to schedule traffic studies for a week when you
know the load is high. Or, you can use tables developed by traffic engineers to estimate the busy hour
load.
BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts)
BHCA of the NEAX2000 IPS is shown below.
Number of PIMs
Business or
Hotel/Motel
without ACD/OAI
Max. 2500 BHCA
(No FP)
Max. 5000 BHCA
(One FP)
Max. 7500 BHCA
(Two FPs)
Max. 8000 BHCA
(Three FPs)
Business or
Hotel/Motel with
ACD/OAI
Max. 2000 BHCA
(No FP)
Max. 4000 BHCA
(One FP)
Max. 5000 BHCA
(Two FPs)
Max. 5500 BHCA
(Three FPs)
Page 3- 8
1PIM
2PIM
3PIM
4PIM
5PIM
6PIM
7PIM
8PIM
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Traffic Capacity In Erlang (For TDM Circuits)
Calculation Procedure
TDSW
LC
Internal Traffic
(I-erl)
LC
STA
LC
External Traffic
(E-erl)
COT
C.O.
Total system traffic capacity (T-erl) is obtainable by the following formula.
T (erl) = I (erl) + E (erl)
In the NEAX 2000 IPS, external traffic capacity is obtained from the Central Office Trunk (COT) quantity
by employing the “Erlang B Table”. There is no limitation for the internal traffic capacity. The time slot is
assigned for individual station and the connection between stations can be made without limitation
through TDSW (Time Division Switch). Consequently, when describing the traffic capacity in erlang, it is
meaningless unless specifying the ratio of the internal and external traffic. From the above idea, total
system traffic capacity (T-erl) is actually obtained by the following formula:
T (erl) = Internal Traffic (I-erl) + External Traffic (E-erl)
= E (erl) ÷ (Ratio of external traffic)
When assuming the external and internal traffic is even.
T(erl) = E(erl)+ 0.5
For example:
System configuration:
• 384 Lines
• 64 C. O. Trunks
• External traffic: Internal traffic: = 7:4
In this system, external traffic capacity is obtained from “Erlang B” table. That is, 64 C. O. Trunks at
grade of service of 0.01 can carry 50.6 erl. Total traffic capacity of this system is obtained from above
50.6 erl and ratio of external traffic as shown below:
T (erl) = E (erl) ÷
(Ratio of external traffic)
= 50.6
7__
7÷3
÷
= 72.3 erl
Traffic capacity per station line
= 72.3erl
÷
384 lines
= 0.19 erl/L
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-9
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Traffic Capacity per Line (For TDM Circuits)
Traffic capacity per line (erl/L) can be calculated in accordance with the calculation procedure in
Section 3.4. The traffic capacity per line at various line/truck configurations as the calculation result is
shown in the following table. Though the following table does not cover all NEAX2000 IPS line/trunk
configurations, it covers the typical TDM line/trunk configurations likely to be required in the actual
system. Grade of service is considered as 0.01. Use the Erlang B Table to find the required number of
DTMF register ports for a specific NEAX2000 IPS.
Unit = erl per line
Number of Trunks
Use Erlang B table to determine the number of trunks at a particular grade of service after using the
following formulas:
Incoming: incoming ccs traffic
----------------------- = Erlang B
36 ccs
Outgoing: outgoing ccs traffic
----------------------- = Erlang B
36 ccs
Note: Traffic loads are measured in hundred call seconds, or CCS. Since there are 3,600 seconds in an hour, a
line that's tied up for one hour measures 36 CCS traffic.
Page 3- 10
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Erlang B Table
Traffic
Distribution
Line
16L
32L
48L
96L
144L
192L
240L
288L
336L
384L
Trunk
4 COT
8 COT
12 COT
4 COT
8 COT
12 COT
16 COT
4 COT
8 COT
12 COT
16 COT
12 COT
16 COT
20 COT
24 COT
12 COT
16 COT
20 COT
24 COT
20 COT
24 COT
28 COT
32 COT
20 COT
24 COT
28 COT
32 COT
20 COT
24 COT
28 COT
32 COT
28 COT
32 COT
36 COT
40 COT
44 COT
28 COT
32 COT
40 COT
44 COT
48 COT
64 COT
Internal
Call: 0.3
External
Call: 0.7
0.078
0.279
0.525
0.039
0.140
0.262
0.396
0.026
0.093
0.175
0.264
0.087
0.132
0.179
0.228
0.058
0.088
0.119
0.152
0.090
0.144
0.139
0.164
0.072
0.091
0.111
0.131
0.060
0.076
0.093
0.109
0.079
0.094
0.108
0.123
0.138
0.069
0.082
0.108
0.121
0.134
0.188
:0.4
:0.5
:0.6
:0.7
:0.6
:0.5
:0.4
:0.3
0.091
0.326
0.612
0.045
0.163
0.306
0.462
0.030
0.109
0.204
0.308
0.102
0.154
0.209
0.266
0.068
0.103
0.139
0.177
0.104
0.133
0.162
0.191
0.084
0.106
0.129
0.153
0.070
0.089
0.108
0.128
0.092
0.109
0.127
0.144
0.161
0.081
0.096
0.126
0.141
0.157
0.220
0.109
0.391
0.735
0.054
0.196
0.367
0.555
0.036
0.130
0.245
0.370
0.122
0.185
0.251
0.319
0.082
0.123
0.167
0.212
0.125
0.159
0.194
0.230
0.100
0.127
0.155
0.184
0.084
0.106
0.129
0.153
0.111
0.131
0.152
0.173
0.194
0.097
0.115
0.151
0.169
0.188
0.264
0.136
0.489
0.918
0.068
0.244
0.459
0.693
0.045
0.163
0.306
0.462
0.153
0.231
0.313
0.398
0.102
0.154
0.209
0.266
0.157
0.199
0.243
0.287
0.125
0.159
0.194
0.230
0.104
0.133
0.162
0.191
0.139
0.164
0.190
0.216
0.242
0.121
0.144
0.189
0.212
0.235
0.329
0.181
0.652
1.224
0.091
0.326
0.612
0.925
0.060
0.217
0.406
0.613
0.204
0.308
0.418
0.531
0.136
0.205
0.278
0.354
0.209
0.266
0.324
0.383
0.167
0.212
0.259
0.306
0.139
0.177
0.216
0.255
0.185
0.219
0.253
0.288
0.323
0.162
0.191
0.252
0.282
0.313
0.439
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-11
Chapter 3 System Highlights
PEG Count
The PEG counter is used for maintenance purposes to verify various data in the system. PEG counters
can be set by system programming to start and stop by month, day, hour and minute. A system reset
will clear all PEG count data. The following data can be measured by PEG count.
Trunk PEG Count
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Number of outgoing trunk seizure by Trunk Route
Number of tandem connectioins established
Number of times a busy station was encountered
Number of all types of calls to Attendant Console
Number of connections giving Dial Tone
Number of station-to-station connections established
Number of failures caused by all senders being busy
Number of failures caused by all registers being busy
Number of failures caused by all ringing trunks being busy
Number of failures caused by all IP-PAD channels being
Number of incoming call seizure-Trunk Route
Number of times all trunks found to be busy trunk route
Number of incoming calls terminated to busy tone-Trunk Route
Number of unanswered incoming calls-Trunk Route
Number of register connection on trunk call-Trunk Route
Number of conference calls (Three/Four way Calling)
Number of failures cased by all conference trunks (For three way Calling) being busy
Number of transferred incoming calls to Attendant Console or predetermined station, by Call
Forwarding-Don’t Answer
UCD PEG Count
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Number of answered calls on UCD station
Number of incoming calls to UCD Group
Number of call waiting calls for predetermined time in queuing mode on UCD Group
Number of abandoned calls to UCD Group
Number of incoming calls to all busy of UCD Group
Number of incoming calls to UCD Group that were answered
Number of times queuing
IP Network PEG Count
ƒ Number of times that traffic exceeded the limit bandwidth
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Number of times that traffic exceeded the warning bandwidth
Maximum bandwidth used
Bandwidth used now
Page 3- 12
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Number of Voice Channels per IP Trunk
The maximum voice channels per IP Trunk card depends on the payload size as follows (payload size
can be assigned in system programming):
CCIS (Point-to-Multipoint)
Payload Size
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
20 ms
8 Channel
8 Channel
------
30 ms
16 Channel
16 Channel
16 Channel
40 ms
16 Channel
16 Channel
------
Payload Size
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
20 ms
6 Channel
5 Channel
---
30 ms
8 Channel
7 Channel
8 Channel
40 ms
12 Channel
10 Channel
---
VoIP (H.323)
Payload size for Virtual IPT
Payload Size
10 ms.
20 ms.
30 ms.
40 ms.
Max. Voice Channels Per IPT
G.729a
4
8
16
16
G.711
4
8
16
16
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
G.723.1
–
–
16
–
Page 3-13
Chapter 3 System Highlights
IP PAD Calculation
IP PAD Calculation
Number of extensions
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
0%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
10%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
20%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
30%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
40%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
50%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
60%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
75%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
80%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
88%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
95%
Number of IP PAD Cards
Legacy: Number of PAD Ports
99.0%
Page 3- 14
Number of IP PAD Cards
8
16
32
48
72
96
100
5
6
9
12
16
20
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
6
9
12
15
19
19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
6
9
11
15
18
19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
6
8
11
14
17
18
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
6
8
10
13
16
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
5
7
9
12
15
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
5
7
8
11
13
13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
6
7
8
10
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
5
6
8
9
9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
4
5
6
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
IP PAD Calculation
Legacy:
0%
Legacy:
10%
Legacy:
20%
Legacy:
30%
Legacy:
40%
Legacy:
50%
Legacy:
60%
Legacy:
75%
Legacy:
80%
Legacy:
88%
Legacy:
95%
Legacy:
99.0%
Number of extensions
120
200
208
264
300
320
376
432
Number of PAD Ports
23
34
35
43
48
50
57
64
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Number of PAD Ports
22
33
34
41
46
48
55
62
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Number of PAD Ports
21
31
32
39
44
48
52
59
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Number of PAD Ports
20
30
30
37
41
43
49
55
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Number of PAD Ports
19
27
28
34
37
40
45
51
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Number of PAD Ports
17
25
25
30
34
35
40
45
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Number of PAD Ports
15
22
22
27
29
31
35
39
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
Number of PAD Ports
11
16
17
20
22
23
26
28
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Number of PAD Ports
10
14
14
17
19
20
22
24
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Number of PAD Ports
7
9
10
11
12
12
14
15
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Number of PAD Ports
5
6
7
7
8
8
9
10
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Number of PAD Ports
8
11
11
13
14
14
16
18
Number of IP PAD Cards
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-15
Chapter 3 System Highlights
System Specifications
AC Power Requirements
Description
AC Input Voltage
AC Input Current
Specifications
90 to 132Vac or 180 to 264Vac; 47 to 64Hz
3.5A(at 100V), 2.0A(at 200V)
AC Power Consumption / Thermal Output (Maximum)
Description
1-PIM
2-PIM
3-PIM
4-PIM
5-PIM
6-PIM
7-PIM
8-PIM
AC Power Consumption (KVA)
100V
200V
0.35
0.40
0.70
0.80
1.05
1.20
1.40
1.60
1.75
2.00
2.10
2.40
2.45
2.80
2.80
3.20
Thermal Output (BTU)
100V
200V
1,195
1,365
2,389
2,730
3,584
4,096
4,778
5,461
5,973
6,826
7,167
8,191
8,362
9,556
9,556
10,922
Battery Requirements
Description
Max. Battery Capacity
DC Input Voltage for Battery
Built-in Battery Requirements
Physical Size of Built-in Battery
(one 12V battery)
Specifications
260AH per 4 PIM (65AH (12V) x 8)
-24V
3.4AH (12V) x 2 (approx. 30min. backup)
133(W) x 60(H) x 67(D) mm
Operating Environment
Description
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
Page 3- 16
Specifications
320F to 1040F (00C to 400C)
Max. 90% (non-condensing)
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Electrical Characteristics (Central Office Trunk)
Description
Insulation Resistance
DC Resistance
Impedance
Leak Current
Specifications
15 mega-ohms or more at 100Vdc
On-hook conditions: 30 mega-ohms
Off-hook conditions: 1,700 ohms
On-hook conditions: 20 kilo-ohms (300 to 3,400Hz)
8 kilo-ohms (at 24Hz)
Looped conditions: 600 ohms
0 mA at on-hook conditions
Transmission Characteristics (For TDM Circuits)
Description
PCM Coding System
Insertion Loss
Return Loss
Longitudinal Balance
Attenuation/Frequency Distortion
Group Delay Distortion
Total Distortion
Idle Channel Noise
Impulsive Noise
Cross Talk Attenuation
Inter-modulation Products
Spurious In-Band Signals
Signal Attenuation
Specifications
A-law/U-law
0.15 dB at 1KHz
20 dB or more (300 to 3,400Hz) against 600 ohms
59 dB or more (300 to 3,400Hz)
-0.2 dB to +0.7 dB (300 to 3,400Hz)
0 to 0.3msec. (500 to 2,800 Hz)
25 dB (Input signal:-45 dBm0)/40 dB(input signal:0 dBm0)
-67 dBmop or less (psophometric noise)
-50 dBm0 or less (single frequency noise)
0 counts at -35 dBm
90 dB or more
-40 dB or more
-49 dBm0 or less
Attenuation rate: 12 dB per octave or more at 3.4 kHz above
Attenuation level: -40 dBm or less at 3.4 kHz and above
-70 dBm or less at 50 kHz and above
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-17
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Line Conditions
Description
Specifiations
Loop Resistance (including Telephone Set)
Analog Standard Line
Max. 600 ohms
Analog Long Line
Max. 2,500 ohms (DP 10pps), Max. 1,700 ohms (DP 20pps)
Max. 1,200 ohms (DTMF)
Loop Resistance (including Opposite End Resistance)
Central Office Trunk
Max. 1,700 ohms
Tie Line Trunk (Loop Dial)
Max. 2,500 ohms
Tie Line Trunk (E&M)
Max. 900 ohms (only E-wire condition)
Cable Length
Note
SN716 Desk Console
8DLC/4DLC/2DLC Card
Max. 350 meters (Max. 300 meters for 8DLC card)
4DLC/2DLC Card with
Max. 1,200 meters
AC Adapter
Dterm Series i/E
8DLC/4DLC Card
Max. 200 meters (Max. 300 meters for Dterm 8 and Dterm 8D)
2DLC Card
Max. 850 meters
4DLC/2DLC Card with
Max. 1,200 meters
AC Adapter
DSS/BLF Console
4DLC/2DLC Card with
Max. 1,200 meters
AC Adapter
Zone Transceiver
ZTII-S (for S-Interface)
Max. 1,210 meters @-48V, Max. 970 meters @-45V
ZTII-S with AC Adapter
Max. 1,340 meters @-48V
ZTII-U (for U-Interface)
Max. 1,210 meters (2-wire), Max. 2,100 meters (4-wire) @-48V
Max. 970 meters (2-wire), Max. 1,700 meters (4-wire) @-45V
ZTII-U with AC Adapter
Max. 3,950 meters
Note: Cable length is based on cable with 0.5mm diameter and without lightning arresters
Page 3- 18
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Rotary Dial Pulse and DTMF Signaling
(1) Rotary Dial Signal
Description
Specifications
Dial Speed
Receiving
9 to 22 pps
Break Ratio
Inter-Digit Pause
Switch-Hook Flash Detection
55 to 77 %
Min. 256 msec.
384 to 2,300 msec.
Sending
10 pps +/- 0.8pps
20 pps +/- 0.8 pps
67 +/- 3% or 62 +/- 3%
300 to 1,000 msec.(10 pps)
Not applicable
(2) DTMF Signal
Description
Signal Code
Specifications
Receiving
High Frequency Group
Low Frequency Group
Frequency Deviation
Signal Duration
Inter-Digit Pause
Signal Level
+/- 1.8 %
Min. 40 msec.
Min. 40 msec.
-46 to -5 dBm
Unwanted Frequency
Components
Not Applicable
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Sending
1,209Hz
1,336Hz
1
2
4
5
7
8
*
0
1,477Hz
697Hz
3
770Hz
6
852Hz
9
941Hz
#
+/- 0.8 %
64 or 128 milli-sec.
32 to 240 msec.
-10 dBm (low group)
- 8 dBm (high group)
40 dB below the power of signal frequency
Page 3-19
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Multi-frequency Compelled (MFC) – R2 SIGNAL
(1) MFC Frequency Value
Frequencies
Forward Signals(Hz)
Backward Signals(Hz)
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
1,380
1,500
1,620
1,740
1,860
1,980
1,140
1,020
900
780
660
540
(2) MFC Combinations
Combination Number
Frequencies
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
F0 + F1
F0 + F2
F1 + F2
F0 + F3
F1 + F3
F2 + F3
F0 + F4
F1 + F4
F2 + F4
F3 + F4
F0 + F5
F1 + F5
F2 + F5
F3 + F5
F4 + F5
(3) Sender/Receiver Specifications
Description
Sender
 Sender Transmitted Level
 Frequency Variation
Receiver
 Sensitivity Range
 Frequency Variation
Page 3- 20
Specifications
-8 dbm to -11.5 dBm
+/- 2 Hz
-35 dBm to 0 dBm
+/- 12 dBm
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
Audible Tones and Ringing Signal
Audible Tones
Frequency
350 Hz mixed with 440 Hz
350 Hz mixed with 440 Hz
480 Hz mixed with 620 Hz
480 Hz mixed with 620 Hz
2,400 Hz interrupted by 16 Hz
350 Hz mixed with 440 Hz
440 Hz mixed with 480 Hz
480 Hz mixed with 620 Hz
Tone
Dial Tone (DT)
Special Dial Tone (SDT)
Busy Tone (BT)
Reorder Tone (ROT)
Howler Tone (HWT)
Service Set Tone (SST)
Ring Back Tone (RBT)
Hold Tone (HDT)
Second Dial Tone
440 Hz mixed with 480 Hz
Call Waiting Ringback Tone
Message Waiting Indication Tone
440 Hz mixed with 480 Hz
350 Hz mixed with 440 Hz
Interruption
Continuous
0.125 sec. ON, 0.125 sec. OFF
0.5 sec. ON, 0.5 sec. OFF
2.5 sec. ON, 0.25 sec. OFF
Continuous
Continuous
1 sec. ON, 3 sec. OFF
0.25 sec. ON, 0.25 sec. OFF
0.25 sec. ON, 1.25 sec. OFF
0.25 sec. ON, 0.25 sec. OFF
0.25 sec. ON, 1.25 sec. OFF
1 sec. ON, 1 sec. OFF
0.125 sec. ON, 0.125 sec. OFF
Ringing Signal
Description
Specifications
Frequency
20 or 25Hz
Voltage
75 or 90Vrms
Note: The 2000 IPS has the capability to detect the above type of signal from Central Office and to transmit
the above type of signal to PBX stations.
Dimension and Weight
NEAX 2000 IPS
Description
Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H; mm)
Weight (kg)
Main Equipment
PIM (Fully card-mounted)
BASE
BASE TRAY (for UL)
Approx. 430 x 223 x 353 mm
(16.9” x 8.8” x 13.9’)
Approx. 430 x 205.2 x 61.6 mm
(16.9” x 8.08” x 2.43”)
Approx. 435 x 224.6 x 66.2 mm
(17.1’ x 8.84” x 2.6”)
Approx. 11.5 kg
(25.35 lbs)
Approx. 3.0 kg
(6.61 lbs)
Approx. 1.7 kg
(3.75 lbs)
NEAX IPSDM/IPSDMR
Description
Main Equipment
NEAX IPSDM
NEAX IPSDMR
Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H; mm)
430(W) x 365(D) x 88(H) mm
(16.9” x 14.4” x 3.5”)
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Weight (kg)
Approximately 7Kg / MODULAR
CHASSIS (when all slots are
occupied)
Page 3-21
Chapter 3 System Highlights
NEAX IPSDM/IPSDMR System Specifications
System Specifications
Item
System Capacity
Circuit Card
Mounted in
MODULAR CHASSIS
Power
Installation Method
Conditions
Cooling
Safety Standard
EMC
Page 3- 22
Specifications
LT ports: Max. 40 ports / MODULAR CHASSIS,
(Max. 64 ports including 24 virtual LT ports/MODULAR CHASSIS)
Max. 120 ports / system (IPSDM), Max. 80 ports / system (IPSDMR)
AP ports: Max. 256 ports / system
IP ports: Max. 952 ports (IPSDM), Max. 128 ports / system (IPSDMR)
Card slots: 6 slots / MODULAR CHASSIS (including 1 slot for MP/FP card)
All LT/AP cards of the NEAX 2000 IPS can be used for the IPSDM/ IPSDMR with
the exception of 4LLC and 2CSI cards.
AC100V – 240V (automatically adjusted)
Desk top-setting, 19” rack-mounting
Temperature: 5°C – 40°C (when the system is operating)
Humidity: 20% - 80% (when the system is operating)
Cooling by FAN
Complied with UL60950, CSA22.2 No. 950, EN60950, AS3260
Complied with VCCI Class A, FCC Part 15 Class A, EN55022 Class A,
AS/NZS 3548 Class A
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 3 System Highlights
IP Specifications
Item
Specifications
G.729a
G.723.1 (5.3 k/6.3 k)
G.711
32 channels per card
Automatically seized per call
Voice Encoding
IP-PAD
FAX
Communication
Feature
DTMF Signal
FAX Relay Method (T.30)
Remarks
8 kbps CS-ACELP
MP-MLQ/ACELP
64 kbps PCM
IP
H.245
H.245
Inter-office/Intra-office
Signaling
PROTIMS over IP
CCIS over IP
H.323
Dynamic Jitter Buffer
Jitter Control
QoS
(Quality of Service)
• TOS, IP Precedence
• DiffServ
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
LAN Interface
Echo Canceller
(IP-PAD)
Auto Negotiation is available.
100BASE-TX is recommended.
G.168
Dterm
IP/CCIS
Virtual IPT
10 ms-40 ms
(G.723.1: 30 ms unit)
Payload
Size
H.323 IPT
PAD Control
PAD card is required.
G3 FAX (up to 14.4 kbps)
Super G3 Reciprocal: Not allowed
H.323 IPT/IP-PAD/Dterm IP
Dterm IP to Dterm IP connection
Dterm IP to IP-PAD connection
Dterm IP to NEAX 2000 IPS
connection
Point to Multipoint connection
H.323 IPT card and IP-PAD card
are required
20 ms.-40 ms. (10 ms. increments)
(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed)
0 dB to +16 dB (+2 dB unit)
0 dB to –16 dB (–2 dB unit)
0 dB to –16 dB
Max. voice channels per card
10 ms: 12 ch
20 ms: 20 ch
30 ms: 30 ch
40 ms: 32 ch
Maximum voice channels per card
G.729a G.711 G.723.1
20 ms.: 6ch
5ch
30 ms.: 8ch
7ch
8ch
40 ms.: 12ch
10ch
Setting is available per Location No.
For connection via the IPT card
LAN interface transmission modes
Device type
MP (M606)
32IPLA/32IPLA-A
8IPLA
Auto
negotiation
X (Default)
X (Default)
X (Default)
100 Mbps fixed mode
Full Duplex Half Duplex
X
X
X
—
X
—
10 Mbps fixed mode
Full Duplex Half Duplex
—
—
—
—
X
—
X = available — = not available
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 3-23
Chapter 3 System Highlights
System Compliance
HIPAA Summary
The security standards set forth within HIPAA require encryption; authentication and audit trail
measures to safeguard patient medical information during electronic data interchange (EDI)
transactions between healthcare providers and third party reimbursement entities. These measures
impact how patient medical information is exchanged, as well as accessed within a facility’s data
network. Claims transmissions using Internet, intranets, extranets or private data networks are subject
to HIPPA security standards as previously outlined.
HIPAA Compliance
Patient medical data is not accessed, stored or otherwise exchanged over a healthcare facility’s private
branch exchange (PBX). However, an NEC manufactured private branch exchange does provide the
flexibility to create detailed call accounting records that can be utilized to audit or otherwise track
utilization of a facility’s NEC telecommunications system and/or PBX. A NEC PBX can also be
configured to restrict access to designated telephone extensions. Furthermore, an NEC PBX can also
be configured to utilize password access to individual telephones, voice mailboxes, etc. for purposes of
end user authentication.
So, under the guise of the security standards within HIPAA, NEC Private Branch Exchange
equipment is HIPAA compliant and does provide the necessary security measures for use within any
business setting that is subject to administrative rules outlined with the Health Insurance Portability and
Accountability Act.
Department of Defense Compliance
The NEC NEAX 2000 Internet Protocol Switch (IPS) with software release D1.8.20, hereinafter referred
to as the system under test (SUT), meets all of its critical interoperability requirements and is certified
for joint use within the Defense Switched Network (DSN) as a Private Branch Exchange (PBX) 2.
However, since PBX2s do not support the Military Unique Feature Requirements detailed in reference
(c), connectivity to the DSN is not authorized until a waiver is granted by the CJCS. PBXs are Military
Department (MILDEP) controlled elements of the Defense Switched Network (DSN). PBX2 switches
have no military unique features (MUFs) and can only serve Department of Defense (DOD), non-DOD,
non-governmental, and foreign government users having no missions or communications requirement
to ever originate or receive Command and Control (C2) communications. C2 users and Special C2
users are not authorized to be served by a PBX2. This interoperability test status is based on
evaluation of Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff (CJCS) validated Generic Switching Center
Requirements (GSCR) for PBX2s and the overall system interoperability performance. The SUT also
offers a Voice over Internet Protocol capability; however this capability is not covered under this
certification.
This statement was obtained from a Department of Defence document posted on there web site and full
copy of the compliance document can be downloaded from the following link.
http://jitc.fhu.disa.mil/tssi/apl.html
Page 3- 24
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Module/Installation Hardware
This table shows the names and functions of the modules.
Equipment Name
Function Name
Remarks
SN1617 PIMMD
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM)
Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM. Houses two batteries for
protection from short power interruption (for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports × 8).
SN1568 PIMMF
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System
Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power
interruption (for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU System.
COVER PARTS
ASSEM-A
COVER PARTS
ASSEM
Cover Parts Assembly
One cover parts assembly is required for each PIM.
SN1545
BASE
BASE/TOP
ASSEM
Base/Top Cover Assembly
One base and top cover assembly is required for each stack.
SN1619
BATTMB
BATTM
Battery Module for housing PIM or CS (ZT) backup batteries
Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power
interruption (for 3 hours).
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 4-1
Chapter 4 Equipment List
This table shows the name and functions of installation hardware.
Equipment Name
HANGER ASSEM (B)
Remarks
Wall Hanger Assembly
One HANGER ASSEM is required per PIM for Wall Mounting
Installation.
MOUNTING BRACKET
Safety Mounting Bracket
Used as an overhead hanger for Floor Standing Installation. Wire,
chain or eyebolts are to be locally provided, to secure the bracket.
To be installed on the top PIM in four or more modules of stack. It
provides 1.1G shockproof construction.
19” RACK BRACKET (A)
19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type A
One bracket is required for one PIM configuration.
One bracket is required for the top PIM of multiple module
configurations.
19” RACK BRACKET (B)
19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type B
One bracket is required for the bottom module of multiple module
configurations.
I/F BRACKET ASSEM
Inter Frame Bracket Assembly
Used to join the frames in two-stack configuration, for Floor
Standing Installation.
BASE TRAY ASSEM
Base Tray Assembly
One BASE TRAY is required per one frame for Floor Standing
Installation of Stationary Equipment.
Page 4- 2
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Circuit Cards
The circuit cards used for NEAX 2000 IPS systems are divided into the following types.
According to these card types, the mounting locations of card and port allocation of the Time
Division Switch are varied.
Common Control Cards
ƒ
Main Processor (MP)
ƒ
Firmware Processor (FP)
ƒ
Ethernet
ƒ
Power
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards
ƒ
IP PAD, Line Circuit (LC), Central Office Trunk (COT), Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT), etc.
Application Processor (AP) Cards
ƒ
SMDR/PMS/CIS/Hotel Printer Interface (AP00)
ƒ
T1/E1 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
Common Control Cards
The following table shows the names and functions of each control card.
Common Control Cards
Equipment
Name
PN-CP24
PN-CP27
Function
Name
MP
MP
Remarks
MP Card for Single MP System
Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration Server
(DRS), built-in FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR, Virtual IPT, Virtual CSH, 33
MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB, Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH
× 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source
mode), two RS-232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128
seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance (33.6
Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a
driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing, cable delay
timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
One card is required per system.
Main Processor Card for Backup CPU system
Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration Server
(DRS), Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR, Virtual IPT, Virtual CSH, 33
MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB, Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH
× 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source
mode), two RS-232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128
seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance (33.6
Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a
driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing, cable delay
timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Two cards are required per Backup CPU system. One card for active MP
[MP0] and another card for stand by MP [MP1].
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-3
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Common Control Cards (Cont.)
PN-CP31
PN-CP15
MP
FP
Main Processor Card for Remote PIM (DMR)
Provides LAN control function, System-based Device Registration Server
(DRS), built-in FP, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB, Flash ROM 9
MB), TDSW (1024CH × 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB sender, Clock, 2-line PLO
(receiver mode/source mode), one RS-232C port, 4-line PB receiver, internal
Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface.
BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate
delay timing, cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
One card is required per system.
Firmware Processor Card for NEAX 2000 IPS.
Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and inter-module BUS
interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals,
adjusts gate delay timing, cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM
BUS. When the system consists of three PIMs or more, one each of this card
is mounted respectively in PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
3/4 PIM System: 1 per System
5/6 PIM System: 2 per System
7/8 PIM System: 3 per System
PN-CP19
PZ-M606
PN-PW00
PZ-PW121
PZ-PW122
Page 4- 4
FP
ETHER
EXTPWR
AC/DC
PWR
DC/DC
PWR
Firmware Processor Card for IPSDM
Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and inter-module BUS
interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals,
adjusts gate delay timing, cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM
BUS. This card is used for the expansion MC of NEAX IPSDM. When the
system consists of three MC, this card is mounted in MC2.
Ethernet Card, 1 per MP
For Peer to Peer Connection and MAT/OAI
Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit/receive a
signal of TCP/IP protocol. Provides Auto Negotiation function (Always set to
ON). 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to
this card.
Power Supply Card for DESKCON
Provides –48 V DC power.
Maximum 4 cards per frame (4PIMs). Maximum 3 cards per PIM.
Occupies two physical slots width per card.
Main Power Supply Card
Input: AC120 V/240 V (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Output: –27 V (4.4 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA), +90 V (80 mA)
One card is pre-installed per PIM.
Power Supply Card for Cell Station (Zone Transceiver)
Input: –24 V DC
Output: –48 V DC (1.7 A)
One card per PIM.
Maximum 16 CS (ZT)s backed up by one card.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Application Processor Cards
The following table shows a summary of the Application Processor cards for NEAX 2000 IPS systems.
Maximum 24 (AP) cards per system
Maximum 256 (AP) ports per system
Application Processor Card Name and Function
Function
Digital Trunk Interface
(DTI/PRT/BRT)
Name
SPN-24DTAC-B (AP)
SPN-30DTC-C (AP)
SPN-24PRTA-C (AP)
SPN-24CCTA-A (AP)
SPN-2BRTC (AP)
SPN-4BRTA-D(AP)
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Port
24
31
25
25
4
8
Remarks
T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps)
Card:
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital
lines. (Available up to 256 AP ports)
T1 w/CSU
E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card:
Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital
lines. (Available up to 128 AP ports)
ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) Interface
Card w/CSU:
Provides a built-in D-Channel Handler
(DCH) and built-in CSU
CCIS (1.5 Mbps) Trunk Card:
Provides a built-in Common Channel
Handler (CCH) of CCIS.
2-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk
Card:
Accommodates two two-channel PCM
digital lines.
4-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk
Card:
Accommodates four two-channel PCM
digital lines.
Point to Point Connection Only
Page 5-5
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Application Processor Cards (Cont.)
Function
Common Channel
Handler for NO.7
CCIS
D-Channel Handler
for ISDN PRI
D-Channel Handler
for ISDN Station
ZT Handler
Name
SPN-SC00 CCH-D (AP)
SPN-SC01 DCH-C (AP)
SPN-SC03B 8ICH (AP)
SPN-SC03B 8CSH-C(AP)
SPN-AP00B MRC-C(AP)
SMDR/MCI/PMS/CIS
/Hotel Printer
Interface
SPN-AP00B MRC-E(AP)
PZ-M537
Note
Port
1
1
4
4
2
2
0
SPN-4RSTB-B (AP)
4
SPN-4RSTB-911 (AP)
4
SPN-4RSTC (AP)
4
MFC Receiver/Sender
Page 4- 6
Remarks
Common Channel Handler for CCIS
(1/Trunk Route). Transmits/receives
signals on the common signaling channel
of CCIS.
D-Channel Handler Card:
Transmits/receives signals on the DChannel of ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D)
interface.
ISDN-channel Handler Card:
Provides the D-Channel signaling
interface and controls a maximum of four
ILC cards (Layer 2 and 3).
CS (ZT) Handler Card for S-Interface/UInterface:
Provides the D-Channel signaling
interface and controls a maximum of four
CSI cards, eight CS (ZT)s.
Supports Dukane Nurse Call system.
Max two PN-4CSIA-A (U-Interface) and
max. four PN-2CSIA (S-Interface)
Application Package for SMDR (2400
basic and 1400 only/ PMS/ Hotel Printer/
CCIS Centralized SMDR
Default data supported.
Application Package for SMDR (2400
basic and extended only)/MCI/DND
Automatic Set/Reset at Appointed Time.
Memory Expansion Card for AP00 Card:
• The system capacity is expanded when
PZ-M537 is mounted on PN-AP00-B
(AP00) card.
4-line MF Receiver, MFC
Receiver/Sender Card:
• Used for MF/MFC-R2 Signaling on
DID/DOD trunks.
• A maximum of four cards can be
provided per system, including the
PN-4RSTC card.
4 circuit MF Receiver for Enhanced 911
Requires CAMA Trunks
4 circuit ID Number Received for Caller ID
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Application Processor Cards (Cont.)
Function
Name
Port
SPN-AP00B DBM-C (AP)
2
Remarks
Database Memory for Wireless Roaming
and OAI Applications using Free Location
Facility (FLF).
1 Card / system
Wireless Roaming
SPN-SC01 DCH-Q (AP)
1
SPN-SC01 QSIG (AP)
1
QSIG
SPN-24PRTA-QSIG (AP)
32-Party Conference
SPN-CFTC (AP)
25
32
DCH Card for Wireless Roaming
1 Card / Tie Line Route
Installed with DTI Card
QSIG Protocol Handler
ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) Interface
Card w/CSU and built-in QSIG DChannel Handler (DCH).
Also provides Name Display.
32-party Conference Trunk
1 card/system
Note: The Expansion Memory (PZ-M537) is the on-board sub-memory card for the AP00-B. It provides
additional memory capacity as shown below.
No EXPMEM
Type of
PN-AP00-B
Local Office of
Centralized
Billing-CCIS
/Stand-alone is
Provided.
With EXPMEM
Center Office
of Centralized
Billing-CCIS is
Provided.
Local Office of
PN-AP00-B
with MRC-C
program
1600
800
PN-AP00-B
with MRC-E
program
2620
1965
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Centralized
Billing-CCIS
/Stand-alone is
Provided.
Center Office
of Centralized
Billing-CCIS is
Provided.
27000: Call Record for CIS is not provided.
26000: Call Record for CIS is provided.
23580
22925
Page 5-7
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards
The following table shows a summary of the Line/Trunk (LT) cards for NEAX 2000 IPS. The LT cards
may be installed in slot 00 to 11 of PIM 0-7, with the following conditions:
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards
Function
Name
Port
Analog Station
PN-8LCAA
PN-8LCS
PN-4LCD-A
8
8
4
PN-AUCA
2
PN-4LCAA
4
PN-4LLCB
4
SPN-2ILCA
8
ISDN Station
Page 4- 8
Remarks
8L Analog Line Circuit
Message Waiting Control: 8 circuits
Momentary Open: 8 circuits
Loop Resistance: Max. 600ohms including
telephone set
8-Line Analog Station Card
Momentary Open: 8 circuits, Message
Waiting notification via Stutter Dial
Tone only. Loop Resistance: Max. 600
ohms
Note: DM & DMR must use with
PN-4LCAA.
4L Analog Line Circuit with MW Lamp
control
Momentary Open: 4 Circuits
On-Board power (80V) is included.
Loop Resistance: Max. 600ohms including
telephone set
2L Analog Universal Trunk
2L Long Line Circuit with PFT
Loop resistance: max. 2500ohms (LLC)
Two reverse circuits is included
On Board power (-48V) is included
4-Line Analog Station Card with built-in
Ring Generator. For use with NEAX
IPS DM and DMR only, Provides Line
Test function
“No Messaging Waiting Lamp” Utilizes
Stutter Dial Tone for MW notification.
Loop Resistance: Max 600 ohms
4L Long Line Circuit
Works in either mode:
Long Line Station
Caller ID
Loop Resistance:
Max. 2500ohms including telephone set
PZ-PW122 is required.
Can not be used in IPSDM or IPSDMR
2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card.
• Provides a physical interface to ISDN
Terminals.
• Occupies eight time slots per one card.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards (Cont.)
Function
Digital Station
Name
Port
PN-8DLCL
8
PN-8DLCP
PN-4DLCM
PN-4DLCQ
PN-2DLCN
8
4
4
2
IP Station
(Integrated IP)
SPN-32IPLA (ELC)
32
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Remarks
8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series
i/E/III, Elite,IPK, DSS Console,DESKCON
[–27 V version, two-wire type]
8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series
i/E/III, DSS Console, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]
4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series
i/E, Elite, DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series
i/E, DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
2-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm
Series i/E, Elite, DSS Console, ATTCON
[–48 V version, two-wire type]:
• Provides Line Test function.
• Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power
supply.
Max. 850 m (2788.7 ft.)
32 Circuit IP Station card G711 56K no
compression. Maximum 2 cards per FP, 8 cards
per system. Each card has RJ45 LAN
connection. Each card has on-board Device
Registration Software (DRS).
Page 5-9
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards (Cont.)
Function
IP PAD
(IP Station
Peer-to-Peer)
Name
Port
SPN-32IPLAA IP
PAD-E
32
SPN-8IPLA IP
PAD-B
8
Remarks
32-channel IP-PAD card:
• Provides Packet Assembly/Disassembly to
accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk interface.
• Used with a maximum of two 16VCT cards.
• Two cards can be accommodated per built-in
FP/FP card, a maximum of eight per system.
• 100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected
directly to this card.
•Supports T.30 or Pass-Through Fax
(G.711/G.726). 16VCT is not required
for G.711, 16VCT is required for
G.726. (R9 enhancement).
• Auto-Negotiation or 100Mbps Full Duplex is
selectable.
8-channel IP-PAD Card
Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/
Disassembly to accommodate Legacy
Line/Trunk interface. And provides voice
compression DSP control functions such as
voice compression control, DTMF relay.
• Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps),
G.729a (8 Kbps)
• FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
• Auto-Negotiation or 100Mbps Full Duplex is
selectable.
When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this
card can provides up to 32-channel of IP-PAD
(When using G.723.1, provides up to 24-channel
of IP-PAD).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in
FP/FP card, maximum 8 per system.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is
connected directly to this card.
PZ-24IPLA
SPN-16VCTAA IP
PAD-B
Page 4- 10
24
0
24-channel IP PAD and VCT daughter board.
Mounts on SPN-8IPLA to provide up to 32
G.711, G.729a and 16 G.723.1 PAD channels.
(T.30/T.38 is not supported)
16-channel CODEC Card for IP-PAD:
• Used with IP-PAD card.
• Two cards can be accommodated per IP-PAD
card, maximum 16 per system.
• Voice compression protocols:
• G.723.1, G.729a, G.711,
• FAX (14.4 Kbps), DTMF signals.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards (Cont.)
Function
Analog C.O. Trunk
Name
Port
PN-8COTS
8
PN-8COTQ
PN-4COTB
PN-4COTG
8
4
4
Analog Tie Line
Trunk
PN-2ODTA
PN-4ODTA
2
4
Analog DID Trunk
PN-4DITB
4
PN-AUCA
2
PN-8RSTG
8
DTMF Receiver
Caller ID Sender
PN-4RSTF
4
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Remarks
8-line Central Office Trunk Card
(Loop Start/ Ground Start Trunk):
Provides loop detection, sending/detecting
ground on Tip/Ring wire.
8-line Central Office Trunk Card
(Loop Start Trunk):
Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the
Caller ID (CLASS SM) signal.
4-line Central Office Trunk Card
(Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk):
Provides loop detection, sending/detecting
ground on Tip/Ring wire.
4-line Central Office Trunk Card
(Loop Start Trunk):
Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the
Caller ID (CLASS SM) signal.
2-line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card:
Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire
E&M trunk. Equipped with –48 V DC-DC onboard power supply. Both No. 0 and No. 1
circuits must be set to the same purpose
(2-wire or 4-wire) in one card.
4-circuit analog 2W/4W Tie line card. The PZPW122 (-48V Power Supply) is required in case
of E&M Type-I signaling.
4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card:
• Provides loop detection, sending reverse
signal and PB to DP signal conversion.
• Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power
supply.
2L ANALOG UNIVERSAL TRUNK
Used as 2-Line Long Line Circuit with PFT or
2-Line DID. Loop Resistance: MAX.2500ohms
(LLC) Two Reverse Circuits Included
On-Board Power (-48VDC) included
8-line PB Receiver Card:
Used for a PB station line, DID or tie line.
4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on
analog single line telephones:
PN-4LLCB is required. Max. 4/sys.
Page 5-11
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards (Cont.)
Function
Conference Trunk
Digital
Announcement
Trunk
Name
Port
PN-CFTB
10
PN-2DATA
4
2-circuit Digital Announcement Trunk
(Max. 60 sec. per channel)
PN-4DATC
8
4-circuit Digital Announcement Trunk
(Max. 120 sec. per channel)
Tone Trunk
PN-TNTA
Power Failure
Transfer
4
PZ-8PFTB
8
PN-AUCA
2
IP Trunk
SPN-IPTB-A
SPN-4VCTI-A
SPN-IPTB-B
SPN-4VCTI-B
Page 4- 12
4
4
4
4
Remarks
6-/10-Party Conference Trunk with Amp
6-party (1 CFTB card): 10 ports
10-party (2 CFTB cards): 20 ports
2-line Tone/Music Source Interface Card:
• Used for BGM or Music on Hold.
• Provides two jacks for an external tone/music
source.
8-line Power Failure Transfer Card:
• Mounted in PFT slot of PIM.
• One card per PIM.
2 Line Analog Universal Trunk card that
provides 2 Lines of Power Failure Transfer
IP Trunk card for VoIP (CCIS/ p-mp). This card
is used together with a max. of four PN-4VCT
cards (16 channels) for connection with
2000/2400 non peer-to-peer connection.
1 card/PIM, 8 cards (Max. 127ch)/system
4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk.
Voice compression protocols:
• G.723.1, G.729a, G.711,
• FAX (14.4 Kbps), DTMF signals.
• Used with PN-IPTB card.
VoIP H.323 IP Trunk card. Supports
up to 12 channels. (G.729a. PAYLOAD
40ms). Also requires CCIS and IPT
key per IPTB and NEC GK1000
software.
Has one RJ45 connectors for 10/100
Ethernet/Fast Ethernet to router.
4-channel voice translator CODEC
card for H.323 includes BUS cable.
Voice compression: G729A /G723
/G711.
Max 3 VCT’s per SPN-IPTB-B
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards (Cont.)
Function
Wireless Zone
Transceiver
interface
Name
SPN-2CSIA
Port
8
Remarks
2-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card:
• Used to interface with the ZT, based on
ISDN S-Interface.
• A maximum of two ZTs can be
connected per CSI card.
• Occupies eight time slots per one card.
The PZ-PW122 is required.
SPN-4CSIA
SPN-2CSIH
4
8
4-circuit CS interface for U-interface ZT.
Two slot card, 16 LT ports. The PZ-PW22 is
required.
2-line Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) Interface
Card:
• Used to interface with the CS (ZT),
based on U-Interface.
• A maximum of two CSs (ZTs) can be
connected per CSI card.
• Occupies eight time slots per one card.
PZ-PW122 is required.
Fiber Optical
PN-M10
0
In-Skin Router
PN-RTA
PZ-M649
PZ-M623
0
0
0
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Optical Fiber Interface Card:
Provides optical fiber interface for T1/E1 Digital
Trunk Interface (1.5 M/2 Mbps) or Remote PIM.
Line length: 10 km (6.2 miles) or less. Line
coding: CMI.
In-Skin Router Card
10/100BASE-TX:1, 10BASE-T:1, RS2332C(Dsub 9pin)
Maximum 8 cards per PIM
T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5Mbps) Card
Mounted on PN-RTA Card
Provides a built-in CSU.
Ether Control Card
Mounted on PN-RTA Card
10BASE-T:1
Page 5-13
Chapter 4 Equipment List
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards (Cont.)
Function
NEAXMail AD-8
Name
Port
PZ-VM00
4
PZ-VM01
4
NEAXMail IM-16
PZ-VM03
PZ-VM05
PZ-VM06
4
4
4
External Relay
Control
PN-DK00
Page 4- 14
0
Remarks
4-Port Voice Mail Card:
• One card per system.
• Number of ports: Four ports (Up to eight
ports when PZ-VM01 is mounted)
• Occupies three physical slots width per card.
• Mounted in LT00 slot of PIM.
Four-port Voice Mail Extension Card:
Mounted on PZ-VM00/VM00-M.
4 Port Voice Mail card (NEAXMail IM-16)
This card can provide 16 ports of digital line
circuit interface.
One card per PBX is available.
This card provides additional 4 ports for
transmitting/receiving the voice information, and
is used for expanding the port interface up to 12
ports for NEAXMail IM-16. It is mounted on the
VM03 card.
This card provides additional 4 ports for
transmitting/receiving the voice information, and
is used for expanding the port interface up to
8/16 ports for NEAXMail IM-16. Moreover, this
card is used for expanding the fax port interface
up to 4 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04
card.
External Relay Contact Control/Scanning
(8-circuit/card)
Works in either mode:
Control Scanning
8-circuit 0-circuit
4-circuit 4-circuit
0-circuit 8-circuit
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Terminal Line Up
A variety of terminal equipment may be connected to the NEAX2000 IPS systems.
Dterm Series i Terminals
Analog
ƒ
ƒ
DTR-1-1 (Single-Line Analog)
DTR-1HM-1 (Hospitality Single-Line Analog)
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ITR-4D-3 (4-Line display Digital)
ITR-8D-3 (8-Line display Digital)
ITR-16D-3 (16-Line display Digital)
ITR-16LD-3 (16-Line display Digital)
ITR-32D-3 (32-line display Digital)
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
DTR-2DT-1 (2-Line Digital)
DTR-4D-1 (4-Line display Digital)
DTR-8-1 (8-Line non-display Digital)
DTR-8D-1 (8-Line display Digital)
DTR-16D-1 (16-Line display Digital)
DTR-16LD-1 (16-Line Desi-less display Digital)
DTR-32D-1 (32-Line display Digital)
DCR-60-1 Console (Add-On Module/DSS/BLF)
Dterm Series i (IP) Multi-line Digital Terminals
Dterm Series i (TDM) Multi-line Digital Terminals
Dterm Series E Terminals
Multi-line (TDM) Digital Terminals
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
DTP-2DT-1 (2-Line Digital Terminal)
DTP-8-1 (8-Line Digital Terminal)
DTP-8D-1 (8-Line Digital Terminal with Display)
DTP-16D-1 (16-Line Digital Terminal with Display)
DTP-32D-1 (32-Line Digital Terminal with Display)
DTP-32DA-1 (32-Line Digital Terminal with Display for ACD)
DCU-60-1 CONSOLE (Add-On Module/DSS/BLF)
Dterm Cordless Terminals
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
DTR-4R-2 (Dterm Cordless II Terminal)
DTH-4R-1 (Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal)
DTR-1R-1 (Dterm Analog Cordless Terminal)
DTP-16HC-1 (Dterm Handset Cordless Terminal)
Inaset
ƒ
ƒ
ITR-LC-1 (3.75” x 4.75” color LCD and 16 programmable keys)
ITR-240G-1 (3” gray scale LCD and 16 programmable keys)
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-15
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
ƒ
ƒ
ITR-320C-1 (5.1” color LCD and 32 programmable keys)
ITR-320G-1 (5.1” gray scale LCD and 32 programmable keys)
Wireless Handset
ƒ
Dterm PSIII
Dterm IP Soft Phones
ƒ
ƒ
Dterm SP20
Dterm SP30
Dterm Extenders
ƒ
ƒ
Dterm Extender (ISDN)
Dterm Extender (Analog)
Analog Terminals
NEC offers two distinct analog terminals. Both are available in black or white.
Descriptions of the Analog Terminals
Description
DTR-1-1 (WH) TEL
DTR-1-1 (BK) TEL
DTR-1HM-1 (WH) TEL
DTR-1HM-1 (BK) TEL
Remarks
Fully modular with Redial key, Flash key, Message Waiting lamp, Data Jack
and Ring/Handset Receive Volume.
Fully modular with Redial key, 'Flash' key, Message Waiting Lamp, Data Jack,
eight programmable Feature/Speed Dial keys and Ring/Handset Receive
Volume.
Line Conditions of the Analog Terminals
Terminal Type
DTR-1-1
DTR-1HM-1
Card Type
PN-4LCD-A (max. 600 ohms loop resistance)
Cable Length* (Cable 0.5/24 AWG)
Approximately: 1.43km (.88 miles)
PN-8LCAA (max. 600 ohms loop resistance)
PN-AUCA (max. 2500 ohms loop resistance)
PN-4LLCB (max. 2500 ohms loop resistance)
Approximately: 1.43km (.88 miles)
Approximately 12.29km (7.63 miles)
Approximately 12.29km (7.63 miles)
*Cable length is based on the diameter of the cable and the terminal impedance.
Page 5- 16
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Specification for Analog Terminals
Item
Size
Color
Dial Pad
Type of Dial
Function Buttons
Message Waiting Lamp
Message Waiting Lamp Operating
Voltage
Speed Dials
Hookflash Timer
Redial Key
Ring Vol. Control
Ring Tone Pitch Control
Handset Receiver & Speaker Volume
Handset
Handset Cord
Directory Card
Data Jack
Data Jack Position
Wall-Mount Unit
Electrostatic Discharge
Approvals
Description
224mm x 165mm +/5mm(Length x Width)
Black or White
12-Key Dial Pad: 4 Rows and 3 Columns; Metropolitan Dial Pad
with Alphabet, * and # buttons; Button 5 has a Raised Dot
DTMF and Dial Pulse
Hook flash, Redial Key, (DTR-1HM Only)
Speaker Monitor and Hold Key
Neon Lamp with Window Design -Glow Through Filter Raised
from Surface with MW and Incoming Ring Indication
Activation Voltage 88V to 108V, Deactivation
Voltage 53V or Less
(DTR-1HM Only) 8 Buttons (2 Columns), Maximum 21 Digits
630+/10ms (Fixed)
Maximum of 31 digits
4 Levels (Off Low Middle High) Programmable
3 Levels Programmable
6 Levels (Volume Key)
Hearing Aid Compatible, Dynamic Type Element
12 feet
Large Convenient Directory Card
Dedicated Jack; Used for Connection to Modem
Back of Telephone
Built-in
Can Withstand +/- 20kv Discharge
c-UL (Ul 60950 3rd Edition) FCC part 15, 68 IC
Dterm Series i (IP) Terminals
Dterm IP terminals offer features and benefits that brilliantly capture the essence of form and
functions, helping your business take service and performance to newer, more profitable
heights. The Dterm IP terminals consist of two distinct models, an 8 or 16 feature key terminal,
in order to meet diverse telephone terminal needs.
Descriptions of the Dterm IP Terminals
Description
ITR-4D-3 (BK)
Remarks
4 Programmable Line/Feature keys with Display
ITR-8D-3 (BK/WH)
8 Programmable Line/Feature keys with Display
ITR-16D-3(BK/WH)
16 Programmable Line/Feature keys with Display
ITR-16LD-3(BK)
Physical Features
•
•
•
Tilt-able LCD Unit
Adjustable Legs
Built-in Wall Mount
Unit
16 Programmable Line/Feature keys with both 3 line
LCD Display and LCD display for each line key
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-17
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Call Handling Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Four Local Soft Key Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX)
Large Message Waiting LED
24 Character, 3-Line LCD
Built-in Headset Jack Connector
Speed Dial/DSS Buttons
Programmable Line Keys with 2-Color LED
Eight Dedicated Function Keys (Feature, Recall, Conf, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer & Speaker)
Built-in Half Duplex Hands-free Unit
Convergence Features
•
Two 10/100 full duplex Ethernet ports- One which connects the Dterm IP to the local Ethernet
Network, the other provides connectivity for a local workstation.
•
Three types of powering options:
- Local AC adapter
- CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) power for those infrastructures with an installed base of Cisco
gear
- Spare pair power across the Ethernet network.
•
Transportable QoS, which follows the user no matter where they log in.
•
Multiple Voice Coding support, which automatically negotiates to a common setting.
- G.711 providing an international standard for encoding/decoding telephony signals on a 64
Kbps Non-compressed channel.
- It also supports the compression algorithms G.729A (8Kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3/6.3 Kbps).
Line Conditions
ITR-8D-3
Max. 328 ft. between Ether/IP-PAD and Router/ Switching Hub
ITR-16D-3
ITR-16LD-3
Max. 328 ft. between Ether/IP-PAD and Router/ Switching Hub
Page 5- 18
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Series i (TDM) Multi-line Digital Terminals
The Dterm Series i, digital terminals have a user-friendly ergonomic design and is available in
six distinct digital models.
Descriptions of Terminals
Description
DTR-2DT-1 (BK) TEL
DTR-2DT-1 (WH) TEL
Remarks
2 LINE TERMINAL - available in black (BK) or white (WH).
(does not support optional adapters)
Fully modular with 2 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eight Function Keys, built-in
Speakerphone and electronic volume and tone controls.
DTR-4D-1 (BK) TEL
4 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL - available in black (BK).
Fully modular with 4 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eight Function Keys, built-in
Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, 24-character by 3-line display, four
softkeys, Large LED, Microphone button, Message button, Directory button,
Electronic Volume and Tone Controls, and tilt stand.
8 LINE TERMINAL – available in black (BK) or white (WH).
Fully modular with 8 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eight Function Keys, built-in
Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, four softkeys, Large LED,
Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand.
8 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL - available in black (BK) or white (WH).
Fully modular with 8 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eight Function Keys, built-in
Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, 24-character by 3-line display, four
softkeys, Large LED, Microphone button, Message button, Directory button,
Electronic Volume and Tone Controls, and tilt stand.
DTR-8-1 (BK) TEL
DTR-8-1 (WH)TEL
DTR-8D-1 (BK) TEL
DTR-8D-1 (WH) TEL
DTR-16D-1 (BK) TEL
DTR-16D-1 (WH) TEL
16 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL - available in black (BK) or white (WH).
Fully modular with 16 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eight Function Keys, builtin Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, 24-character by 3-line display,
four softkeys, Large LED, Microphone button, Message button, Directory button,
Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand.
DTR-16LD-1 (BK) TEL
DTR-16LD-1 (WH) TEL
16 LCD DESI-LESS TERMINAL – 16 Flexible LCD appearances for Speed
Dial/DSS, feature or line appearance, 11 Function Keys, Built-in Speakerphone
(Half Duplex), Headset Jack, Wall Mount Unit, 4 Soft-keys, In-Line Power and 12
ft. Handset Cord
32 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL - available in black (BK) or white (WH).
Fully modular with 32 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eight Function Keys, builtin Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, 24-character by 3-line display,
four softkeys, Large LED, Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand.
DTR-32D-1 (BK) TEL
DTR-32D-1 (WH) TEL
DCR-60-1 (BK)
CONSOLE
DCR-60-1 (WH)
CONSOLE
ATTENDANT ADD-ON CONSOLE - Requires an AC-R ADP (included).
Fully modular with 48 programmable, 2-color LED keys (for station trunk
appearances), 12 Function keys with red LED, and tilt stand. Terminal available
in: black (BK) or white (WH).
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-19
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Standard features
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Tilt-able LCD Unit and Adjustable Legs
Built-in Wall Mount Unit
Four Local Soft Key Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX, only provided on
terminals with display)
Built-in Half Duplex Hands-free Unit
Large Message Waiting LED
24 Character, 3-Line LCD on display equipped models
Built-in Headset Jack Connector
Speed Dial/DSS Buttons
Programmable Line Keys with 2-Color LED
Eight Dedicated Function Keys (Feature, Recall, Conf, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer
and Speaker)
Ringing Sound Variation
LCD indication of volume control
FCC Part.15 Class B Approved
Replaceable Function/Dial Key pad:
Used for foreign languages, ACD instruments, etc.
Un-tangler compatible handset
The Directory card can swivel 360o
Specification
Item
Curl Cord Length
Weight (no handset)
LCD Display
Ringing Sound Level
Built in Hands Free
Items Provided with Instrument
Handset Cradle
LCD angle
Housing Face Angle
Recommended Headset
Other
Page 5- 20
Description
12ft
510g (min.)
24 digit x 3 line (alphanumeric and some characters)
no back light
max. 80dBSPL (in output limit condition) max.
86dBSPL (in normal condition)
Half duplex
Line cord, Directory card
K type compatible
14~42.5 deg. (on the desk, no housing tilt) 25~53.5
deg. (on the desk, housing tilt up)
-4.4 deg. (wall mounting)
14~25 deg. (on the desk)
-4.4 deg. (wall mounting)
NEC Headsets
HAC
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Terminal Options
Item
WM-R Unit
Description
Series i Multi-line Terminals with an AP(R)-R, AP(A)-R, CT(A)-R, and/or an IP-R
Unit can be wall mounted using the WM-R Unit.
AD(A)-R Unit
Provides Series i Multi-line Terminals ability to interface with recording device.
AP( R)-R Unit
Provides Series i Multi-line Terminals ability to interface with analog device such
as a cordless telephone, facsimile machine, external speakerphone, Automatic
Dialer or modem. Provides ringing to analog device connected. Requires an ACR ADP.
AP(A)-R Unit
Provides Series i Multi-line Terminals ability to interface with analog device such
as a cordless telephone, facsimile machine, external speakerphone, Automatic
Dialer or modem. No ringing is provided.
CT(A)-R Unit
Connects a Series i Multi-line Terminal to a PC providing a complete turnkey
package with graphical telephone user interface and call logging. Shipped with
Multi-line Phone Kits software. Supports Serial interface.
IP-R Unit
A compact plug-and-play device that installs into the base of a Dterm Series i
display terminal. Integrated two-port 10/100baseT Ethernet pass through hub
that permits using one port to connect the network interface card (NIC) from the
PC to the IP network. The other is plugged directly into a LAN or an IP network
device such as a router, DSL modem or cable modem. Requires an AC-R ADP.
AC-R Unit
AC adapter for DSS/BLF Console, AP(A), AP(R), or IP-R Unit
Line Conditions
Cable Length Note 1
Dterm Series i
Dterm 8 / 8D
Dterm 16/16D
Dterm 32/32D
DSS/BLF
Console
Note 3
Note 1:
Standard
8DLC
300m (984ft)
with AC Adapter
Note 2
4DLC
300m (984ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
850m (2789ft)
1200m (3937ft)
8DLC
200m (656ft)
Note 2
4DLC
200m (656ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
850m (2789ft)
1200m (3937ft)
8DLC
-
300m (984ft)
4DLC
-
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
-
1200m (3937ft)
Note 2:
Cable length is based on the following conditions.
•
Diameter of the cable is 0.5 mm.
•
The Protection arrester is not inserted between the terminal and PBX.
When using 8DLC card, it is not available for long line function, even if it is equipped with AC Adapter.
Note 3:
The DSS/BLF Console requires local AC/DC supply.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-21
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Series E (Multi-line Digital Terminals)
The Dterm Series E terminals were strategically designed to provide ergonomic form and userfriendly functions. With advanced digital circuitry, the Dterm Series E terminals consist of five
distinct telephone models and one DSS/BLF console to meet users’ diverse terminal needs.
The Dterm Series E family of terminals offers adjustable display and non-display units with
menu-driven soft key operation, allowing users to program terminals at the desktop. The
display units are equipped with large LCD panels with three lines of display, each with 24
characters. Each terminal offers an optional full duplex speaker phone operation for two-way
conversation. Standard features include headset jacks, wall mount units and adjustable base
units. Laser printer designation cards are available in Metallic Green (MG), Black (BK) and Soft
White (WH).
Standard features
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
HOLD - Press key to place an internal or external call on hold.
TRANSFER - Allows the station user to transfer established calls to another station
without attendant assistance.
ANSWER - When LED on this key is lighted, press key to answer a waiting call.
SPEAKER - Controls the built-in speaker that can be used for Hands Free
Dialing/Monitoring and Voice Call.
REDIAL - Press key to activate redial feature. Press redials and scrolls back through
numbers that have been dialed. When desired number is displayed, press the * key
to activate dialing.
CONF - Press key to establish a three-way conversation.
RECALL - Press key to terminate established call and re-seize internal dial tone.
FEATURE - Used to activate terminal setup functions and to program One-Touch
Speed Dial/Feature Keys.
Dterm Series E Softkeys
The Dterm Series E Display Terminals have four Softkeys located just under the Display of each
Terminal. These menu-driven Softkeys allow users convenient access to many features. Each Softkey
may have up to 4 features programmed on it. Softkeys will be functional for specific states of the
terminal such as idle, during dialing, ringing, etc. The state of the terminal will determine what Softkey is
available to the user. According to the status of the Multiline Terminal, functions of the Softkeys are
displayed in the third line on the LCD and if the status of the Multiline Terminal changes, the Soft Key
displayed will change automatically. Also if the HELP key is pressed, an explanation of the indicated
Softkey is shown on the LCD. Typical Softkey Applications are Business, Hotel, Multi-tenant and
Networking applications where it is necessary to save key space on the telephone and also provide a
variety of quickly accessible features.
Page 5- 22
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Descriptions of Series E Multi-line Digital Terminals
Description
DTP-2DT – 1 (WH)
Remarks
This 2-line non-display digital terminal is equipped with 2 programmable
line/feature keys (each with a two-color LED), 8 dedicated function keys, a builtin speakerphone, and large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages.
The terminal comes in Ivory White (WH) only.
DTP-8 – 1 (WH)
DTP-8 – 1 (BK)
This 8-line non-display digital terminal is fully modular with 8 dedicated function
keys, 8 programmable line/feature keys (each with a two-color LED), built-in
speakerphone, built-in headset jack, built-in long loop adapter, built-in wall mount
unit, tone/volume/contrast control, tilt stand, and a large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages.
The terminal comes in two colors: Black (BK) and Ivory White (WH).
DTP-8D – 1(WH)
DTP-8D – 1(BK)
This 8-line display digital terminal is equipped with 8 dedicated function keys, 8
Programmable line/feature keys (each with a two-color LED), built-in
speakerphone, built-in headset jack, built-in long loop adapter, built-in wall mount
unit, tone/volume/contrast control, tilt stand, 3 line by 24 character LCD display
panel (adjustable/detachable), four softkeys, and a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages.
This terminal comes in two colors: Black (BK) and Ivory White (WH).
DTP-16D – 1 (WH)
DTP-16D – 1 (BK)
This 16-line display digital terminal is equipped with 8 dedicated function keys,
16 Programmable line/feature keys (each with a two-color LED), built-in
speakerphone, built-in headset jack, built-in long loop adapter, built-in wall mount
unit, tone/volume/contrast control, tilt stand, 3 line by 24 character LCD display
panel (adjustable/detachable), four softkeys, and a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages.
This terminal comes in two colors: Black (BK) and Ivory White (WH).
DTP-32D – 1 (WH)
DTP-32D – 1 (BK)
This 32-line digital terminal is equipped with 8 dedicated function keys, 32
Programmable line/feature keys (each with a two-color LED), built-in
speakerphone, built-in headset jack, built-in long loop adapter, built-in wall mount
unit, tone/volume/contrast control, tilt stand, 3 line by 24 character LCD display
panel (adjustable/detachable), four softkeys, and a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages.
This terminal comes in two colors: Black (BK) and Ivory White (WH).
DTP-32DA-1 (WH)
DTP-32DA-1 (BK)
See above for basic description of phone. This phone is to be used as an ACD
terminal. The Silk Screening of the function keys is changed for the dedicated
ACD functions.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-23
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Descriptions of Series E Multi-line Digital Terminals (Cont.)
Description
DCU-60 –1 (WH)
DCU-60 –1 (BK)
Remarks
This DSS/BLF/Add-On Console is equipped with 60 programmable line keys
(each with a two-color LED). These keys can be programmed as Direct Station
keys, function keys, or outside line keys. This terminal comes in two colors:
Black (BK) and Ivory White (WH).
When the console is used as an Add-On Module, an additional 25 lines/trunks
and the existing line/trunks for the Multiline Terminal can be accessed directly
(maximum 41 lines/trunks).
The station speed dialing function can be assigned for all keys on the Add-On
Module unit. Also, one of the last three keys can be used as a Day/Night change
keys.
When the console is used as a DSS/BLF console, up to 60 stations can be
directly accessed in addition to those already appearing on the Multiline
Terminal. A red LED associated with each button indicates busy status for each
station. In addition, the DSS/BLF console can provide the following functions:
Message Waiting – Set/Cancel/Status Display
Do Not Disturb – Set/Cancel/Status Display
Automatic Wake Up No Answer – Status Display/Cancel
Agent Busy Out – UCD – Status Display
Line Lockout – Status Display
Room Cutoff – Set/Cancel/Status
Page 5- 24
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Series E Accessories & Adapters
Unit
ADA-U
Description
Ancillary Device Adapter (ADA-U)
The Ancillary Device Adapter (ADA-U) allows for a direct connection to a tape
recorder for logging/recording telephone calls. A dedicated set of input
connectors is also provided for a recording tone unit to inform the parties that
the call is being recorded. The ADA-U does not require an AC adapter.
HFU-U
External Handsfree Unit (HFU-U)
The External Handsfree Unit (HFU-U) provides a solution for small office
teleconferencing by improving the sound quality of speakerphone calls via an
external microphone. This unit is ideal for a working environment where
handsfree calling is a necessity. In order to provide maximum performance,
two user-adjustable switches are provided which allow the speakerphone to be
configured for a unique environment (quiet room, noisy business environment,
and room with acoustic echo). Furthermore, a push-to-mute button is featured
on the external microphone to add privacy for handsfree calling.
APR-U
Analog Port Adapter with Ringing (APR-U)
The Analog Port Adapter with Ringing (APR-U) provides an interface for
installing single line telephones (SLTs), modems*, and the NEC
VoicePoint/VoicePoint + conferencing unit. By installing the APR-U, calls may
be initiated via a PC modem and switched to voice operation if desired. Data
calls at a maximum speed of 28.8 kbps are also supported with the APR-U.
The APR-U has the added benefit of detecting incoming ringing signals. By
providing ring detection, the user may wish to install a personal fax machine or
an answering machine for convenience. Finally, two user-adjustable switches
are provided on the adapter: one allows for either a 600
or complex
impedance interface to a (modem, SLT, etc.), also a second voice channel to
permit calls from the Multiline Terminal and devices installed to the APR-U
simultaneously*. The APR-U requires an AC adapter.
Note 1*: When a modem is installed to the Multiline Terminal with the APR-U,
the modem and the Multiline Terminal (handset, speakerphone, headset)
cannot be used simultaneously.
Note 2*: Dual voice channel capability is available and special programming
may be required from the NEC PBX/KTS systems to support two simultaneous
voice channels.
CTA-U
Computer TAPI ADAPTER Unit (CTA-U)
The Computer TAPI Adapter Unit (CTA-U) permits connecting a Dterm Series E
multilane terminal to a PC. Each CTA-U unit is shipped with multiline Phone
Kits software, a complete turnkey package offering a graphical telephone user
interface and call logging.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-25
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Series E Accessories & Adapters (Cont.)
ACA-U
AC Adapter Unit (ACA-U)
The AC adapter provides the Dterm Series E terminal with the voltage required
to power the built-in long loop adapter, and APR units. One AC adapter can
power up to three optional adapters.
WMU-U
External Wall Mount Unit (WMU-U)
The External Wall mount Unit is ONLY required if an option adapter is required
on the multiline terminal which is being mounted on a wall. It permits the
terminal to be installed to a flat wall surface. With this unit, any option adapter
may be installed to the terminal for high functionality. The built-in wall mount
unit should be used for wall mount operation when no option adapter (except
ADA-U unit) is installed on the multiline terminal.
Note: This unit is designed to enhance the handsfree operation of Multiline
Terminal by providing an echo canceling circuit. However, this unit is primarily
designed for a typical small office environment and not for conference rooms.
Its performance should not be compared to commercial, expensive audio
conference units. The HFU-U requires an AC adapter.
WMU-W
Wall Mount Unit for DTP-2DT-1 terminal
PC Telephony
Adapter
PC Telephony Adapter
The PC Telephony Adapter provides an integration link from a desktop PC to
the Dterm Series E telephone. Using Microsoft® Windows™ Telephony API,
Windows applications users can now control or use many of the features,
desktop message notification, calling line identification, and calling functions of
the Dterm Series E telephone from their PC.
IP Adapter for Dterm Series E. For use with 32 Button Display Terminal and
PN-32IPLA ELC station card only. Requires either ACA-U local power or
SN1604 Power Hub 12-Port
IPW-2U (ELC)
IPW-2U (P-P)
Page 5- 26
The IPW-2U (P-P) adapter is a full duplex switch, which can be installed on
any of the NEC LCD Dterm Series E phones when using Peer-to-Peer IP
stations. Requires either ACA-U local power or SN1604 Power Hub 12-Port
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Series E Specifications
Feature/Function
Housing color
Two colors LED
Line/Feature keys
One touch keys
Fixed feature keys
Number of characters
per line on display
Number of lines on
display
Volume Control
Speakerphone
Headset
Ring Volume
LCD Contrast
Softkeys
Off hook ring on/off key
Mute on/off key
Microphone on/off key
Headset on/off key
Built-in speakerphone
Built-in headset jack
Built-in wall mount unit
AC adapter required
Data Adapter
Message Waiting Lamp
Add-on console
supported
ADA supported
APR supported
CTA supported
PC Telephony Adapter
supported
HFU supported
HFU operation: Half
Duplex
Full Duplex
Adjustable legs
Long loop supported
Hearing Aid compatible
Cable pairs
Dterm Series E Digital Terminals (DTP-)
2DT
8
8D
16D
32D
White
White or Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
8
8
16
16
None
None
None
None
16
8
8
8
8
8
DCU-60
Add-On
DSS
No
48 ext.
12
None
No
60
None
None
N/A
N/A
24
24
24
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3
3
3
N/A
N/A
Yes
No
Yes
N/A
N/A
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Optional
Optional
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Optional
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Optional
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Optional
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Optional
No
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
N/A
1 port
Yes
N/A
N/A
2 ports
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-27
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Series E Line Conditions
Terminal
4DLC
8DLC
2DLCB/N
Page 5- 28
Loop Resistance and Distance (Long Loop circuit built-in)
Cable Length
(24 AWG Cable)
Maximum
Loop Resistance ( ) (Without
ACA Unit)
DTP-8-1 TEL
35
1000 ft. (304 m)
DTP-8D-1 TEL
35
1000 ft. (304 m)
DTP-16D-1 TEL
26
650 ft. (198 m)
DTP-32D-1 TEL
21
650 ft. (198 m)
DCU-60-1 Console
N/A
N/A
DTP-8-1 TEL
35
1000 ft. (304 m)
DTP-8D-1 TEL
35
1000 ft. (304 m)
DTP-16D-1 TEL
26
650 ft. (198 m)
DTP-32D-1 TEL
21
650 ft. (198 m)
DCU-60-1 Console
N/A
N/A
DTP-8-1 TEL
35
2800 ft. (853 m)
DTP-8D-1 TEL
35
2800 ft. (853 m)
DTP-16D-1 TEL
26
2800 ft. (853 m)
DTP-32D-1 TEL
21
2800 ft. (853 m)
DCU-60-1 Console
N/A
N/A
Cable Length
(24 AWG Cable)
(With ACA Unit)
4000 ft. (1219 m)
4000 ft. (1219 m)
4000 ft. (1219 m)
4000 ft. (1219 m)
1000 ft. (304 m)
1000 ft. (304 m)
1000 ft. (304 m)
1000 ft. (304 m)
1000 ft. (304 m)
1000 ft. (304 m)
4000 ft. (1219 m)
4000 ft. (1219 m)
4000 ft. (1219 m)
4000 ft. (1219 m)
2800 ft. (853 m)
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Cordless Terminals
Dterm Cordless II (DTR-4R-2 BK)
The Dterm Cordless II is fully digital and operates in the 900MHz frequency range. It includes
Base Unit, Handset (with a standard battery, 6 hours of Talk Time or 4 days of Standby),
Charging Stand, Belt Clip, Wall Plate Adapter and 2 AC Adapters.
Specifications:
ƒ Digital
ƒ Up to 350 feet
ƒ 900 MHz digital spread spectrum
ƒ 4 programmable line keys
ƒ 10 Simultaneous channel access
ƒ Headset connection
ƒ Volume slide switch/6 ring tones
ƒ Weight: 8.8 ounces w/battery
Options:
Unit
EXP 9530
EXP9785
EXP9702
AD970
EXP9704
Leather Carry Case
Wall Mount
BT2499
Description
Headset
Lightweight headset with foam covered ear and microphone
Mounts over the head
REPLACEMENT CHARGER UNIT w/o AC Adapter
The charging cradle is used to charge the batteries used with the Dterm
Cordless II Terminal
REPLACEMENT SPRING-TYPE BELT CLIP
Use to clip the handset to clothes or belt
REPLACEMENT AC ADAPTER FOR CHARGING UNIT
Provides 9Vdc to the Dterm Cordless II Charging Unit
Requires 120V, 60Hz (14W) AC input from standard AC plug
REPLACEMENT AC ADAPTER FOR BASE UNIT
Provides 10Vdc to the Dterm Cordless II Terminal Unit
Requires 120V, 60Hz (14W) AC input from standard AC plug
LEATHER CARRY CASE
Leather case for DTR-4R-1 (BK) Handset
Replacement Wall Mount Adapter
Used to mount the Dterm Cordless II to a standard wall plate
REPLACEMENT BATTERY
Dterm Cordless II - 6 hours of Talk Time or 4 days of Standby Capacity
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-29
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Cordless Lite II (DTH-4R-1 BK)
The Dterm Cordless Lite II is fully digital and operates in the 900Mhz narrow band frequency range. It
includes Base Unit, Handset, one telephone cord, 2 AC Adapters, 2 Rechargeable Batteries, Spring
Belt Clip, Battery Charger, and Wall Mounting Plate.
Specifications
Frequency
Security
Voice Channel
Interface Port
Multi Line Capability (Hand Set)
LCD Screen
System Caller ID
Remote Base Unit
2nd Battery Charging system
Auto Talk
Auto Standby
Talk Time
Standby Time
Silent Alert System
Handset Size
Ring On-Off Key
Battery Type
Selectable Ring Tones
Message Waiting Indicator
Belt Clip
Headset Jack
Transfer
Conference
Hold
Mute
Backlit Keypad
Hot Swap Battery
900Mhz FM with ADPCM
Digital
30 Channel
Digital/Analog
4 Line Capability
2x16 Digit (10 Digit)
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
6 Hours
96 Hours
YES
5½
YES
NiMH Battery (3.6V-700mAh)
3 Tone
YES
YES
Yes-2.5mmö
YES
YES
YES
YES
4 LINE KEY
YES
Options
Unit
EXP9660
AD9500
AD960
BT9000B
EXP9603
EXP9683
EXP9685
EXP9530
EARSET
Page 5- 30
Description
Replacement Wall Mount Unit Use to wall mounts the Dterm Cordless Lite Terminal.
Replacement AC Adapter for Charging Base Unit.
Replacement AC Adapter for Charging Unit. Provides 9Vdc to the Dterm Cordless Lite
Charging Unit. Requires 120V, 60Hz (14W) AC input from standard AC plug.
Replacement Battery 5 hours of Talk Time or 40 hours of Standby Capacity,
500mAH 4.0V
Replacement Spring-Type Belt Clip. Use to clip the handset to cloths or belt.
Leather Carry Case.
Replacement Charging Cradle and AC Adapter.
Dterm Headset. Lightweight headset with foam covered earpiece and microphone.
Dterm EARSET. Lightweight ear set with microphone.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Analog Cordless (DTR-1R-1 BK)
Package includes Base Unit, Handset (with a standard battery 6 hours of Talk Time or 4 days of
Standby), Belt Clip, wall mount plate and AC Adapter. Fully digital and operates in the 2.4 GHz Digital
Spread Spectrum frequency range.
Specifications
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Analog
Up to 300 feet
2.4 GHz digital spread spectrum
9 Simultaneous channel access
Headset connection
10 Built-in speed dials
Weight: 8.8 ounces w/battery
Options
Unit
Headset
GBCT348526Z
BADY0422001
BBTY0300001
GCBZ229537C
Description
HS900 Headset
Lightweight headset with foam covered ear and microphone
2.5 mm connector on headset jack
REPLACEMENT SPRING-TYPE BELT CLIP
Use to clip the handset to clothes or belt
REPLACEMENT AC ADAPTER
Provides 9Vdc to the Dterm Analog Cordless Terminal Unit
Requires 120V, 60Hz (14W) AC input from standard AC plug
REPLACEMENT BATTERY
Dterm Analog Cordless - 6 hours of Talk Time or 4 days of Standby Capacity
Replacement Wall Mount Adapter
Used to mount the Dterm Analog Cordless to a standard wall plate
Dterm Handset Cordless Terminal (DTP-16HC-1)
Enjoy the mobility and convenience of a cordless telephone with the style, features and power of a Dterm
Series E terminal. Fully modular 900 MHz Analog FM spectrum with Voice scramble, 40 separate
voice channels, 16 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eight Function Keys, built-in Speakerphone, 24character by 3-line display, four softkeys, Large LED, Electronic Volume/Tone Controls, built-in base
stand, headset jack on handset only, fully functional handset dial pad, Auto Talk capability, five handset
function keys, individual handset volume, channel and ringer controls, and an additional handset LED.
This terminal does not support optional adapters.
Each NEC Dterm Handset Cordless Telephone (DTP-16HC-1) includes a base unit, cordless handset,
belt clip and a standard rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery that supports 4 hours of talk time or 40
hours of standby and a user guide. The optional headset may be easily connected to the 2.5mm
headset connector on the handset.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-31
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Specifications
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Base Unit
Cordless Handset
Belt Clip
16 programmable line/feature keys with two-color LED indication
8 dedicated Function Keys
Built-in speakerphone
ADA compatibility
Large Message waiting LED
900 Mhz analog spectrum
40 channels
Standard nickel-cadmium battery (40 hours of standby talk time
Terminal Options
Unit
Headset
RF Line Cord
Belt Clip
Battery
Laser Labels
ACA-U
Page 5- 32
Description
HS9000 Headset
Lightweight headset with foam covered ear and microphone
5mm connector of headset jack
Dterm Handset Cordless RF-Coil line cord
Replacement Belt Clip
Use to clip the handset to clothes or belt
Replacement Battery
4 hours of Talk Time or 40 hours of Standby
Black or Metallic Green Laser Labels
AC Adapter
Required on Dterm HC when distance is greater than 197 feet with less than 10
ohms loop resistance.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
INASET
INASET terminals are members of the Dterm IP family. INASET terminals have a Web browser with a
large color display and a built-in multi-port Ethernet switch for connectivity to the user’s local PC.
INASET terminals bring a wealth of information to the desktop, including short text display messages
and Web pages specifically tailored for the small screen format
The INASET’s basic load includes a graphical telephony application that provides an abundance of
telephony information and desktop control that is easy to use with its menu-based interface. Information
and controls accessible via the softkeys and feature buttons include:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Line status showing a visual icon display for the status of all assigned phone lines and DSS
lines.
Caller information showing a visual text display for things such as time, date and call status
information.
Telephony Directory for storing, searching and dialing different profiles which you can
categorize and store in one of three different groups: corporate, personal and group.
Web access providing browsing capabilities to display HTML web-based information located on
the Internet or Intranet. Also includes support for Java applets.
Virtual keys providing access to features, functions and recent keys activated on the terminal.
The user can program display and functions for how they see fit with limited or no administrative
support necessary.
By converging a company’s voice and data networks, there is only one network to manage. The
INASET includes a built-in switch, so you can use a single Ethernet switch port for the computer (data)
and the INASET. Because it’s an IP based telephone, it can be installed anywhere on a corporate IP
network. The INASET is Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) compatible and doesn’t require
the need to be co-located with the NEAX PBX equipment. INASET supports G.711, G.729a and
G.723.1 audio compression for low-bandwidth requirements.
INASET Applications
The INASET is specifically suited for the enterprise environment, including the following end users:
managers, purchasing agents, consultants and call agents. But this is just the beginning. This
advanced IP business terminal can be programmed to do much more than a standard business phone.
For example, the customizable user interface (that’s developed with the SDK) can replace single line
phones that are typically installed in cafeterias, break rooms, lobbies and manufacturing floors. The
INASET’s programmability is also ideal for traders, stockbrokers, real estate brokers, executives, PR
professionals and any other occupation in which professionals use Internet-related information to
interact with the public.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-33
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Additional Applications
ƒ
Personalization at the desktop: Individual customization can bring flexibility to the desktop.
Software developers can enhance traditional features such as Answer, Redial, Conference,
Recall and Help menus.
ƒ
Centralized services: Information or features that need to be accessed by numerous
individuals within the organization can be centralized on servers. Directory service functions,
Intranet web site information, customer records, CTI applications and other work group
applications are examples of centralized services that could improve portability and use
throughout the enterprise network.
INASET Terminal Line UP.
The INASET terminals are available in three models. Each is described below.
Description
ITR-LC-1 (BK)
Remarks
This INASET terminal has a full-color, 3.75” x 4.75” LCD and 16 programmable
keys. Does not support Power over Ethernet (POE).
Available in black only.
ITR-240G-1 (BK)
The INASET 240G has a 3” LCD with a gray scale 240 x 160 pixel display and
16 programmable keys.
Supports Power over Ethernet (POE) (802.3af and Cisco Discovery Protocol).
Available in black only.
ITR-320C-1 (BK)
The INASET 320C has a 5.1” color display and 32 programmable keys.
Supports Power over Ethernet (POE) (802.3af and Cisco Discovery Protocol).
Available in black only.
ITR-320G-1 (BK
The INASET 320G has a 5.1” LCD with gray scale display and 32 programmable
keys. Supports Power over Ethernet (POE) (802.3af and Cisco Discovery
Protocol). Available in black only
INASET Accessories
Description
WM-RL UNIT
INASET Headset Cord 12’
INASET Headset Cord 25’
AC-R
ILPA-R
ADA-2R
MIC-R (BK/WH) UNIT
PSA-R
Page 5- 34
Remarks
Wall mount for the ITR-LC-1
12 Foot Black Handset Cord
25 Foot Black Handset Cord
AC adapter for the INASET
802.3af power Dongle for INASET Original
Audio recording adapter for IP terminals
External Microphone for INASET 240, 320s
Analog survivable adapter
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
INASET Basic Network Capability
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Dual port 10/100 Mbps Ethernet switch
Internal voice packet prioritization
VLAN support (802.1q & 802.1p frame tagging)
Configurable ToS bits (DiffServ and IP Precedence support)
Powering
o Inline power (unused pairs) or
o Direct powering with external wall-plug adapter
PBX System Requirements
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
NEAX 2000 IPS R6.1or higher
IPPAD Card
8 Seat Licenses: Supports up to 8 INASET terminals
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-35
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm PS III Wireless Handset
The Dterm PSIII is a wireless handset designed to support the professional’s schedule and the special
needs of people on the run. At less than 3.8oz and with 300 hours of standby time, the Personal
Station continues to offer the size, weight and battery life demanded by the user constantly on the go.
The phone uses digital technology with audio quality approaching that of a digital desk phone. The new
DtermPSIII wireless handset moves freely throughout the building with seamless handover when moving
from one zone transceiver to another. Note
•
•
•
•
Separate Call Hold & Transfer keys
2-Line Operation
Enhanced Short Text Message (STM)
Reminder tones for unread STM
•
•
•
•
Dterm PS III Features
Name Display
Directory Dial
Speed Dial
4 Line 18 digit LCD Display
•
•
•
Last Number Redial
Automatic Answer
Vibration Alert
Dterm PS III OPTIONS
ƒ
Standard Charger for the Dterm PSIII handset. Single AC adapter is included.
There are three cases available for Dterm PSIII:
ƒ
Two types of Leather Case provide a Glove like fit for ease of handling and are designed for indoor
use. One includes a swivel belt clip with quick release and the other has a built in belt clip.
ƒ
The Weather Case model offers a weather resistant material for users whose job is outdoors a
majority of time.
There are two available headset options:
ƒ
ƒ
The Headband type is a classic banded headset with a microphone extension.
The Single Ear Cover type is an ear bud type with an in-line microphone.
Note: For seamless handover ZT must be ver7.2 or higher
Page 5- 36
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm SP20 SoftPhone
The Dterm SP20 is a full-featured Internet telephone that places calls over a VoIP network using a Dterm
series graphical user interface (GUI) displayed on the laptop. It is an ideal solution for employees who
work at home, employees who travel frequently, or remote ACD agents who require the interaction of
data.
The Dterm SP20 offers four types of graphic displays, a look-alike Dterm Series E terminal in black or
white, or a customizable GUI. No matter which interface you use, features and functions that existed on
the Dterm hardware set are transported to the Dterm SP20 upon activation.
Key Features and Benefits
The Dterm SP20 offers a full complement of station features and impressive voice quality over IP for this
important segment of mobility and PC-based applications. Most of the features and functions, which
exist on the IP Dterm and/or IP enabled Dterm can be instantly transported to the SoftPhone. Basic
features offered by the Dterm SP20 include:
ƒ
Configurable for Peer-to-Peer or Protims IP for IPELC Voice Communications
No need to load new software in order to operate a different protocol. The Dterm SP20 supports
both Protims IP and peer-to-peer. Administrators are able to invoke the protocol via the Dterm
SP20 control.
ƒ
Powerful User Interface (Dterm SP20 and Java GUIs) with a NEC Hardware Terminal
Appearance.
The Dterm SP20 provides a user configurable GUI (Graphical User Interface), enabling the user
to access telephone features. Most of the procedures are easy to perform by selecting the
buttons on the screen with the mouse. The display may be freely customized in order to create
an environment best suited for specific requirements.
ƒ
Displays call records in Quick Reference List via the Call Log Window
All calls are recorded one by one in the call log. You can find at a glance when and with whom
you talked. The Dterm SP20 also offers a call memo function whereby you can record the key
points of the call so that you can visually identify the individual records.
ƒ
Recording Function
Use the personal computer in place of a tape recorder to record the contents of a call. Record
the contents of a call in a sound file and reproduce the saved contents of a call anytime from the
call log window. Since the file is stored as a .wav file, you can e-mail and forward it to other
personnel for their listening pleasure.
ƒ
Macro Function for Launching or closing Dterm SP20
The macro function will enable the user to launch related applications, which might run
simultaneously with the Dterm SP20. One selection and all applications are launched.
ƒ
Support for multiple algorithms
The Dterm SP20 supports both G.711 and G.729A compression algorithms.


NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-37
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm SP20 System Requirements
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Protims over IP
32IPELC Card and 16VCT Card for compression
Dterm SP20 Software CD
External Licensing server via dongle
NEAX 2000 IPS, 3200 Series software or higher
SoftPhone 4 seat Licenses : per 4 clients
8 Hardware seat licenses: Only required when seat is not available
Dterm SP20 Software CD
Computer Requirements
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Computer: IBM-PC/AT or Compatible
Operating System: Windows XP,2000(SP2),NT4.0 (SP4), ME, 98, 95 English Version
Note: NT4.0 cannot support USB headset
CPU: Pentium II or greater
Memory: 128Mb or more
Hard Disk: Free Capacity 10Mb or more
CD-Rom Drive: Quad or Faster
Mouse: Window compatible point device
Display Resolution: VGA or higher resolution
Network Interface Card: 10/100base -T
Printer Port: Parallel (Indispensable)
USB Port: USB Headset for Plantronics
DSP 300 or DSP 400.
Page 5- 38
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm SP30 SoftPhone
The Dterm® SP30 allows customers to capitalize on the advantages of a converged voice and data
network whether they’re in the office or on the road. The Dterm SP30 combines traditional business
communication needs with the data applications your customers require.
The Dterm SP30 optimally delivers high quality voice via a USB-connected headset. With a simple drag
and drop, the Dterm SP30 allows telephone dialing from other telephone directory applications such as
Microsoft Outlook®, HTML pages and Word® documents, etc. In addition, the Dterm SP30 provides an
interface to Microsoft’s Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) via NEC OpenWorX
integration, allowing TAPI-enabled applications, such as Outlook and ACT, to make and receive calls.
The Dterm SP30 has the ability to use a wireless handset (PS) for all voice connections instead of the
USB handset. The Dterm SP30 can be displayed in 1 of 4 different colors (black, red, gold and neon
blue) in order to reflect the “personality” of the day. The Dterm SP30 also allows for 3 different modes of
operation.
Maximized mode: Access to full line of softphone features such as application sharing, member
lists, conference mode, chatting capabilities, Internet access and many others are just one click
away.
Compact Mode: L-shaped user interface, operating in a small footprint on the PC screen. Compact
view allows the softphone to remain active while another application window such as a Word
document; database file or email is the primary focus on the PC. With the compact view, the most
popular features of the converged softphone are just a click away.
Task Mode: The softphone can be minimized and shown as a task within a Microsoft Operating
System. While operating in this mode, the softphone will output an audio notification to the user
upon receiving an incoming call. It will be up to the user to utilize the hot key in order to activate the
Dterm SP30 application and answer the call.
Key Features and Benefits
The Dterm SP30 offers a full complement of station and converged features for an important segment of
mobility and PC-based applications. Even though a majority of the hardware telephone features
function on the softphone, the main focus for the softphone is its ability to deliver PC capabilities to the
telephone.
Features:
Displays call records in Quick Reference List via the Call Log Window:
All calls are recorded in a Call Log. Telephone number, date of the call and identification as to
whether or not the call was received and answered are all logged. You can find at a glance when
and with whom you talked. The Dterm SP30 also offers a call memo function whereby you can record
the key points of the call so that you can visually identify the individual records.
Links with PC applications:
Now you can collaborate on a white board application (Word® or Excel® document or any other
application) that is operating on your PC and the PC at a distant site. Simply place a call to the farend Dterm SP30 user and activate the application you will be collaborating on. You are now able to
have a more productive conversation.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-39
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Internet Link:
The Dterm SP30 can be assigned with a common database link for fast access to a particular site.
This link could be an Internet link that needs to be accessed when receiving or placing a call (i.e.,
you receive a call from a customer and need to look up information that is contained in a database).
Previously, you needed to locate and launch the application before loading the file. Now with the
Dterm SP30, simply select the Internet link and the database file is opened, bringing it all together in
one user interface.
Real Time Communication:
In addition to providing a voice and data collaboration link, you can also chat with a remote Dterm
SP30. This is ideal for the real quick conversation you need with a distant Dterm SP30 user. Maybe
you’re on a call and need to get a quick response from a co-worker. There’s no need to put the
customer on hold and call the co-worker for an answer. Instead, send a chat message and get your
answer in real time. The Dterm SP30 will store all your chat messages in a log so that you can use
them for future reference. Additional features of the Dterm SP30: forwarding control selection for
different call modes, videoconferencing capabilities, automatic downloading of telephony features to
the display and diagnostic capacities for audio problem notification.
Features Phase 2:
Presence/Status
The presence/status functionality allows the user to confirm a buddy’s presence/status with a visual
indication (ICON) and text message on the Dterm SP30 GUI. The presence/status information is
provided by the OpenWorx servers (LSI) package.
8/6 Party Conference Conrol
When the trunk conferencing card is configured within the voice switch and the voice trunk channel
is configured in the program utility for the Dterm SP30, a user can dynamically setup and save future
dated collaboration conferences. All the conferences can be activated immediately upon
configuration or saved for a future date upon activation. When the conference is activated, the Dterm
SP30, with the help of the Voice sever, places calls to the configured participants based on the
number which are user predefined. Conferences do not require users to be Dterm SP30 users for
voice only conference calls. Only Dterm SP30 users will utilize additional features like application
sharing and messaging during call.
PHS/PCS Collaboration
PHS/PCS collaboration links the wireless handset capabilities to the Dterm SP30 GUI. In this mode,
all the voice connections will be directed across the PS infrastructure instead of through Dterm SP30
USB handset. The Dterm SP30 GUI will give the indication that it has received a call such as caller
ID, ringing information and notification as to the state of the line. The only thing that changes is
voice path direction being directed to the PS handset. The Dterm SP30 will provide data collaboration
interface. The benefits for this functionality are as follows:
1. User has a more reliable voice connection with the voice server. The PS provides a constant
voice connection over that of the IP voice connection.
2. Dterm SP30 user now has a handset which can be ported from place to place without the need
for programming call forward functionality of the phone.
3. Now the user can be reached by one number, no matter if call forwarding is set or the user is
located next to the Dterm SP30
4. User now has a physical device which they can use for dialing and answering calls instead of
working with mouse’s and keyboards.
5. User is no longer locked to their PC for receiving and answer calls. The user is as portable as
the in-building wireless network.
Page 5- 40
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Voice Recording
A user will be able record the voice connection and save the wave file on a network storage place
of their choice. It is recommended all voice recording be stored on a local hard drive and not a
network drive. With the activation of the voice recording of the Dterm SP30, no extra recording
equipment other than the Dterm SP30 phase 2 application with a USB headset is required. For those
specific regions which require the notification to the remote party that a voice connection is being
recorded, the Dterm SP30 provides for the setting of an automatic beep tone in the configuration
menus. Beep tone can also be conditioned to send a tone notification at user selectable intervals.
Application Collaboration
The NEC Dterm SP30 phase 2 allows users to share ideas, information and programs in a variety of
ways while either in a point-to-point connection or 6/8 party conference mode.
o
o
o
o
o
Videoconferencing
The Dterm SP30 audio and videoconferencing feature lets you communicate with anyone on the
NEC Network.
• Share ideas, information, and applications using video and audio
• Send and receive real-time images using Windows-compatible equipment
• Allows for broadcasting of the live video to other Dterm SP30 users which might not have video
transmission capabilities.
• Use of a video camera to instantly view items, such as hardware devices, road conditions or
even personnel, which are displayed in front of the camera
Whiteboard
The whiteboard lets you collaborate in real time with other Dterm SP30 users via graphic design.
With the whiteboard, you can review, create and update graphic information.
• Manipulate contents by clinking, dragging and dropping information on the white board with a
mouse/keyboard.
• Copy, cut and paste information from any Windows-based application into the whiteboard.
• Use different-colored pointers to easily differentiate participant’s comments.
• Save the whiteboard contents either at the local side or distant end location
• Load saved whiteboard pages, enabling you to prepare information before a conference, then
drag and drop it into the whiteboard during an audio meeting
Chat
The chat functionality lets you conduct real-time conversations via text with as many Dterm SP30
users as you like. With chat, you can:
• Type text messages to communicate with other co-workers during a conference
• All messages are sent in a whisper mode so that they are only received by one party
• All messages sent and received are saved automatically in the chat log
• Automatic pop up notification when a chat message is received
• ICON notification within the chat log identifying different states of the messages
File Transfer
File transfer lets you send one or more files to distant Dterm SP30 users. With file transfer, you
can:
• Send a file to other Dterm SP30 users
• Accept or reject transferred files
Application Sharing:
Dterm SP30 gives you better control over how shared programs are displayed on your desktop
and give the person sharing the program control over who uses it.
• View shared programs in a frame, which makes it easy to distinguish between shared and local
applications on your desktop
• Minimize the shared program frame and do other work if you don not need to work in the
current conference program.
• Easily switch between shared programs using the shared programs taskbar.
• Approve conference participants’ requests to work in the program you introduce.
• Allow or prevent others from working in a program using the sharing dialog menu.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-41
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Application Collaboration Modes Supported
Applications
2 Party Mode
3 Party without UM4730
3 Party with UM4730
Video Conference
Yes
No
No
White Board
Yes
No
Yes
Application Sharing
Yes
No
Yes
File Transfer
Yes
No
Yes
Chat
Yes
No
Yes
One Key Operation
The space bar key on the keyboard for the Dterm SP30 PC can be configured in such a way to allow
fast access to placing calls, receiving calls and termination of calls. You are no longer required to
utilize a combination of the keyboard and mouse to access these telephone features.
Call Log Export
The Dterm SP30 phase 2 provides for the capability of saving the call log file in a “.cvs” file format in
addition to the administrator/user selecting a network storage place for the file. When opening the
file with application render capable of displaying “*.cvs” files, columns breaking out caller direction,
date and time, caller ID, duration of the call, notification of whether the call was recorded and memo
information are displayed.
Voice Quality Alarm
The Dterm SP30 is able to provide notification to the user when it is perceived to be transmitting
and/or receiving voice problems. When the Dterm SP30 application detects a voice problem an alarm
is lit on the GUI and information about the audio problem is stored in the maintenance log file.
2 Line Display
When the Dterm SP30 is set for a compact mode, the display which is shown is only capable of
displaying one line of information. When configuring the Dterm SP30 to a 2 line display, the display is
able to switch (1 second intervals) between the normal 2 lines of display.
Automatic Idle Return
This function allows for automatic disconnection during ROT or BT tone being heard due to
disconnecting by remote party. Administrator/user can choose to disable or enable this function
within the user configuration. The default for this configuration is disabled.
PB tone sending
During a call, a PB tone of the dial number which is set on the member button can be sent by
selecting the [send PB tone] with a right-mouse click of speed dial number.
Pause into Dialing string
This feature allows the user to insert a pause into the dialed number during the following conditions:
Last Number Redial
A Dterm SP30 user can do a quick access and call to the most recent call placed by the SP30.
During the idle stage a user can redial the telephone numbers previously dialed by selecting the
[Redial] in pop up menu which appears by right-clicking on a “Call” button.
Page 5- 42
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Redial via Call Log
The Dterm’s SP30 is capable of displaying the last 32 calling/called telephone numbers. This is done
by depressing the Up/Down arrow key (Keyboard) when the LCD field is highlighted.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
First number displayed on LCD screen will be the most recent called/received telephone number.
Pressing the arrow up will cycle the from the most recent to the latest calls/received telephone number.
Pressing the arrow down button will cycle the number from last to most recent calls received/ placed by
the softphone user.
One Touch Button in Compact Mode
A new button called the “One Touch” button has been added to the compact panel. The “One
Touch” button allows access quick access to your speed dial list (Buddy List) that is conditioned on
the main GUI under the Member buttons. By clicking the “One Touch” button, you can place a call
or transfer a call to any of the member’s numbers that has pre-registered on the main GUI.
Notification of Call Received with No Answer
The Dterm SP30 Call Log button which is located on the main and compact panel will flash in blue
when a call was receive by the Dterm SP30 but not answered. Before the integration of the blinking
call Log button the only way a user was noted that a call was received was if the remote party left a
voice mail. In those case where there was no voicemail message was left, the user had no way of
identifying whether calls were received or not. Users can confirm visual that a call was received and
immediately reply to the caller when they become available.
Client PC specification:
PC
OS
Memory
CPU
Sound Device
Hard Drive
LAN Interface
USB Port
Video Camera
Operation Environment
IBM-PC/AT Compatible machine
Windows XP/2000 w/NetMeeting application and DirectX
8.1software components installed
384Mb or more
Pentium III 900Mhz or more
Direct Sound Application version 8.1 or higher
Full duplex capability."
50Mb or more of empty capacity
10/100M Ethernet
2.0 support for USB headset for audio input/output
Optional
PBX Specification (Must be peer to peer IP enabled)
Operation Environment
NEAX 2000 IPS R8 Series 3300 or higher
SP30-4 software license
Dterm® SP30 Softphone Parts List
Software/Licenses/Accessories
Package of 4 right to use IP softphone clients.
Requires a IP seat License per client
8 IP Seat License
Adds support for up to 8 IP phones
Dterm SP30 Software CD
Application CD. One CD can be used for multiple Client
installations. Recommend 1 per 4 clients.
NEC USB Headset (DSP300)
One per SP30
NEC USB Headset (DSP400)
One per SP30
SP30-4 software license
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-43
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Dterm Extenders
The NEC Dterm Extenders extends the operation of the NEAX2000 IVS2 digital telephone to a
remote location. The NEC Dterm EXTenders are available in two models: Dterm EXT (ISDN) &
Dterm EXT (Analog).
Dterm EXT (ISDN)
The Dterm EXT (ISDN) consists of two units, a Switch Module and a Remote Module, referred to as an
“Office Module (OPE-OF Module)” and a “Remote Module (OPE-RE Module)” respectively. The Office
Module is located at the PBX side and is connected to a Series E Digital Station Port from the PBX.
The Remote Module is located at the Remote Site and is connected to a Dterm Series E (DTP-32DE-1
ONLY) display terminal.
The DTP-32DE-1 is the same as the DTP-32D-1 except it is registered with the FCC for home use. This
is the only NEC Digital telephone that has this “Residential FCC Registration”. All of the digital and
audio PBX functionality is extended, except that of data capabilities via the Dterm. This extension is
accomplished via ISDN-BRI lines or 56K synchronous leased lines ordered from the Public Switched
Network, connected to Terminal Adapters (TA) or CSU/DSU’s, respectively, and then connected to an
NEC Dterm EXT (Digital Line Extender). The Dterm EXT is connected to a standard Digital Line Port of the
NEAX2000 IVS2 at the “Switch Location” and to a Dterm Series E terminal at the “Remote Location”. The
Dterm EXTs connect to the TAs or CSU/DSU’s with an RS-232 “Synchronous Clear Channel” serial
connection.
Session Handling over Dterm EXT
The user at the Remote Site is able to select between two modes of operation: “Continuous Operation”
or “Call-on-Demand Operation”.
When continuous operation is selected, the user initiates the session by using the Remote Module to
dial the Switch Modules’ Directory Number (DN) (by logging onto the Remote Module). After
establishing the session, the session will stay connected until the user chooses to disconnect (by
logging off of the Remote Module). This is the recommended operational method when data is being
sent through the Dterm EXT (Remote Work-Station connected to the COM1 port).
When call-on-demand operation is selected, the user initiates the session by using the Remote
Module to dial the Office Modules’ (DN) telephone number. When there is no call in progress, the units
will time out and disconnect the B-Channel. When a user starts to place a call or a call comes in at the
PBX location, the units will automatically re-establish a connection with one another. For this reason
(time out and disconnect of the B-Channel), if data is being sent through
The Dterm EXT modules (as in Figure 2.0) Call-On-Demand is not recommended. The data stream may
get disconnected in the middle of a data transfer because the voice stream controls the Time Out (idle
state of Series E Phone). Note: Call-On-Demand helps avoid continuous usage charges.
If Call-On-Demand is desired but the need of a data connection from the Remote Site to the PBX Site is
required, it is recommended that a terminal adapter, which supports two serial connections, be used
(such as the Motorola UTA220 TA). The NEC Dterm EXT uses only one B-Channel of the ISDN-BRI
leaving the other B-Channel available for a data connection and/or single line devices. An ISDN TA
equipped with two serial ports will allow one to be used for the Dterm EXT and the other to be used for
the data connection.
Page 5- 44
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Multiple Remote Operation
Another invaluable application offered by the NEC Dterm EXT is that multiple Remote Modules may
access the same Office Module at different times. Therefore, if one remote agent “logs out” from the
“Office Module”, another remote agent may “log on”.
This application could be used in a call center that is open 24 hours a day with multiple shifts of agents
working at home. Each of the agents has his or her own “Remote Module”, Series E terminal, TA, and
PC Workstation. Each is assigned their own “password” for access to the same “Office Module”.
Once an agent has established a session with the “Office Module” and another agent tries to log on to
the same “Office Module”, the “Office Module” will compare the new password received from the agent
and if it doesn’t match the one which is currently “logged on” (in use) the calling agent will be
disconnected with the LCD message “COD Intruder (Call on Demand Intruder)”.
ISDN-BRI Order for NI-1
One ISDN-BRI Line should be ordered from the ISDN Provider for each Switch Module to be installed
terminating at the “PBX site” and one ISDN-BRI Line should be ordered for each Remote Module to be
installed terminating at the “Remote site” with the following specifications:
ƒ “Capabilities Package S”
- 2 B-Channels + 1 D-Channel with simultaneous Voice & Data
- 2 Directory Numbers & 2 SPIDs (Service Provider Identifiers)
ƒ Plus Calling Party Number
- Sending & Receiving
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-45
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
NEAX2000 IPS Requirements
The Digital Station Port which is connected to the Dterm EXT at the “PBX Site” must be provided via the
PN-8DLC, PN-4DLC, or the PN-2DLC Circuit Cards.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The Station Port may be set to operate in “Series E Mode” or “Series III Mode”
The maximum distance from the Dterm EXT to the PBX digital port interface (at the PBX Site) is 250
feet (76m).
The maximum distance from the Dterm EXT to the DTP-32DE-1 (Series E Terminal at the Remote
Site) is 250 feet (76m).
The Analog Port Adapter with Ring (APR-U) may operate in “Single Port Mode” ONLY when
attached to the DTP-32DE-1 phone that is operating at the Remote Site.
The Ancillary Device Adapter (ADA-U) and the Hands Free Unit (HFU-U) are supported at the
Remote Site. When the remote phone is located in a “Residential Environment” the HFU-U
CANNOT be used because of FCC restrictions.
The Computer Telephony Adapter (CTA-U) is supported at the Remote Site. The CTA-U is only
supported when the Dterm EXT is set to operate in “Continuous Mode”.
The Dterm Series III cordless telephone is supported at the Remote Site. A DTP-32DE-1 set for
“Series III Mode” must be connected in conjunction with the cordless telephone.
Voice Calls made to the DTP-32DE-1 that is connected to the Dterm EXT will automatically activate
the built in “MIC” even if it was disabled prior to the call. Class of Service for the Remote Phone
may be set to automatically disable the “MIC” when called via “CM15, YY=99.
The Dterm PC computer interface card is not supported with the Dterm EXT.
“911” (Emergency Calls) should not be made via the remote terminal since the phone number at the
PBX location will be sent to the “Emergency Answering Facility” rather than the “Home/Remote
Office phone number” where the remote terminal is located.
The telephone terminal that is connected to the Dterm EXT Remote Module must be a Dterm Series E,
Display Terminal. Specifically, a DTP-32DE-1 Series E terminal. This is the only terminal that has
the proper FCC registration for residential use.
Page 5- 46
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Equipment List
Description
Dterm Series E (32 Button Display Terminal)
Dterm Series E (32 Button Display Terminal)
Dterm EXT (OPE-OF Module)
Includes: Dterm EXT Owners Manual
Dterm EXT (OPE-RE Module)
Includes: Dterm EXT Owners Manual
Additional Dterm EXT Owners Manual
Dterm EXT Sales Brochure
Remarks
DTP-32DE-1 (Black)
FCC Approved for Residential Use
DTP-32DE-1 (Soft White)
FCC Approved for Residential Use
Office Module
Located at PBX Site
Remote Module
Located at Remote Site
Included with Dterm EXTs
25 Brochures per package
NEC Tested Terminal Adapters
Description
Motorola BitSURFR Pro
Motorola UTA 220
Motorola BitSURFR
Note:
Remarks
Has one RS232 Serial Port
Has two Analog Ports
Has two RS232 Serial Ports
Has one RS232 Serial Port
Has one Analog Port
The BitSURFER PRO EZ is not compatible with the Dterm EXT because it does not provide a Synchronous
Clear Channel transmission from its’ RS232 Port to the Dterm EXT.
Dterm EXT (Analog)
The Dterm Analog EXT enables telephone users to be a fully functional part of the NEC PBX with a Dterm
Series E (DTP-32DE-1) telephone located any distance off-premises. The Dterm Analog EXT consists
of two modules. One module, identified as the Office Module, connects to a digital Dterm Series E station
port on your PBX. The other module, identified as the Remote Module, connects to your NEC Dterm
Series E (DTP-32DE-1) telephone at your off-premises location. The modules communicate via a single
analog telephone line.
The Dterm Analog EXT is transparent to the user and retains access to the features and functions of the
PBX. In addition, an RS-232 data port is incorporated, allowing the user to connect off-premises RS232 equipment to equipment at the Office Module location. The Office Module emulates your
telephone, and the Remote Module emulates your NEC PBX. Each module uses a V.90 internal
modem (operating in V.34 mode) for the transmission of all signals between the two modules. Network
configurations that support V.34 modems should work well.
Through the use of soft keys, the remote user signs on with a secured password. When the extender is
online, a voice/data connection is made through public facilities via an Analog line from the remote
location to the office PBX system. The Extender offers the flexibility for the user to operate in
Continuous or Call On Demand modes. The continuous mode maintains the connection until the
remote user sign off. The call on demand mode helps in avoiding continuous connection charges by
only staying connected when a call is in progress.
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Page 5-47
Chapter 5 Station Equipment
Service Conditions for Dterm Analog EXT
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Note:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
911 calls should not be made via remote terminals since the telephone number at the PBX
location is sent to the emergency center. The user should use a separate line that is not
connected to the Dterm EXT system.
If a dedicated line is used, it should be an unlisted number in order to minimize busy signals.
No custom calling features, such as Call Waiting or Call Forwarding, should be ordered for the
line to which you connect the Remote Module.
A Call waiting tone causes an interruption in data transfer between the Office and Remote Module.
When you use voice and data simultaneously, the voice transmission will have priority over the
data transmission regarding available bandwidth allocation.
Up to 100 passwords can be programmed into each Office Module.
Only one Remote Module at a time can be “online” with an individual Office Module.
If passwords have been enabled on the Office Module, authorized connections require a
password, 8 to 10 digits in length.
Passwords are retained in non-volatile memory and are not affected by power outages.
Each password begins with two digits (00-99). These digits uniquely identify up to 100 users.
The 00 password is reserved for the System Administrator and can be used to change any of
the user’s passwords.
Zone paging and voice paging must be turned off via PBX programming on the ports connected
to the Dterm Analog EXT. The remote telephone should be programmed to ring for all incoming
calls.
If the remote Multiline Terminal is programmed to answer multiple calls, these calls should ring
at the terminal. Configure secondary incoming extensions for ringing.
Analog fax machines and modems are not operable with the DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal
when connected to the APR-U optional adapter.
The NEC Dterm Cordless and Dterm Cordless Lite telephones cannot be used in conjunction with
the DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal and Dterm Analog EXT.
The NEC CTA-U optional adapter cannot be installed to a NEC PBX remote Multiline Terminal
to provide TAPI functionally with the PBX.
The auto answer feature for PBX ACD is not operable while in Call on Demand mode.
The Dterm PC and Dterm PC II are not functional with the Dterm Analog EXT.
The HFU-U handsfree adapter is not operable with the DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal for Dterm
Analog EXT operation when used in a home environment due to FCC restrictions. However, it is
permitted for use in an office environment.
Page 5- 48
NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349 Issue 4
Chapter 6 Trunking
Type of Trunks
The following list reflects the type of trunk and the package that supports it.
Type of Trunk
Central Office, Foreign Exchange,
WATS (Analog)
Circuit Package
Ports
Slots
PN-4COTB
4
1
PN-8COTS
8
1
PN-4COTG
4
1
Central Office Caller ID (Class SM)
PN-8COTQ
8
1
PN-4DITB
4
1
Direct in Dial (DID)
PN-AUCA
2
1
PN-2ODTA
2
1
Two wire E & M tie trunks
PN-4ODTA
4
1
PN-2ODTA
2
1
Four wire E & M tie trunks
PN-4ODTA
4
1
T-1 Spans
SPN-24DTAC
24
1
E-1 Spans
SPN-30DTC
30
1
SPN-24CCTA
23
1
Digital CCIS
SPN-24DTAC & SC00
23
2
SPN-30DTC & SC00
30
2
PN-2ODTA & SC00
2
2
Analog CCIS
PN-4ODTA & SC00
4
2
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD/VCT) & PZ-M606
8
1
PZ-24IPLA (PAD/VCT Daughter
24
3
IP CCIS (Peer to Peer)
board for 8IPLA)
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) & PZ-M606
32
4
SPN-16VCTAA (Compression)
1
1
SPN-IPTB-A
16
1
IP CCIS (non Peer to Peer)
SPN-4VCTI-A
4
1-6
SPN-24PRTA
23
1
ISDN (PRI)
SPN-24DTAC & SC01
23
2
SPN-30DTC & SC01
30
2
SPN-2BRTC
2
1
BRI Trunk
SPN-4BRTA
4
1
PN-4COTB
4
1
Paging
PN-8COTS
8
1
PN-CFTB
8
1
Conference
SPN-CFTC
32
1
PN-2DATA
2
1
Announcement
PN-4DATC
4
1
SPN-IPTB-B
16
1
H.323 Trunk
SPN-4VCTI-B
4
1-6
(DTMF) PN-8RSTG
8
1
(MF) SPN-4RSTB
4
1
Register/Sender
(Caller ID) SPN-4RSTC
4
1
(E911) SPN-4RSTB-911
4
1
Note: Any combination of the above cards is allowed with a limit of 256 trunks per system.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 6-1
Chapter 6 Trunking
Trunk Parameters
ƒ
Trunk Impedance 600/900 ohms (selectable by programming)
ƒ
Trunk Resistance Characteristics, Central Office Trunk (1200
o
o
o
o
o
o
ƒ
maximum)
Trunk Set Up Procedure
Loop Start
Ground start
Wink Start
Ring Down
E & M Signaling
Release and Incoming Detect Immediate Start and Timing Variable Start
Trunk Card Specifications
PN-4COTB
This card provides 4 Loop/Ground Start trunks with disconnect supervision and mounts in any PIM (0 to
7) and supports the following interface:
a. Interface for standard Analog trunks/Centrex type lines
b. Interface card for CO ring down trunks
c. Interface with 4 paging equipment lines
d. Interface with external music/announcement source for Music-On-Hold feature
The above interfaces can be mixed on to one card in any combination.
PN-8COTS
This card provides 8 Loop/Ground Start trunks with disconnect supervision and mounts in any PIM (0 to
7) and supports the following interface:
a. Interface with 8 CO lines
b. Interface with 8 paging equipment lines
c. Interface with external music/announcement source for Music-On-Hold feature.
The above interfaces can be mixed on to one card in any combination.
PN-4COTG
This card is used to provide the system with Caller ID (Class SM). This feature requires the SPN4RSTC card to receive the FSK signals for Caller ID. This 4-port card mounts in any PIM (0 to 7). This
card supports Loop Start trunks.
PN-8COTQ
This card is used to provide the system with Caller ID (Class SM). This feature requires the SPN4RSTC card to receive the FSK signals for Caller ID. This 8-port card mounts in any PIM (0 to 7). This
card supports Loop Start trunks.
Page 6-2
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 6 Trunking
PN-4DITB
This circuit card is a DID line trunk card which supports the functions of four DID line trunks. This card
provides the following functions:
a. This card is equipped with Direct Inward Dialing (DID) function.
b. This card is equipped with loop detection functions, sending reverse signal, and
DTMF to DP conversion.
PN-AUCA
This circuit card is used to either control two single line telephones for off-premise extensions or for 2line Direct Inward Dialing trunks. Also, this card will connect to single telephones for Power Failure
Transfer.
PN-2ODTA
The 2ODTA card is a two or four wire tie line card that mounts in any LT slot in PIM 0 to 7. This card
provides analog tie line service for standard PBX networking or CCIS.
SPN-24DTAC
This circuit card is a 24 channel 1.5 Mbps digital interfacing trunk card which also supports the interface
between ISDN lines and CCIS lines with 1.5 Mbps AMI. The following circuit cards may be used in
conjunction with the 24DTA:
a. SPN-SC01 - This circuit card controls the signal link (D channel) when Integrated
Services Digital Network (ISDN) PRI (Primary Rate Interface - 23B+1D) is employed in
the system. This package will support one signaling link on a single DTA package. A
maximum of 8 ISDN spans are allowed per system.
b. SPN-SC00 - This circuit card controls signal links when Common Channel Interoffice
Signaling (CCIS) is employed in the system. This package will support one signaling link
on a single DTA package. A maximum of 8 CCIS links per system is allowed
SPN-24PRTA
This circuit card is a 24 channel 1.5 Mbps digital interfacing trunk card that also provides a built-in DChannel Handler (DCH). This package provides one DTI span with ISDN Data Link on a single
package. A maximum of 8 ISDN links per system is allowed per system.
SPN-24CCTA
This circuit card is a 24 channel 1.5 Mbps digital interfacing trunk card that also provides a built-in CChannel Handler (CCH) for CCIS. This package provides one DTI span with CCIS Data Link on a
single. A maximum of 8 CCIS links per system is allowed per system.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 6-3
Chapter 6 Trunking
SPN-30DTC
This circuit card is a 30 B-channel, 2 Mbps E1 digital interfacing trunk card (2.048 MHz). Typical E1
applications apply to any CCIS, Q-SIG, and TIE Line application via continuous property. Complies with
U-LAW PCM voice coding standard used in North America.
Note: Does not support A-LAW coding used in Europe, Mexico and South America.
The following circuit cards may be used in conjunction with the 30DTC:
a. SPN-SC01 - This circuit card controls the signal link (D channel) when Integrated
Services Digital Network (ISDN) PRI (Primary Rate Interface - 30B+1D) is employed in
the system. This package will support one signaling link on a single DTA package. A
maximum of 4 ISDN spans are allowed per system.
b. SPN-SC00 - This circuit card controls signal links when Common Channel Interoffice
Signaling (CCIS) is employed in the system. This package will support one signaling link
on a single DTA package. A maximum of 3 CCIS links per system is allowed.
PN-2BRTC
This card has two circuits of Basic Rate interface (2B+D) and provides connectivity for Voice, High
Speed Data, Switched Video and G4 Fax calls to be placed and received via ISDN Basic Rate (BRI) to
the ISDN Network. The BRTA-C card has built-in DCH (D channel handler) and has a ST interface. A
locally provided NT1 device is required to connect to the ISDN Network. One BRI trunk provides two
incoming/outgoing voice connections and (or) two 64k bps channels for high-speed data. This card is
used for BRI trunks from the Telco to the PBX.
PN-4BRTC
This card has four circuits of Basic Rate interface (2B+D) and provides two 2-channel PCM digital lines.
This card is used for BRI trunks from the Telco to the PBX.
PN-CFTB
The CFTB card is a 6 Party Conference card. One card can control a conference of up to ten
participants. This card occupies 10 time slots per one card.
PN-CFTC
The CFTC card is a 32 Party Conference Trunk card. One card can control a conference of up to 32
participants. Two Conference methods are available: Group Call and Meet-Me Conference. This card
occupies 32 time slots per one card.
Page 6-4
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 6 Trunking
PN-2DATA
This circuit card is a trunk card that supports the announcement function for a maximum of two
announcements without external announcement equipment. This package supports only the
following announcement arrangements:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Two 60-second announcements.
Single or multiple connections to an announcement is allowed.
Announcements will be recorded from a Dterm, Single line, or Attendant Console.
PN-4DATC
This circuit card is a trunk card that supports the announcement function for a maximum of four
announcements without external announcement equipment. This package supports only the following
announcement arrangements:
ƒ Four 120-second announcements.
ƒ Single or multiple connections to an announcement is allowed.
ƒ Announcements will be recorded from a Dterm, Single line, or Attendant Console.
PN-IPTB (IPT)
The PN-IPTB circuit card is an IP Trunk card.
ƒ Accommodates the IP network and transmits/receives compressed voice or signals over an
IP network.
ƒ Used together with maximum of four PN-4VCTI cards (16 channels).
ƒ 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.
PN-4VCTI (VCT)
The PN-4VCTI circuit card is a 4-channel CODEC card for IP Trunks; four VCT cards per IPT card.
ƒ Voice compression protocols: G723.1, G729A, G711, FAX (14.4kbps), DTMF signals
ƒ Used together with PN-IPTB card
PN-8RSTG (DTMF Receiver)
The RSTA card receives DTMF signals sent by single line telephones, DID lines, and tie lines. This
card mounts in any LT slot in any PIM and provides 8 RST circuits per card. Usually at least one card
per system is required. This card uses 8 time slots. This card is required for a 512 Port System. The
128 Port System’s CPU is equipped with 4 RST circuits.
PN-4RSTB (MF Receiver for T1 MF ANI)
This MF receiver card is required when using the T1-ANI feature. This card receives the MultiFrequency (MF) signals sent by the CO to ID the calling party. One RSTB card provides four MF
receiver ports. This card mounts in any AP slot in PIMs 0 to 7.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 6-5
Chapter 6 Trunking
PN-4RSTC (ID Number Receiver)
The Caller ID (Class) feature requires this card to receive and store Caller ID information from the CO.
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) is used to send calling number and calling name information to the PBX.
The RSTC card receives this information from the CO and provides flexible options for the use of the
Caller ID messages.
PN-4RSTB-911 (MF Sender)
This MF Sender card is used in conjunction with a trunk circuit to provide 911 information CAMA type
interface. The trunks to be used for the E-911 System must be ordered from the local telephone
company provider as E-911 trunks corresponding to the CAMA standards.
Note: Ground Start trunks cannot be utilized for E-911 service.
PZ-M606 (ETHERNET TCP/IP)
Peer-to-Peer IP Stations or Trunks require the PZ-M606 Ether Control Card. This card is mounted on
MP card to accommodate the Ethernet transmit and receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol. 10 BaseT/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD
The PN-8IPLA IP PAD card is an 8 channel IP to TDM Gateway with integrated G.711 CODEC (64
Kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps), G.729a (8 Kbps) compression.
PZ-24IPLA IP PAD
The PZ-24IPLA card can be mounted to the 8IPLA card to provide 32-channels of IP-PAD with
compression.
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD
The SPN-32IPLA IP PAD card is a 32 channel IP to TDM Gateway with integrated G.711 CODEC.
Compression (G.729/G.723) requires one PN-16VCTA IP PAD for 16 channels and two PN-16VCTA IP
PAD cards for 32 channels.
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD
This card provides G723 and G729a vice compression for Peer-to-Peer IP Trunking.
Page 6-6
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 6 Trunking
System Trunking Capacity
IPS Trunking Capacity
Item
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
Loop Start
DID w/4DIT
2W E&M
Tie Line Trunk (Lines)
4W E&M
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
DTI/CCIS Digital Link
1.5M
Note
2MI
1.5M/2M (PRT)
ISDN
2BRT (card)
4BRT (card)
IP Trunk
3-Party Conference
6-Party
6-/10-Party Conference
10-Party
32-Party Conference
Announcement Trunk Circuits
DTMF Sender
DTMF Receiver
Note:
Syatem Capacity
1PIM 2PIM 3PIM 4PIM 5PIM 6PIM 7PIM
64
128
192
256
256
256
256
48
96
144
192
240
256
256
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
Max. 127
DTI: 10, CCIS: 8
8
8
12
24
6
12
18
24
24
24
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Max. 16 conference groups per system
Max. 4 conference groups per system
Max. 2 conference groups per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
128
Max. 32 circuits per system
16
32
8PIM
256
256
192
192
24
8
The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 6-7
Chapter 6 Trunking
IPSDM Trunk Capacity
Capacity Per MC
Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS
IP-PAD
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
1
2
3
No. of channel
32
64
96
Loop Start
40
80
120
DID w/4DIT
20
40
60
2W/4W E&M
10
20
30
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
DTI/CCIS Digital Link
Note 1
ISDN
Max. 127
1.5M
5
DTI: 10, CCIS: 8
2M
5
8
1.5M/2M(PRT)
5
2BRT (card)
5
10
15
4BRT (card)
5
10
15
1
2
3
IP Trunk
3-Party Conference
6-/10-Party Conference
8
Max. 16 conference groups per system
6-Party
Max. 4 conference groups per system
10-Party
Max. 2 conference groups per system
Max. 8 conference groups
5
per system
Max. 32 circuits per system
32-Party Conference
DTMF Sender
DTMF Receiver
16
32
IPSDMR Capacity
Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS
IP-PAD
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DTI
ISDN
Note 1:
Page 6-8
Note 1
Capacity Per MC
1
2
No. of channel
32
64
Loop Start
40
80
DID w/4DIT
20
40
2W/4W E&M
10
20
1.5M
5
10
1.5M(PRT)
5
8
4BRT (card)
5
10
The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 6 Trunking
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
The NEAX 2000 IPS provides extensive Least Cost Routing capabilities. LCR allows the
NEAX 2000 IPS to be programmed to route outgoing calls over the most economical facility
(WATS, FX, and DDD), based on the area code and office code dialed. In the case of
Specialized Common Carriers, associated NXX patterns can be screened out via 6-digit Toll
Restriction if the dialed number is not within the designated service area of that SCC.
The NEAX2000 IPS system provides one of the most flexible route selection capabilities of any
system on the market today. While many systems can add and/or delete digits on incoming
calls, it is the capability of what can be done on outgoing calls that make the NEAX2000 IPS
such a powerful and cost effective system.
When multiple routes are to be used for an outgoing call, the system is programmed with route
order priority (RA). Priority 1 usually being the most cost effective route for the call being
made. Up to eight route choices can be assigned for a call. These choices would be put into an
Outgoing Route Pattern (OPR). The system allows for up to 64 different OPRs to be
constructed.
For true cost effective use of outgoing dialing, it may be desired to change the outgoing route
selection during specific times when certain carriers may offer cheaper rates. These OPRs can
be assigned using one of eight different Time of Day Patterns (TDPTN). In TDPTN data, you
assign what pattern is used at what time of day. You then assign the Time Pattern in the OPR
data.
Outgoing calls made using the Least Cost Routing (LCR) can have up to 24 digits added to the
number dialed. In OPR data, the system will ask if and how many digits are to be deleted from
the number dialed. It will then ask if any digits are to be added, and if so, what are the digits to
add in front.
Besides the flexibility of getting a call out of the system, restriction controls make this system
one of the best. There are various types of call restrictions that can be made. Some of them
are as follows:
Six Digit Least Cost Routing
This allows you to restrict specific area code(s) from going out a specific route, even though
the route is included in the OPR constructed. This table lets you choose the TDPTN, the OPR,
the RA, and the area code. Then, designate whether the area code is allowed or not.
Route Restriction Class (RSC)
There are 8 different restriction classes that can be created to allow, deny, or toll restrict
certain users from dialing certain numbers. An RSC is assigned to the stations. The RSC table
is then constructed on a per route basis to determine whether a number dialed from a station
in a specific RSC is to be allowed, denied, or toll restricted.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 6-9
Chapter 6 Trunking
Toll Restriction
The toll code restriction data allows the system administrator to program certain restrictions for
Tandem (trunk-to-trunk) and Outgoing calls. Outgoing toll restriction is based on a station
RSC. For outgoing, the parameters request the Route Number, Destination Code, RSC, and
Toll Data Index (TDI). The TDI can be assigned as; Connection is restricted, Connection is
allowed, 3/6 Digit toll restriction, or C.O operator call. When 3/6 Digit toll restriction is used, the
system will ask what digit to check the restriction upon (3rd or 6th).
3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
3/6 Digit Toll allows restrictions to be assigned starting with a specific digit place in the dialed
number. This command will request the Route Number, RSC, Digit Code (3 or 6 digits), and
whether it is allowed or restricted. For example, if I wish to restrict stations with an RSC of "4"
from dialing 555 numbers only if a specific route (Route n) gets chosen in the LCR sequence:
In the Toll Restriction data, assignment would be to check the 6th digit (9 + 1 + 201 + 5XX +
XXXX). In the 3/6 digit toll table assign Route n, RSC4, DC 555, RES: 0 [restricted].
Priority Restriction Class
These provide 8 levels of control over a user's route access eligibility. The system allows a call
to reach its destination if the RSC is greater than or equal to the Priority Restriction Class of
the outgoing trunk group (route).
Page 6-10
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
Attendant Console (SN716)
The Attendant Console (SN716 DESKCON) has an ergonomic design and provides full access
to all PBX Console features. The SN716 DESKCON uses the same interface cards as the
digital phones to connect to the PBX. The SN716 Desk Console uses a 6-core Modular Jack;
inner 1 pair for signal and outer 2 pairs are for power supply to connect to the PBX system.
The SN716 Desk Console operates on a switched-loop basis with a maximum of 6 Attendant
loops terminating at each console on the associated Interface card. The Attendant uses these
loops for answering, originating, holding, extending, and re-entering calls. When Attendant
loop release is used, the number of loops is effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for each
console.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 7- 1
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
SN716 DESKCON General Features
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Character LCD (4 x 40 character)
LCD designation strips
Software-controlled LCD loop key
Full access to PBX features
Headset connectivity
Recorder connectivity
SN716 DESKCON Exclusive Features
While the DESKSON has full access to PBX features the SN716 DESKCON has the following exclusive
features.
DESKCON Exlcusive Features
Attendant Assisted Calling
Call Waiting Display
Attendant Camp-on (Full and Semi-automatic)
Common Route Indial
Attendant Called/Calling Name Display
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Attendant Called/Calling Number
Incoming Call Identification
Attendant Call Selection
Individual Trunk Access
Attendant Console Lockout-Password
Multi-Function Key
Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup and Cancel
Multiple Console Operation
Attendant Interposition Calling/Transfer
Pushbutton Calling - Attendant Only
Attendant Lamp Check
Serial Call
Attendant Listed Directory Number
Time Display
Attendant Loop Release
Trunk Group Busy Display
Attendant Programming
Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer By Attendant
Attendant Training Jacks
Attendant Delay Announcement
Audible Indication Control
Attendant Lockout
Call Processing Indication
Attendant Overflow
Call Queuing
Attendant Override
Call Splitting
Note: For Detail of each feature refer to Chapter 9 Feature Description.
Page 7-2
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
Face Layout of the SN716 DESKCON
Alarm Position Available
(24)
(25)
Position Busy
Night
(26)
(27)
(28)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 7- 3
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
Functions and use of Keys and Lamp Indications
Location
Number
Key or Lamp
Designation
Full
Name
Basic
/Option
Key/Lamp
1
L1-L6
Loop
Basic
Key
2
L1A-L6A
Loop Lamp
A
Basic
Lamp
(one per loop)
3
L1B-L6B
Loop Lamp
B
Basic
Lamp
(one per loop)
4
Push-button Dial
Push-button
Dial
Basic
Key
5
SRC
Source
Basic
Key & Lamp
6
DEST
Destination
Basic
Key & Lamp
7
Talk
Talk
Basic
Key
8
Cancel
Cancel
Basic
Key
9
Hold
Hold
Basic
Key
10
Release
Release
Basic
Key
11
Answer
Answer
Basic
Key & Lamp
12
Start
Start
Basic
Key & Lamp
Page 7-4
Function
The attendant answers the call associated to
the particular loops. Loop keys are usually
used to reenter to held calls, answer
automatic recalls.
Steady green lamp indicates attendant
connected to the loop, or called station has
answered. Flashing green lamp indicates call
waiting to be answered. Steady red lamp
indicates call party busy. Flashing red lamp
indicates call held at the console.
Flashing red lamp indicates automatic recall
has been activated.
Allows the attendant to:
•
Process incoming calls
•
Originate calls
•
Activate various service features
Allows the attendant to speak with the calling
party. The associated lamp lights when the
attendant is connected. The source
trunk/station number will be shown in the
number display field.
Allows the attendant to speak with the called
party. The associated lamp lights when the
attendant is connected. The destination
station/trunk number will be shown in the
number display field.
Allows the attendant to join in a three-way
conference with the calling and called parties.
When connection is established, both SRC
and DEST lamps will light.
Allows the attendant to:
•
Disconnect the calling (source) or called
party (destination) from the loop.
•
Disconnect an outgoing trunk or tone
seized by the attendant.
•
Disconnect
the
station
recalling
attendant for transfer assistance.
Allows the attendant to hold a call at the
console and/or to activate it to serial call
state.
Allows the attendant to release from an
established connection freeing the console for
processing of new calls.
Allows the attendant to answer incoming
calls in the order in which they arrive at the
console.
Allows the attendant to extend an outgoing
call to a station. Completion of outgoing
pulse will be recognized.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Incoming Call Identification: These eight non-locking keys with associated lamps provide attendant access to specific
types of incoming calls. A flashing lamp indicates a call waiting to be answered. A steady lamp indicates a call
answered. The standard arrangement of these keys is shown on the face layout.
LDN
Listed Directory Number
Basic
Key & Lamp
Incoming central office trunk call.
Allows the attendant to answer incoming Tie
Line calls when the distant station dials
TIE
Tie Line
Basic
Key & Lamp
access digit to the attendant.
Allows the attendant to answer incoming
Call Forwarding-Busy
Busy
Basic
Key & Lamp
calls to specified station when the station is
Line
busy.
ATND
Attendant
Basic
Key & Lamp
Incoming station call.
Allows the attendant to answer incoming
Call Forwarding-Don’t
calls to specified station when the station
NANS
Basic
Key & Lamp
Answer
does not answer within the predetermined
time.
Incoming station call for attendant assistance
Recall
Recall
Basic
Key & Lamp
in transferring an established outside call to
another station.
Additional incoming special service calls,
Option
Optional
Option
Key & Lamp
such as FX.
Additional incoming special service calls,
Option
Optional
Option
Key & Lamp
such as FX.
Allows the attendant to connect with pager.
PAGE
Page
Basic
Key & Lamp
(overhead paging)
Allows the attendant to connect with
REC
Record
Basic
Key & Lamp
recorder.
Allows the attendant to answer incoming
EMG
Emergency
Basic
Key & Lamp
calls from the station where the station leaves
the receiver off.
Busy
Allows the attendant to enter into station-toBV
Basic
Key & Lamp
Verification
station connection.
Trunk
Allows the attendant to individually select a
TRKSL
Basic
Key & Lamp
Selection
desired trunk.
Allows the attendant to establish incoming
call to Call Park.
Note: The attendant can connect this call
Call Park
Call Park
Basic
Key & Lamp
once again by dialing a specific number and
individual number of the console from an
ordinary extension telephone.
Allows the attendant to be automatically
recalled when the station user replaces the
Serial call
SC
Basic
Key & Lamp
handset, by depressing the key after
Set
extending a central office incoming call to
the station user.
Allows the attendant to supervise a call by
Supervisory
depressing the key after extending a central
SVC
Basic
Key & Lamp
Call Set
office incoming call to the station user.
Allows the attendant access to various
Option
Optional
Option
Key & Lamp
optional features provided as required. Each
key has an associated lamp.
Allows the attendant to cut off the voice
Mute
Mute
Basic
Key & Lamp
transmission.
Steady lamp indicates trouble conditions in
Alarm
Alarm
Basic
Key
the PBX.
Position
When the attendant position (console) is
Position Available
Basic
Lamp
Available
available to process calls, the lamp lights.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 7- 5
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
26
Position Busy
Position
Busy
27
Night
Night
Basic
Key & Lamp
28
Up Down
Up and
Down
Basic
Key
Basic
Key & Lamp
29
LCD
Liquid
Crystal
Display
Basic
Display
30
Muli-Function Key
MuliFunction
Key
Basic
Display
Page 7-6
When the key is pressed, the lamp will light,
and the console will become not available.
Note: Press the button if operators leave
their seats.
Allows the console to place in the night
answer mode and lights the associated lamp.
Releasing the key restores the console to
normal operation.
Allows the attendant to adjust volume of the
receiver, ringer and contrast of the LCD.
The following information will be displayed:
1st line:
The kind of party that connects to the
attendant, the number of the waiting calls, the
date and time.
2nd line:
Tenant number, station class of service and
station number belonging to the destination
(called) party.
3rd Line:
Tenant number, station class of service and
station number belonging to the source
(calling) party.
4th Line:
Optional indication, such as trunk busy.
Keys while idle:
Mode—allows
access
to
DAY/NIGHT mode and LKOUT
(Console Lock out mode)
Prog—allows
access
for
programming DISA, System Speed
Dial, Date & Time and Tone
Ringer
Keys while answering or originating:
SPB—Out Pulse Short
LPB—Out Pulse Long
SHF—Flash Over Trunk
Keys while calling a busy station:
B.V—Busy Verification
Keys while calling a DND station:
DDOVR—DND override
Keys whil accessing Hotel feature:
RC—Room Cut off
MW—Message Waiting
DD—Do not Disturb
WU—Wake up call
RESET—Reset
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
SN716 Specifications
ITEM
SN716
DESKCON
ƒ
ƒ
Interface and
Power Options
PN-8DLCP
Q’ty
1/8 ATT
PN-4DLCM
1/4 ATT
PN-4DLCQ
1/4 ATT
PN-2DLCN
1/2 ATT
PN-PW00
1/ ATT
ACA-U Unit
1/ ATT
Remarks
Interface Card (-27V)
Distance: Max. 984.3ft (350m)
Interface Card (-27V)
Distance: Max. 984.3ft (350m)
Interface Card (-27V)
Distance: Max. 984.3ft (350m)
Interface Card (-48V)
Distance: Max. 984.3ft (350m)
DC/DC Converter (-27V to –48V)
Distance with 2/4/8 DLC (350m)
24V AC/DC Adapter
Distance w/8DLC (350m)
Distance w/4DLC or 2DLC (1200m)
The NEAX2000 IPS can support up to (8) SN716 Desk Consoles.
Dimensions: 10 inches (25.4 cm) wide x 9 inches (22.9 cm) deep x 4 inches (10.2 cm) high.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 7- 7
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
Business Attendant System (BAS)
NEC’s Business Attendant System (BAS) is a powerful client/server PC-based tool for full-time
and part-time NEAX PBX systems answering positions. The BAS consists of an interactive
client side application running on Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000 (SP2) or Windows XP (SP1)
operating system that connects to the BAS server via the corporate LAN. The BAS server
software is used for PBX connectivity and runs on a Windows 2000 Server (SP2) or Windows
2003 Server. With a dynamic interactive directory and an Open Application Interface (OAI)
driven call queue, the operators are able to process a high call volume with minimal effort and
time expenditure in today’s sophisticated business environment. For example, an operator can
answer an incoming call from one of many queues; find out to whom the caller wishes to
speak, begin typing that name to select it in the directory, and once selected, hit the <Enter>
key or click the entry to transfer the call. Additionally the caller could be parked, put on hold, or
sent to voice mail. Several operators can monitor the same queues and share the same
directory for call operation. These few examples barely scratch the surface of the capabilities
and features available for the system operator positions.
Page 7-8
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
BAS: Benefits
ƒ
Centralized company database that can link and replicate with other databases, including
AimWorX.
ƒ
Sound playback and recordings on the operator telephone.
ƒ
Provides operators with the ability to do more than answer the phone, since the client resides on
a PC.
Meet-me paging to enhance operator productivity.
Unlimited, global parked calls.
Different greetings/displays available for DID calls to the operator, which is especially useful in a
multi-tenant environment.
Single key call processing.
Directory dialing for accuracy.
Look ahead status from the directory that saves time, key strokes and enhances decisionmaking.
Sort and searchable directory by key fields.
Configurable screens for each operator.
Time stamped recordings with caller ID and optional note field that can be saved permanently or
used for sampling quality.
Queue types allowing flexibility to answer certain call types first if so desired.
Configurable information about the caller is displayed upon answering the call allowing
personalized service.
MAPI compliant e-mail integration.
Ability to set/cancel call forwarding and DND for other phones within the business.
Delay announcements capabilities to ensure callers are informed and provided other options
during busy call times.
Configurable night station or announcement when operators are not logged in.
Flexible DID number assigned to each operator that follows them regardless of what PC/phone
they use to log in.
Optional statistics package to track queue and operator statistics (next release).
Optional integration with OpenWorX Location Status Information to see an employee's
availability, return time, and alternate phone number.
Optional integration with OpenWorX Dialer providing Dterm users’ access to the same employee
and external database .It is searchable by site, department or name.
Optional integration with OpenWorX Short Text Messaging to notify wireless users of
messages.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 7- 9
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
Business Attendant System: Directory
Both an internal directory and an external directory exist in the BAS system. The internal
directory lists employees within the company, while the external directory stores numbers
outside the company. External numbers are usually numbers that are frequently called, or
information about people or companies that frequently call the main listed number. When
answering a call from one of these external numbers, fields from this entry are displayed to the
operator, providing more information than just the 10-digit caller ID. Below is an example of
the internal directory screen.
Many of the title bars at the top of the screen are capable of producing a directory sort by
clicking the mouse on the title bar. The information displayed is configurable by the
administrator. There are several different fields available for display and four of these fields
can be user-defined. This window is also expandable for viewing more fields. The “Search”
field searches dynamically as the information is typed in the field selected.
The directory is also capable of being partitioned by company. The drop down box at the top
of the window displays entries from a particular company, or all companies in the system. This
is particularly useful in shared tenant installations, where a single attendant group serves
multiple companies.
Page 7-10
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
Business Attendant System: Speed Dials Pad
Another versatile screen is the Speed Dial pad shown below:
Up to forty (40) Speed Dial fields are available for each attendant. Dragging an entry from the directory
onto the speed dial button automatically programs these fields. Another great feature of these buttons
is that they act as Busy Lamp Fields (BLF). When that user’s phone is off hook, the speed dial button
becomes red and when that phone is ringing, the speed dial button blinks red. By right clicking the
button, the operator can enable or disable monitoring, as well as change the name, forward the
person’s Dterm, set DND, or initiate a screened, blind, or announced voice call. This is useful for
an operator who also has a set of VIPs for whom they answer calls.
Business Attendant System: Additional Features
As the BAS continues to grow, more features will be added and existing features will be
enhanced. Currently, there are several adjunct applications under development for use
directly with the BAS directory. Apart from the directory, another powerful feature integrated
into the BAS client is the ability to record conversations and playback greetings over the
telephone. With the addition of a Dterm Play/Record Module, the client will be able to
automatically record voice conversations and instruct the software to save the last specified
number of conversations. Conversations are saved as .wav files, which are time; date
stamped and rotated in a circular buffer. When it is determined that a call needs to be saved,
the operator simply presses the “Save Recordings” button and the selected call is
automatically saved. Conversely, the operator can save a set of greetings to be played back
immediately every time the phone is answered via the BAS. Greetings playback can be
determined based on “internal” or “external” calls, on groups of caller IDs, or even morning or
afternoon. A different greeting can be recorded for any of the scenarios above allowing the
attendant to present a pleasant and consistent greeting over the telephone.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 7- 11
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
Business Attendant System: CCIS Network Information
The following is a diagram of a simple CCIS network using the BAS.
The Business Attendant System can run in the above-pictured environment with the following
limitations.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Calls transferred from the BAS Client to a Dterm on the second PBX will not recall to the BAS
operator.
The Dterm in the second PBX cannot be monitored by the BAS system and the monitored speed
dials and status checks in the directory will not function for those extensions.
The system will force supervised transfers to CCIS extensions to ensure callers do not get
transferred to a busy remote extension. Operators need to listen for ring back tone or busy
tone, and then either completes the call or return back to the source caller as appropriate.
The message waiting lamp cannot be controlled on remote Dterms.
Using multi-node capabilities, the operator can now view station data via the directory or
speed dials to extensions in other PBXs. The other PBXs must have OAI and a TCP/IP
connection back to the OpenWorX server. Additional OpenWorX software is also
required per PBX to be added on the server (Short Text Message and Nurse Call do not
have multi-node capabilities).
Page 7-12
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position
Business Attendant System: Attendant PC Minimum Hardware Requirements
Item
Operating System
Processor
Memory
Hard Drive Space
Additional
Hardware
Description
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or Server, or Microsoft
Windows XP Professional. (Latest Critical Updates for both)
350 MHz Pentium II Class Processor or higher
256 MB of RAM
1 GB Hard Drive
Ethernet Network Interface Card
CD ROM Drive
Monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
Business Application Environment
Description
Business AE NEAX 2000
OWX BAS 1 Attendant (12 user Max)
OWX Dialer
OWX Incoming Call Assistant (ICA)
OWX Location Status Information (LSI)
OWX Message Reader
OWX TAPI Link Single PBX
OWX TAPI Link Multi-Switch
OWX Personal Call Assistant (100 user Max)
OWX Group Call Forward Control (GCFC)
OWX Name Display
OWX Short Text Messaging (STM) Email Interface
OWX Short Text Messaging (STM) TAP Interface
OWX Short Text Messaging (STM) Email Upgrade
OWX Short Text Messaging (STM) TAP Upgrade
Hardware Requirements
Description
Qty
PZ-M606-A
1
Remarks
Ether card 1 per system
For Peer to Peer connection
and MAT/OAI
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 7- 13
Chapter 8 System Administration
System Administration
In this system, the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) or Maintenance Administration
Terminal (MAT) is used for programming the system data. The CAT is a digital multi-function
telephone (Dterm) which is equipped with function keys, a dial pad and LCD and interfaces with
the system via the MP card. The Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) is a personal
computer that provides an interface to the PBX via the system CPU card. The MAT PC must
have the MATWorXTM program properly installed to communicate with the PBX. MATWorX is
required for system software registration and activation.
Password Entry
In a system with password service, a maintenance person is required to enter an authorization
level number (Password Level) and appropriate password prior to engaging in programming
the system data with the MAT/CAT. A maximum of eight (8) Password Levels can be set up.
The number of commands that the maintenance person can access is determined by the
Password Level.
Resident System Program
This resident system program generates system data automatically according to the system
hardware configuration, thereby providing immediate operation and shorter programming time.
When activated, the system scans hardware configuration (such as line/trunk card location)
and assigns the system data (such as station numbers, trunk numbers, etc.) according to a
predetermined generic program assignment.
Service Conditions
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
This service is applicable for equipment installed in PIM0 through PIM3.
Data for any vacant slot is not assigned.
Virtual stations are not assigned.
A line/trunk card (PN-AUCA/PN-DK00/PN-CFTA/PN-CFTB/PN-2AMP/PN-4DAT/PN4RSTF/PN-4VCTI/PN-32IPLA) is not assigned, even if mounted.
An application card is not assigned, even if mounted.
No tenant assignment is provided. (Tenant 01 is assigned)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 8- 1
Chapter 8 System administration
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT)
The Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) is a digital multi-function telephone (Dterm) which
is equipped with function keys, a dial pad and LCD and interfaces with the system via the MP
card. Programming of the system can be done from selected Multiline Terminals with LCD.
The designated Multiline Terminals can be placed in program mode, and system data can then
be changed. To prevent unauthorized changes, password levels are assigned, providing
authorization for access to certain areas of programming and denying access to others.
Service Conditions
1. Programming from a Customer Administration Terminal can only be accomplished when the system
is online.
2. All Multiline Terminals with LCD scanned during initialization will be Customer Administration
Terminals.
3. The commands CM00 (Office Data All Clear) and CM01 (Office Data Partial Clear) cannot be
accessed from the CAT. The CAT cannot delete itself from the system program.
4. Only two Customer Administration Terminals can be in program mode at the same time.
5. The data that can be changed from the CAT can be limited by the Password level assigned. There
are eight levels of Passwords that can be assigned in system programming. The relation between
Password level and access to available commands is also assigned in system programming.
6. A password can consist of a maximum of any eight digits with the following limitation: The password
cannot be CCCCCCCC or FFFFFFFF.
7. Caution should be exercised when assigning Passwords to command authorization levels. If a
password is forgotten, access to system programming will be limited and a system initialization with
subsequent programming may be required.
8. When the Customer Administration Terminal is offline for programming, it cannot access normal
terminal functions.
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)
The Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) is a personal computer (PC) that is used for
programming and maintenance of the NEAX 2000 IPS system. The MAT can provide a
Maintenance Printout, Peg Count information and fault message output. Additionally, the MAT
can be used to Remove and Restore to service any station in the system and can read or save
system data from disks. The MAT can assign the Key Data for the Attendant Console. The
MAT requires an IBM or compatible PC running Microsoft Windows 98, NT 4.0, 2000 or XP
and MATWorX.
MATWorX is a Graphical User Interface (GUI) program that provides an efficient method for
manipulating the PBX database. This program contains extensive help files, Usage Wizards
and Tool Tips, with hyperlinks imbedded in the text. The hyperlinks provide quick access to the
appropriate Add-In modules. Add-In modules provide a user-friendly, intuitive method for
customizing the PBX database.
MATWorX add-ins makes it easy for you to add or remove PBX features at any time. Add-ins
are modular components that let you program specific features such as Caller ID, Station
Assignments, Day/Night Modes, and Line Key Assignments.
Page 8- 2
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 8 System Administration
Because add-ins are modular, you can add, remove, and upgrade them individually from within
MATWorX. Add-ins let you modify your PBX's features without having to upgrade the
MATWorX application itself. MATWorX also gives you a convenient way to launch other
commonly used applications, such as Microsoft Word or Excel, directly from its Toolbar.
Connecting to a PBX
There are three ways to connect your PC to an NEC PBX:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Use a modem to establish a dial-up connection.
Use a serial cable to establish a direct connection.
Use TCP/IP over your Local Area Network (LAN), Requires DeviceServerWork (DSW)
The method you use depends on how you installed and configured the device to which you
want to connect. A serial cable direct connection offers better performance than a modem
connection, but requires that the PC and device be within 50 feet of each other. A TCP/IP
connection offers excellent performance and flexibility but requires a network connection to
both your PC and the device.
PBX Configuration Wizard
The PBX Configuration Wizard is a custom tool in MATWorX that enables you to establish the
proper communication settings between your computer and the NEAX2000 IPS. The Wizard
asks you simple questions and then uses the information to automatically configure the
connection for the PC and the PBX.
Service Conditions
1. Connection through modems is available, providing remote maintenance capabilities.
2. MATWorX can be connected to the system either directly or remotely. Direct connection is through
the RS connector on the MP card. Remote connection is available via either an internal modem on
the MP card or an external modem for high speed. Remote connection via the internal modem is
through the COT card. Connection between the modem and the COT is accomplished through
internal switching of the TDSW. Remote connection via an external modem is through the MP card.
3. The following functions can be performed from MATWorX:
ƒ System, station, and trunk data entry, change, and copy.
ƒ Loading, saving, and verification of system data to and from a disk.
ƒ ROM check readout of generic program.
ƒ Display of fault/fault cleared messages.
ƒ On-site or remote access to the system.
ƒ Printout of system data (when printer is connected to PC).
ƒ Display and setting of system clock/calendar.
ƒ Numbering Plan
ƒ Least Cost Routing (LCR)
ƒ System initialize
ƒ UCD/Station Hunting/Call Pickup – Group
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 8- 3
Chapter 8 System administration
Service Conditions (Con’t)
4. The PC used with MATWorX must have an RS-232C port, and cannot be located more than 50 feet
(15m) from the system when connected on premises.
5. When stations or trunks are expanded, moved, or changed, office data for a Multiline Terminal
key/station/ trunk can be copied and multiple assignments of related office data is possible.
MACH Script Editor
This is a powerful timesaving tool that enables you to create a list of NEAX2000 IPS
commands that perform tasks in the PBX. This list is referred to as a script, which can be
saved and run at anytime. You can also use the MACH Script Editor to perform many other
operations.
Traffic Management
The NEAX2000 IPS provides traffic management reports to be used for overall analysis of
system performance. MATWorX is used to request and display the type of report, sample
measurement time period, and time increments of reports. Type of Traffic Measurement
Reports:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Number of successful attempts at outgoing access, based on trunk route.
Number of times all trunks were busy, based on trunk route.
Number of incoming calls, based on trunk route.
Number of incoming calls connected to busy tone and then trunk abandoned.
Quantity of incoming calls with no answer and trunk abandoned, based on trunk route.
Number of times a push button register was connected, on a system basis.
Number of times all push button registers were busy, on a system basis.
Number of outgoing connections using modem trunks, based on modem trunk group.
Number of incoming connections using modem trunks, based on modem trunk group.
Number of times all modem trunks were busy, based on modem trunk group.
Number of times the Conference circuits were used, on a system basis.
Number of times Conference circuits were all busy, on a system basis.
Number of times an incoming call was Call Forwarded-No Answer to the Attendant or another
station (on DID, Tie or DIT lines), on a system basis.
Number of Tandem Connections, on a system basis.
Number of times a push button register was connected to a trunk, based on trunk route.
Number of Attendant calls including recalls, on a system basis.
Number of station-to-station calls, on a system basis.
Number of times senders were all busy, on a system basis.
Number of ring generator capacity overflows, on a system basis.
Number of DTE to DTE connections, on a system basis. (UCD Peg Count)
Number of answered calls by UCD group.
Number of incoming calls by UCD group.
Number of waiting calls for a pre-determined time into queuing mode on the UCD group.
Number of incoming calls to all busy stations in the UCD group.
Number of answered calls in the UCD group.
Page 8- 4
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 8 System Administration
MATWorX PC Requirements
MATWorX requires an IBM or compatible PC running Microsoft Windows®98, ME, 2000 or XP.
Minimum Requirements
Recommended
Pentium III 350 MHz processor
128 MB RAM
Available hard-disk space
before installation:
Pentium IV 1 GHz processor
256 MB RAM
Available hard-disk space
before installation:
200 MB - Full Installation
MATWorX uses about 100 MB
200 MB - Minimum installation
MATWorX uses about 100 MB
SVGA monitor, 800 x 600
15” SVGA monitor, 1024 x
resolution
768 resolution
3.5” diskette drive, CD-ROM drive
Valid NEAX hardware connection
(direct serial, modem, or TCP/IP)
Mouse
System Diagnostics
When a fault occurs in the system, an audible and visual indication will be given at the
following units:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
External alarm indicating unit
Fault messages reported at MATWorX for remote reporting
Alarm lamps in front of each package mounted in the frame
Self Diagnostic/System Messages
The NEAX 2000 IPS provides a sophisticated array of self-diagnostic routines that are
continually and automatically being performed. Various system messages are printed when a
fault occurs in a central processor system, switch network processors. Many other
miscellaneous system messages and change of key status messages are also printed.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 8- 5
Chapter 8 System administration
Remote Maintenance
This feature allows station and trunk changes or reassignments to be performed without a site
visit by service personnel, and can be used to retrieve fault codes prior to visiting a site. One
Remote Maintenance center can service an unlimited amount of systems, thus reducing the
amount of personnel to maintain each site, travel costs and customer billing for each site.
Service Conditions
1. The following additional equipment is required for this feature:
ƒ
ƒ
A modem at the maintenance center and one at each remote site. (When the internal
modem of the Main Processor (MP) is used, no modem at each remote site is required)
A cable for connection between the MP and the on-site modem. (When the internal modem
of the MP is used, the above cable is not required)
2. The internal modem of the MP is compatible with the following specifications:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ITU-T V.22 1200 bps
ITU-T V.22 bis 2400 bps
Bell 212A 1200 bps
ƒ
ƒ
ITU-T V.32 4800/9600 bps
ITU-T V.34 19.2 k/33.6 kbps
3. Any one of the following connections are also required for access to the modem:
ƒ
ƒ
A dedicated line
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
ƒ
ƒ
Attendant controlled transfer
Direct Inward Termination
4. The following operations can be executed from the Remote Maintenance location:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Page 8- 6
Retrieval of fault data
Retrieval of Peg Count information
Deletion or addition of system data (line, trunk, etc.) using a preprogrammed security
password
Data assignment by device number (stations, trunks, and Attendant Console)
Copying of station data from one station to other stations (when adding sequential stations in
groups)
Release / Reconnection of backup batteries
Display of station line status
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 8 System Administration
MA4000 Management System
MA4000 Management System is a web based, powerful voice server management
configuration suite. MA4000 offers centralized management for the NEAX 2000 IPS Voice
Server as well as simple and powerful tools for managing moves, adds and changes. MA4000
also offers flexibility and security and allows the end user to manage their voice server in the
same ways they manage their networks.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Web Browser Operation
Email Alarm Notification
Alarm Client Notification
LDAP Auto Provisioning Service
LDAP Authentication
Windows Authentication
IT Friendly Interface
Flexible Access Levels (Roles)
Application Program Interface (API & SDK)
Security
o HTTPS supported
o Audit Trail Logging
Customizable Portals
Command Line Interface
Integration to OpenWorX
Centralized Authentication Service (NEC CAS)
System Health Monitoring
Range programming that is schedulable
The MA4000 IPS Assistant gives the power of station management directly to the end-user.
Limited by access rights, an administrator can allow his users to manage their own phones.
Supported features include Button Programming, Call Forwarding and Speed Dial
Programming.
System Requirement
The following are the specifications for the Web Client machines. These machines only access the
MA4000 via a web browser and have no actual software installed on them.
WEB Client
Processor:
RAM:
Hard Drive Space:
Video:
Web Browser:
Input Device:
Operating System:
Minimum
Intel® Pentium® 450 MHz
64 MB
10 MB
800 x 600 SVGA Monitor
Any HTTP 1.1 compliant
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
Windows® 98 SE
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Recommended
Intel Pentium 700 MHz or higher
128 MB or more
100 MB or more
1024 x 768 SVGA Monitor
Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
Windows 2000/XP with latest Service
Pack
Page 8- 7
Chapter 8 System administration
The following requirements are for a single user system running the MA4000 Management System
software.
WEB Server
Minimum
Recommended
Processor: Intel® Pentium® 450 MHz
Intel Pentium 2 GHz or higher
RAM: 1 GB (1024 MB)
1 GB (1024 MB)
Hard Drive Space: 500 MB
500 MB or more
Video: 800 x 600 SVGA Monitor
1024 x 768 SVGA Monitor
Web Browser: Any HTTP 1.1 compliant
Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater
Drives: CD ROM
CD ROM
Input Device: Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
Ethernet Port: 10/100 MB
10/100 MB
USB Port: At least one unused USB Port
At least one unused USB Port
Microsoft Internet Information
Microsoft Internet Information
Web Server Used:
Server version 5.0 or higher
Server version 5.0 or higher
Windows® 2000/XP Professional Windows 2000/2003 Server with
Operating System:
with latest Service Pack
latest Service Pack
Microsoft® SQL MSDE with the
Microsoft SQL 2000 Personal or
Database: latest Service Pack
Standard depending on the OS
with the latest Service Pack
The following requirements are for a single user system running the MA4000 Management System
software.
WEB Server
Minimum
Recommended
Processor: Intel® Pentium® 450 MHz
Intel Pentium 2 GHz or higher
RAM: 512 MB
512 MB
Hard Drive Space: 500 MB
500 MB or more
Video: 800 x 600 SVGA Monitor
1024 x 768 SVGA Monitor
Web Browser: Any HTTP 1.1 compliant
Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater
Drives: CD ROM
CD ROM
Input Device: Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
Ethernet Port: 10/100 MB
10/100 MB
USB Port: At least one unused USB Port
At least one unused USB Port
Microsoft Internet Information
Microsoft Internet Information
Web Server Used:
Server version 5.0 or higher
Server version 5.0 or higher
Windows® 2000/XP Professional Windows 2000/2003 Server with
Operating System:
with latest Service Pack
latest Service Pack
Microsoft® SQL MSDE with the
Microsoft SQL 2000 Personal or
Standard depending on the OS
Database: latest Service Pack
with the latest Service Pack
Page 8- 8
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 8 System Administration
Equipment List
Part #
Description
0390911
MA4000 Management Software
0390912
MA4000 SQL Processor Lic (1)
0390913
MA4000 CUST Provided DB Option
0390914
MA4000 MSDE DB Option
0390901
MA4000 SQL 2000 Generic PKG
0390921
MA4000 IPS Manager Option
0390922
MA4000 IPS Ext Lic (1)
0390928
MA4000 IPS Assistant Lic. (1)
0390930
MA4000 LDAP APS Option
Notes
Includes all MA4000 Programs, System Manager and a
USB Key
Includes MS SQL 2000 Standard & Personal DB (1 CD)
Includes one processor license for unlimited client
browser access to the MA4000 Manager & Assistant
system
Enables MA4000 to work with a Customer Provided MS
SQL 2000 Database. Customer is responsible for
providing the database and for all licensing
Enables MA4000 to work with MSDE Database.
Simultaneous client-browser access is limited to five
Provides Microsoft SQL 2000 database CD with one
folder containing Personal Edition and one folder
containing Standard Edition
1 required when managing NEAX 2000 IPS Voice
Servers
1 License is required for each IPS extension to be
managed
1 License is required for each IPS extension using the
Desktop interface
Enables the MA4000 LDAP Auto Provisioning Service
(LAPS)
Optional Server and Hardware
Part #
542083
Logitech PS/2 Wheelmouse OEM Ivory
Notes
Includes 2.8 GHz Processor, 1GB RAM, 136GB Hard Drive, Windows 2003 Server
Operating System
Logitech Mouse
542084
Intel 104 Keyboard PS/2
Intel Keyboard
542085
NEC Acusync AS500 Monitor
NEC 15” Monitor
542086
2.8GHz/512KB CPU KIT (120Rd-1)
Additional CPU for 1U Servers
542087
512MB LP SDRAM (2x256MB)
KIT120Rd-1
Additional 512MB RAM for 1U Servers. 1U
Servers support up to 1.5GB of RAM
542080
HDD 36G 15K RPM HOTPLUG KIT
542082
1-CHANNEL U320 RAID w/64M
CACHE (120Lg)
542109
Description
120Rd-1 w/ Win2K3 Server
Note
Additional Hard Drive for 1U Servers. 1U
Servers support up to 3 Hard Drives.
RAID Controller for RAID 1 (Two Hard
Drives), RAID 5 (Three Hard Drives)
Note: Server above does not include Keyboard, Mouse or Monitor. These items must be added separately
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 8- 9
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Business/Hotel/Data Feature List
Account Code
Add-On Module
Alarm Indications
Alphanumeric Display
Analog Port Adapter
Announcement Service
Answer Key
Attendant Assisted Calling
Attendant Camp-On (Full and Semi-automatic)
Attendant Console
Attendant Called/Calling Name Display
Attendant Called/Calling Number
Attendant Call Selection
Attendant Console Lockout-Password
Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup and Cancel
Attendant Interposition Calling/Transfer
Attendant Lamp Check
Attendant Listed Directory Number
Attendant Loop Release
Attendant Programming
Attendant Training Jacks
Audible Indication Control
Call Processing Indication
Call Queuing
Call Splitting
Call Waiting Display
Common Route Indial
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Incoming Call Identification
Individual Trunk Access
Multi-Function Key
Multiple Console Operation
Pushbutton Calling - Attendant Only
Serial Call
Time Display
Trunk Group Busy Display
Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer By
Attendant
Attendant Delay Announcement
Attendant Lockout
Attendant Overflow
Attendant Override
Authorization Code
Automated Attendant
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Busy In/Busy Out - ACD
Call Waiting Indication - ACD
Delay Announcement - ACD
Hunt Past No Answer - ACD
Immediate Overflow - ACD
Priority Queuing - ACD
Queue Size Control - ACD
Silent Monitor - ACD
ACD w/Management Information System (MIS)
Automatic Camp-On
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
Automatic Recall
Automatic Wake-Up
Background Music
Back Up CPU
Bandwidth Control
Boss/Secretary Calling
Broker’s Call
Call Back
Call Forwarding
Attendant Call Forwarding Setup and Cancel
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding - Destination
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Multiple Call Forwarding - No Answer
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 1
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Business/Hotel/Data Feature List (Cont.)
Split Call Forwarding - All Calls
Split Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Split Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding - Logout (Dterm IP)
Call Forwarding - Override
Group Diversion
Call Park
Call Park - System
Call Park - Tenant
Call Pickup
Call Pickup - Direct
Call Pickup - Group
Call Pickup - Designated Group
Call Redirect
Call Transfer
Call Transfer - All Calls
Call Transfer - Attendant
Caller ID Class
Caller ID Display
Caller ID - Station
Camp-On
Centrex Compatibility
Check In/Check Out
CID Call Back
CID Call Routing
Class of Service
Code Restriction
Conference (Three/Four Party)
Conference (Six/Ten Party)
Conference (32 Party)
Group Call
Meet-Me Conference
Consecutive Speed Dialing
Consultation Hold
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT)
Data Line Security
Delayed Ringing
Diagnostics
Page 9- 2
Dial by Name
Dial Conversion
Direct Data Entry
Direct Digital Interface
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
DID Call Waiting
DID Digit Conversion
DID Name Display
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Call Forwarding Set by DISA
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)
Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field
(DSS/BLF) Console
Busy Out Status Console
Do Not Disturb Console
Message Waiting Console
Room Cutoff Console
Wake Up No Answer Console
Distinctive Ringing
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb - Group
Do Not Disturb - Hotel/Motel
Do Not Disturb - System
Dterm Assistant
Dterm IP
Elapsed Call Timer
Enhanced 911
Executive Calling
Executive Override
External Paging with Meet-Me
Fax Arrival Indicator
FAX over IP
Feature Activation from Secondary Extension
Flexible Line Key Assignment
Flexible Numbering Plan
Flexible Ringing Assignment
Forced Account Code
Group Call
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Business/Hotel/Data Feature List (Cont.)
Automatic Conference (6/10-Party)
2 Way Calling
Group Call by Pilot Number Dialing
Group Listening
Handsfree Answerback
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
Hold
Call Hold
Dual Hold
Exclusive Hold
Non-exclusive Hold
Hotel/Motel Attendant Console
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
Hotline - Inside/Outside
House Phone
Individual Attendant Access
Intercept Announcement
Intercom
Manual Intercom
Automatic Intercom
Dial Intercom
Internal Tone/Voice Signaling
Internal Zone Paging with Meet-Me
IP Enabled Dterm
Last Number Redial
Least Cost Routing - 3/6 Digit
Line Lockout
Line Preselection
Maid Status
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)
Message Center Interface (MCI)
Message Registration
Message Reminder
Message Waiting
Miscellaneous Trunk Access
CCSA Access
Code Calling Equipment Access
Dictation Equipment Access
Foreign Exchange (FX) Access
Radio Paging Equipment Access
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) Access
Multiple Terminal Attendant Position
Music On Hold
Night Service
Attendant Night Transfer
Call Rerouting
Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant Console
Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing
Day/Night Mode Change by System Clock
Night Connection - Fixed
Night Connection - Flexible
Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS)
Overflow for TAS Queue
Queue Limit for TAS
Off-Hook Alarm
Off-Premises Extensions
Open Application Interface (OAI)
Pad Lock
Periodic Time Indication Tone
Pooled Line Access
Power Failure Transfer
Priority Call
Privacy
Direct Privacy Release
Manual Privacy Release
Private Lines
Property Management System Interface
Proprietary Multiline Terminal
Automatic Idle Return
Called Station Status Display
Calling Name and Number Display
Dynamic Dial Pad
Handsfree Unit
I-Hold/I-Use Indication
Microphone Control
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 3
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Business/Hotel/Data Feature List (Cont.)
Multiple Line Operation
Mute Key
My Line Idle Display
Off-Hook Voice Announcement
Prime Line Pickup
Recall Key
Relay Control Function Key
Ring Frequency Control
Ringing Line Pickup
Soft Keys
Volume Control
Remote Hold
Remote PIM
Remote PIM over IP
Reserve Power
Resident System Program
Return Message Schedule Display
Room Cutoff
Room Status
Route Advance
Save and Repeat
Security Alarm
Set Relocation
Single Digit Dialing
SNMP
Software Line Appearance (Virtual Extensions)
Stack Dial
Station Hunting
Station Hunting - Circular
Station Hunting - Terminal
Station Hunting - Secretarial
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Station Speed Dialing
Step Call
Supervisory Control of Peripheral Equipment
System Clock Setup by Station Dialing
System Speed Dialing
Page 9- 4
Tenant Service
Tie Lines
Tie Line Tandem Switching
Timed Queue
Timed Reminder
Trunk - Direct Appearances
Trunk Queuing - Outgoing
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Busy In/Busy Out - UCD
Call Waiting Indication - UCD
Delay Announcement - UCD
Hunt Past No Answer - UCD
Immediate Overflow - UCD
Priority Queuing - UCD
Queue Size Control - UCD
Silent Monitor - UCD
Uniform Numbering Plan (UNP) - Voice and Data
Variable Timing Parameters
Voice Guide
Voice Mail Integration
Voice Mail Private Password
Voice Mail Transfer
VoIP
Whisper Page
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Business/Hotel/Data Feature Descriptions
Account Code
This feature, when used with Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR), allows station
users and Attendants to enter a cost
accounting or client billing code (up to 16
digits) into the system.
Add-On Module
This feature allows the Add-On Module to be
combined with a legacy Multiline Terminal
when there are insufficient line or trunk keys
provided at the Multiline Terminal. When the
DCU-60-1 unit keys are programmed as
line/trunk keys, the additional 25 lines/trunks
and the existing lines/trunks set for the
Multiline Terminal can be accessed directly
(maximum of 49 lines/trunks). The station
speed dialing function can be assigned for all
keys on the DCU-60-1 unit. Also, one of the
last 3 keys can be used as a Day/Night
change key.
Alarm Indications
Faults are indicated by the Major/Minor
(MJ/MN) lamps located on the AC/DC Power
Supply and, optionally, an external alarm
display unit.
Alphanumeric Display
The DTR-16DC-1 Multiline Terminals are
each equipped with a 3-line, 24-character
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). These displays
are used to provide alphanumeric information
including clock/calendar and call processing
information.
Station Application All Multiline Terminals with
an LCD display.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Analog Port Adapter
This feature allows an APR-U/AP(R)-R or
APA-U/AP(A)-R unit combined with a legacy
Multiline Terminal to connect to an analog
terminal such as an analog telephone,
Modem, and PC with built-in Modem. There
are two communication modes for the
terminal connected via the Analog Port
Adapter as shown below:
1. Single Port Mode
A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal share
the same port. In this mode, the Multiline Terminal
and the analog terminal cannot be used
simultaneously.
2. Dual Port Mode
A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal use
different ports. In this mode, the Multiline Terminal
and the analog terminal can be used
simultaneously.
Announcement Service
This feature allows station users to record
messages on Digital Announcement Trunk
(DAT) cards. When a station user dials the
feature access code for this feature, the user
receives the corresponding message from the
system.
Answer Key
An Answer Key is provided on all Multiline
Terminals. The Answer Key can be used to
answer incoming calls on outside lines, and
primary or secondary extensions. When the
Answer Key is used to answer an incoming
call with a call in progress, the first party is
placed on hold and the second party is
connected. If the Answer Key is depressed
while in a three-party call, the user can
alternate between each party and a Broker's
Call is established.
Page 9- 5
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Attendant Assisted Calling
This feature allows a station user to ask an
Attendant for assistance in originating a call.
Three methods are available: non-delay,
delay, and passing dial tone.
Attendant Camp-on (Full and Semiautomatic)
The Full Automatic Camp-on feature permits
the Attendant to hold an incoming call in a
special mode when the desired station for the
transfer is busy. The Attendant sends a
Camp-On tone to the busy station. When that
station becomes idle, it is automatically
alerted and connected to the waiting party.
The Semi-automatic Camp-on feature works
similarly to full automatic except when the
station becomes idle the call on Camp-on
recalls to the Attendant. Once the Attendant
answers the Camp-on recall the station is
then called and the call is connected.
Attendant Console (SN716 DESKCON)
The Attendant Console (SN716 DESKCON)
operates on a switched-loop basis with a
maximum of 6 Attendant loops terminating at
each console on the associated Interface
card. The Attendant uses these loops for
answering, originating, holding, extending,
and reentering calls. When Attendant loop
release is used, the number of loops is
effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for
each console.
Attendant Called/Calling Name Display
This feature provides a display of the
calling/called party's name on the Attendant
Console LCD for Attendant Called/Calling
Name Display. On attendant-to-station calls,
the LCD display the name assigned to the
primary extension of the station. On
attendant-to-trunk calls, the LCD displays the
name assigned to the trunk route of the trunk.
Page 9- 6
Attendant Called/Calling Number
This feature provides a display of the station
number and station name on the Attendant
Console during an Attendant-to-station
connection. During an Attendant-to-trunk
connection, the same display shows the trunk
route designation and a trunk identification code
(4 digits).
Attendant Call Selection
This feature allows assignment of keys on the
Attendant Console to particular types of trunk
routes (such as WATS or FX) and particular types
of service calls (such as Attendant recalls,
intercept calls, etc.). LEDs indicate the type of
incoming call and pressing the associated key
allows the Attendant to answer the calls in any
order.
Attendant Console Lockout-Password
This feature allows the Attendant Console to be
set into a lockout mode. This diables the console
from originating or receiving calls and setting or
resetting service features. To return the Console
to its manual operating condition a password is
required.
Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel
The Attendant has the ability to enter and remove
individual stations from Do Not Disturb (DND).
Additionally, the Attendant can set one
preassigned group of stations into, or out of, Do
Not Disturb.
Attendant Interposition Calling/Transfer
This feature allows any Attendant to directly
converse with another Attendant and also allows
Attendants to transfer calls from their console to
another Attendant's console in systems where
Multiple Console Operation has been provided.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Attendant Lamp Check
This function is used to check the status of keys,
lamps, and LCDs mounted on the Attendant
Console to verify that various operations of the
Attendant Console are functioning normally. The
check is done by a preset procedure.
Attendant Listed Directory Number
This feature provides a display of the Listed
Directory Number on the Attendant Console when
the operator has answered a Listed Directory
Number call.
Attendant Loop Release
This feature allows an Attendant Console loop to
become available for a second call as soon as the
Attendant has directed the first call to a station,
even if that station does not answer.
Attendant Programming
This function is allowed only for the Attendant
Console (SN716) and is used to execute DISA
code set up, speed dial programming, and system
clock set up operations.
Attendant Training Jacks
The Attendant Console can be equipped with two
headset/handset jacks using an optional adapter.
Two jacks are equipped on the adapter and can
be used for training new operators.
Audible Indication Control
This feature allows the Attendant to adjust the
volume of audible indications received at the
Attendant Console.
Call Processing Indication
This feature provides visual indications of all calls
being processed or awaiting processing at the
Attendant Console.
Call Queuing
This feature provides the Attendant the ability to
handle a series of exchange network calls in the
order of their arrival, (first in, first out) thereby
eliminating unnecessary delays.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Call Splitting
This feature allows the Attendant to confer
privately with one party on an Attendant handled
connection without the other party overhearing.
Call Waiting Display
This feature provides a visual indication to the
Attendant when one or more calls are waiting to
be answered.
Common Route Indial
This feature allows assignment of incoming DID
calls to different Attendant Call Selection keys
based on the last 4 digits dialed into the system.
Up to eight individual Listed Directory Numbers
can be assigned in system programming. When
an incoming call to any of these trunks is
received, an Attendant Call Selection key will flash
and the LCD display will indicate the Listed
Directory Number associated with that trunk route.
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
This feature provides a display of the company
name on the Attendant Console when the
Attendant has answered a Listed Directory
Number or a Tie Line call.
Incoming Call Identification
Incoming calls are identified by various means.
Refer to Attendant Called/Calling Number,
Attendant Call Selection, Attendant Source Key,
Attendant Listed Directory Number and Common
Route Indial Features and Specifications.
Individual Trunk Access
The Attendant Console is provided with the ability
to access each individual trunk by dialing an
associated identification code. This allows
detection of faulty trunks during regular testing or
after complaints. The Customer Administration
Terminal (CAT) or Maintenance Administration
Terminal (MAT) has the capability to then busy
out the trunk until repair is made.
Page 9- 7
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Multi-Function Key
This feature allows the top row of keys on the
Attendant Console to perform and display multiple
functions in accordance with the status of call
processing.
Multiple Console Operation
This feature allows more than one Attendant
Console to operate within the same system.
Pushbutton Calling - Attendant Only
This feature permits an operator to place all calls
over Dual-Tone, Multi-Frequency (DTMF) lines
from the pushbutton keypad on the Attendant
Console.
Serial Call
This feature is activated by the Attendant
when an incoming calling party wishes to
speak with more than one internal party.
When the internal station subsequently
disconnects from the Central Office line call,
the Central Office party automatically rings
back to the same Attendant.
Time Display
This feature provides a digital time display on the
Attendant Console LCD.
Trunk Group Busy Display
A visual indication is supplied to the Attendant
when all trunks in a particular trunk group are
busy.
Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer By
Attendant
This feature allows an Attendant to transfer an
incoming or outgoing call on one trunk to an
outgoing trunk and exit the connection before the
called party answers.
Page 9- 8
Attendant Delay Announcement
This feature provides an announcement, via a
Digital Announcement Trunk Card, to external
calls that are not answered by the attendant
within a predetermined time.
Attendant Lockout
This feature denies an Attendant the ability to
reenter an established trunk or station
connection without being recalled by that
station after the call is put in consultation hold.
Attendant Overflow
When an incoming call, which has terminated
from a trunk to the Attendant Console,
remains unanswered after a predetermined
time period, this feature provides a change to
Night Service for that particular trunk.
Attendant Override
This feature permits an Attendant to enter a
busy connection (station or trunk) using the
Attendant Console. When this feature is
activated, a warning tone is sent to the
connected parties after which, they are
connected with the Attendant in a three-way
bridge.
Authorization Code
An Authorization Code is a numerical code
which will temporarily change a station’s
Class of Service to a Class of Service
assigned to that Authorization Code. This new
Class of Service allows access to trunks,
dialing patterns, and/or features that would
otherwise be restricted.
Automated Attendant
This feature allows the system to answer
incoming trunk calls. The system will supply a
message and/or dial tone to the caller. The
caller can then dial the desired extension
number and be directed to that station.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature
permits incoming calls to terminate to a
prearranged group of stations. Calls are
distributed in the order of arrival to idle
terminals within the group, based on which
terminal has been idle the longest period of
time. Stations may log on/log off from the
ACD group. Supervisor stations may monitor
conversations of agents.
Immediate Overflow - ACD
This feature allows a call directed to an ACD
group to immediately overflow to another ACD
group, upon encountering an “all agents busy”
condition.
Priority Queuing - ACD
This feature allows the system to prioritize
incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station
basis, when the call enters an ACD queue. When
a call is considered as a priority, it is placed at the
beginning of the queue.
Busy In/Busy Out - ACD
This feature allows an agent in an ACD group to
log their station into or out of the group. This
allows the system to control whether a call
directed to the pilot number of the ACD group
goes to that station or not. This prevents incoming
calls from being directed to stations at which no
agent is available.
Queue Size Control - ACD
On incoming DID/Tie line calls, the system can be
assigned a threshold which limits the number of
calls in queue. When the queue size threshold is
exceeded, incoming callers are connected to busy
tone.
Silent Monitor - ACD
Call Waiting Indication - ACD
This feature provides a visual indication when an
incoming call to an ACD group is placed in queue,
due to an “all agents busy” condition. On external
relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline
Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting
Indication.
Delay Announcement - ACD
This feature allows the system to provide a
recorded announcement to an incoming caller
placed in queue to an ACD group. A single
announcement, or two separate announcements,
can be provided.
Hunt Past No Answer - ACD
This feature provides the ACD group supervisor
with the ability to monitor a call to an ACD agent.
The silent monitor function gives no indication (as
an option) to either the agent or the calling party.
Automatic Call Distribution with
Management Information System (MIS)
The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with
Management Information System (MIS)
feature provides a management information
system to be used in conjunction with the
built-in ACD features of the system. The MIS
incorporates a supervisor's terminal for realtime monitoring of agent activity, amber and
red alarms, and hard-copy summary reports.
This feature allows calls targeted at an ACD group
to hunt past an agent’s station, after a no answer
condition, if the agent forgets to log off of the
group and the agent is unable (or not available) to
answer the call.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 9
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Automatic Camp-on
An incoming Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
call which has been terminated to a busy
station can be Camped-On automatically.
When the busy station becomes idle, the
station is automatically called and connected
to the camped on incoming trunk call.
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
This feature receives the calling subscriber's
number automatically sent from T1 network
using MF signaling and displays the calling
number on the LCD of a Multiline Terminal
and an Attendant Console.
Automatic Recall
This feature works as a timed reminder. When
a call remains on Hold, Camp-On or ringing
unanswered for a fixed interval after being
transferred, the station that initiated the hold,
transfer, or Camp-On is automatically alerted.
Automatic Wake-up
This feature allows the system to be
programmed to automatically call guest rooms
or administration stations at specified times.
Upon answering, the guest is connected to a
recorded announcement or music source. A
printout of unanswered or blocked Automatic
Wake-Up attempts for each guest room is
provided using the Hotel/Motel printer.
Back Up CPU
NEAX 2000 IPS provides a dual CPU system
with two MP cards. When Emergency
Notification from hardware is detected, the
changeover from an active MP card to a
standby MP card will occur. If the active MP
card becomes out of order for any reason, the
standby MP card starts up automatically. The
standby MP card employs a Cold Standby
System that will restart initialization by the
changeover from the active MP card.
Bandwidth Control
This feature allows to assign an available
bandwidth threshold for VoIP traffic within a
Location and between Locations, and to
restrict outgoing/incoming calls when the VoIP
traffic exceeds the threshold. The Location is
a group of VoIP devices (IP Enabled Dterm, IPPAD, or Peer to Peer IP trunks (built-in IP
trunks)), which the same VoIP
communications parameters such as codec
selection list and ToS field value are
assigned.
When the VoIP traffic over CCIS exceeds the
threshold, the call can be routed to legacy
trunks (TDM network). When exceeding the
threshold, the system can store fault
information and provide external alarm
indication.
Background Music
Background Music can be provided on a dialup basis over legacy Multiline Terminal
speakers. Incoming voice announcements,
ringing and recalls override Background
Music. Up to 10 music programs can be
offered.
Boss / Secretary Calling
A secretary with a Multiline Terminal can use
an appearance of the boss' extension to
screen calls for that extension, and announce
and/or transfer calls to that extension.
Additionally, the secretary can call the boss
during a busy condition and send a Message
Waiting Indication to the boss' station.
Page 9- 10
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Broker's Call
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal or
Single Line Telephone user to alternate
between two parties, talking to one party while
the other party remains on Hold on the same
line. The Multiline Terminal user uses the TRF
or ANS key to alternate between the two
parties. The Single Line Telephone user uses
the Hold feature to alternate between the two
parties.
Call Back
This feature allows a calling party to set an
automatic Call Back when a busy or no
answer condition is encountered. When the
busy station becomes idle, the station that set
the Call Back will be called. In case of Call
Back no answer, the Call Back to the setting
station is initiated immediately after the called
station goes on hook after making a call or
accessing a feature.
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding allows calls directed to a
station to be routed to another station, an
Attendant, an outside number or voice mail
equipment. The types of Call Forwarding
provided are:
Attendant Call Forwarding Setup and Cancel
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding - Destination
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Multiple Call Forwarding - No Answer
Split Call Forwarding - All Calls
Split Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Split Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding – Logout (Dterm IP)
Call Forwarding - Override
Group Diversion
Attendant Call Forwarding Set-up and Cancel
All of the various types of Call Forwarding can be
set up or canceled from both Attendant Consoles.
Call Forwarding - All Calls
This feature allows all calls directed to a particular
extension to be rerouted to an alternate
destination, regardless of the busy or idle status of
the extension. Call Forwarding - All Calls can be
set by an Attendant Console, the individual station
user, a Multiline Terminal with a secondary
appearance of the station's extension, or from
another station (which can program itself to be the
destination of the rerouting).
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 11
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Split Call Forwarding - Busy Line
This feature permits a call to a busy extension to
be routed to a pre-designated station, Attendant
Console, or voice mail equipment. Call Forwarding
- Busy Line can be set or canceled by an
Attendant Console, the individual station user, or a
Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of
the station's extension.
This feature allows internal and external calls to a
busy extension to be rerouted to separate
destinations. Destinations may be an internal
station, Attendant Console, or voice mail.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
This feature reroutes calls to extensions which do
not answer. These calls can be rerouted to
another station, an Attendant Console or voice
mail equipment. Call Forwarding - No Answer can
be set by the individual station user, an Attendant
Console, or by a Multiline Terminal with a
secondary appearance of the station's extension.
Call Forwarding - Destination
This feature allows a station (A) user to set Call
Forwarding - All Calls from another station (B)
within the system, to the user's station (A).
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls
When a forwarded call is rerouted to a station that
has also set a Call Forward, the call can be
forwarded to another station. A call can be
forwarded up to a maximum of five times, as
specified in system programming.
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line
This feature permits a call to a busy station to be
forwarded, multiple times, to a pre-designated idle
station.
Multiple Call Forwarding - No Answer
This feature permits a call to an unanswered
station, the ability to be forwarded multiple times
to a pre-designated station that does not have Call
Forwarding - No Answer set or to the Attendant
Console.
Split Call Forwarding - All Calls
This feature allows all internal and external calls to
a busy extension to be rerouted to different
destinations individually, regardless of the busy or
idle status of the extension.
Page 9- 12
Split Call Forwarding - No Answer
This feature allows internal and external calls, to
extensions that do not answer, to be rerouted to
separate destinations individually.
Call Forwarding – Logout (Dterm IP)
This feature allows a call terminated to an IP
station in logout status to be forwarded to a
predestinated station, outside number, Attendant
Console or Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT).
This feature is also applicable to the IP stations
when the LAN cable is pulled out or the power is
off.
Call Forwarding - Override
This feature allows the call forward destination
station to call the station which set call forward.
The call forward setting will be ignored.
Group Diversion
This feature allows all calls terminated to an
extension that are not answered within a
predetermined time to be forwarded to a predesignated station.
Call Park
This feature enables a station user or
attendant to place a call into pre-designated
Call Park locations. The station user or
attendant is then free to process other calls.
This feature is available system wide and for
individual tenants.
Call Park - System
When a call is parked by Call Park-System, the
call can be retrieved from Call Park by any station
in the system.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Call Park - Tenant
When a call is parked by Call Park - Tenant, the
call can be retrieved from Call Park-Tenant by any
station within the tenant from which the call was
originally parked.
Call Pickup
This feature enables a station user to answer
any call directed to another station, to a
station within the user's own Call Pickup
Group, or to a station within a different Call
Pickup Group. Three Call Pickup methods are
available: Call Pickup - Direct, Call Pickup Group, and Call Pickup - Designated Group.
Call Pickup - Direct
This method permits a station user to pickup a call
to any other station in the system by dialing a
specific Call Pickup feature access code and the
number of the called extension.
Call Pickup - Group
This method permits a station user to answer any
calls directed to other extensions in their preset
pickup group by dialing a Call Pickup - Group
feature access code.
Call Pickup - Designated Group
This method permits a station user to answer an
incoming call directed to another group by dialing
the Call Pick-up - Designated Group feature
access code and any station within the group to
which the ringing station belongs.
Call Redirect
Without answering incoming calls or held calls
that terminate to the line keys of a Multiline
Terminal, the calls can be transferred to a preprogrammed station or Voice Mail System.
Two transferring destination number can be
designated per tenant, in system data
programming. This feature can be used
together with the Caller ID Display feature.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Call Transfer
This feature permits a station user to transfer
a call to another station in the system directly,
or with assistance from the attendant.
Call Transfer – All Calls
This feature permits a station user to transfer
incoming or outgoing calls to another station within
the system without attendant assistance.
Call Transfer – Attendant
This feature permits a station user, while
connected to an internal or outside call, to signal
the Attendant and have the Attendant transfer the
call to another station within the system or to an
outside connection.
Caller ID Class
This feature receives the calling subscriber’s
name and number sent from a public network
using a MODEM signal and displays the name
or number on an LCD of a Multiline Terminal
and Attendant Console.
Caller ID Display
Without answering incoming calls or held calls
which terminate to the line keys of a Multiline
Terminal, the calling party's information can
be confirmed by the indications on the LCD.
Caller ID Station
This feature enables a user to connect an
analog telephone with Caller ID display
function, and provides the calling party’s
number and name on the display without
answering incoming calls.
Page 9- 13
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Camp-on
This feature provides selected stations or
outside calls with Camp-On capability to a
busy internal station. Two Camp-On methods
are provided. The call waiting method allows a
station or an outside party to camp itself on to
a busy station. The transfer method allows a
transferred outside call to be camped-on to a
busy station.
Centrex Compatibility
A combination of features allows full
integration of the NEAX2000 IPS with Centrex
service.
Check In / Check Out
When this feature is activated, the following
operations occur:
• Check In
Room Cutoff is cleared.
• Check Out
Room Status printout is supplied.
Do Not Disturb is reset.
Room Cutoff is set.
Message Waiting is reset.
Automatic Wake Up is cleared.
CID Call Back
When an incoming call is terminated from
station and trunk with Caller ID (calling
number information), and called station does
not answer, the calling number is registered to
the system memory and MW lamp is lit. After
the calling number is registered, by operating
from station, confirmation / delete / call back is
available. Besides, when the called station
answers, the calling number is also registered
to the Last Number Redial memory. The
station can search and call back to that
number by the operations of Last Number
Redial / Stack Dial feature.
Page 9- 14
CID Call Routing
This feature allows designating a call
terminating system based on the calling party
number received from the network.
Class of Service
This feature permits all stations to be
assigned a Class of Service in accordance
with the degree of system use desired. The
Class of Service is used to assign restrictions
for trunk access and feature access.
Code Restriction
This feature allows the NEAX2000 IPS to be
programmed to restrict outgoing calls
according to specific area and/or Central
Office codes. This restriction is controlled on
the basis of a three-digit area code or six-digit
area and office code numbering plan.
Conference (Three/Four Party)
This feature provides a station user the ability
to add-on another party (trunk or station) to a
call already in progress. Single Line
Telephone users can add up to one additional
party and Multiline Terminal users can add up
to two additional parties.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Conference (Six/Ten Party)
This feature permits a station user or
Attendant (conference leader) to establish a
Conference among as many as six or ten
parties (including the Conference leader).
Conference (32 Party)
This feature permits a station user (PS,
Multiline Terminal, or Single Line Telephone),
Attendant, or a trunk party to establish a
conference among as many as 32 parties
(including the conference leader). Two
Conference methods are available: Group
Call and Meet-Me Conference.
Group Call
This feature enables a station user (PS,
Multiline Terminal, Single Line Telephone)
within the system or a trunk party to establish
a conference among as many as 32 parties. It
also enables a station user to page a
maximum of 31 parties simultaneously,
excluding the conference leader. Three Group
Call methods are available: Group Call Automatic Conference, Group Call Broadcasting, and Group Call - 2 Way Calling.
Group Call - Automatic Conference
This feature enables a station user to establish a
conference among as many as 32 parties. From a
station or Attendant, a maximum of 31
stations/trunks can be paged simultaneously
except the conference leader.
Group Call - Broadcasting
This feature enables a station user to page a
maximum of 31 parties simultaneously except the
group call leader. After paged parties answer, the
leader can speak to the paged parties (the paged
parties only hear the leader's voice).
Meet Me Conference
This feature enables station users (PS, Multiline
Terminal, Single Line Telephone) within the
system, Attendants, or trunk parties to join a
conference of as many as 32 parties by dialing a
specific access code. The conference participants
are automatically connected to the conference
trunk. Conference participants may call in at
preset time or may be directed to do so by a
conference coordinator.
Consecutive Speed Dialing
For Speed Dialing, all digits are registered as
a Speed Dialing Code. In the case of
Consecutive Speed Dialing, the common
portion of the number is registered as a speed
calling code, and the remaining digits of each
number are dialed by each individual calling
station or by using a Station Speed Dial key
on a Multiline Terminal.
Consultation Hold
This feature permits a station user to hold any
incoming or outgoing CO call, tie line call, or
any intra-office call while originating a call to
another station user within the system.
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT)
In addition to the Maintenance Administration
Terminal (MAT), programming can be done
from selected Multiline Terminals with LCD.
The designated Multiline Terminals can be
placed in program mode, and system data
can then be changed. To prevent
unauthorized changes, password levels are
assigned, providing authorization for access
to certain areas of programming.
Group Call - 2 Way Calling
This feature enables a station user to page a
maximum of 31 parties simultaneously except the
group call leader. After one of the paged parties’
answers, paging becomes 2-way calling between
the leader and the first answered party and
automatically stops paging other parties.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 15
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Data Line Security
This feature allows line circuits that are used
for data transmission to be protected from
interruptions such as Attendant Camp-On,
Executive Override, and Attendant Override.
Delayed Ringing
This feature enables trunks and station lines
to ring immediately at the terminating station,
but also, after a programmable period of time
has elapsed, to ring at secondary Multiline
Terminals with that trunk or line appearance.
Diagnostics
To assist maintenance personnel, the
NEAX2000 IPS provides diagnostic
capabilities such as fault code generation,
device status information and alarm
information recording which can be accessed
from the Maintenance Administration Terminal
(MAT) or Customer Administration Terminal
(CAT).
Dial By Name
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user
to search for a desired number by name. The
number and name are registered in the
system and they are shown on Multiline
Terminal LCD. The Multiline Terminal user
can search for the desired number by name
using up or down soft keys. When the
Multiline Terminal user finds the desired
number, the call can be originated by pressing
the Line/Trunk key or going off hook.
Dial Conversion
The system can be assigned to use rotary
Dial Pulse (DP) or Dual Tone Multifrequency
(DTMF) trunks and stations. This feature
provides for the repeating of digits dialed by
the station user onto the C.O. trunks.
Page 9- 16
Direct Data Entry
This feature allows a maid or other hotel
personnel to enter numeric data to the
Property Management System (PMS), using
the guest room station for entry through dial
operation. The same numerical data can be
output to a Hotel/Motel Printer by system data
programming.
Direct Digital Interface
This service feature provides the capability to
connect trunks from the NEAX2000 IPS
directly to T1 carrier links using either a
private or public network.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
This feature provides for incoming calls from
the exchange network (except FX or WATS)
to reach any station within the system without
attendant assistance.
DID Call Waiting
This feature allows an incoming call on a DID
trunk or a tie line to automatically be Camped-On
to the destination station if the destination station
is busy.
DID Digit Conversion
This feature allows the NEAX2000 IPS to convert
the digits received from the serving C.O. to valid
station numbers when the C.O. numbering plan
differs from the desired station numbering plan.
DID Name Display
This feature allows name assignment for a DID
number received from a public network, and
displays the name on an LCD of a Multiline
Terminal or Attendant Console.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
This feature allows an outside caller to access
the system using an exchange network
connection without Attendant or station
assistance. The outside user may originate
calls over any or all of the system's facilities
such as WATS, FX, Tie Line or CCSA. The
outside user can also directly call stations and
access miscellaneous trunks for such features
as dictation access.
Call Forwarding Set by DISA
This feature allows an outside caller to set Call
Forwarding - All Calls by using Direct Inward
System Access (DISA) code.
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
This feature automatically routes incoming
network exchange calls directly to a preselected station without Attendant assistance.
The call can then be processed by the called
party. Three-party Conference, Call Transfer,
etc., are handled in the same manner as any
normal trunk call.
Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)
This feature permits any station user the
ability to gain access to the exchange network
by dialing an access code and receiving new
dial tone. The user may then proceed to dial
the desired exchange network number.
Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field
(DSS/BLF) Console
This feature allows a DCU-60-1 unit
associated with a legacy Multiline Terminal to
be used as a Direct Station Selection/Busy
Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) Console. When the
buttons on the DCU-60-1 unit are
programmed for Direct Station Selection
(DSS) buttons, up to 60 stations can be
directly accessed in addition to those already
appearing on the Multiline Terminal. Busy
status for each station is indicated by a red
LED associated with each button. In addition,
the DSS console can provide the following
functions:
• Message Waiting - Set/Cancel/Status
Display
• Do Not Disturb - Set/Cancel/Status
Display
• Automatic Wake Up No Answer - Status
Display/Cancel
• Agent Busy Out - UCD - Status Display
• Line Lockout - Status Display
• Room Cutoff - Set/Cancel/Status
Busy Out Status Console
This feature allows a DCU-60-1 unit associated
with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Busy Out
Status Console. This feature is activated by use of
a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF Console.
Busy Out Status for each station is indicated by a
red LED associated with each button.
Do Not Disturb Console
This feature allows a DCU-60-1 unit associated
with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Do Not
Disturb (DND) Console. This feature is activated
by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF
Console. DND set status for each station is
indicated by a green LED associated with each
button. In addition, the Multiline Terminal user can
set/cancel the DND status of other stations using
the DND Console.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 17
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Message Waiting Console
This feature allows a DCU-60-1 unit associated
with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Message
Waiting (MW) Console. This feature is activated
by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF
Console. The Message Waiting status for each
station is indicated by a green LED associated
with each button. In addition, the Multiline
Terminal user can set/reset MW status using the
MW Console.
Room Cutoff Console
This feature allows a DCU-60-1 unit associated
with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Room
Cutoff Console. This feature is activated by the
use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF
Console. The Room Cutoff status for each station
is indicated by a green LED associated with each
button. In addition, the Multiline Terminal user can
set/cancel Room Cutoff to another station using
the Room Cutoff Console.
Wake Up No Answer Console
This feature allows a DCU-60-1 unit associated
with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Wake Up
No Answer (WU) Console. This feature is
activated by a function mode key on a DSS/BLF
Console. The No Answer status for each station is
indicated by a flashing green LED associated with
each button.
Distinctive Ringing
This feature provides Distinctive Ringing
patterns to the station so that the station user
can distinguish between internal and external
incoming calls. This feature also enables the
LED associated with the line key of the
Multiline Terminal to flash in two colors
according to the kind of incoming call.
Page 9- 18
Do Not Disturb
This feature restricts incoming calls to a
station and can be set by an individual station
or from the Attendant Console. Placing a
station in Do Not Disturb (DND) does not
prevent a station from originating a voice or
data call or from receiving a data call. This
feature also allows a station to ensure privacy
from telephone interruptions while on an
outgoing call. Additionally, the Attendant
Console can place a group of stations in the
Do Not Disturb condition.
Do Not Disturb – Group
This feature allows the system to schedule to
set/cancel Do Not Disturb for a group of stations at
appointed time. The system has up to four
patterns of timetable, and each timetable has time
to set/cancel Do Not Disturb in a day (the time is
programmable by the system). The timetable can
be assigned for day of the week. The different
timetable can also be assigned for specific dates
of the year.
Do Not Disturb - Hotel/Motel
This feature allows the Attendant Console(s),
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument(s), guest
stations or Property Management System (PMS)
terminal(s) to place individual stations into Do Not
Disturb. Calls can be placed from stations set in
DND.
Do Not Disturb-System
This feature simultaneously restricts incoming
calls to a pre-assigned group of stations by
operation from the Hotel/ Motel Front Desk
Instrument(s). Attendant Console(s) and
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments can use the
DND OVR key to override this Do Not Disturb
setting.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Dterm Assistant
Dterm Assistant is Web-based software, which
resides on the server and provides end users
with the ability to maintain their Dterm Multiline
Terminals and the 2000 IPS telephony
features such as Speed Dialing from their
Web-enabled PCs. The Dterm Assistant
operates in a client – server environment and
can manage multiple 2000 IPS systems over
a Local Area Network (LAN)/Wide Area
Network (WAN).
Dterm IP
Dterm IP is an IP-based Multiline Terminal,
which provides a built-in capability of peer-topeer IP communications. The NEAX 2000
IPS system provides the Dterm IP with same IP
communications capabilities of an IP Enabled
Dterm (The IP Enabled Dterm is a Dterm Multiline
Terminal with an add-on IP adapter unit).
Elapsed Call Timer
This feature provides a display of the elapsed
time while a Multiline Terminal with LCD is
connected to any trunk.
Enhanced 911
This feature allows the PBX to transmit a
caller’s emergency service identification
information to an Enhanced 911 Emergency
system.
Executive Calling
This feature allows a station to be assigned a
VIP class. This provides special ringing to a
called station when that station is idle, and
automatic sending of three tone bursts to a
called station when that station is busy,
provided the call was originated from a station
assigned as VIP class.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Executive Override
This feature allows selected users to override
a busy condition on a called station. A
warning tone is transmitted to both stations in
the busy call before the busy condition is
overridden, and a three-party Conference is
then established.
External Paging with Meet-Me
This feature allows a station user or attendant
dial-access to local voice paging equipment
and connects both parties automatically after
the paged party has answered the page by
dialing an access code.
Fax Arrival Indicator
When a call from a C.O. line (Direct-InwardTermination, Direct-Inward-Dialing,
Automated Attendant), station or tie line has
terminated to a facsimile machine, a related
lamp on a pre-designated Multiline Terminal is
caused to light, indicating reception of a
facsimile call.
Fax over IP
This feature allows the system to transmit
facsimile communications over IP network, via
Local Area Networks (LAN) and corporate
Wide Area Network (WAN). Since PBX
regards facsimile equipment as one of
ordinary telephones, IP Packet
Assembler/Disassembler (IPPAD) and Voice
Compression Trunk (VCT) are required for
facsimile uses over IP network same as
legacy stations. The facsimile transmission
procedure (T.30 or G.711/G.726 passthrough) is supported with IP-PAD/
VCT.
Page 9- 19
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Feature Activation from Secondary
Extension
This feature allows the Multiline Terminal user
to access an appearance of another extension
and program certain features from that
extension.
Flexible Line Key Assignment
Multiline Terminals can have any desired linekey assignment. This feature permits
assignments to be tailored to each individual's
needs. (The terminal's primary extension line
appearance is the only line key that cannot be
reassigned.)
Group Call Automatic Conference (6/10 Party)
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user
or single line telephone user within the system
to establish a conference among as many as
six or ten parties. From a Multiline Terminal
/Single Line Telephone, a maximum of 9
stations can be paged simultaneously plus the
originator. The stations are assigned to the
simultaneous paging groups as participants
by the system data beforehand.
Group Call - 2 Way Calling
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal/Single
Line Telephone to page a maximum of fifteen
parties simultaneously including the originator.
Flexible Numbering Plan
The NEAX2000 IPS has a Flexible Numbering After one of paged parties answers, the
paging becomes the 2 Way Calling between
Plan. All access codes and station numbers
and can be assigned in system programming. the originator and the first answered party,
Refer also to the Single Digit Dialing Features automatically stops paging other parties. The
stations are assigned to the simultaneous
and Specifications, which further increases
paging groups as participants by the system
the flexibility of the system.
data beforehand.
Flexible Ringing Assignment
This feature allows lines on Multiline
Group Call by Pilot Number Dialing
This feature allows a station user (Multiline
Terminals to be individually programmed to
Terminal / Single Line Telephone / PS) or a
ring or not ring.
trunk party to page a group of stations
simultaneously by dialing a pilot number. The
Forced Account Code
maximum of 32 stations can be assigned to a
This feature forces the user to enter an
paging group, and the paging group is
Account Code (up to 8 or 10 digits) for all
associated with the pilot number. After one of
outgoing calls. The Account Code must be
the paged stations answers, the paging
dialed before dialing the outgoing number.
becomes a 2 way calling between the calling
Calls are processed only when the dialed
party and the first answered station and
Account Codes are valid.
automatically stops paging other stations.
Group Listening
When a Multiline Terminal user makes a call
using the handset, pressing the SPKR key will
allow others to listen through the built-in
speaker of the Multiline Terminal. The user
may continue talking on the handset at the
same time.
Page 9- 20
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Hands-free Answerback
This feature allows the station user to answer
a voice call without lifting the handset.
Hands-free Dialing and Monitoring
This feature allows the station user to dial or
monitor a call without lifting the handset.
Hold
This feature permits a user to Hold a call in
progress. After Hold has been set, the station
user can make or answer new calls.
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be
programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel
(H/M) Front Desk Instrument. This can be
used to set and cancel standard H/M features
such as Message Waiting, Do Not Disturb,
Automatic Wake Up, and Room Cutoff.
Hotline – Inside/Outside
This feature causes the terminal to place a
call to another station or to an outside party
automatically when the user selects the
Hotline extension.
Call Hold
This feature permits a user to Hold a call in
progress by sending a hookflash and dialing the
Call Hold feature access code, or by pressing the
Call Hold key. This line can then be used for
originating another call or returning to a previously
held call.
Dual Hold
This feature permits a station user who is placed
on Hold by another station to place that station on
Hold also.
Exclusive Hold
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to
place a call on Hold and to exclude all other
station users from retrieving the held call.
Non-exclusive Hold
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to
place a call on Hold that may be retrieved by any
station that has an appearance of the held line.
Hotel/Motel Attendant Console
The Attendant Console can be programmed
to function as a Hotel/Motel Attendant
Console. In addition to the business features
and functions of the Attendant, the
Hotel/Motel Attendant Console can set Room
Cutoff (individual and group), Automatic Wake
Up, Message Waiting, and Do Not Disturb
(individual and group).
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
House Phone
This feature allows selected stations to reach
the Attendant simply by going off-hook.
Individual Attendant Access
This feature permits a user to call a specific
Attendant by dialing an Attendant call code.
Intercept Announcement
This feature provides the automatic
interception of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and
Tie Line calls which cannot be completed due
to unassigned station or level. The caller
hears a recorded Intercept Announcement
that informs the caller that an inoperative
number was reached, and may supply the
number for information.
Intercom
Three types of Intercoms are available:
Manual Intercom, Automatic Intercom, and
Dial Intercom. Each type of Intercom provides
access to a small group of Multiline Terminals
with simplified calling methods.
Page 9- 21
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Manual Intercom
The Manual Intercom groups have up to six
Multiline Terminals sharing a common signal path.
Users can call other members of the Manual
Intercom group by pressing a Manual Intercom
key; each press sends a tone burst over the
speakers of all the terminals in the group. When
another user answers the call, a speech path is
activated.
Automatic Intercom
Automatic Intercom provides a path for Voice
Announcement Calls with Handsfree Answerback
between two Multiline Terminals using a line key.
Private conversations can be held by using the
Multiline Terminal handsets. The Busy/Idle status
of the associated Multiline Terminal is displayed
on the Automatic Intercom line key LED.
Dial Intercom
Dial Intercom comprises up to 10 Multiline
Terminals which can call each other using a
dedicated Dial Intercom line key with abbreviated
dialing. Dial Intercom calls can be Voice
Announce with Handsfree Answerback or ringing
calls.
Internal Tone/Voice Signaling
Multiline Terminals can signal incoming
internal calls by Voice Announcement or by
ringing according to the programmed mode
(Voice first or Ring first) of the called terminal.
The caller can dial the digit 1 to change from
Voice Announcement to Ring Tone or vice
versa. The Multiline Terminal assigned this
feature can program the following two modes:
• Voice Mode: allows an incoming call to terminate
with Voice Announcement.
• Tone Mode: allows an incoming call to terminate
with ringing.
IP Enabled Dterm
This feature provides a Dterm Series E/i
Terminal combined with an IP Adapter unit
with the capability to connect NEAX2000 IPS
via IP networking (IP Enabled Dterm). The IP
Enabled Dterm provides users with all features
currently available in Dterm Series E terminals.
Last Number Redial
This feature allows users to redial the last
station-to-station or outside number they
dialed using a feature access key or a feature
access code. This is useful when the called
station is busy or does not answer.
Least Cost Routing - 3/6 Digit
This service feature allows the NEAX2000
IPS to be programmed to route outgoing calls
over the most economical facility (WATS, FX,
DDD). Based on the individual area code and
office code dialed (6-digit analysis), the
system examines the programmed tables and
uses the trunk in the order specified.
Line Lockout
This feature automatically releases a station
from the common equipment if the station
remains off-hook for longer than a
programmed interval before dialing. Howler
tone may be programmed to be sent to the
station in Line Lockout.
Line Pre-selection
This feature provides the station user with two
ways to select an idle, held, recalling, or
ringing line before going off-hook.
Maid Status
This feature allows the Hotel/Motel (H/M)
Internal Zone Paging with Meet-Me
Front Desk Instrument, Property Management
This feature allows the Attendant Console and
System (PMS) terminal, or guest room station
system users to page over the built-in
(using special access code) to register the
speakers of the Multiline Terminals within the
condition of each guest room.
assigned zone or all zones.
Page 9- 22
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Maintenance Administration Terminal
(MAT)
The Maintenance Administration Terminal
(MAT) is a personal computer (PC) that
provides an interface to the PBX via the
NEAX 2000 IPS CPU card. The MAT PC must
have the MATWorX IPS program properly
installed to communicate with the PBX.
MATWorX is required for system software
registration, activation and system data
backups.
Message Center Interface (MCI)
This feature provides an interface with a
customer supplied Voice Mail System (VMS)
which can send Message Waiting lamp
control data to the NEAX2000 IPS using an
RS-232C interface.
Message Waiting
This feature allows the Attendant Console,
Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument,
administrative station, or Property
Management System (PMS) terminal to light a
lamp (on an uninterrupted or interrupted
basis) on a Single Line Telephone or Multiline
Terminal to indicate a message is waiting.
In addition to the lamp indication control, this
feature also provides the Voice Message
Waiting service that an originating station user
can set to Message Waiting with a
prerecorded message by using the Digital
Announcement Trunk card (PN-2DATA).
Miscellaneous Trunk Access
This feature allows the connection of various
types of external facilities. In addition to Loop
and Ground Start Trunks, the following can
also be interfaced with the NEAX2000 IPS:
Message Registration
CCSA Lines Code Calling Equipment,
This feature provides output from the system
to a call accounting system using an RS-232C Dictation Equipment, Foreign Exchange (FX)
Lines, Radio Paging Equipment, and Wide
interface. This allows the Hotel/Motel clerk to
Area Telephone Service (WATS) lines. Refer
retrieve the information needed to charge for
to separate features, Direct Inward Dialing
local and toll calls.
(DID), and Tie Line Access for more
applications of Miscellaneous Trunk Access.
Message Reminder
This feature allows a user or Attendant to turn
CCSA Access
on the message waiting (MW) lamp of a
This feature allows connection to or from a
Single Line Telephone, or the Message
Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)
Reminder (MSG) LED of a Multiline Terminal
network. A CCSA network is a special, privately(if assigned).
leased network constructed for one customer's
exclusive use that replaces or augments the public
switched network services.
Code Calling Equipment Access
Code Calling Equipment consists of external
paging units and external dialers requiring dial
access from the NEAX2000 IPS.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 23
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Dictation Equipment Access
This feature permits dial access to customer
provided Dictation Equipment, and in some
instances allows them to maintain telephone
dial control of normal dictation system
features.
Foreign Exchange (FX) Access
An FX line is a line that is extended and
terminated at a distant Central Office. With this
feature, outgoing calls over the FX line become a
local call at the distant C.O.
Radio Paging Equipment Access
This feature provides station users dial access to
Radio Paging Equipment, and to selectively tone or voice/ tone-alert individuals carrying pocket
paging devices. The paged party (when on
premises) can be connected to the paging party
by going to the nearest station and dialing an
answer back code.
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) Access
This feature allows any station user direct dial
access to outgoing WATS lines.
Multiline Terminal Attendant Position
A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be
programmed to function similar to an
Attendant position. This Attendant position
has limited access to Attendant related
features and functions and can be substituted
where an Attendant is required but an
Attendant Console is not necessary. When an
DCU-60-1 unit is associated with this
Attendant Multiline Terminal enhanced
operation is available.
Music on Hold
This feature plays music when a line is placed
on hold. Music is provided by a circuit board
memory chip, IP adpter, or a local music
source, such as a CD player or a radio.
Page 9- 24
Night Service
This feature provides a variety of methods for
handling incoming calls when the system is in
night mode. These include:
• Attendant Night Transfer
• Call Rerouting
• Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant
Console
• Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing
• Day/Night Mode Change by System Clock
• Night Connection-Fixed
• Night Connection-Flexible
• Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS)
• Overflow for TAS Queue
• Overflow Limit for TAS
Attendant Night Transfer
When the Attendant Console is in Night Service,
any operator directed calls (dial 0 calls) are
automatically routed to a preprogrammed station.
Priority Calls and Off-Hook Alarms which
terminate to an Attendant are also routed by this
feature.
Call Rerouting
This feature provides flexible reroute capabilities
for a variety of calls when the system is in night
mode.
Day / Night Mode Change by Attendant Console
This feature provides activation of DAY/NIGHT
Mode Change by depressing a predetermined key
from the Attendant Console.
Day / Night Mode Change by Station Dialing
This feature allows selected stations to activate a
change from day mode to night mode by dialing a
special code.
Day / Night Mode Change by System Clock
This feature provides automatic activation of
DAY/NIGHT Mode Change by using System
Clock.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Night Connection - Fixed
This feature allows incoming calls normally
terminated to the Attendant to reroute to a
predetermined station when the system is placed
in Night Service.
Night Connection - Flexible
This feature provides incoming calls normally
terminated to the fixed night station to be Call
Forwarded to another station.
Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS)
This feature allows any station, other than one
with incoming restrictions, to answer incoming
calls when the system is in the night mode. When
this feature is activated, incoming exchange
network calls will activate a common alert signal at
the customer premises. By dialing a specified
code, any station may answer the call and then
extend it to any other station by means of the Call
Transfer feature.
Overflow for TAS Queue
If the TAS call is not answered by
predetermined time, the call will be forwarded
to predetermined station/Attendant
Console/Announcement Service.
Queue Limit for TAS
When a DID call is converted to TAS and the
number of using lines reaches queue limit,
this feature provides the system to restrict the
next call terminating.
Off-hook Alarm
This feature allows a station user to call the
Attendant, or a pre-designated station, by
simply staying off-hook for a preprogrammed
period of time. The calling number is
automatically displayed at the Attendant
Console, or the pre-designated station if
equipped with an LCD.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Off-Premises Extensions
This feature allows the connection of a single
line telephone in an off-premises location. The
connection to the Off-Premises Extension can
be through direct copper or through the local
telephone company.
Open Application Interface (OAI)
Provides a computer-to-PBX interface,
allowing a computer to control the function of
the NEAX2000 IPS. The NEAX2000 IPS can
be customized to accommodate most
customer applications. Application software
can be provided by NECAM, an outside
software house, or a customer.
Optical Interface
The Optical Interface Card (PN-M10) provides
an internal optical fiber modem to the T1/E1
or Remote PIM network. The PN-M10
provides a bandwidth of 6.3 Mbps and
supports a maximum distance of 10
kilometers (or 6.25 miles) point to point. The
NEAX2000 IPS only supports Single Mode
optical fiber.
Pad Lock
This feature temporarily restricts telephones
from making unauthorized calls by dialing
special access code when station users are
away from their seats.
Periodic Time Indication Tone
This feature provides a periodic tone to the
station user who has made an outgoing call.
This feature can be allowed or denied for
each station.
Pooled Line Access
A line key can be assigned to access Pooled
Lines. Each line key will allow incoming,
outgoing, or both-way access to a trunk route.
Page 9- 25
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Power Failure Transfer
This feature provides for specified trunks to be
automatically connected to designated Single
Line Telephones in the event of AC power
loss. It is normally used when the system is
not equipped with reserve power.
Priority Call
This feature allows the Attendant to answer a
call before other calls, at the Attendant's
discretion.
Privacy
This feature restricts Multiline Terminal users
from depressing a busy line button and
entering a conversation unless permitted by
the Multiline Terminal user currently on that
line button or if the line button is assigned for
Direct Privacy Release.
Direct Privacy Release
This feature allows a station user with a secondary
appearance of another extension in the system to
access that extension when it is being used by
someone else. This feature allows for a simplified
method for establishing a conference. In addition,
this feature can be used to emulate PC dialing,
where a single line extension connected to a PC
can appear on a Multiline Terminal and be
accessed by the Multiline Terminal user after the
PC is completed dialing.
Manual Privacy Release
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to
enter a conversation on a busy line button if the
Multiline Terminal user already in the conversation
allows them by releasing Privacy.
Private Lines
Only a C.O. trunk assigned to that specific
station is seized when a station user
originates an outgoing C.O. call or when an
incoming C.O. call is terminated at the station
designated by Direct-In-Termination. In this
manner, stations and C.O. trunks are to be
associated on a 1-to-1 basis.
Page 9- 26
Property Management System Interface
The NEAX2000 IPS provides a data interface
to a locally provided Property Management
System (PMS). This enables communication
between the NEAX2000 IPS and the PMS in
order to provide computer control of Hotel/
Motel features.
Proprietary Multiline Terminal
The are several Multiline Terminals available
which can be used with the NEAX2000 IPS.
•
•
•
•
•
Legacy: Dterm Series i
Legacy: Dterm Series E (Display/Non-Dispalay)
Dterm IP: Dterm Series E (Display)
Dterm IP: Dterm Series i (Display)
Legacy: Electra Elite(Display/Non-Dispalay)
Automatic Idle Return
This feature returns a station to the idle state after
3 seconds of reorder tone is received due to the
distant end disconnecting.
Called Station Status Display
This feature provides a display on the status of a
called station on the LCD of the calling Multiline
Terminal.
Calling Name and Number Display
This feature provides a display on the LCD of the
Multiline Terminal receiving a call, indicating the
station number or trunk number of the incoming
call.
Dynamic Dial Pad
This feature allows a user to make an outgoing
call by first pressing a key on the keypad of
Multiline Terminal without pressing the Speaker
key or going off-hook.
Handsfree Unit
The built-in Handsfree Unit enables full Handsfree
operation for both internal and external calls (No
optional Handsfree Unit is required).
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
I-Hold / I-Use Indication
Recall Key
Multiline Terminals provide indication of which line
keys have been placed on Hold, or are in use by
that Multiline Terminal. The LED associated with
the line key will give the appropriate indication.
Each Multiline Terminal is equipped with a Recall
Key that is used to generate a hookflash to access
features provided by the outside exchange, or to
abandon a call while retaining the line for
origination of another call.
Microphone Control
All Multiline Terminals are equipped with a
Microphone Control button with an associated
LED.
Relay Control Function Key
This feature provides a Multiline Terminal with the
ability to activate/deactivate relays (on a PNDK00) to control external devices.
Multiple Line Operation
This feature allows for the appearance of multiple
lines on the Flexible Line Keys and feature keys of
all Multiline Terminals.
Mute Key
This feature allows the distant extension user, of a
station user that presses a mute key during
conversation, not to hear the station user's voice
though the station user can hear the distant
extension user's voice. By pressing the mute key
again, the mute status returns to original
conversation.
Ring Frequency Control
The ring frequency of the Multiline Terminal can
be controlled on a station basis in system
programming (eight ro fourteen frequencies are
available) or by use of a function key on the
Multiline Terminal.
Ringing Line Pickup
This feature provides the ability to answer any call
ringing into a Multiline Terminal by just lifting the
handset.
My Line Display Idle
Soft Keys
This feature allows the display of the Prime line in
the LCD display of the Muliline Terminal during an
Idle state.
According to the status of the Multiline Terminal,
function keys (Soft Keys) are displayed in the third
line on the LCD. If the status of Multiline Terminal
changes, the Soft Keys will change automatically.
Also if the Help key is pressed, explanation of
indicated Soft Keys are shown on the LCD.
Off-Hook Voice Announcement
This feature provides a secondary voice path to
the Multiline Terminal with an APR or APA unit.
This allows the station to receive a voice call
through the speaker while on a handset call on the
Primary Extension, a secondary extension, or a
Direct Trunk Line Appearance.
Prime Line Pickup
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to go
off hook and originate a call from the line assigned
as the Prime Line without depressing the
associated line key.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Volume Control
Multiline Terminals are equipped with common
Volume Control keys for:
•
•
•
•
•
Built-in Speaker / Handset Receiver Volume
Ring Volume
C.O. Transmission Level
LCD Contrast
Ring Tone Frequency
Page 9- 27
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Remote Hold
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user
or an attendant to place a call on hold on the
line button of the destination terminal, by
pressing the Hold key.
Remote PIM over IP
When IPSDMR and 2000 IPS PIM are installed
at remote site, and connected to a 2000 IPS
or IPSDM at main site over IP network, the
Main Site system controls and maintains the
remote DM and PIM operation as one single
system. If a communication failure occurs
between the Main Site and Remote Site, the
Remote Site automatically changes over to a
survival mode and operates as a stand-alone
system.
IPSDMR: IPS Distributed Model Remote (with
CP31-A)
IPSDM: IPS Distributed Model (with CP24-A/B)
Reserve Power
This feature provides backup power from a
24V battery source in the event of a
commercial power failure.
Resident System Program
This feature provides the installers a simple
procedure to have the system generate
system data according to the system
hardware configuration, thereby providing
immediate operation and shorter
programming time. When activated, the
system scans hardware configuration (such
as line/trunk card slot location) and assigns
system data (such as extension numbers,
trunk numbers, etc.) according to a
predetermined generic program assignment.
Page 9- 28
Return Message Schedule Display
This feature permits any station user to
register his Return Schedule from his phone
when he leaves his desk or the premises, and
have the Return Schedule displayed on a
calling Multiline Terminal with a Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD) during his absence.
Room Cutoff
This feature allows the Attendant Console,
Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument, or
Property Management System (PMS)
terminal, or guest room telephones using a
special access code, to temporarily restrict
guest room telephones from making
unauthorized calls when guests are away
from their room, and when rooms are in
Check Out status.
Room Status
This feature provides the Hotel/Motel (H/M)
Front Desk Instrument with a visual display of
the guest's room status. A supplementary
print out (individual and summary) can be
provided.
Route Advance
This feature automatically routes outgoing
calls over alternate facilities when the first
choice trunk group is busy. Users select the
first choice route by dialing the corresponding
access code, and the equipment then
advances through alternate trunk groups only
if the first choice is busy.
Save and Repeat
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal to
save a specific dialed number and then redial
that number at a later time.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Security Alarm
This feature provides an indication on the
Attendant Console when a contact closure
occurs.
Set Relocation
This feature enables two stations to be moved
from one location to another without
reprogramming station data at MAT.
Single Digit Dialing
This feature provides the station user the
ability to dial single digit codes to access
certain features while still allowing the same
digit dialed to be used as the first digit of
station number.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) is a standard protocol for TCP/IP
network management, which enables a
network management application software to
query a management agent (network device
such as router, PC host, and hub) using a
supported MIB (Management Information
Base). The MIB is a database of network
performance information that is stored on the
network devices. The NEAX 2000 IPS can
support the SNMP standard MIB (MIB-II,
defined in IETF RFC 1213) and private MIB
and TRAP. This feature also enables the
network management system (SNMP
manager) to manage the 2000 IPS via
Network Address Translation (NAT).
Software Line Appearance
(Virtual Extensions)
This feature permits assignment of circuits
which do not physically exist, to be used as
secondary extensions on Multiline Terminals.
There are a possible 1020 virtuals and can be
calculated by 1020 – number of Multiline
Terminals (Dterm/Dterm IP)=Total Virtuals
available.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Stack Dial
This feature enables a Multiline Terminal or
an Attendant Console to remember the
numbers dialed in the preceding five calls,
including the last number dialed. The stack
dial numbers are sequentially displayed on
the LCD display, thus allowing the station user
to make an outgoing call by selecting the
desired dialed number from the display.
Station Hunting
Three Station Hunting arrangements are
available. Station Hunting - Circular processes
the call no matter which station in the hunt
group is called. Station Hunting - Terminal
initiates a hunt only when the pilot number of
a hunt group is called. Station Hunting Secretarial is initiated when a busy station in a
Station Hunting - Circular group or Station
Hunting - Terminal group is reached.
Station Hunting - Circular
When a busy station in a hunt group is called, this
feature permits the call to be processed
automatically through the hunt group in a
preprogrammed order from that station's position
within the hunt group.
Station Hunting - Terminal
When a pilot number is dialed and that number is
busy, sequential Station Hunting will be initiated.
However, if a number other than the pilot number
is dialed and that number is busy, busy tone will
be provided rather than initiate Station Hunting.
Station Hunting - Secretarial
This feature allows assignments to be given to
members of Terminal and Circular Hunting groups
to reroute calls (when their hunting group is all
busy) to a back-up hunting group.
Page 9- 29
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
This feature provides a call record for
outgoing station-to-trunk calls, incoming trunkto-station calls (including Data Call) and
tandem calls. This facilitates cost control by
identifying trunk use and misuse by individual
stations. Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) enables call billing to customers and
clients, and provides a means for checking
local telephone bills.
Station Speed Dialing
This feature allows a station user to dial
frequently called numbers by dialing an
access code and an abbreviated code, or by
depressing a feature key or line key assigned
for Station Speed Dialing capability.
System Speed Dialing
This feature provides all users the ability to
dial frequently called numbers using an
abbreviated call code.
System Traffic
The NEAX2000 IPS is the stored program
controlled digital electronic PABX employing
PCM time division switching technique. Single
stage time division switching is employed for
all configurations of NEAX2000 IPS up to its
maximum line and trunk configuration. Traffic
capacity is expressed in Busy Hour Call
Attempts (BHCA). This value is the number of
call attempts that can be generated in the
busiest hour of the day.
Tenant Service
This feature provides for more than one
Step Call
This feature allows the Attendant or station
organization (tenant) to share the same
user, after calling a busy station, to call an idle NEAX2000 IPS system. Through system
station by simply dialing an additional digit.
programming, each organization may be
This feature will operate only if the number of restricted to its own Central Office trunks,
the idle station is identical to that of the busy
Attendant Consoles and extension group. In
station in all respects, except the last digit.
addition, incoming calls are directed to the
specific tenant.
Supervisory Control of Peripheral
Equipment
Tie Lines
When various types of peripheral equipment
This feature allows any station user dial
(such as facsimiles, dictation equipment,
access or direct access to an E&M Tie Line.
Voice Mail, etc.) are connected to the line
circuits of the NEAX2000 IPS, this feature
Tie Line Tandem Switching
allows the loop of the line circuit concerned to This feature allows trunk-to-trunk connections
open for a programmable interval, and send a through the NEAX2000 IPS without the need
release signal to the peripheral equipment
for any Attendant assistance or control. The
when the calling party disconnects.
major use of this feature is in association with
a dial tandem tie line network to allow tie line
System Clock Setup by Station Dialing
connections and incoming tie line calls
This feature enables a station user to set up automatic access to, and completion of, local
the system clock, from Single Line Telephone, Central Office calls.
Multiline Terminal, and PS.
Page 9- 30
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Timed Queue
When a user originates an outgoing trunk call
and the called party is busy or does not
answer, the caller can set the Timed Queue
feature. When this feature is set, the trunk
seizure is repeated and the number is
redialed after a predetermined time interval.
Timed Reminder
This feature allows the system to be
programmed to automatically call stations at
specified times. Upon answering, the station
is connected to a recorded announcement or
music source.
Trunk - Direct Appearances
This feature allows Multiline Terminal users
the ability to access a CO line or E&M Tie
Line without dialing an access code. For this
feature, trunks must be assigned to the line
keys on the Multiline Terminal. Incoming calls
on CO lines can be answered on the
appropriate trunk line appearance.
Trunk Queuing - Outgoing
This allows a station user, upon encountering
a busy signal on a trunk, to dial a feature
access code and enter a first-in, first-out
queue. As soon as an outgoing trunk
becomes available, stations in the queue will
be called back on a first-in, first-out basis.
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
This feature provides any station user with the
ability to conference together two outside
trunk calls and abandon the connection
without dropping the Trunk-to-Trunk
Connection.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
The Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) feature
permits incoming calls to terminate to a
prearranged group of stations. Calls are
distributed in the order of arrival to idle
terminals within the group, based on which
terminal has been idle the longest period of
time. Stations may log on/log off from the
UCD group. Supervisor stations may monitor
conversations of agents.
Busy In/Busy Out-UCD
This feature allows an agent in a UCD group to log
their station onto or off of the group. This allows
the system to control whether a call directed to the
pilot number of the UCD group goes to that station
or not. This prevents incoming calls from being
directed to stations at which no agent is available.
Call Waiting Indication-UCD
This feature provides a visual indication when an
incoming call to a UCD group is placed in queue,
due to an “all agents busy” condition. An external
relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline
Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting
Indication.
Delay Announcement-UCD
This feature allows the system to provide a
recorded announcement to an incoming caller
placed in queue to a UCD group. A single
announcement, or two separate announcements,
can be provided.
Hunt Past No Answer-UCD
This feature allows calls targeted at a UCD group
to hunt past an agents station, after a no answer
condition, if the agent forgets to log off of the
group and the agent is unable (or not available) to
answer the call.
Page 9- 31
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Immediate Overflow-UCD
This feature allows a call directed to a UCD group
to immediately overflow to another UCD group,
upon encountering an “all agents busy” condition.
Priority Queuing-UCD
This feature allows the system to prioritize
incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station
basis, when the call enters a UCD queue. When a
call is a considered as priority it is placed at the
beginning of the queue.
Queue Size Control-UCD
On incoming DID/Tie line calls, the system can be
assigned a threshold that limits the number of
calls in queue. When the queue size threshold is
exceeded, incoming callers are connected to busy
tone.
Silent Monitor-UCD
This feature provides the UCD group supervisor
with the ability to monitor a call to a UCD agent.
The silent monitor function gives no indication (as
an option) to either the agent or the calling party.
Voice Guide
This feature provides a station user with an
announcement that informs:
1. The result of the operation when the station
user set or canceled the service feature, instead of
service set tone.
2. Which service has been set to the station; such
as, Call Forwarding - All Calls, Do Not Disturb or
Message Waiting, when the station goes off-hook,
instead of special dial tone.
Voice Mail Integration
This feature is used to interface the
NEAX2000 IPS with a locally provided standalone type Voice Mail System (VMS). The
VMS, connected to the NEAX2000 IPS single
line circuit (LC), is controlled by sending/
receiving DTMF signals using this LC.
The VMS’s voice mail feature can be used by
accessing this VMS directly from an
extension. If a station sets its call forwarding
destination to the VMS, calls to this station are
connected to the VMS, and the messages can
be registered according to the VMS
instruction. In addition, the Message Waiting
lamp of the station can be turned on
automatically by the VMS.
Uniform Numbering Plan (UNP) -Voice and
Data
In the numbering plan for a network to be
configured through the use of Tie Lines, a
Uniform Numbering Plan (UNP) is employed.
When UNP is employed, a station user from
any PBX within the network can call a desired
party by using a uniform dialing method based Voice Mail Private Password
on the UNP.
Voice Mail Password can be prevented from
displaying in LCD of Multiline Terminals when
Variable Timing Parameters
connected to the Voice Mail System.
This feature gives the IPS the versatility to
change timing duration using the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) or the
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT). All
timing parameters are set initially in the
Resident System Program. These timing
parameters can be changed according to the
customer's requirements.
Page 9- 32
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Voice Mail Transfer
This feature has two functions that provide
streamlined transfer access to voice mail.
1. One touch access to VMS: When an
Attendant transfers an external call to a station, and if the station is busy or unanswered,
the Attendant can transfer the call to a VMS
by dialing “9” or by pressing a function key
provided for this feature.
2. Transferring Camp-On call to VMS: When
an Attendant sets Camp-On to a busy
destination station for an external call, and if
the destination station does not answer by
predetermined time, the call can be
automatically transferred to a VMS.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Voice Over IP (H.323)
Provides the ability for the NEAX2000 IPS to
connect via IP Trunk to other non-NEAX
systems that are compliant with H.323.
Allows Transparent Dialing and Calling
Station Number Display between the systems.
Gate keeper (GK1000) software and customer
supplied server is required.
Whisper Page
This feature allows a secretary to interrupt the
boss in a private way. By pressing a feature
key or dialing an Access Code, the secretary
station can voice override the conversation
between the boss and another party (station
or trunk). When the conversation is
interrupted, the boss can hear the secretary
but the other party is unaware of the Voice
Override.
Page 9- 33
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
CCIS Feature List
Attendant Camp-On with Tone Indication - CCIS
Attendant Controlled Conference - CCIS
Automatic Recall - CCIS
Brokerage - Hot Line - CCIS
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) - CCIS
Busy Verification - CCIS
Call Back - CCIS
Call Forwarding - All Calls - CCIS
Call Forwarding - Busy Line - CCIS
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer - CCIS
Call Forwarding - Intercept - CCIS
Call Forwarding - Override - CCIS
Call Processing Indication - CCIS
Call Transfer - All Calls - CCIS
Call Transfer - Attendant - CCIS
Called Station Status Display - CCIS
Calling Name Display - CCIS
Calling Number Display - CCIS
CCIS Networking via IP
Centralized Billing - CCIS
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - CCIS
Centralized E911 - CCIS
Consultation Hold - All Calls - CCIS
Data Line Security - CCIS
Deluxe Traveling Class Mark - CCIS
Dial Access to Attendant - CCIS
Digital Display - Station - CCIS
Digital Display - Trunk - CCIS
Direct-In Termination - CCIS
Distinctive Ringing - CCIS
Do Not Disturb - CCIS
Dual Hold - CCIS
Elapsed Time Display - CCIS
Flexible Numbering of Stations - CCIS
Hands-Free Answerback - CCIS
Hot Line - CCIS
House Phone - CCIS
Incoming Call Identification - CCIS
Individual Attendant Access - CCIS
Page 9- 34
LDN Night Connection - CCIS
Link Alarm Display - CCIS
Link Reconnect - CCIS
Message Waiting Lamp Setting - Attendant - CCIS
Message Waiting Lamp Setting - Station - CCIS
Miscellaneous Trunk Access - CCIS
Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction - CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls - CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line - CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer - CCIS
Multiple Console Operation - CCIS
Network Station Number - CCIS (FCCS)
Night Connection - Fixed - CCIS
Night Connection - Flexible - CCIS
Outgoing Trunk Queuing - CCIS
Paging Access - CCIS
Restriction from Outgoing Calls - CCIS
Service Display - CCIS
Single-Digit Station Calling - CCIS
Station-Controlled Conference - CCIS
Station-to-Station Calling - CCIS
Station-to-Station Calling - Operator Assistance - CCIS
Toll Restriction 3/6 Digits - CCIS
Trunk Answer from Any Station - CCIS
Trunk-to-Trunk Restriction - CCIS
Uniform Numbering Plan - CCIS
Voice Call - CCIS
Voice Mail Integration - CCIS
Voice Mail Private Password - CCIS
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
CCIS Features Descriptions
Attendant Camp-On with Tone Indication –
CCIS
This feature permits the Attendant, when the
desired station at another switching office is
busy, to hold an in-coming call in a special
waiting mode. A distinctive Camp-On tone is
sent to the busy station when the Attendant
sets Camp-On. When that station becomes
idle, it is automatically rung and connected to
the waiting trunk party.
Attendant Controlled Conference - CCIS
This feature permits an Attendant (2400 IPX)
to establish a conference, through CCIS, with
up to eight parties of stations and/or trunks
(inside and outside parties).
Busy Verification - CCIS
This feature permits an Attendant, via the
Attendant Console on the 2400 IPX or the
2000 IPS, to interrupt a busy station’s call at
another switching office connected through
CCIS.
Call Back - CCIS
This feature provides inter-office Call Back. A
station that has dialed a busy station at
another office can set Call Back - CCIS by
dialing a feature access code. When this
feature has been set, the setting station will
ring as soon as the busy station becomes
available.
Call Forwarding - All Calls - CCIS
This feature permits all calls destined for a
This service feature works as a time reminder. particular station to be routed to another
When an Attendant-handled call through
station or to an Attendant Console, in another
CCIS remains on hold, camped-on, or ringing office in the CCIS network, regardless of the
unanswered for a fixed interval, the Attendant status (busy or idle) of the called station. The
is automatically alerted.
activation and cancellation of this feature may
be accomplished by either the station user or
Brokerage - Hot Line – CCIS
an Attendant.
This feature provides a ringdown connection
between two stations, each using a Multiline
Call Forwarding - Busy Line – CCIS
Terminal, in different offices in the CCIS
This feature permits a call to a busy station to
network.
be immediately forwarded to a pre-designated
station or to an Attendant Console in another
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) - CCIS
office in the CCIS network.
This feature provides a busy status indication
of the predetermined stations within the CCIS Call Forwarding – Don’t Answer - CCIS
network. The visual indication is provided with This feature permits a call to an unanswered
a red LED associated with each DSS button
station to be forwarded to a pre-designated
on the DSS/BLF Console and Multiline
station or to an Attendant Console in another
Terminal. Pressing the DSS button allows a
office, when the called station does not
direct access to the preprogrammed station
answer after a predetermined time period.
within the CCIS network.
Automatic Recall - CCIS
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 35
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Call Forwarding - Intercept - CCIS
Calling Number Display - CCIS
This feature allows calls to an inoperative
number, through a CCIS trunk, to be
intercepted and automatically routed to a
recorded announcement informing the caller
that an inoperative number was dialed and
giving the Listed Directory Number for
information.
This feature permits the number of a calling or
called party at another switching office to be
displayed either on a Multiline Terminal or an
Attendant Console.
CCIS Networking via IP
This feature provides CCIS networks with
Voice over IP (VoIP) capabilities to provide a
Call Forwarding - Override - CCIS
converged infrastructure over corporate Wide
This feature allows a target station user
Area Networks (WAN). The IP Enabled Dterm
(Station A) to call a station (Station B) that has can communicate with other IP Enabled
set Call Forwarding - All Calls - CCIS.
Dterm over the CCIS network (IP based) on a
peer-to-peer connection basis. The legacy
Call Processing Indication - CCIS
terminals (TDM based terminals) can
This feature provides visual indications of all
communicate with other legacy terminals or IP
CCIS calls being processed or awaiting
Enabled Dterm terminals over the CCIS
processing at the Attendant Console.
network, via IP Packet Assembler/
Disassembler (IP-PAD). Voice compression of
Call Transfer - All Calls - CCIS
G.729a (8 kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3 kbps /
This feature allows a station user to transfer
6.3 kbps) is available for those connections.
incoming or outgoing Central Office, intraThe CCIS Networking via IP provides users
office and inter-office calls to another station
with all TDM-based CCIS functionality, such
in the CCIS network, without Attendant
as feature transparency, centralized
assistance.
management, and centralized facilities.
Call Transfer - Attendant - CCIS
This feature permits a station user, while
connected to a CCIS network call, to transfer
a call to an Attendant Console via the CCIS
network.
Called Station Status Display - CCIS
This service feature provides, on the LCD
display of the calling Multiline Terminal, a
display of the called station status of the
remote office within the CCIS network.
Calling Name Display - CCIS
This feature permits the station name of a
calling or called party at another switching
office, through the CCIS network, to be
displayed either on a Multiline Terminal or an
Attendant Console.
Page 9- 36
Centralized Billing - CCIS
This feature is used to collect billing
information from each office within the
network and to direct it to the associated
center office. Billing information is then
forwarded to the central billing centers via
RS232C interfaces.
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - CCIS
This feature switches the Day/Night mode of a
remote office, linked to the main office (2400
IPX) via CCIS. The mode is switched in
accordance with the Day/Night mode
switching on the Attendant Console at the
main office.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Centralized E911 – CCIS
Digital Display - Trunk - CCIS
This feature allows the system to transmit a
calling party number to the 911 Emergency
system over CCIS tandem connection.
This service feature provides the Attendant
with a visual indication of incoming and
outgoing trunk calls during an attendant-totrunk connection within the CCIS network.
Trunk Group number and trunk identification
code are displayed.
Consultation Hold - All Calls - CCIS
This feature permits a station user, within the
CCIS network, to hold any incoming or
outgoing public network or Tie Line call while
originating a call to another station within the
CCIS network.
Date Line Security- CCIS
This service feature allows the lines, which
are used for data transmission through CCIS
to be, protected from interruptions such as
Attendant Camp - On, Busy Verification CCIS, Executive Right of Way, and Attendant
Override.
Direct-In Termination - CCIS
This feature automatically routes incoming
exchange calls through CCIS to a preassigned station in the network, without
Attendant assistance.
Distinctive Ringing – CCIS
This feature provides distinctive station ringing
patterns for terminated calls, through the
CCIS network, so that a station user can
distinguish between incoming internal and
external calls.
Deluxe Traveling Class Mark - CCIS
This feature provides outgoing call restrictions
within the CCIS network. The following three
types of restrictions are allowed:
• Deluxe Traveling Class Mark Restriction
• Route Restriction
• Numbering Restriction
Do Not Disturb - CCIS
This feature allows a station user to establish
Do Not Disturb (DND) status on a temporary
basis, during which time access to the station
from CCIS calls will be denied.
Dual Hold – CCIS
Dial Access to Attendant – CCIS
This feature allows a station user to call an
Attendant Console by dialing an operator call
code through the CCIS network.
Digital Display - Station - CCIS
This service feature provides a display of the
station number on the Attendant Console,
during an Attendant-to-station connection,
within the CCIS network.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
This feature allows two connected Multiline
Terminals to be placed on hold
simultaneously over the CCIS link. This
enables the held parties to answer or originate
a call from a secondary extension or the idle
primary extension.
Elapsed Time Display – CCIS
This feature provides an LCD, which shows
the duration of time that a Multiline Terminal is
connected to any trunk through the CCIS
network.
Page 9- 37
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Flexible Numbering of Stations – CCIS
Link Alarm Display - CCIS
This feature allows voice and data station
numbers to be assigned to any instrument in
the CCIS network, based solely upon
numbering plan limitations.
This feature provides an indication on external
equipment when the CCIS link is
connected/disconnected, when the system is
initialized, or when the CCH is in make-busy.
Hands-Free Answerback - CCIS
Link Reconnect - CCIS
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal station This feature provides the system connected to
user to respond to a voice call, through the
CCIS network with the capability to release
CCIS network, without lifting the handset.
the redundant CCIS link connection and reconnect the link within the system for efficient
Hot Line – CCIS
usage of the CCIS links.
This feature allows two stations, at different
nodes in the CCIS network, to be mutually
Message Waiting Lamp Setting – Attendant –
CCIS
associated on an automatic ringdown basis
This feature allows an Attendant, in the 2400
through the CCIS network.
IPX, to set or cancel a Message Waiting lamp
indication, through the CCIS network, on a
House Phone – CCIS
This feature allows selected stations to call an station in 2000 IPS.
Attendant Console, through the CCIS
Message Waiting Lamp Setting - Station –
network, simply by going off hook.
CCIS
Incoming Call Identification - CCIS
This feature allows an Attendant to visually
identify the type of service and/or trunk group,
which is arriving or waiting to be answered at
the Attendant Console through the CCIS
network.
This feature allows a station user, in the 2400
IPX, to set or cancel a Message Waiting lamp
indication, through the CCIS network, to a
station in 2000 IPS with this feature.
Miscellaneous Trunk Access - CCIS
This feature permits a station user to call a
specific Attendant Console, in the CCIS
network, using an individual Attendant
Identification Number.
This feature provides access to all types of
external and customer-provided
equipment/facilities, such as Tie Line and
exchange network, along with Dictation,
Paging Access - CCIS and Code Calling
through the CCIS network.
LDN Night Connection – CCIS
Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction - CCIS
Individual Attendant Access – CCIS
This feature routes Listed Directory Number
(LDN) calls to a pre-selected station, in the
CCIS network, when the Night mode has
been entered.
This feature denies certain stations and dialrepeating tie trunks access to specific trunk
groups, such as Tie Line, exchange network,
Dictation or Paging Access - CCIS through
the CCIS network.
Page 9- 38
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls - CCIS
Night Connection - Flexible – CCIS
This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple
Call Forwarding - All Calls sequence to be
forwarded over a CCIS network to a station in
another office.
This feature provides an inter-office night
connection service, via the CCIS network,
when the calling station and the night station
belong to different offices.
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line – CCIS
Outgoing Trunk Queuing - CCIS
This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple
Call Forwarding - Busy Line sequence to be
forwarded over a CCIS network to a station in
another office.
This feature allows a CCIS network station,
upon encountering an all trunk busy signal, to
dial a specified access code and enter a firstin, first-out queue. As soon as a CCIS trunk
becomes available, stations in the queue will
be called back on a first-come, first-served
basis.
Multiple Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer - CCIS
This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer sequence to
be forwarded over a CCIS network to a station Paging Access - CCIS
in another office.
This feature provides dial access to paging
equipment from an Attendant Console or a
Multiple Console Operation – CCIS
station, through the CCIS network.
This feature provides console operation where
Attendant Consoles are installed in more than Restriction from Outgoing Calls - CCIS
one node in the CCIS network.
This feature automatically restricts users of
pre-selected stations from placing outgoing
Network Station Number - CCIS (FCCS)
calls and/or certain miscellaneous trunk calls
When 2000 IPS is connected to a 2400 IPX
through CCIS, without Attendant assistance.
via CCIS link, the Network Station Number
can be moved to other office within the
Service Display - CCIS
network by a simple command operation from This feature generates LCD displays on the
the Centralized MAT in the 2400 IPX.
Multiline Terminal corresponding to the
various features as they are initiated.
Night Connection - Fixed – CCIS
This feature routes calls normally directed to
the Attendant Console to a pre-selected
station in another office, through the CCIS
network, when the Night mode has been
entered.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Single-Digit Station Calling - CCIS
This feature allows the assignment of SingleDigit Station numbers.
Station-Controlled Conference - CCIS
This feature allows any station of the 2400
IPX to establish a conference among a
maximum of eight parties of stations and/or
trunks (inside and outside parties) of the 2000
IPS, through CCIS.
Page 9- 39
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Station-to-Station Calling – CCIS
Voice Call - CCIS
This feature permits any station user to dial
another station directly, through CCIS, without
Attendant assistance.
This feature provides a voice path, through
the CCIS network, between a Multiline
Terminal in one office and a Multiline Terminal
in another office. This path is established from
the calling party to the called party’s built-in
speaker. If the called party’s MIC lamp is on,
the called party can have a conversation in
hands-free.
Station-to-Station Calling - Operator
Assistance – CCIS
This feature allows a station user to call
another station in the CCIS network, with the
assistance of an Attendant Console operator.
Voice Mail Integration – CCIS
Toll Restriction - 3/6 Digits - CCIS
This feature allows the system to be
programmed to restrict outgoing calls, through
CCIS, according to specific Area and/or Office
Codes. This restriction is determined on the
basis of a three-digit Area Code or six-digit
Area and Office Code numbering plan.
Trunk Answer From Any Station - CCIS
This feature allows any station, not restricted
from incoming calls, to answer incoming calls
when the network is in Night mode.
This feature allows any station user in the
CCIS network to utilize the Voice Mail System
(VMS) with the Message Center Interface
(MCI).
Voice Mail Private Password - CCIS
Voice Mail Password can be prevented from
displaying in LCD of Multiline Terminals when
connected to the voice mail system via CCIS.
Trunk-to-Trunk Restriction - CCIS
This feature allows Trunk-to-Trunk tandem
restriction by caller’s information sent from
each office (e.g., caller is a trunk) through the
CCIS network.
Uniform Numbering Plan – CCIS
In a CCIS network, a Uniform Numbering Plan
enables a station user to call any other station
in the network. Two alternative numbering
plans are provided. In the first plan, the station
user dials any digit station number from three
to eight. The location of the office is identified
by the first one-, two-, or three-digit of the
station number. In the second plan, the station
user dials a one-, two- or three-digit office
code and any digit station number from two to
eight.
Page 9- 40
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
ISDN Feature List
Addressing
Advice of Charge - Display
Call-By-Call Service Selection
Called Party Recognition Service
(Direct-In Termination (DIT))
Channel Negotiation
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) /
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
CPN To Network - Present
CPN To Terminating User - Display
DID Addressing
DID and DOD Addressing
Event Based CCIS
Incomplete Number Handling
ISDN Terminal
MEGACOM® Access/WATS
MEGACOM® 800 Service/800 WATS/Ultra WATS
MULTIQUEST®/900 Service
Overlap Receiving
Overlap Sending
Subaddress - Present
Trunk Provisioning Service Selection
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 41
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
ISDN Feature Descriptions
Addressing
The 2000 IPS supports E.164 numbering plan
as Type of Number (TON) / Numbering Plan
Identifier (NPI) combination in Calling and
Called Party Number Information Element for
ISDN calls.
Advice of Charge - Display
When an outgoing connection is made on the
ISDN trunk, this feature provides the call
originator with the charge information form the
network. The information will be displayed on
the calling Dterm LCD for six seconds after the
station has been released, and be output to
the SMDR port.
Call-By-Call Service Selection
Services can be selected on a call-by-call
basis to all channels of a single PRI interface
according to applications. Services may be
used on any available channel, unlike Trunk
Provisioning Service, in which services are
assigned to specific channels.
Called Party Recognition Service (Direct-In
Termination (DIT))
This feature provides an incoming Direct-In
Termination (DIT) call via an ISDN trunk to be
connected to a predetermined station. This
application can be used for a station or
modem.
Channel Negotiation
When collisions of data occur between an
outgoing call to ISDN and an incoming call
from ISDN, the B channel that 2000 IPS
specified will be busy on the network and the
network will specify another B channel. This
feature provides negotiation for the selection
of a B-channel between the 2000 IPS and the
network, when the SETUP message is
delivered.
Page 9- 42
Connected Line Identification Presentation
(COLP) / Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)
Connected Line Identification Presentation
(COLP) provides the 2000 IPS to send the
ISDN number of the connected party in the
2000 IPS, to the calling party. Connected
Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
provides the 2000 IPS to restrict presentation
of the connected party’s ISDN number in the
2000 IPS, to the calling party.
CPN To Network–Present
This feature allows the ISDN network to be
informed of the Calling Party Number (CPN)
when a call originates from a terminal
connected to the NEAX 2000 IPS.
CPN To Terminating User–Display
This feature provides a visual display of the
originating station’s number and sub-address
information on a Multiline Terminal for
incoming ISDN calls. This provides the
terminal user with a quick and accurate way to
identify the originating station’s number
(Calling Number).
DID Addressing
This feature allows incoming ISDN-PRI calls
to terminate to stations, Attendant Console,
Automated Attendant, etc., based on the
Called Party number. Direct Inward Dial
trunks will be terminated to a programmed
destination without Attendant assistance.
DID and DOD Addressing
This feature allows the system to use DID and
DOD on the same B-Channels. Trunk
Provisioning Service election is not required.
(B-Channels can be used for DID and DOD
without separating the trunk routes.)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Event-Based CCIS
Overlap Receiving
This feature allows a PBX customer who does
not have a tie line (or when a customer cannot
use the tie line due to busy or fault of the line),
to use the various CCIS feature by using the
ISDN line as a CCIS virtual tie line, between
the NEAX 2400 IPX to NEAX 2000 IPS
connection or the NEAX 2000 IPS to IPS
connection.
Overlap Receiving is available for an incoming
call to the 2000 IPS from ISDN network.
Overlap Receiving is a procedure, used in call
establishment of an incoming call, to enable
the network to send called party number digits
to the user in successive messages, as and
when they are made available from the
remote network.
Incomplete Number Handling
Overlap Sending
When a DID number incoming from ISDN is
incomplete, NEAX 2000 IPS can transfer the
call to a predetermined station or attendant
console.
ISDN Terminal
This feature provides the system with an
ISDN Terminal or Terminal Adapter (TA).
ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal, ISDN
Terminal to ISDN Trunk, ISDN Trunk to ISDN
Terminal, ISDN Terminal to Single Line
Telephone, ISDN Terminal to Multiline
Terminal, and ISDN Terminal to PS
connections are available.
MEGACOM® Access/WATS
Overlap Sending is available for an outgoing
call from the 2000 IPS to ISDN network.
Overlap Sending is a procedure, used in call
establishment of an outgoing call, to enable
the user to send called party number digits to
the network in successive messages.
Sub-Address–Present
This feature allows a Primary Rate Interface
ISDN trunk to transfer the Called Party Subaddress information to a destination ISDN
station when the call is originated by the
system. Dialing the called party station
number and sub-address is required.
Trunk Provisioning Service Selection
AT&T’s MEGACOM® (WATS) network, as well Each channel of a PRI interface can be
as WATS from other carriers, can be used.
dedicated to a particular service. Services are
designated to specific channels; once
MEGACOM® 800 Service/800 WATS Ultra
designated, a channel can be used only for
WATS
that service.
AT&T’s MEGACOM® 800 (Inward WATS)
network, as well as 800 WATS provided by
other carriers, can be used.
MULTIQUEST® /900 Service
AT&T’s MultiQuest® service can be used. (It is
a “900”-type service.) Also, 900 service
provided by other carriers can be used.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 43
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Q-SIG Feature List
Calling/Connected Line ID Presentation (CLIP/COLP)/
Calling/Connected Name ID Presentation (CNIP/CONP)
CCIS Tandem Call-Calling Party Number (CPN) Delivery to
ISDN & Q-SIG Networks
Q-SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call - ETSI Version
Q-SIG Feature Descriptions
Calling/Connected Line ID Presentation (CLIP/COLP)/
Calling/Connected Name ID Presentation (CNIP/CONP)
In between Q-SIG networks, this feature allows calling or called party information, to be
displayed on the Dterm LCD. CLIP/COLP conforms to ETS 300 173 and IS-11572 network.
CNIP/CONP conforms to ETS 300 238 and IS-11572 network.
• Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP): Calling party number (ID) is displayed on
the called party's Dterm LCD.
• Connected Line ID Presentation (COLP): Called party number (ID) is displayed on the
calling party's Dterm LCD.
• Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP): Calling party information (Name ID) is
displayed on the called party's Dterm LCD.
• Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP): Called party information (Name ID)
is displayed on the calling party's Dterm LCD.
This feature is also available when interworking with a CCIS interface.
CCIS Tandem Call-Calling Party Number
(CPN) Delivery to ISDN & Q-SIG Networks
This feature is provided for the call from tie line (CCIS line or
Q-SIG) or a station, is sent to the public ISDN network (AT&T, NT, NI-2) or Q-SIG network.
Q-SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call - ETSI Version
This feature enables NEC’s PBX to connect to NEC’s PBX or other manufacturer by using
Layer 3 protocol for the signaling for the support of circuit mode bearer services at the Q
reference point.
Q-SIG conforms to ETS 300 172.
Page 9- 44
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Wireless Feature List
Analog PBX Interface
Announcement - PS No Answer / Announcement - PS Out of Zone
Automatic Release - Out of Zone Calls
Call Forwarding - Not Available
Call Forwarding - PS Out of Zone
CCIS Interface
Calling Name Display - PS
Calling Number Display - PS
DTMF Signal Sender
Group Call - Automatic Conference (6/10-Party)
Group Call - 2 Way Calling
Handover
Individual PS Calling
Last Number Redial - PS
Multi-Line Operation - PS
Multi-Site Roaming
NEAX 2000 IPS Wired for Wireless
Number Sharing
Out of Zone Indication
Overlap Dialing
Preset Dialing
PS Authorization
PS Location Indication
PS Location Registration
Q. 931a Roaming over IP Trunk
Radio Channel Changeover
Short Message Notification (OAI)
Speech Encryption
Speed Dial - PS
Station Hunting - Not Available
Voice Mail Indication
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 45
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Table of Features by Configuration Type
Adjunct Type
Integrated Type
Feature
Analog PBX
Interface
Analog PBX Interface
X
Announcement - PS No Answer
X
Announcement - PS Out of Zone
X
Automatic Release - Out of Zone Calls
X
Call Forwarding - Not Available
–
Call Forwarding - PS Out of Zone
–
CCIS Interface
–
Calling Name Display - PS
–
Calling Number Display - PS
–
DTMF Signal Sender
X
Group Call - Automatic Conference(6/10-Party)
–
Group Calling - 2 Way Calling
–
Handover
X
Individual PS Calling
X
Last Number Redial - PS
X
Multi-Line Operation - PS
X
Multi-Site Roaming
–
NEAX2000 IPS Wired for Wireless
–
Number Sharing
–
Out of Zone Indication
X
Overlap Dialing
X
Preset Dialing
X
PS Authorization
X
PS Location Indication
–
PS Location Registration
X
Q. 931a Roaming over IP Trunk
–
Radio Channel Changeover
X
Short Message Notification (OAI)
–
Speech Encryption
X
Speed Dial - PS
X
Station Hunting - Not Available
–
Voice Mail Indication
–
X = available — = not available
Page 9- 46
CCIS
Interface
–
X
X
X
–
–
X
X
X
X
–
–
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
X
X
X
X
–
X
–
X
–
X
X
–
–
NEAX 2000 IPS
Wired for Wireless
–
X
X
X
X
X
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
Wireless Feature Descriptions
Analog PBX Interface
CCIS Interface
This feature allows the WCS to be integrated
with many types of PBXs and to activate
various PBX services by sending hookflash
signal and DTMF tone.
This feature allows the WCS to be integrated
with NEC PBXs with CCIS interface.
Calling Name Display - PS
Without answering incoming calls or hold calls
terminates to the Dterm PS III, the calling
party’s name can be confirmed by the
This feature allows calls to a Dterm PS III which indications on the LCD.
cannot be paged in a predetermined period of
time to be routed to the announcement
Calling Number Display - PS
notifying the calling party that the Dterm PS III
This feature provides a display on the LCD of
cannot answer. Announcements can be
a Dterm PS III receiving a call, indicating the
divided between Announcement-PS No
station number.
Answer and Announcement-PS Out of Zone
depending on the Dterm PS III condition.
DTMF Signal Sender
This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to send
Automatic Release - Out of Zone Calls
the DTMF signal (tone) to the called party
When a Dterm PS III user engaged in a call
(terminal, voice mail system, etc.) while
moves out of the service area or enters a
engaged in communication.
radio zone where all the channels are busy
and the communication becomes unavailable, GroupCall-Automatic Conference
(6/10Party)
the call will be disconnected automatically,
This feature permits a Dterm PS III user,
and the other party receives reorder tone.
Multiline Terminal user or Single Line
Call Forwarding-Not Available
Telephone user within the system to establish
When a Dterm PS III is powered off or out of
a conference among as many as six or ten
zone, a call directed to the Dterm PS III is
parties. From a Dterm PS II/D term /Single
forwarded to a VMS, and a voice mail
Line Telephone, a maximum of 9 PSs can be
message can be recorded to the VMS and
paged simultaneously except the conference
term
PS III. Also the VMS
checked from the D
leader. The PSs are assigned to the
can page the Dterm PS III automatically after
simultaneous paging groups as participants
the voice mail message is recorded.
by the system data beforehand.
Announcement - PS No Answer /
Announcement - PS Out of Zone
Call Forwarding - PS Out of Zone
This feature allows calls directed to a Dterm PS
III, which is power off or out of zone to be
routed to an another station, an Attendant, an
outside number or voice mail equipment. The
call forwarding destination can be set/
cancelled from the Dterm PS III station or
MAT/CAT.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 47
Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions
Group Call – 2Way Calling
term
Multi-Site Roaming
This feature permits a D
PS III, Multiline
Termianl and Single Line Telephone to page a
maximum of fifteen parties simultaneously,
except the group call leader. After one of
paged parties answers, the paging becomes
the 2 Way Calling between the leader and the
first answered party, and paging other parties
stops automatically. The Dterm PS III is
assigned through system data as participants
in the simultaneous paging groups.
Dterm PS III user can originate or receive a call
in any place of a network provided by multiple
PBXs which communicate through JT-Q931a.
Handover
Number Sharing
When the signal transmission quality
becomes inferior, a Dterm PS III re-originates a
call automatically and seizes another radio
channel, making the WCS handover the call
to another zone transceiver to maintain the
speech quality.
Individual PS Calling
This feature allows the calling party to page
the individual Dterm PS III.
Last Number Redial – PS
This feature enables a Dterm PS III to store the
numbers dialed in the previous five calls
including the last number dialed. The stack
dial numbers are sequentially displayed on
the LCD, allowing the station user to make an
outgoing call by selecting the desired dialed
number from the display.
Multi-Line Operation – PS
Dterm PS III equipped with two line keys, L1
key and L2 key, and different station numbers
can be assigned to each of two lines. The
number assigned to L1 key of the PS is called
My Line and the other number assigned to L2
key is called Sub Line. My Line and Sub Line
of a Dterm PS III can be assigned to appear on
the Flexible Line Keys of a Multiline Terminal
and the Multiline Terminal can share the Dterm
PS III lines.
Page 9- 48
NEAX 2000 IPS Wired for Wireless
This feature allows the NEAX 2000 IPS to
have the Wireless PBX feature. NEAX 2000
IPS provides several integrated features
adding on the adjunctive configuration.
This feature allows the Multiline Terminal user
to have a Dterm PS III as Sub Station and to
get service with one telephone number.In
case that one user has both a Multiline
Terminal and Dterm PS III, with this feature
used the user is not required to have two
separate telephone numbers.
-When a user is at his desk, a call is
terminated to his Dterm.
-When a user leaves thier desk with Dterm PS
III, a call is automatically terminated to the
Dterm PS III.
In this feature, the Multiline Terminal and Dterm
PS III are referred as Main Station and Sub
Station, respectively.
Out of Zone Indication
When a Dterm PS III user moves out of the
service area and the electric field strength
becomes weak, this feature notifies the user
with a warning tone and an LCD display.
Overlap Dialing
This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to
receive dial tone and dial the desired number
to originate a call.
Preset Dialing
This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to
confirm the number to be dialed before
originating a call.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 9 Descriptions
PS Authorization
This feature is to confirm the identity of a Dterm
PS III to avoid an unauthorized Dterm PS III
from accessing the system.
PS Location Indication
Speech Encryption
This feature protects a call from being tapped.
Speed Dial-PS
This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to dial
the certain frequently called numbers using
two-digit abbreviated call codes.
When a Dterm PS III calls a Multiline
Terminal/Attendant Console or vice versa, this
feature allows to indicate the location name of Station Hunting - Not Available
This feature allows a call placed to a Dterm PS
the ZT II that is connected to the Dterm PS III
III station, which is out of zone or power off to
on the LCD of the Multiline terminal.
be forwarded to an idle station in a hunt
PS Location Registration
group. Two Station Hunting arrangements are
This feature allows the IPS-WCS to supervise available. Station Hunting - Circular processes
the location of each Dterm PS III, upon
the call regardless of which station in the hunt
receiving the location registration request, to
group is called. Station Hunting - Terminal
allow call termination.
initiates a hunt only when the pilot number of
a hunt group is called.
Q931a Roaming Over IP Trunk
Dterm PS III user can originate or receive a call
in any place of a network provided by multiple
PBXs, which are interfaced by JT-Q931-a
protocol over IP Trunks.
Voice Mail Indication
When a message is mailed in the Dterm PS III,
an indication of the envelope icon is displayed
in the LCD of the Dterm PS III.
Radio Channel Changeover
This feature is to supervise and changeover
the channel automatically to avoid the
interference and to maintain the speech
quality.
Short Message Notification (OAI)
This feature enables a Short Text Message
(STM), once arrived at a mail box of the STM
Server (external equipment), to be
automatically distributed to the addressee
Dterm PS III via Open Application Interface
(OAI). This feature also provides “TM Full”
notification on the display (LCD) of the
address D term PSII that is busy. If the Dterm
PS III is out of zone, the feature makes
retransmission of the STM after the PS
returns to the zone.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 9- 49
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
This feature provides a call record for outgoing Station-to-Trunk calls, incoming Trunk-toStation calls (including Data Call), and tandem calls. This facilitates cost control by identifying
trunk use and misuse by individual stations. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
enables call billing to customers and clients, and provides a means for checking local
telephone bills. The PBX provides three kinds of Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
formats; NEAX2400 IMS Format, NEAX 2400 IMS Extended Format and NEAX 2000 IPS
Format.
2400 Format and 2400 Extended Format
The following call information is provided to the SMDR terminal upon completion of each outgoing or
incomming C.O. call.
ƒ Type of Record
ƒ Trunk Number (000-255)
ƒ Trunk Route Number (00-63)
ƒ Calling/Called Party Information
o Calling/Called Party I.D.
o Tenant Number (01-63)
o Station Number (Max. 5 digits)
o Attendant Number (00-07)
o Trunk Route (00-63) + Trunk Number (000-255)
ƒ Time of Start Conversation-Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second
ƒ Time of Call Completion-Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second
ƒ Account Code (Max. 10 digits)
ƒ Condition Code
ƒ Route Advance Information
ƒ Called Number (Max. 24 digits)*
ƒ Call Metering Information
ƒ Calling Party Office Number (Max. 4 digits)
ƒ Billing Office Number (Max. 4 digits)
ƒ ANI Information (Former: Max. 16 digits/Extended: Max. 32 digits)*
ƒ Authorization Code (Max. 10 digits)*
ƒ Call Start Year
ƒ Call End Year
ƒ Condition Code for Advice of Charge (AOC)*
ƒ Advice of Charge (AOC)*
Note: The information marked by “*” is only for outgoing C.O. calls.
The information marked by “**” is only for incoming calls.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 10-1
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
2000 Format
2000 Format is generally used to print call records on a serial printer and provides an easy to read
format for printouts of outgoing / incoming call activity.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Each record is given a serial number from 0000 to 9999 to identify each call.
Calling Station Number
Called Number (26 digits maximum)
Route Number and Trunk Number
Start of Call Time (from month down to second)
Duration of Call (hours, minutes, seconds, rounded to nearest .5 sec.)
Forced Account / Authorization Code
Account Code
Attendant Handled
Trunk Route Overflow (Route Advance)
CPN/ANI up to (16 digits)
Six options for 80/136 character printers
SMDR Terminal Interface
A Personal Computer or a Host Computer is used as the SMDR terminal for receiving and processing
the call information that arrives at the MP. The transmission interface specification by which the AP or
MP sends out call information to the SMDR terminal are as follows:
ƒ
SMDR with AP00/MP built-in SMDR on RS-232C
ITEM
SMDR w/AP00
Specifications
MP Built-in SMDR on RS-232C
Physical Interface
Synchronization
Protocol
Transmission Speed
RS-232C
RS-232C
Asynchronous
Asynchronous
Non protocol (Free Wheel)
Non protocol (Free Wheel)
1200/2400/4800/9600 bps
1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
(for PN-AP00-B with AP00 program)
Note 1
300/1200/2400/4800 /9600/19200 bps
(for PN-AP00-B with MRCA program)
Stop Bit
1/1.5/2 bits
1/2 bits
I/O Port
No. 0-3 port of AP00-B card
RS port of MP card
Terminal Busy
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal
Detecting Method
ON/OFF (terminal ready/busy)
ON/OFF (terminal ready/busy)
Note 1: For the port 1 and 3 of AP00-B card with AP00 program, data speed cannot be set to 9600 bps.
Note 2: Upon confirming that the status of the DCD signal from the SMDR terminal is ON, the system sends out
call information to the SMDR terminal. When the status of the DCD signal is OFF, the system does not
send out call information but temporarily stores the information until the SMDR terminal becomes ready
to receive call information, in other words, until the status of the DCD signal changes to ON. If the status
of the DCD signal has changed from ON to OFF while transmission of specific call information is in
progress, the next call information is not sent out but stored into the system temporarily. The same
applies to CTS and DSR signals.
Note 3: For output to MP built-in SMDR, one message is sent at intervals of one second unidirectionally.
Page 10-2
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
ƒ
MP built-in SMDR on IP
ITEM
Physical Layer
Connection Layer
TCP/IP Protocol
Socket Interface
Transport Protocol
Application Port Number
Number of Connections
Client/Server
Specifications
Ethernet
The Ethernet packet format complies with the DIX standard
ARP, IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP
Complies with 4.3 BSD socket interface
TCP stream type protocol
60010 (fixed)
1
Client: SMDR terminal
Server: PBX
Transmission Code
7-bit ASCII code
Quasi-normal Restriction Condition
1. When conection is closed
2. Status monitoring text
Note 1: The MP card in main site communicates with the SMDR terminal. Therefore, in the communication
settings at SMDR terminal side, set the IP address to connected to the address specified by office data
(CM0B Y=00>00 or CM0B Y=02>03), and application port number shown in the above table.
Note 2: One message is sent each time a request is received from SMDR terminal.
Combinations between SMDR and SMDR Output Format
SMDR
Former
NEAX 2400 IMS
Format
Extended
NEAX 2400 IMS
Format
NEAX 2000
Format
X
—
X
X
X
NOTE
—
X
X
—
X
X
—
SMDR with AP00
(PN-AP00-B with AP00 program)
SMDR with AP00
(PN-AP00-B with MRCA program)
MP built-in SMDR on RS-232C
MP built-in SMDR on IP
X: Available —: Not available
Note: The extended NEAX 2400 IMS format is available by using SC-3168 MRCA program issue 2 or later.
Combinations available at the same time
SMDR
SMDR with AP00
(PN-AP00-B with AP00 program)
SMDR with AP00
(PN-AP00-B with MRCA program)
MP built-in SMDR on RS-232C
MP built-in SMDR on IP
Pattern A
Pattern B
Pattern C
Pattern D
X
—
X
—
—
X
—
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
X
X
X: Available —: Not available
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 10-3
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
Combinations for Center Office of Centralized Billing
SMDR
Former NEAX 2400 IMS
Format
Extended NEAX 2400 IMS
Format
X
—
X
X
—
—
X
X
SMDR with AP00
(PN-AP00-B with AP00 program)
SMDR with AP00
(PN-AP00-B with MRCA program)
MP built-in SMDR on RS-232C
MP built-in SMDR on IP
X: Available —: Not available
Note: Only one output can be used at the center office.
Combinations for Local Office of Centralized Billing
SMDR
Former NEAX 2400 IMS
Format
Extended NEAX 2400 IMS
Format
X
—
X
—
X
X
—
—
SMDR with AP00
(PN-AP00-B with AP00 program)
SMDR with AP00
(PN-AP00-B with MRCA program)
MP built-in SMDR on RS-232C
MP built-in SMDR on IP
X: Available —: Not available
Note: Only one output can be used at the local office.
Service Conditions
ƒ
SMDR can be programmed to record all outgoing calls or toll calls only, depending on the
customers' requirements.
ƒ
When customer provided computer equipment is connected using the RS-232C interface, SMDR
information will be transmitted directly to the equipment as each call record is completed.
ƒ
If the outgoing call is directed to a trunk, which does not supply answer supervision, SMDR will start
recording the call approximately 10 seconds after the last digit has been dialed.
ƒ
Supervision of the status of the external RS-232C terminal is not supplied.
ƒ
There are two kinds of SMDR features as follows:
a. Built-in SMDR
The MP card has one of RS-232C ports for SMDR. This card provides memory for a maximum of
1280 calls, and provides a record of a maximum of 256 trunk calls simultaneously for a
maximum of 8-digit extension number.
Page 10-4
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
Note: In case of built-in SMDR, if the station number is a 7- or 8- digit number, the upper one or
two digits are sent as Calling office Number and the last six digits are sent as Calling Number in
the call record format.
b. SMDR with AP00
o AP00 without expansion memory (standard): up to 1600 calls (if central office feature is used,
up to 800 calls)
o AP00 with expansion memory (optional): up to 27000 calls (if central office feature is used,
up to 26000 calls)
o When a call is completed, the record is sent to the output device and is removed from
memory.
o If the amount of calls exceed the SMDR memory, those overflow calls will not be recorded.
ƒ
The built-in SMDR cannot be provided when AP00 is mounted.
ƒ
Account Codes, Forced Account Codes, Authorization Codes and DISA Codes on Tandem
connections (SMDR with AP00 only) are reported in the applicable call record.
ƒ
SMDR with AP00 provides a record of incoming Tie Line tandem calls where another trunk is dial
accessed.
ƒ
For details of SMDR format, data stream, memory buffer, etc., refer to the Installation Procedure
Manual/Feature Programming Manual.
ƒ
Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber’s number for Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and
CPN (IS-DN) can be recorded in the SMDR by system programming.
Data Transmission Sequence for Ethernet Interface
Establishing a connection, outputting billing Information, and releasing a connection are performed
between the PBX and the SMDR terminal in the following timings.
ƒ Timing to Establish a Connection
o A connection is established when a connection request is received from the SMDR
terminal.
ƒ Timing to Output Billing Information
o Billing information is output when a polling request is received from the SMDR terminal
connected to LAN.
ƒ Timing to Release the Connection
o The connection is released when the SMDR terminal does not receive data from the
PBX in a predetermined time interval. Also the connection is released when the PBX
receives connection release text from the SMDR terminal or does not receive data from
the SMDR terminal within a given time interval.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 10-5
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
System Capacity
ƒ
ƒ
MP Built-in SMDR
Number of
Simultaneous Trunk
Calls
Maximum No. Call Records
256
1280
SMDR with AP00
Buffer Memory Capacity within AP00 card can store the following number of call information
temporarily.
No EXPMEM card on AP00
EXPMEM card on AP00
When not a center
office of Centralized
Billing-CCIS
When center office of
Centralized BillingCCIS
1600
27000
800
26000
Hardware Required for SMDR
Description
SPN-AP00B MRC-C (AP)
Qty
1 per system
SPN-CP24A MP (UA)
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
RS RVS-4S CA-C
RS NORM-4S CA-A
RS PRT-15S CA-A
SMDR Terminal
Printer
Modem
1 per system
1 per system
1 per SMDR, PMS
1 per SMDR, PMS
1 per Printer
1 per system
as Required
as required
Page 10-6
Remarks
Control card for SMDR/PMS/H/M
Printer/CCIS Centralized SMDR
MP
MP Mounted card One per MP
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
Message Center Interface (MCI)
This feature provides an interface with a customer supplied Voice Mail System (VMS) which
can send Message Waiting lamp control data to the system.
The Message Center Interface (MCI) can provide the following operations:
1. When terminating the call to the VMS, the system sends call connection status information
to the VMS through the MCI.
2. The VMS sends the Message Waiting Lamp on data to the MCI.
3. The system, upon receiving this control data from the MCI, illuminates the Message
Waiting lamp of the corresponding station.
4. The VMS, upon receiving retrieved message information, will send the Message Waiting
lamp control data requesting the system to extinguish the Message Waiting lamp of the
corresponding station.
Service Conditions
ƒ
The Voice Mail System (VMS) is interfaced to the system through the 4LCD/8LC card. (The
4LCD/8LC provides disconnect supervision in the form of a momentary loop open.)
ƒ
The UCD or Station Hunting feature is usually provided with the VMS station.
ƒ
One RS-232C port on the MP card or the Application Processor (AP00) is required to make a data
link with a customer supplied VMS.
ƒ
Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal, DTMF telephone, or the Attendant
Console, but not from DP telephones.
ƒ
The MCI is available to a direct call or a forwarded call from a station/trunk/Attendant to the VMS.
ƒ
Stations can set Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding - All Calls, No Answer, and Busy Line to
the VMS. The system sends out incoming call information to the VMS. A call to a station that has
Call For-warding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS.
ƒ
The MCI can control the LCD display of a Multiline Terminal for “MESSAGE” Indication. The
number of messages is not displayed.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 10-7
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
Service Conditions (con’t)
ƒ
When the Message Waiting lamp control is activated with the MCI, the lamp control from the
following equipment will not be provided:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
From the Property Management System (PMS)
From the station (by dialing the access code)
From the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
From the Hotel/Motel Attendant Console
From the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
From the Attendant Console
ƒ
Only one system should be programmed (via system programming) to control Message Waiting
lamps through the CCIS network.
ƒ
The system controls Message Waiting lamps normally when the time interval between messages is
a minimum of 350 msec. or more.
ƒ
When the VMS interface line does not answer, all of the messages are sent out from the I/O port of
the MP/AP00.
ƒ
If the VMS is not ready for information receiving (Busy Status), the AP00 can temporarily store up to
16 call records in its internal memory. If the maximum of 16 call records is stored and a 17th is
generated, the system will write over the oldest stored record. When the RS port on the MP card is
used for the data link to the VMS, the MP can store up to 15 call records. If a 16th call record is
generated when the MP stores 15 call records, the system will write over the oldest stored record.
ƒ
The Voice Mail Integration (Inband) feature can be combined with voice mail through the MCI in the
system. The Voice Mail Integration (Inband) feature and MCI feature can coexist in one system and
either can be selected per VMS (VMS station number) by system programming.
ƒ
When terminating a call with the ANI information to the VMS through the MCI, the system can send
the ANI information to the VMS, if required. This is not available through CCIS interface.
Hardware Required for MCI
Description
SPN-CP24A MP (UA)
SPN-AP00B MRC-C (AP)
RS RVS-4S CA-C
RS NORM-4S CA-A
AP VM-0.7 CA-A
PN-8LCAA
VMS
MODEM
Page 10-8
Qty
1 per system
1 per system
1 per VMS
1 per VMS
1 per AD8
As required
1 per system
As required
Remarks
MP
Control card for MCI
AP00-VMS, 13.1ft (4.0m)
AP00-MODEM, 13.1ft (4.0m)
AP00-VM00 (AD8), 2.3ft (0.7m)
Interface for VMS (with MW lamps)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
Property Management System (PMS)
The system provides a data interface to a locally provided Property Management System
(PMS). This enables communication between the system and the PMS in order to provide
computer control of Hotel/Motel features.
The available PMS feature codes:
Feature
Feature
Code
11
Maid Status
12
Type of Information
PMS
AP00
IP
Maid status set up by guest room telephones
Maid status set up by the Front Desk
Terminal
X
X
Message waiting lamp status changes
X
X
X
X
X
—
Message Waiting
13
Station Message Detail
14
Restriction Control
15
Check In/Check Out
16
Room check in/check out status
X
X
Room Data Image
17
Complete status information for a room
X
X
Wake Up
19
Wake up status
X
X
Room Change/Room
Swap/Room Copy
20
Room change/room swap status
X
X
Room Occupancy/
Room Data Change
21
Room Occupancy/Room Data Changes
X
—
Data Connection
Maintenance
50
Batch processing status
—
X
Message Waiting
53
—
X
Station Message Detail
54
Controlling message waiting lamps
Station message detail information for
each call
—
X
Check In/Check Out/Room
Change
56
Setting check in/check out and room change
—
X
Room Recovery
57
Room information at system recovery
—
X
Direct Data Entry
59
Data entered from a guest room station
X
X
Room Data Change
61
Room data change information
—
X
Administrative
Station Name
65
Setting administrative station name
—
X
Status Inquiry
70
Data link maintenance
X
X
Local/toll call details on completion
of calls
Changes in telephone calling restrictions
placed on room station numbers
X: Available —: Not available
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 10-9
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
PMS Interface
ƒ
PMS with AP00-B on an RS-232C Interface
Item
Description
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bps, asynchronous, software
selectable
Data Rate
Note 1
Operating Mode
Half Duplex
Electrical Interface
Characteristic
EIA RS-232C electrical standard interface
Signal Form
Interface Distance
Word Framing
Parity VRC
EIA RS-404
Max. 15 m (49.2 ft.) between PBX and PMS (without modem)
NOTE 2
10 bits (1 start, 7 data, 1 parity, 1 stop) or 11 bits (1 start, 7
data, 1 parity,2 stop)
No parity, even parity, odd parity; selected by PBX system
data
Parity LRC
Exclusive OR of message text
Frame Contents
US ASCII 7-bit codes
Control
Contention
Primary office: PBX
Priority Sequence
Secondary office: PMS
Note 1: For the Port 1 and Port 3, data speed 9600 bps cannot be used.
Note 2: When modems are used, full duplex asynchronous type modems are required.
ƒ
Bulit in PMS over IP
Item
Description
Physical layer
Ethernet
Connection Layer
The Ethernet packet format complies with the DIX standard
TCP/IP core protocol
ARP, IP, ICMP, UDP, and TCP
Socket interface
Transport Protocol
Complies with the 4.3BSD socket interface
TCP stream-type protocol
Application Port Number
60050 (Fixed)
Number of Connections
Frame Contents
1 conncetion
Server: PBX
Client: PMS
US ASCII 7-bit codes
Pseudo Normal Restriction
Condition
1. At connection release
2. Status monitoring text
Client/Server
Page 10-10
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 10 System Input/Output (I/O) Interfaces
Service Conditions
1. Only one Interface Port can be provided for PMS.
2. The system sends information relating to the following features to the PMS upon request from the
PMS:
ƒ Do Not Disturb
ƒ Room Cut-off
3. The NEAX 2000 IPS system can support PMS Model-60 via AP00-B or PMS Model 90/120 via
TCP/IP connection.
4. The AP00-B with MRC-E program does not support PMS.
Hardware Required for PMS
Description
SPN-CP24A MP (UA)
SPN-AP00B MRC-C (AP)
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
RS RVS-4S CA-C
RS NORM-4S CA-A
RS PRT-4S CA-A
PMS Terminal Serial
PMS Terminal over IP
SMDR Terminal
Printer
MODEM
Qty
1 per system
1 per system
1 per system
1 per SMDR/PMS
1 per SMDR/PMS
1 per Printer
1 per system
1 per system
1 per system
As required
As required
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Remarks
MP
Control card for PMS
MP Mounted card One per MP
AP00-VMS, 13.1ft (4.0m)
AP00-MODEM, 13.1ft (4.0m)
AP00 Printer
Model 60 only
Model 90/Model 120
Page 10-11
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface
System Outline
The NEAX 2000 IPS is equipped with an Open Application Interface (OAI) to provide user
applications through an external processor, which transmits and receives the control signals
via Ethernet interface on the MP. The interface supports TCP/IP protocol.
OAI Components
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Ethernet Card (PZ-M606-A)
APM Platform Software Rel FD 600C
OAI Application FD 600C (Specific Application Software)
OAI Computer (NT or Unix Platform)
Service Conditions
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
If the host computer goes off line for any reason, all OAI features will be unavailable.
Up to 24 digits of the calling subscriber’s number for Automatic Identification (ANI) can
be sent out to the OAI Computer by system programming.
This feature supports TAPI 2.1.
Up to 8 digits is available for station numbers. Available numbers are O to 9, “*” and “#”.
Note: The number of digits depends on the OAI application software
Attendant Console and ISDN terminal do not support the monitor.
Delete PBX station number after delete station information such as SMFR, SSFR, and
SSFM setting information in application side.
Free Location Facility (FLF) is available from Series 3300 software. SPN-AP00B DBM
(AP) is required for FLF.
The backup function of ACF when the external OAI computer is out of service.
User Application Processor (UAP)
The User Applications Processor (UAP) is a pre-staged processor with all of the essential PC
elements necessary to load OAI applications and connect to the PBX for efficient installations.
The UAP uses a SCO UNIX or Linux operating system and communicates to the NEAX2000
IPS via TCP/IP (Ethernet). In addition to the operating system, NEC’s Application Platform
Manager (APM) software manages the OAI applications, installed on the UAP, and maintains
the communications between the UAP and the NEAX2000 IPS. Each UAP is fully assembled
and all generic software is pre-loaded prior to shipment.
UAP Configurations
OAI is only being offered with a pre-staged User Application Processor (UAP) and the actual OAI
software applications. Since the OAI interface protocol is based on universally accepted OSI standards,
the UAP uses industry standard PC components. With additional memory and hard drive capacity,
multiple applications may be installed.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-1
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
OAI UAP Applications
NEC has developed a number of applications to enhance the features and functions of the
NEAX2000 IPS. These applications are Open Server 5 compliant and will not operate with
Open Server 4. The NEAX2000 IPS supports a maximum of 4 simultaneous applications.
The following applications, when residing alone, require the UAP. If additional OAI applications
are to coexist on the same UAP, additional RAM and Hard Disk capacity may be required.
Code Master
Code Master allows authorized employees to place calls from any station in the facility based on their
own individual level of access. They can do the same from remote stations, located outside the facility.
Users are issued an access code, which they enter in, through the dial pad, when calling from stations
other than their own. That code bypasses the restrictions on the station being used and allows the user,
even from a remote phone, to have the same unrestricted access they normally use when calling from
their assigned stations. Code Master will also allow the telecommunications managers and
administrators to keep detailed records of calls being made through the use of Code Master. Code
Master, when residing alone, requires the UAP1000. If additional OAI applications are to coexist on the
same UAP, additional RAM and Hard Disk capacity may be required. Code Master can be accessed
either from a telephone within the system (internal) or from outside of the system (external). The
application uses the Authorization Code Facility (ACF) of the NEAX 2000 IPS and maintains a
database that accommodates 10-digit authorization codes.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Authorization codes are limited to 10 digits (including # and *).
Only one application may access the NEAX2000 IVS2 Authorization Code Facility (ACF). Code
Master cannot run simultaneously with another application that processes calls requiring
authorization codes (i.e. Guardian).
If the UAP is down or otherwise not available, the NEAX2000 IVS2 will use its internal table of
authorization codes which are more limited in number than those maintained in the Code Master
database.
Code master supports in excess of 10 Million authorization codes.
Directory Dialer
Directory Dialer enables you to initiate or transfer a call to someone in your organization by entering the
name of the person you are calling, rather than the person’s extension number. Directory Dialer
maintains a list of the last names of everyone in the organization. When you want to call someone, you
enter the first few letters of the last name (up to 16), and Directory Dialer displays any names from the
list that contain the same sequence of letters. Then, after you select the correct name, Directory Dialer
places the call for you.
Letters are entered through the Dterm keypad. Press the key labeled “A” (the two key) for A, etc. You
need not enter the entire name; the first few letters are enough. If there is more than one name that
begins with the same sequence of letters, Directory Dialer will display each possible name until you
show the one you want.
Page 11-2
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
Conference Room Scheduler
Conference Room Scheduler is a NEC OAI application that allows an organization to better manage
conference and meeting rooms that are always in high demand. Conference Room Scheduler enables
users of a Dterm phone to reserve conference rooms, cancel reservations, verify reservations, or check
reservations made by other users. Rooms may be reserved in half hour blocks, up to 90 days in
advance. Where multiple conference rooms exist, Conference Room Scheduler enables you to specify
the amount of attendees expected and reserve a room large enough to suit your needs. All reservations
and cancellations are achieved via assigned use identification numbers. A conference room reservation
list can be printed or displayed on a terminal.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Rooms can only be reserved, verified, or canceled up to three months, or 90 days in advance.
Room reservations must be made for a specific day and time. It is not possible, to reserve a
room for Mondays and Fridays without making a separate request for each day individually.
Rooms are reserved in half-hour intervals. For example, if you want a conference room from
10:20 - 10:40, the reservation will be made from 10:00 - 11:00.
Rooms cannot be reserved across days (i.e. 11:30 PM Monday - 1:00 AM Tuesday).
Reservations are made and maintained by identification number. If an employee is leaving the
company, all reservations made using that person’s identification number must be deleted
before the number is removed from the employee database. A reservation in the system
associated with an ID number that is no longer in the employee database cannot be removed
from Conference room Scheduler.
Conference Room Scheduler can be set up to work with three, four, or five digit room numbers
and adjusts the messages displayed on the Dterm panel to accommodate the difference in length.
Identification codes may be one to nine digits in length.
Roamer
Roamer enables you to take your incoming telephone calls and you calling privileges with you no
matter where you go within you office environment. If you are assigned permanently to your own
telephone, you can relocate to any other telephone. If you do not have your own telephone, you can
make any telephone in the system your own. When you have relocated to another telephone (or back
to your permanently assigned telephone) all of your incoming calls will be transferred to the new
location, and your privileges and restrictions apply to any outgoing calls you make from that telephone.
Second Party Alert
Second Party Alert is a powerful telecommunications application that makes it possible for users to
know that they are receiving secondary calls while they are on the phone. This application lights an
LED lamp on the Dterm, sounds a chime, and when the function key is pressed, displays the name and
extension of the secondary caller, and additional callers, in sequence, on the Dterm LCD.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-3
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
Guardian
Guardian provides a level of vigilant phone security that not only monitors occurrences of toll fraud in
the organization, but effectively deters would be toll fraud callers by documenting all long distance
activity. Guardian allows the end user to assign authorization codes for access to certain stations,
detects attempts to place calls that are considered invalid according to assigned privileges and, when
necessary, restricts service to indicated extensions. Through the Guardian Administrator, restrictions
can be exercised on an automatic basis, by time of day, and day of week.
The system is designed to support the management of multiple tenants. Each tenant has its own realtime call processing, configuration, and databases, but the centralized System Administrator manages
all tenants.
Guardian monitors access to telephone extensions in the system, detects invalid attempts to place
calls, and when necessary, restricts service. In the Guardian system, each telephone user is assigned
an authorization code that corresponds to an individual extension or to a whole group of extensions, as
in a college dormitory or a corporate department. Authorization codes, extensions and groups are
administratively assigned defined time periods during which access is prohibited. Any calls attempted
during prohibited periods are considered invalid and are not processed. An excessive frequency of
invalid calls on any extension results in the Guardian system restricting or disabling the extension. Calls
that are attempted either on extensions or with authorization codes that are already disabled are also
considered invalid. There are three ways the telephone access is restricted or disabled:
System Disable - Guardian monitors real-time processing for frequency of invalid call attempts on any
extension that exceeds the maximum frequency. Guardian than automatically and temporarily disables
the extension used in the invalid call attempts. Both the maximum frequency and the length of time that
the extension is temporarily disabled are configured limits specified by extension group, however, the
administrator is provided with the ability to override a System Disable at any time.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Administrative Disable - Guardian enables the administrator to disable any extension,
authorization code, or group of extension in either of two ways:
Routinely - The disablement of any or all extensions, authorization codes, or groups of
extensions during specified, regularly occurring time periods, such as weekend or the late night
hours.
Unconditionally - The disablement of an extension, authorization code, or group at any time, for
as long as desired.
Guardian logs information about invalid call attempts and modifications to the status of
extensions, authorization codes, and groups. From this log and from the databases, Guardian
than provides a variety of reports in support of system management.
Page 11-4
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
Time Clock
Time Clock is designed to provide organizations with a more effective and efficient way to keep track of
employee hours worked and days absent. Time Clock allows employees to conveniently use their own
Dterm station as time clocks. Employees are assigned personal identification numbers (PINs), or
PIN/Password combinations, that can be linked to certain extensions to discourage employees from
checking-in for another. A centralized database allows management to monitor the time of day each
employee arrives and departs, and enables reports to be compiled based on employee name, time, and
location. Also, Time Clock can control call-out restriction codes to prevent the use of a checked-out
phone.
Time Clock is also a modern solution for today’s security operations, where guards need to check-in
periodically at different stations through out their shift. Instead of using the traditional, but somewhat
outdated, key and clock method, guards need only call up the database from any phone in the area
they happen to be monitoring.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Individual identification numbers are assigned to each user. If these identification numbers are
public, a secret personal identification number may also be used to ensure security and
confidentiality. These numbers must be 10 digits in length or less and 0 may not be used.
Time Clock moves all route restrictions assigned to each individual user to the telephone on
which he/she checks in. When no one is checked in to a telephone, a default route restriction
class is automatically assigned to that telephone.
A time may be designated at which all users are automatically checked out. This feature is used
to reduce any confusion when someone checks in twice without checking out in between.
OpenWorX: Attendant Statistics
OpenWorX Statistics operates in conjunction with the Business Attendant System in order to
provide near real time statistics about the operators and the queues. A variety of information is
gathered and stored in a database that allows for a multitude of differing reports. With the
power of Crystal Reports® the user can then view the data with a web interface allowing for
HTML, PDF, and RPT formats. An additional purchase of Crystal Reports Viewer® is required
for the RPT format. Below is a list of the types of reports the user can run.
Attendant Reports
ƒ Attendant Call Summary
ƒ Attendant Answered Calls
ƒ Attendant Outbound Calls
ƒ Attendant Interval Summary
ƒ Attendant Inbound Interval
ƒ Attendant Outbound Interval
ƒ Total Attendant Summary
ƒ Attendant Login/Logout Detail
Queue Reports
ƒ Queue Summary
ƒ Queue Abandon Calls
ƒ Queue Answered Calls
ƒ Queue Interval
ƒ Total Queue Summary
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-5
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
OpenWorX: Business Attendant System (BAS)
NEC’s Business Attendant System (BAS) is a powerful client/server PC-based tool for full-time
and part-time NEAX® 2000 IPS system answering position. The BAS consists of an interactive
client side application running on Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system that
connects to the BAS server via the corporate LAN. The BAS server software is used for
NEAX® 2000 IPS connectivity and runs on a Microsoft Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2003
Server.
With a dynamic interactive directory and an Open Application Interface (OAI) driven call queue,
the operators are able to process a high call volume with minimal effort and time expenditure in
today’s sophisticated business environment. For example, an operator can answer an
incoming call from one of many queues; find out to whom the caller wishes to speak, begin
typing that name to select it in the directory, and once selected, hit the <Enter> key or click the
entry to transfer the call. Additionally the caller could be parked, put on hold, or sent to voice
mail. Several operators can monitor the same queues and share the same directory for call
operation.
BAS: Benefits
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Centralized company database that can link and replicate with other databases, including
AIMWorX.
Greeting playback and call recording.
PC-based call processing.
Meet-me paging.
Unlimited, global parked calls.
Different greetings/displays available for DIDs.
Single key call processing.
Directory dialing for accuracy.
Look ahead status from the directory.
Sort and searchable directory by key fields.
Configurable screens for each operator.
Queue types allowing flexibility to answer certain call types.
Configurable screen pop information.
MAPI compliant e-mail integration.
Set/cancel call-forwarding and DND for other phones.
Delay announcements capabilities to ensure callers are informed and provided other options
during busy call times.
Configurable night station or announcement when operators are not logged in.
Flexible DID number assigned to each operator that follows them regardless of what PC/phone
they use.
Optional statistics package to track queue and operator statistics.
Optional integration with OpenWorX Location Status Information to see an employee's
availability, return time, and alternate phone number.
Optional integration with OpenWorX Dialer providing Dterm users’ access to the same employee
and external database.
Optional integration with OpenWorX Message Reader providing Dterm users access OpenWorX
text messages.
Page 11-6
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
ƒ
ƒ
Optional integration with OpenWorX Desktop providing PC users all the benefits of the standard
Dterm -based applications from a graphical user interface.
FASTER and MORE EFFICIENT OPERATORS!
BAS: Call Control Functionality
Call control for the BAS is a queue-oriented system. Just like the NEC business attendant
console, the BAS provides the standard familiar call queues and information. However
additional information about incoming calls is added to better empower the Attendant.
Brief Definition of Queues:
ƒ Internal – extension to attendant calls within the PBX.
ƒ External – calls coming into PBX from an undefined trunk type.
ƒ CCSA, FX, TIE, WATS – calls coming into the PBX from trunks in CCSA, FX, TIE or WATS
Trunk Groups.
ƒ Priority – calls that must be answered before all other calls.
ƒ Paged – people who have been paged to a meet-me paging number, but the parked person is
no longer waiting to be joined.
ƒ Vacant – vacant-level intercept when a call goes to an invalid number.
ƒ Park T.O. – calls that were parked and have timed out will recall here.
ƒ NANS T.O. – internal calls blind transferred but not answered will recall here.
ƒ Station Transfer – transferred to the attendant queue by another station or voice mail.
ƒ Attendant Transfer – calls transferred from other attendants will arrive on this queue.
ƒ Me – This queue is for the attendant’s personal monitored number or calls made directly to their
extension.
Brief Description of Call Control Function:
ƒ Answer – answers the oldest call in queue or in the priority queue.
ƒ Park – allows the operator to park a caller on an orbit number. Once there, dialing that orbit
from any telephone in the system retrieves the caller. This function is also known as “Meet-me
Paging”.
ƒ Dial – allows the operator to make an outgoing call from his or her extension.
ƒ Retrieve – enables the attendants to retrieve parked calls by selecting a caller to retrieve from a
menu of callers that are parked.
ƒ Hold – place a caller on hold on one of the loop keys or “un-hold” them as well. The Dterm will
become idle.
ƒ Transfer – initiates a supervised transfer once a number has been entered or a directory entry
selected.
ƒ Blind Transfer – initiates an un-supervised transfer. As with Transfer, a number must be
selected beforehand.
ƒ Join Park – allows the operator to join an existing caller with a parked caller that is selected from
the parked call menu.
ƒ Conference – a conference between the source caller, the destination caller, and the operator.
ƒ Source/Destination – used when a supervised transfer is initiated. Before the transfer is
completed, the operator may switch voice path back and forth between the existing source and
destination connections.
ƒ Camp – camps a caller onto a busy extension.
ƒ Cancel – disconnects a call or cancels an existing supervised transfer.
ƒ Release – completes a supervised transfer or conference.
ƒ Override – allows the operator to perform an executive override of a busy call.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-7
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The above functions are mapped to Function Keys (F1 – F12) at the top of the keyboard. The
spacebar can be used to answer the first call in queue and the Enter key will activate dialing or
transfer based on the current call state.
Other Functions and Features Associated With This Screen:
Loop keys allow the attendant to hold up to 10 different callers simultaneously.
The boxes directly below the loop keys are the source and destination boxes. The Source is on
the left and is fully configurable to show the caller name and caller ID if known. Additionally, up
to three lines of information chosen from the directory can be displayed below the name and
number. The destination box is configurable in the same way and shows available information
when the operator transfers the call to another party, or when a station transfers a call to the
operator.
The Number Entered box allows the operator to enter a known number for either a direct dial or
a transfer.
The number shown in the bottom hand portion of the screen represents the number of calls
waiting in queue at the queue screen, or total queue depth.
The time shown left of the queue depth describes how long the current caller has been
connected. Also if the operator hovers the mouse pointer over a loop key with a caller on hold,
the time that caller has been holding will display.
Left of the timer is an information screen that displays the name of the person holding while
hovering the mouse pointer over a held loop. Also, if a caller is recalled from a park or a blind
transfer, their identification, and the party to which they were transferred or for which they were
parked will be shown here.
BAS: Speed Dials Pad
Up to forty speed-dial fields are available for each individual attendant. Dragging an entry from
the directory onto the speed dial button automatically programs these fields. Another great
feature of these buttons is that they act as a Busy Lamp Field (BLF). When that user’s phone
is off hook, the speed dial button becomes red and when that phone is ringing, the speed dial
button blinks red. By right clicking the button, the operator can enable or disable monitoring,
as well as change the name, forward the person’s Dterm, set DND, or initiate a screened, blind,
or announced voice call. This is useful for an operator who also has a set of VIPs for whom
they answer calls.
BAS: Directory
Both an internal directory and an external directory exist in the BAS system. The internal
directory lists employees within the company, while the external directory stores numbers
outside the company. External numbers are usually numbers that are frequently called, or
information about people or companies that frequently call the main listed number. When
answering a call from one of these external numbers, fields from this entry are displayed to the
operator, providing more information than just the 10-digit caller ID. There are several different
fields available for display and four of these fields can be user-defined. The “Search” field
searches dynamically as the information is typed in the field selected. The directory is also
capable of being partitioned by company. The drop down box at the top of the window
displays entries from a particular company, or all companies in the system. This is particularly
useful in shared tenant installations, where a single attendant group serves multiple
organizations.
Page 11-8
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
DID for Company Lookup
A DID number can be associated with each company selection in the database. With this function
enabled, when a call comes in on a specific DID for that company, the operator directory will
automatically default to that company and only show those employees that are in the company. A
screen pop will also occur letting the operator know which DID was called.
BAS: Overhead Paging
Most overhead paging is done by the creation of a direct trunk access key or a trunk access
code. The BAS software does not have the ability to utilize these methods. Because of this, if
the user wishes to overhead page from BAS they must manually initiate it from their Dterm.
However the user may create a special speed dial key instead. In the PBX, the user must
create a trunk access dial string. Using LCR, a dial string can directly access the trunk and
provide voice path to the paging system. For example, the user creates the number 19 in their
LCR to access trunk 1 in route 1. This trunk is terminated to the overhead paging. Now when
the attendant hits their speed dial to dial 19, they will be able to overhead page.
BAS: Call Recording and Playback
Apart from the directory, another powerful feature integrated into the BAS client is the ability to
record conversations and playback greetings over the telephone. With the addition of a Dterm
Play/Record Module, the client will be able to automatically record voice conversations and
instruct the software to save the last specified number of conversations. Conversations are
saved as .wav files, which are time; date stamped and rotated in a circular buffer. When it is
determined that a call needs to be saved, the operator simply presses the “Save Recordings”
button and the selected call is automatically saved. Conversely, the operator can save a set of
greetings to be played back immediately every time the phone is answered via the BAS.
Greetings playback can be determined based on “internal” or “external” calls, on groups of
caller IDs, or even morning or afternoon. A different greeting can be recorded for any of the
scenarios above allowing the attendant to present a pleasant and consistent greeting over the
telephone.
BAS: Offline Mode (Pseudo Night Mode)
Night Mode allows for calls to be handled differently during off business hours. When no BAS
attendants are logged into the system, the OWX server is still monitoring calls to the
attendants. Since there are no attendants to send the calls, the server will instead send the
calls to a configurable number, such as the voice mail system, or play a night announcement.
In the case where the server itself goes down, it is recommended that the user set up a UCD
degrade. Since the OAI cannot route the calls, it will instead send the calls to a UCD group,
which includes the operators. Typically a separate set of virtual sub-lines are put into a UCD
group and assigned on each attendant’s Dterm and the pilot number of this UCD group is
associated with the BAS queues to be used in the event of failure.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-9
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
BAS: Authorization and Account Code Dialing
BAS supports dialing with Account Codes or Authorization Codes. However, it uses a slightly different
number format for the dial string. To denote an account code an exclamation point (!) is used and for
authorization codes a dollar sign ($) is used. Here are some example strings.
Account Code: 2145551212!1234567890
Authorization Code: 2145551212$1234567890
The exclamation point (!) or the dollar sign ($) delineate to BAS where the dial-able number ends and
where the code begins. In the account code example, 2145551212 is the phone number and
1234567890 is the account code.
BAS: Attendant PC Minimum Hardware Requirements
Operating System
Processor
Memory
Hard Drive Space
Additional Hardware
Microsoft® Windows 2000 Professional or Server or
Microsoft Windows XP (Latest Critical Updates)
350 MHz Pentium II Class Processor or higher
256 MB of RAM
1 GB Hard Drive
Network Interface Card, CD ROM Drive, Monitor,
Keyboard, Mouse
OpenWorX: Business Receptionist (BR)
The OpenWorX Business Receptionist is a PC-based call-processing application designed
primarily for departmental executive assistants. The OpenWorX Business Receptionist enables
multiple users to answer calls, search the directory for a desired party, check the Dterm status,
and perform call processing functions including making, answering, transferring, and parking
calls. The OpenWorX Business Receptionist is a line-based system unlike the Business
Attendant System (BAS) which is queue-based. Therefore, the OpenWorX Business
Receptionist is also an effective tool for other Dterm users such as help desks, security desks,
etc. The OpenWorX Business Receptionist, like all OpenWorX applications, uses the common
OpenWorX database and is integrated with a multitude of OpenWorX applications.
BR: Speed Dials Pad
The BR speed dial pad is modeled off the BAS speed dial. See the previous section on BAS for details
of operation.
Note: In order for the BR operator to monitor the speed dials, they must be given TAPI rights to the lines they
wish to monitor
BR: Directory
Both an internal directory and an external directory exist in the Business Receptionist system. The
internal directory lists employees within the company, while the external directory stores numbers
outside the company. External numbers are usually numbers that are frequently called, or information
about people or companies that frequently call the main listed number. When answering a call from
one of these external numbers, fields from this entry are displayed to the operator, providing more
information than just the 10-digit caller ID.
Page 11-10
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
DID for Company Lookup
The directory is also capable of being partitioned by company. The drop down box at the top of the window
displays entries from a particular company, or all companies in the system. This is particularly useful in
shared tenant installations, where a single attendant group serves multiple organizations. Additionally, a DID
number can be associated with each company selection in the database. With this function enabled, when a
call comes in on a specific DID for that company, the operator directory will automatically default to that
company and only show those employees that are in the company.
BR: Overhead Paging
Most overhead paging is done by the creation of a direct trunk access key or a trunk access code. The
Business Receptionist software does not have the ability to utilize these methods. Because of this, if
the user wishes to overhead page from Business Receptionist they must manually initiate it from their
Dterm. However the user may create a special speed dial key instead.
In the PBX, the user must create a trunk access dial string. Using LCR, a dial string can directly access
the trunk and provide voice path to the paging system. For example, the user creates the number 19 in
their LCR to access trunk 1 in route 1. This trunk is terminated to the overhead paging. Now when the
attendant hits their speed dial, to dial 19, they will be able to overhead page
BAS: Call Recording and Playback
Apart from the directory, another powerful feature integrated into the Business Receptionist client is the
ability to record conversations and playback greetings over the telephone. With the addition of a Dterm
Play/Record Module, the client will be able to automatically record voice conversations and instruct the
software to save the last specified number of conversations. Conversations are saved as .wav files,
which are time & date stamped and rotated in a circular buffer. When it is determined that a call needs
to be saved, the operator simply presses the “Save Recordings” button and the selected call is
automatically saved. Conversely, the operator can save a set of greetings to be played back
immediately every time the phone is answered via the Business Receptionist. Greetings playback can
be determined based on “internal” or “external” calls, on groups of caller IDs, or even morning or
afternoon. A different greeting can be recorded for any of the scenarios above allowing the attendant to
present a pleasant and consistent greeting over the telephone.
BR: Authorization and Account Code Dialing
Business Receptionist supports dialing with Account Codes or Authorization Codes. See the previous
section on BAS for details of operation.
BR: Attendant PC Minimum Hardware Requirements
Business Receptionist hardware requirements are the same as the BAS requirements, see previous
section for details.
OpenWorX: Dialer
NEC’s OpenWorX Dialer allows any user in the NEAX 2000 IPS to use his or her Dterm to
electronically search for the extension of another person in the NEAX 2000 IPS, even while the
user is on the phone. Once the listing is located, a simple button press is all it takes to make
the call or initiate a transfer. Instead of thumbing through a paper directory, the user now
accesses the online up to date directory by pressing a function key on their Dterm. Centralizing
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-11
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
the database also ensures that all extensions are easily added and/or updated; no matter how
often updates are made. Also, the user can query using division and department such as
would occur in a multi-site corporation.
Dialer: Database
The database used for Dialer is the same as the Business Attendant System database, which allows
Dialer users to have the same information available to the attendants.
Dialer: Benefits
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Saves the attendant time by curtailing the need for employees to dial ‘0’ to get a phone number
or extension of someone in the company directory.
Provides a centralized company phone directory.
Eliminates outdated printed copies of the company directory.
OpenWorX: Location Status Information (LSI)
LSI is a useful service that allows other system users to obtain information regarding your
current location and status when you are away from your office. This can be done through any
Dterm phone that has the associated function key programmed. The user can:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Set, Modify, or Delete their location information.
View the location information of your colleagues.
Query an extension to determine whether location information is set, and call that extension, if
the person is available.
Check the status of other users simply by dialing their extension, if configured to do so.
LSI: Database
LSI uses the OpenWorX database. This common database allows for other applications such as BAS,
INASET or Desktop to access LSI information.
LSI: Benefits
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Never have to guess about someone’s whereabouts.
Know when someone is expected to return and how to contact them while they are away.
Securely set your own location through any Dterm phone in the office.
BAS integration allows attendants to check status via their directory.
Desktop integration allows all employees to view the status of other employees via their web
browser.
INASET integration allows INASET users to see employee statuses in their view of the
corporate directory.
OpenWorX: Message Reader (MR)
Message Reader is a convenient application that allows users to retrieve their messages taken
by the attendants from any Dterm phone set enabled with the proper OAI function key. The
messages can be sent from BAS, INASET or Desktop.
Page 11-12
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
MR: Functionality
Message Reader is quite easy to use. Simply go to any Dterm phone set that has the Message Reader
function key configured, then press the key and enter the extension for which you wish to read
messages. In the event more than one user is assigned to a phone, the user may choose from a list of
employees to designate for whom to read messages, and then enter the proper password, if required. If
no extension number is entered, Message Reader will default to the extension you are using for this
connection. Once having entered the extension and the password, the user may easily peruse all their
messages and after a message is read, it may be deleted or saved. If the person leaving the message
left a return phone number, Message Reader can even dial the call back number automatically!
MR: Database
MR uses the OpenWorX database. This common database allows for other applications such
as BAS, INASET or Desktop to access LSI information.
MR: Benefits
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Read your messages even when away from your desk, from any Dterm phone set.
Save valuable operator time because they no longer have to read the message back to the
employee.
Automatically dial call back numbers, preventing paper clutter or misdialed numbers.
OpenWorX: Short Text Messaging
Short Text Messaging (STM) is a service running on the OpenWorX Server designed to
facilitate the delivery of text messages to NEAX Wireless Dterm PSIII handsets on the NEAX
2000 IPS. This is accomplished with either, Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) on a Local
Area Network (LAN), or Telelocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP) Version 1.8. This application
turns your PSIII handsets into one-way internal text pagers in addition to their normal
functionality. The interface allows for an audible alert when messages arrive. Users should be
aware that the volume for the text message arrival notice is the same as the ringer volume. In
addition, if the PSIII is set to vibrate, it will also vibrate when a text message arrives. Messages
can be stored for later reading as well as deleted. Messages cannot be received while the
user is on the phone.
STM: Functionality in an SMTP Environment
The STM server can be installed on your enterprise network as an SMTP mail gateway. In this
configuration, users simply send messages up to 128 characters (always the limit of text messages, no
matter what SMTP set up used) to the address [email protected] [email protected] is a
good example. The server will then parse the Pager ID out of the heading and send the message to
the wireless handset with that extension. NEC has verified this functionality on Microsoft Exchange®
and Lotus Notes®.
STM: Functionality in a TAP Environment
STM can also be configured to use an RS-232c TAP interface for sending or receiving alphanumeric
messages to the user’s wireless handsets. Thus a TAP enabled pager program can be used to send a
message.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-13
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
STM: Benefits
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Allow users to send messages directly to users when not available for call transfer.
Short messages can be left as text pages instead of voice mails.
Internal Text messages can be sent directly to wireless handsets via email.
Facilitates quick call back. “Call me at 555-1212, Bob.” Can immediately be returned via the
same device.
Automated reminders can be set up via your email to be sent directly to your PSII.
OpenWorX: Incoming Call Assistant (ICA)
Incoming Call Assistant (ICA) is a service that gives Dterm users a powerful tool to manage
incoming and outgoing calls. These functions can be accessed with the simple touch of an
associated function key.
ICA: Functionality
The user can:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
View the caller’s name and number on the LCD display for any line or sub-line on the user’s
Dterm, even while currently on another phone call. The name lookup comes from the Personal,
External, or Corporate Directory in OpenWorX. The above order is also the search order
priority.
Check for past or current calls to the user’s Dterm on any Dterm in the system with an ICA enabled
function key.
Look up past callers and return their calls with the information stored in ICA’s database. This is
known as the inbound call log. It will store up to 99 entries.
Check list of calls made by the user. This is called the Outbound Call Log. Up to 99 entries will
be stored.
Supports use of * and # in the user extension with the limitation that the user must be at their
physical device to log in if their extension contains either a * or a #.
Determine if a call was forwarded or transferred.
ICA: Functionality
ICA uses the same database as the entire OpenWorX suite of applications. The following fields from
the OpenWorX Database are accessible.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Caller name (inbound and outbound call log)
Caller number (inbound and outbound call log)
Date and time of each call (inbound and outbound call log)
Whether or not the call was transferred and by whom (inbound call log)
Whether or not the call was forwarded and by whom (inbound call log)
The direct number dialed by the caller (inbound call log)
ICA: Benefits
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Able to identify callers on prime lines and sub-lines before they are answered, even while the
user is still on another call.
Identify past callers quickly without having to listen to voice mail.
Identify past callers when you are not at your desk.
Return calls quickly with dial back feature.
Page 11-14
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
ICA: Comparison of ICA and IPS Functionality
Feature
Call Log Capacity
OpenWorX ICA
99 Inbound max
99 Outbound max
(System Level Setting)
Manual, TAPI, OAI, LNR
2000 Caller ID
24 Inbound, or
19 Inbound + 4 Outbound
Call Log Information
displayed
Number, Name, Date, Time,
Transferring/Forwarding
number, Line rung
Number only
Ringing Line
Information
Displayed
Automatic, Name & Number
Prime Line- Automatic Sub
line – Manual, key press
shows Name & Number
Caller ID “Name”
Searches Personal,
Corporate, and External
directories for matching
name to Caller ID number
Displays Caller ID name and
number form Telco. CID
name can be overwritten by
system defined name for
1500 numbers
Dialed call types
saved in Call Log
Manual
ICA: ICA vs. Camp On
It should be noted that ICA and Camp On have similar end goals. With camp on, the user
receives notification of a second call that is “camped” to their extension. They have the choice
of answering this call and putting the original caller on hold. However, Camp On is limits the
user to 2 total callers.
ICA can achieve the same thing through multiple sub lines. The user rolls their forwarding of
busy calls to the next sub line. ICA then gives notification of the information of the incoming
caller. From there the user can decide whether or not to answer the call or let it continue and
roll to voice mail.
OpenWorX: Group Call Forward Control (GCFC)
Group Call Forward Control is an application that allows forwarding patterns of individuals or
user defined groups to be forwarded based on a schedule. Complex schedules are supported,
that allow for recurring forwarding on a daily, weekly, monthly or even yearly basis. GCFC
supports call forward busy, call forward no answer and call forward all calls. It is possible to
forward entire divisions within a company, such as after 5:00 PM all calls are forwarded directly
to voice mail.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-15
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
GCFC: Functionality
The user can navigate completely through all the tasks required of the GCFC administrator with a
simple point and click of the mouse. The administrator can also see a summary of what is already
configured within the application. The administrator can modify, define and delete user accounts here.
There are several levels of users.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Administrator – can access and maintain all user accounts, groups and call forwarding
schedules within GCFC.
Premium User – can create and maintain sets of groups. Including adding, modifying and
deleting group members, as well as controlling their call forwarding schedules.
Regular User – can view group and call forwarding jobs within GCFC, as well as maintain a
group if given permission by the group owner
The users of the groups can also be given or denied permission to group level. There is no limit to the
number of users to each individual group, nor is there a limit to the number of people who can modify
the group members or call forwarding patterns. Jobs can be configured to occur only once or recur at
specific time intervals. These time intervals can be as small as forwarding all calls to voice mail at 5:00
PM every weekday, to as broad as forwarding all calls to an automatic announcement for holidays that
occur once a year
GCFC: Functionality
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Allows calls for individuals or groups of people based on schedules.
No more forgetting to un-forward your phone after returning from vacation or a business trip.
Insure privacy for users, such as in a hospital or dormitory.
OpenWorX: Personal Call Assistant (PCA)
In NEC’s continuing effort to bring better efficiency to the standard telephony user’s desktop,
Personal Call Assistant was created. PCA includes functionality like Desktop and INASET in a
much more convenient form. PCA replaces Clipboard Dialer (the ability to dial from any
application that supports the Windows Clipboard). PCA brings screen pops to the user
desktop, via text to speech agent, small pop box, or specially written customized pops. The
text to speech agent and small pop box are standard features. The customized pops must be
specially written. It is recommended that PCA’s server reside as an intranet application with
clients treating it as a Trusted Site in their internet options.
The icon is the same as Clipboard Dialer, a small yellow phone in the system tray. This icon
will turn red when the user has missed calls. Hovering over the red icon with your mouse will
list the number of calls that have been missed.
The user can then access their inbound call log to see a list of the calls that have come in to
their phone The name of the caller will be there if that person is in the OWX database. The
inbound number, whether extension or caller id, is recorded as well as the time and date of the
call. A day of the week will be shown for the last 7 days of calls. Calls going back more than 7
days will show a date such as 1/10. Clicking on the call number will return the call with the
correct dialing rules. The user can also check their outbound call log in the same way.
Page 11-16
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
If the user simply wishes to find someone internal to the company they can use the corporate
directory. Clicking on the telephone icon next to the person will dial that person. Dialing rules
are applied automatically. Other numbers can be stored and displayed this way, as well as
email and pager. These fields just like Desktop can be masked from certain users. Searching
can be done by entering a letter combination and hitting GO. You can search by Full Name,
Last Name, First Name, or Extension. In addition to the corporate directory, each user gets a
Personal Directory. This directory is stored on the server, but is only accessible by that user
and operates the same way as the Corporate Directory. The Personal Directory will also
support importing from a CSV (comma separated values) text file. PCA also includes the
ability to synchronize the user’s Personal Directory with their Outlook Contacts. The mappings
of the fields are controlled by an XML file (mappings.xml in the PCA directory) which is easily
modified to suit the individual’s needs.
PCA: Limiting User Views
Occasionally it is necessary to make certain fields un-available except by certain users. For example,
the company may not wish for non-executives to have access to employee home phones. Because of
this, the OpenWorX administrator can put the login Ids of Desktop users into groups that do not allow
the viewing of specific fields.
PCA: OpenWorX Desktop
Desktop is now a part of Personal Call Assistant as a standard feature. Desktop is designed for
general day-to-day NEAX 2000 IPS users who have a PC with a web browser. No application
installation needs to take place on the PC. Access is directly via the web.
Desktop PC Requirements
Operating System
Processor
Memory
Color Monitor
Additional Hardware
Dterm Set
Microsoft® Windows 98SE or Higher
350 MHz Pentium Processor or higher
128 MB of RAM
800 X 600 Resolution or Higher
Network Interface Card, Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse
IP, TDM or Soft-Phone
Desktop Directory
The user can look up individuals within the company directory, and access their speed dials. From each, they
can dial, and from within the corporate directory, a user may send a Short Text Message (if STM is installed),
email, or OpenWorX Message.
Personal Directory
In addition to the standard OpenWorX corporate directory, Desktop gives users an additional Personal
Directory. The Personal Directory is different for each individual user, but the Corporate Directory is common
among all users. For example, the user could have an entry for their Mother, and it would only be for use with
their individual phone.
Desktop Call History
The lists of calls that have been received by the phone are displayed in the “Inbound” Section of this screen.
The number, Name, and Date are included. The Name is only included if there is a match for the number in
the database. The user can also click on the telephone handset icon next to the number to return the call
from their Dterm set.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-17
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
In addition to searching the corporate directory, ICA will now search the Personal Directory of that station as
well. For example, if 214-555-1111 calls one individual who has “Mom” defined in their Personal Directory for
that number, the ICA pop and record in Desktop will say “Mom”. For another person who does not have
“Mom” defined in their Personal Directory, no name will be attached, or can also have a different number
defined for “Mom. ICA also indicates the phone type found in the Personal contact, using appending “-H” for
home, “-M” for mobile or wireless, and “-W” for any business line.
The “Outbound” section is similar to the “Inbound” section, except it records calls made (by Manual Dialing,
OpenWorX Dterm Applications, Desktop, or TAPI) at the telephone, not calls received.
Desktop Location Status
With Desktop, the user can set their status, including return date, return time, and alternate number with the
click of a mouse. In addition, Desktop allows for the use of Custom statuses, instead of only the 10 predefined messages available via Dterm operation.
Desktop Message Reader
Previous to Desktop, the only way for an individual to check messages sent by Message Reader was by
using the key on the Dterm, or by calling the attendant and having the message read back to them. Now, the
user can use a Web Browser with Desktop to check their messages. Also, as mentioned in the Directory
section, the user may send these messages to other users of Message Reader. No longer is it just the
attendants who can send messages. The message can also include a number and the Desktop user simply
needs to click on the telephone handset icon next to the number to return the call from their Dterm set.
PCA: OpenWorX INASET
The INASET is now a part of Personal Call Assistant as a standard feature. NEC’s INASET is a
powerful IP terminal and is enhanced even further by the addition of the OpenWorX application suite.
This suite enables INASET Application Services mode, adding a great deal of features and
functionality.
Home Application
This is the base application that is loaded directly to the INASET’s memory. It allows for the basic
functionality expected from a standard IP Dterm. The main difference a user will notice with this screen is the
different application control buttons at the bottom of the INASET screen. Without OpenWorX, these buttons
are static and controlled by the INASET’s local memory. With the addition of the OpenWorX Network
Services mode, the server configures these buttons. The modification of a simple XML file on the server is all
that is required to move, add, or delete additional application buttons. These additional application buttons
can be used for many things, such as custom developed applications and direct links to web sites.
Corporate Directory
The Corporate Directory pulls the information directly from the OpenWorX Employee database. The user can
search for specific people and dial using this directory. Once found in the directory the user may also send a
text message (if Message Reader is installed), send a Short Text Message to their wireless PSIII (if Short
Text Messaging is installed), or simply view the entry to see other information or alternate dial-able numbers.
Location Status
This interface allows the user to set their status in the OpenWorX database. It is then accessible by the
operator. Also when another Dterm user calls the person, they will receive their status on their Dterm display,
along with Return Time, and Alternate Number if provided.
Message Reader
Message Reader allows the user to read messages sent to them by the operator or other users.
Page 11-18
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
OpenWorX: Name Display
Name Display is an application that synchronizes the NEAX 2000 IPS name database with the
employee portion of the OpenWorX Database. This sync is real time.
In the case of two people sharing a single extension, the application will search through,
Department, Division, and Company in that order. The first one that matches for both
employees will be the one displayed.
OpenWorX: Multiple CCIS Node Configuration
OpenWorX is capable of hosting applications for multiple NEAX 2000 IPS systems on a single
server. All instances of this require a viable OAI connection between the OpenWorX server
and the NEAX 2000 IPS. See the bandwidth requirements list previously in this chapter to
make sure your connection is sufficient.
The applications once equipped with the remote TCP/IP connection and multi-node software
operate as if they are in a single NEAX 2000 IPS, except where noted below.
BAS: CCIS Network Information
The Business Attendant System can run in a CCIS network environment with the following limitations.
ƒ
ƒ
Calls transferred from the BAS Client to a Dterm across a CCIS Link will not recall to the BAS
operator.
Using multi-node capabilities, the operator can now view station data via the directory or speed
dials to extensions in other NEAX 2000 IPS systems. The other NEAX 2000 IPS systems must
have OAI and a TCP/IP connection back to the OpenWorX server. Additional OpenWorX
software is also required per NEAX 2000 IPS to be added on the server.
Business Receptionist: CCIS Network Information
The Business Receptionist can run in a CCIS network environment with the following limitations.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Calls transferred from the Business Receptionist to a Dterm across a CCIS Link will not recall to
the Business Receptionist operator.
The Dterm across a CCIS Link cannot be monitored by the Business Receptionist system and the
monitored speed dials and status checks in the directory will not function for those extensions.
The system will force supervised transfers to CCIS extensions to ensure callers do not get
transferred to a busy remote extension. Operators need to listen for ring back tone or busy
tone, and then either complete the call or return back to the source caller as appropriate.
The message-waiting lamp cannot be controlled on a remote Dterm.
ƒ
Note: Business Receptionist does not have the same multi-node capability that BAS does
Short Text Messaging and Nurse Call CCIS Network
STM and NC do not have multi-node capabilities.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 11-19
Chapter 11 Open Application Interface (OAI)
OAI Application Software Development
For users wishing to develop their own applications, NEC offers a complete library of
development tools. For further information, contact the OAI Product Manager.
System Specifications
Required Equipment for OAI
Equipment
Description
Qty
PN-CP24-B (MP)
MP Card
1
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Ethernet Control Card
1
• 10BASE-T Cable
(TIA/EIA category 3 or
larger)*
• 100BASE-TX Cable
(TIA/EIA category 5)*
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Cable between Ethernet
Card and LAN
Page 11-20
As required
Remarks
One card per system
Mount on PIM0
Mount on MP card
One card per MP
Cable length:
Maximum 100 m
(328 ft.)
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
ND-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
with MIS
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
An Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a
prearranged group of stations. Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals
within the group, based on which terminal has been idle the longest period of time. Stations
may log on/log off from the ACD group. Supervisor stations may monitor conversations of
agents.
In addition to basic ACD, NEC has a Microsoft® Windows 2000 Professional, Winodws 2000
Advanced Server or Windows 2003 Server ACD/MIS system (CallCenterWorX™ ACD/MIS)
that enables a user to efficiently manage a call center. Also, NEC offers an Infolink™
Application (QueWorX™) that provides IVR, Internet and Desktop integration for NEAX2000
IPS Call Centers.
The MIS system analyses statistical data received from the ACD, displays real-time activity
screens, and generates and prints graphs and reports of the activity.
Basic ACD
The NEAX2000 IPS system has basic ACD that comes standard with any NEAX 2000 system.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 16 ACD groups can be assigned per system. Each ACD group is assigned a pilot
number. Calls directed to the pilot number are directed to that ACD group.
2. The maximum number of stations in an ACD group is 60. The maximum number of ACD groups in
the system is 16. The total number of ACD stations may not exceed the system limits of 256 Dterms
and 512 ports. If ACD-MIS is used, the maximum number of ACD stations is 60.
3. Assignment of ACD groups is performed from the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
4. ACD groups consist of a pilot station and one or more member stations. Hunting is initiated in a
circular fashion, and then based on which member has been idle the longest period of time.
5. If all stations within the ACD group are busy, incoming calls may be serviced in the following ways:
ƒ
remain in queue until an agent becomes available (Ringback Tone provided)
ƒ
immediately overflow to another group, to a station, or to the Attendant
ƒ
remain in queue until an agent becomes available (Delay Announcement or Music on Hold
provided)
ƒ
remain in queue for a preset time (Ringback Tone, Delay Announcement, or Music on Hold
provided), and then overflow to another group, to a station, or to the Attendant
6. When the pilot station has set Call Forwarding – All Calls, incoming calls to the ACD group will be
transferred to the destination of that Call Forwarding – All Calls setting
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12-1
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Service Conditions (Con’t)
7. An ACD group number can be used as the destination station of Direct Inward Termination (DIT), or
as a designated Night Service station.
8. An ACD group number can be assigned as the destination station of Off-Hook Alarms, Priority
Calls, and Attendant Night Transfer.
9. ACD group pilot numbers should not be placed in Station Hunting groups. The Station Hunting
feature would take priority over the ACD function.
10. Two types of traffic measurements can be provided for ACD:
a. ACD group Peg Count
ƒ Count of incoming calls
ƒ Count of answered calls
ƒ Count of abandoned calls
ƒ Count of waiting calls
ƒ Count of all busy calls
b. ACD station Peg count
ƒ Count of answered calls
11. Upon initial installation, or after a system initialization (reset), each agent must lift and
restore handset (of their station) to begin receiving calls for the ACD group.
Basic ACD Features
Busy In/Busy Out – ACD
This feature allows an agent in an ACD group to log their station onto or off of the group. This
allows the system to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the ACD group goes
to that station or not. This prevents incoming calls from being directed to stations at which no
agent is available.
Call Waiting Indication – ACD
This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to an ACD group is placed in
queue, due to an “all agents busy” condition. On external relay controlled indicator or an LED
on a Multiline Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting Indication.
Delay Announcement – ACD
This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller
placed in queue to an ACD group. A single announcement, or two separate announcements,
can be provided.
Hunt Past No Answer – ACD
This feature allows calls targeted at an ACD group to hunt past an agents station, after a no
answer condition, if the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable (or not
available) to answer the call.
Page 12- 2
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Immediate Overflow – ACD
This feature allows a call directed to an ACD group to immediately overflow to another ACD group,
upon encountering an “all agents busy” condition.
Priority Queuing – ACD
This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station basis,
when the call enters an ACD queue. When a call is a considered as priority it is placed at the beginning
of the queue.
Queue Size Control–ACD
On incoming DID/Tie line calls the system can be assigned a threshold that limits the number of calls in
queue. When the queue size threshold is exceeded, incoming callers are connected to busy tone.
Silent Monitor – ACD
This feature provides the ACD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to an ACD agent. The
silent monitor function gives no indication (as an option) to either the agent or the calling party.
Note: The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record telephone
conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission, may be illegal in
certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any
practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of
notification to all parties to the telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or
require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording a telephone
conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business is a suite of hardware and software solutions that are
focused on customer care. Included are the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) system and the
Management Information System (MIS), elements that streamline call flow and workflow. Its
routing capabilities allow businesses to connect callers with the most appropriately skilled
agents in the shortest time possible, minimizing a caller’s wait for assistance and improving
customer satisfaction. Its real-time and historical reporting abilities provide call center
managers and supervisors a tool for maximizing agent productivity, assuring quality
performance in handling the incoming and outgoing call volume in the call center.
CallCenterWorX-Business helps businesses make a good first impression on new customers,
better manage existing customer relationships, and inspire customer loyalty, leading to
increased revenue potential.
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business is a Microsoft Windows® based software system that
enables you to efficiently manage your call center. It does so by providing a complete and
flexible feature set, allowing you to customize the ACD based on your particular business
needs. In addition, it provides a powerful Graphical User Interface (GUI) to a NEAX2000 IPS
ACD System that allows you to program additions, deletions, and changes via your computer.
You can also query and print ACD data from CallCenterWorX.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12- 3
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
The CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business suite includes the Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) system and the Management Information System (MIS 3.0). The ACD system
supplements the call processing capabilities of the PBX, with typical call routing designed to
connect each caller with the most appropriate agent to handle their call in the shortest time
possible.
When the CallCenterWorX ACD system accepts a call, it can be configured to play a message
to the caller and route the call in a pre-specified order to a queue of waiting calls for a
particular split (group of agents). The queued call is then answered in sequence by the next
available agent in that split. The Call Control Vectors of the CallCenterWorX ACD system allow
great flexibility in routing calls, permitting alternate solutions to fit almost any situation.
As each call progresses through the system, the CallCenterWorX ACD system provides data
to the CallCenterWorX MIS 3.0, which translates the call-handling data into meaningful
statistics. The MIS uses these statistics to offer call center managers and supervisors access
to real-time and historical data concerning incoming and outgoing call volume.
The CallCenterWorX MIS Status Screens (Real-time Screens) provide color-coded, up-to-thesecond views of agent, queue, and system activity. Statistics on the call volume and agent
effectiveness are computed in real-time and are displayed for the current hour and day on
supervisors’ screens. Optional wall display boards can show current statistics and messages
to call center personnel.
The call statistics are also collected in the MIS database and used to generate reports in text
or graphical format. These reports and graphs can be printed for a view of activities ranging
from a graph updated in the last second to a retrospective report ranging back up to 1.5GB
worth of data.
CallCenterWorX ACD Features
1. Runs on the Windows 2000 Professional operating system using Client/Server architecture, making
information and processing directly available from the desktop interface.
ƒ
The MAT Client as a remote PC runs on Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP.
2. A capacity of 10 to 120 positions, depending upon licensing, application, and PBX platform.
3. Can support up to nine tenants.
4. Uses a GUI interface to make commands and controls easily accessible to the user.
5. Routes incoming calls using:
ƒ
User-defined sets of call handling instructions named Call Control Vectors (CCVs), week
schedules, and holiday schedules.
ƒ
A system of priorities and call overflows designed to deliver calls rapidly and efficiently to the
appropriate split or agent.
Page 12- 4
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
6. Has dock able toolbars, which can be dragged to other locations on the working screen. The user
can also build a personal toolbar of most frequently used icons.
7. Provides toolbar icons and tool tips for all MAT commands, for opening report views, and for online
Help and context-sensitive Help.
8. Provides data entry screens with a choice of background color pattern for each screen.
ƒ
Data entry screens can accept new data or revise previously entered data with immediate
confirmation of the action. These screens list operational data in drop-down menus.
ƒ
Each data entry screen can open to a report view showing the currently programmed data.
The font style and size and the column headings in the report can be reset to suit your
preference.
ƒ
The report view can open to a print preview showing the report as it would be printed, and
can send the report to a printer. A report can be saved to a data file, saved to a Microsoft
Excel file, or exported to a Microsoft Access database.
9. An optional workbook area showing a tab for each open screen with the MAT command icon for
that screen. A report icon on top of the command icon for those screens open to the report view.
ƒ
Multiple screens can be open simultaneously. A screen is made the active screen by
selecting the appropriate Workbook tab.
10. Has an optional status bar, which reflects the state of the active screen.
11. Supports 6 languages (English, Japanese, French, German, Italian and Spanish) for display to the
agent’s Dterm position.
12. Uses a Trace Client to view ACD call processing on screen. CCV programming diagnostics let you
monitor the call flow in real-time to design or re-engineer your installation.
13. ACD client MAT provides the ability to program multiple CallCenterWorX ACD`s from one GUI in a
network
14. List-up includes the ability to view multiple reports and to export these reports in MS Access or MS
Excel formats
15. Configuration of trunk group data and holiday calendar performed by single point and click interface
16. System Data configuration allows the ACD to be customized for specific features including Info link
and MIS message generation, debugging tools, and phone-set operation
17. Trace Client view provides the ability to see ACD call processing on screen. Call Control Vector
(CCV) programming diagnostics allow the call flow to be monitored in real-time, aiding in the design
or re-engineering of call center installations
18. A Windows® event viewer provides access to critical ACD event messages such as ACD state
changes and helps technicians identify other critical events such as an inability to connect to the
PBX or indicating that the system security key is not attached
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12- 5
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
CallCenterWorX MIS
The CallCenterWorX Management Information System (MIS 3.0) offers call center managers’
access to the most important real-time and historical data available for workgroups. With this
tool, you are able to maximize agent productivity and assure quality performance in handling
the incoming and outgoing call volume of the center.
CallCenterWorX MIS has a menu-driven user interface. All of the menus show a list of choices
available under a particular topic. Each choice is preceded by a number, which is entered at
the Enter Selection prompt, followed by pressing the Enter key. CallCenterWorX MIS responds
by displaying the requested menu screen, by using one of its prompting methods to ask for
more information, or by displaying the appropriate data screen.
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business Turnkey Software Only is available packaged for 10,
20, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, and 120 Agents. Each combines both the ACD and MIS software on a
CD ROM and comes with a required security key for the main CallCenterWorX PC. The
security key attached to the main CallCenterWorX PC provides the appropriate agent capacity
as well as the main CallCenterWorX supervisor position. Individual security keys can also be
purchased for applications requiring additional supervisor PCs.
Each CallCenterWorX Turnkey package contains the following components:
Trunkey Package
Common Server 120Lg/2.4GHz
Monitor, Keyboard & Mouse
20/40GB SCSI 4mm DDS-4DAT
20/40GB SCSI 4mm DDS-4DAT Cable Kit
Windows2000 Professional
Modem & Cable DB9F to DB25M 3 FT.
2 10/100 Fast Ethernet NIC
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business CD-ROM
CallCenterWorX USB Security Key/Licensing (ACD &
MIS)
Symantec PC Anywhere
Allied Tele-syn 5 port HUB & Cables
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business Turnkey Packages
Business Turnkey Packges
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (10 Agent Pkg)
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (20 Agent Pkg)
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (30 Agent Pkg)
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (40 Agent Pkg)
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (60 Agent Pkg)
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (80 Agent Pkg)
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (100 Agent Pkg)
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (120 Agent Pkg)
Page 12- 6
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business Software Only Packages
Business Software Only Packages
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (10 Agent) SW Only
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (20 Agent) SW Only
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (30 Agent) SW Only
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (40 Agent) SW Only
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (60 Agent) SW Only
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) (80 Agent) SW Only
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) 100 Agent) SW Only
CallCenterWorX-B ACD (3.00) 120 Agent) SW Only
CallCenterWorX MIS 3.0
CallCenterWorX MIS 3.0 runs on the Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems. It provides
MIS services for both CallCenterWorX – Business and CallCenterWorX Enterprise.
The CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business suite includes the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) system
and the Management Information System (MIS). The CallCenterWorX ACD system supplements the
call processing capabilities of the platform being used. Typical call routing is designed to connect each
caller with the most appropriate agent to handle the call in the shortest time possible, avoiding long wait
times and getting the caller directly to someone who can deal with their request.
As each call progresses through the system, the ACD system provides call-handling data to the MIS,
which translates this data into meaningful statistics. The MIS uses these statistics to offer call center
managers and supervisors access to real-time and historical data concerning incoming and outgoing
call volume in the call center.
The CallCenterWorX MIS Status Screens (Real-time Screens) provide color-coded, up-to-the-second
views of agent, queue, and system activity. Statistics on the call volume, and on the effectiveness of the
agents handling those calls, are computed in real-time and can be displayed up-to-the-second on
supervisors’ screens. Optional wall display boards can show current statistics and messages to call
center personnel. The call statistics are also collected in the MIS database and used to generate
reports in text or graphical format. These reports and graphs can be printed for views of activity ranging
from a graph of today’s activity to a retrospective report covering previous months.
The following features are available with the purchase of CallCenterWorX MIS 3.0.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
True Multi-Tenant Support
Increased Multi-Split Agents (from 4 to 16 split monitoring)
Microsoft MSDE
ODBC Compliant
Configurable in 15 min. / 30 min. / 1 hr Increments
Conversion utility to migrate proprietary database to ODBC database
Backup and Restore
1.5 GB database storage
New "System Agent Detail Status" Screen
Configurable Agent State Colors
Retains Real-Time Screen Configuration
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12- 7
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
CallCenterWorX Documentation CD Includes
Description
CallCenterWorX ACD (3.00) Features and Specifications Manual
CallCenterWorX MIS (3.0) Quick Reference Guide
CallCenterWorX MIS 3.0 Installation Guide
CallCenterWorX MIS 3.0 Administration Guide
CallCenterWorX MIS 3.0 Reports Manual
Dterm Series E Supervisor Console User Guide
Dterm Series E Agent Console User Guide
Dterm Series III 24 Button Agent User Guide
Dterm Series III Supervisor Console User Guide
Minimum Computer Requirements
ACD Computer (Client or Server) with/without MIS
Minimum Requirements
Computer
Pentium III 2.4GHz Processor or higher
256 MB RAM or more
30 MB Available hard disk space or more
15” SVGA Monitor and Video card that support 1024 x 768 resolution
1 floppy-disk drive or other data storage device
4X CD ROM drive
1 USB port for connection of security Key
MS-Compatible Mouse
Network card (such as 3Com Etherlink III)
Computer Hardware
CallCenterWorX Security Key
Software
NEAX 2000 IPS System Software
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
CallCenterworX CD-ROM installation disk
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher for online Help
Information
IP address information for PBX
PBX Hardware
NEAX 2000 IPS PBX
PZ-M606-A
10 Base T Twisted 2P Cable of correct length
Page 12- 8
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
ACD Computer with MIS Using Remote MIS via TCP/IP
Minimum Requirements
Computer
Pentium III 933 MHz Processor or higher
256 MB RAM or more
30 MB Available hard disk space or more
15” SVGA Monitor and Video card that support 1024 x 768 resolution
1 floppy-disk drive or other data storage device
4X CD ROM drive
1 parallel port for connection of security Key
MS-Compatible Mouse
Network card (such as 3Com Etherlink III)
Computer Hardware
CallCenterWorX Security Key
Software
NEAX 2000 IPS System Software
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 6a or
higher
CallCenterworX CD-ROM installation disk
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher for online Help
Information
IP address information and host name information for PBX and all PCs
PBX Hardware
NEAX 2000 IPS PBX
PZ-M606-A
10 Base T Twisted 2P Cables of correct lengths
10 Base Hub
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12- 9
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
ACD Computer Using Remote MIS PC via RS-232
Minimum Requirements
Computer
Pentium III 933 MHz Processor or higher
256 MB RAM or more
30 MB Available hard disk space or more
15” SVGA Monitor and Video card that support 1024 x 768 resolution
1 floppy-disk drive or other data storage device
4X CD ROM drive
1 parallel port for connection of security Key
MS-Compatible Mouse
Network card (such as 3Com Etherlink III)
Computer Hardware
CallCenterWorX Security Key
Software
NEAX 2000 IPS System Software
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or Microsoft NT 4.0 with Service Pack
6a or higher
CallCenterworX CD-ROM installation disk
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher for online Help
Information
IP address information for PBX
PBX Hardware
NEAX 2000 IPS PBX
PZ-M606-A
10 Base T Twisted 2P Cable of correct length
Serial Hardware
RS-232 cabling to run from COM port to remote MIS PC
Page 12- 10
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Remote MIS PC via TCP/IP
Minimum Requirements
Computer
Pentium 266 MHz Processor or higher
64 MB RAM or more
30 MB Available hard disk space or more
15” SVGA Monitor and Video card that support 1024 x 768 resolution
1 floppy-disk drive or other data storage device
4X CD ROM drive
1 parallel port for connection of security Key
MS-Compatible Mouse
Network card (such as 3Com Etherlink III)
Computer Hardware
MIS Security Key
Software
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, or Microsoft NT 4.0 with Service Pack
6a, or higher, or Windows 98, or Windows Me
CallCenterworX CD-ROM installation disk
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher for online Help
Information
IP address information and host name information for PBX and all PCs
PBX Hardware
ACD Computer connected to PBX via TCP/IP
10 Base T Twisted 2P Cable of correct length
MIS PC via serial RS-232
Minimum Requirements
Computer
Pentium 266 MHz Processor or higher
64 MB RAM or more
30 MB Available hard disk space or more
15” SVGA Monitor and Video card that support 1024 x 768 resolution
1 floppy-disk drive or other data storage device
4X CD ROM drive
1 parallel port for connection of security Key
MS-Compatible Mouse
Computer Hardware
MIS Security Key
Software
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, or Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack
6a, or higher, or Windows 98, or Windows Me
CallCenterworX CD-ROM installation disk
PBX Hardware
ACD Computer connected to PBX
RS-232 Cable to run from ACD computer COM Port to remote MIS PC COM
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12- 11
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Business System Capacities
Capacities
CallCenterWorX
CallCenterWorX
ACD 3.0
MIS 3.0
Item ACD
Tenants per System
Splits per ACD Tenant
Splits per System
Splits per Logon ID
Active ACD Agents per
System
Trunks per System
Maximum Queue Depth
Priority Levels 1
Maximum Calls in
Queue per System
Transfer to PBX
Numbers
Agent Logon ID Codes
per System
Agent Logon ID Code
Digits
Statistics Report History
Limit
MIS per System
Pilot Numbers
Tally Code Names per
Split
Tally Code Names per
System
Busy Hour Call Attempts
(BHCA)
9
Note 1
150
32
Note 1
150
32
120 Note 2/ Note 4
120 Note 2
255 Note 4
300
250
300
255
–
Note 3
–
120
–
400
400
9
9
–
1.5GB
8
300 Note 4
–
8
300
100
–
3000
Note 5
–
Note 1: The total number of splits per system (150) is shared among the total number of tenants
(up to 9).
Note 2: Agent positions available depend on the installed security key’s capacity for logged-on
agents. The total number of agents is shared among the total number of tenants (up to 9). Security
keys are available in the following capacities: 10, 20, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, & 120.
Note 3: The MIS tracks Split queue calls as “High” and “Standard.”
Note 4: Dependent upon the CallCenterWorX configuration formula based on the OAI monitoring
limitations: (Agents x 2) + (Pilots and/or Personal Pilots) + Trunks + IVR Ports must be equal to or
less than 256.
Note 5:
BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts)
Number of PIMs 1PIM
2PIM
3PIM
4PIM
Business or
Hotel/Motel
with ACD/OAI
Page 12- 12
Max. 2000 BHCA
(No FP)
Max. 4000 BHCA
(One FP)
5PIM
6PIM
Max. 5000 BHCA
(Two FPs)
7PIM
8PIM
Max. 5500 BHCA
(Three FPs)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
PBX Requirements
PBX Requirements
PZ-M606-A
Remarks
On board Ethernet Interface card (Ethernet TCP/IP)
Related Documents
Title
CallCenterWorX System Manual
CallCenterWorX Features and Specifications Manual
Dterm Series E Supervisor Console User Guide
Dterm Series E Agent Console User Guide
CallCenterWorX Sales Slick
ICS ACD System Manual
Abacus User’s Guide
Navigator Configuration Guide
Navigator Reports Manual
Navigator Real Time Screen Manual
CallCenterWorX ACD User Guide
ACD Terminals
With the Dterm Series i/E ACD terminals enjoy the convenience of having the most frequently
used ACD function keys silk-screened right on the terminal.
Availability
The 32-button Series E ACD terminals are available in soft white or black. User Guides and
spare parts are also available.
DTP-32DA-1 (WH)
DTP-32DA-1 (BK)
Dterm Series E Supervisor User Guide (10-pack)
Dterm Series E Agent Console User Guide (10-pack)
Detachable dial-pads are available for Dterm Series I and Dterm IP instruments in an ACD
environment.
BS(ACD)-R
Dial pad for ACD (Available in black and white)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12- 13
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
QueWorX4.0
QueWorX® 4.0 is a suite of customer service and productivity-oriented applications. QueWorX
utilizes NEC’s CTI link, “Infolink” to deliver advanced applications to contact centers
These advanced applications are tightly integrated and specially designed to work in
conjunction with NEC’s CallCenterWorX ACD applications for both NEAX 2000 and NEAX
2400 systems. QueWorX integrates with CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (I), & CallCenterWorX
ACD 3.0 for Business & Enterprise. QueWorX provides the same features and functionality
regardless of the ACD platform it accompanies. In addition, QueWorX may be installed on the
same server as the CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business or Enterprise.
QueWorX 4.0 Licensed Applications
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Automated Attendant
Immediate Callback
Scheduled Callback
Web (Internet) Callback
Estimated Time to Answer
Queue Depth
ANI/Are Code Routing
Account Code Routing
Screen Pop
Soft Phone
QueWorX 4.0 Features:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Modular Licensing
Multilingual Announcements
Global Repeat Verification
Customer Profile Records Database
Unlimited Multi-level Automated Attendants
Customizable Announcements
Customizable Reports
The above items are detailed below:
Auto Attendant
The Auto-Attendant provides basic call routing functions to the caller. The caller receives a message
with up to ten call routing options and the caller presses a key to initiate a selection. The caller’s
selection is processed as a transfer to a destination. Additional menu choices are available for
customers with the multi-level automated attendant. The caller may be prompted for Account Code or
User ID, which will then be displayed on the agent’s Dterm phone as the call arrives. Alternatively, the
Account Code or User ID may appear in the QueWorX Agent Screen Pop. This allows the agent to
begin accessing a customer’s profile while greeting the caller.
Page 12- 14
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Immediate Customer Callback
This feature allows callers, based on their estimated time to answer, to elect to receive a callback from
an agent instead of waiting in queue. By entering their telephone number and recording a brief
message, their call will remain in queue until an agent becomes available, even though they have hung
up. The QueWorX system will automatically dial the number entered by the caller when the agent
receives the call. Bonus: The contact center does not incur toll charges for the time call remains in
queue awaiting a callback.
Scheduled Callbacks
This feature allows callers to determine when an agent calls them back. This feature brings a new level
of flexibility to the immediate callback feature, allowing customers to determine interactions with the
contact center based on their timetable.
Internet Initiated Callbacks
This feature allows customers to request a callback from an agent while browsing the organization's
Web site. Requests for callback will be placed into queue as are voice calls. When agents become
available, they will receive a screen pop with collected customer information and URL information.
Estimated Time to Answer (ETA)
QueWorX can provide a caller with information on the wait time expected before an agent answers the
call. An announcement will only be provided if the actual ETA falls within the programmed parameter
thresholds. Announcements can be provided in three variations stating a number of minutes and
seconds (“approximately 2 minutes and 45 seconds”), only a number of minutes (“approximately 2
minutes”) or a maximum number of minutes (“less than 3 minutes”).
Queue Depth
QueWorX can provide an announcement indicating how many callers are ahead of a caller in the
queue. Threshold settings are set within the system to determine when to offer this announcement to
callers. For example the 2nd through 15th caller may hear their position within the queue, such as “The
are5 callers ahead of you”. Any caller falling outside of this range would not hear the announcement.
ANI / Area Code Routing
This feature allows calls to be routed based on one or a combination of the following factors – ANI
(Automatic Number Identification), Account Code, Area Code. This feature allows callers to be routed
based on a match of any of these criteria. For example, callers may be prompted to enter their account
number as they enter the system. Based on a match by the QueWorX system, their call may be
redirected to a group of agents (or their personal agent) at a higher priority.
Account Code Routing
This feature allows the system to route a caller to a specific split or agent based on Account Code.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12- 15
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Screen Pop
Provides an application that is installed at each agent’s desktop. Agents can log into QueWorX and the
CallCenterWorX system via this application. Customer information provided in the Customer Profile
Records Database can be displayed in the form of a ‘pop-up’ at each agent’s desktop as calls are
received. Additionally, the softphone capabilities of this application can be utilized to allow agents to
enter break mode, ready mode, enter tally codes, etc. right from the computers.
Soft Phone
Using the agent Soft phone application from the agent client PC, the agent has the ability to:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Answer the incoming Call
Release (disconnect) the Call
Set Break Mode
Tally the Call
Transfer the Call
Conference the Call
Place the Call on Hold
Retrieve a Call on Hold
Multilingual Announcements
Up to seven (7) language sets can be configured and recorded in QueWorX. Each set is selected
based on pilot number to accommodate multilingual applications. For example, a pilot may be defined
to send calls to a group of agents who support Spanish-speaking customers.
Global Repeat Verification
This feature allows callers to verify their customer input, such as account number of callback number.
This feature helps ensure the proper handling of customer calls.
Customer Profile Records Database
The profile contains information specific to each customer. This information is used to display pertinent
customer information to agents via the QueWorX Agent screen pop application.
Unlimited Multi-Level Automated Attendant
Up to 10 menu options and unlimited levels are recorded and offered to customers. With this option,
customers can provide more options for callers. Multiple levels allow callers to provide more detailed
routing. For example, when the PBX option is chosen from the menu, callers may receive additional
selection choices, such as “For NEAX 2000 press 1, for NEAX 2400, press 2”, and so on up to 5 levels
deep. Up to 10 distinct automated attendants can be configured to accommodate multiple customer
menus. Calls can be routed via the automated attendant to selected departments or groups of agents.
Page 12- 16
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Customized Announcements
QueWorX can be configured with up to 89 custom announcements. These announcements are
recorded in QueWorX and invoke utilizing the Call Control Vectors of the CallCenterWorX application
with the “IVR Announcement #” command.
Customizable Reports
The Reports can be customized using the default reports as templates. The modified reports can be
saved for later use.
QueWorX Server Information & PBX Requirements
QueWorX can be purchased as a Turnkey or Software Only System.
Server Information
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Each turnkey package includes:
NEC Server, monitor, keyboard & Mouse
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
QueWorX 4.0 base SW
Dialogic Boards
Tape Backup
External Modem & PC Anywhere
2 10/100Mbps NIC’s
QueWorX Documentation (on CD)
Minimum PBX System Requirements
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
CallCenterWorX (ACD) and the PBX are across the local area network via TCP/IP (only).
Serial (RS-232) connections are not supported.
NEAX 2000 IPS 3000 series software or above
NEAX 2000 IVS 1900 series software, release 2
NEAX 2000 IVS2 2200 series software
CC1.01 Firmware (NEAX IVS/IVS2 below 2200 SW)
CC12.01 Firmware (2200 Series SW or above)
Line Card to support selected type of integration
CallCenterWorX ACD 3.0 for Business
PZ-M606-A: On board Ethernet Interface card (Ethernet TCP/IP)
QueWorX Packaging
QueWorX 4.0
Analog = 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, & 48 Ports
Digital = 24 & 48 Ports
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 12- 17
Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS
Professional Services for QueWorX
While QueWorX provides an advanced set of features, some customers will require
applications specific to their contact center that are outside the scope of QueWorX. With
hundreds of successful solutions deployed Professional Services has developed many custom
solutions that allow us to provide Call Center, CTI and speech applications that meet the
customer’s business needs and demands. Requests for these applications can be forwarded
to your NEC representative who will work with NEC Professional Services to help define the
requirements of unique applications or you may contact Professional Services via
[email protected]
Page 12- 18
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice over IP (VoIP)
VoIP Solutions
The NEAX 2000 IPS (Internet Protocol Server) is a communication system that can convert
voice signals into IP packets and transmit them through the same data communication line as
IP network (Intranet). Using this system, both voice and data communication lines are
integrated into one communication line, and communication cost can be reduced.
The following VoIP solutions are available with the NEAX 2000 IPS system.
VoIP Solutions
Extended Enterprise IP Solution
H.323 Connection
IP Station (Peer-to-Peer)
Fax over IP
CCIS Networking via IP
Modem over IP
Remote PIM over IP
Extended Enterprise IP Solution
Teleworkers, usually working from an off-site location, can place a call through the corporate PBX/KTS
by simply dialing the number as if they were in their office. The Dterm phones can be connected to either
a multiple-user unit (called the Dterm IP Branch), or a single-user device (called the Dterm IP Adapter).
The Dterm IP Gateway, Dterm IP branch and Dterm IP Adapter units are linked through a wide variety of
network devices (TA, FRAD, and CSU/DSC) and network types (ISDN, IP, Frame Relay, T1, Fractional
T1, ATM).
Dterm IP Gateway: is a multiline module, available in 8 or 12 port units. On one side it has an AMP
connector that is used to interface with Digital station ports. On the other side it connects to an IP
packet network though a 10BaseT Ethernet port or circuit network through a DB25 WAN port. It
communicates over the IP network to the Dterm IP Adapter(s) or over an IP network or circuit network to
Dterm IP Branch unit(s).
Dterm IP Adapter: is a compact plug-and-play device that installs into the base of a Dterm display
terminal. It has an integrated two-port 10BaseT Ethernet pass-though hub that permits using one port
to connect the network interface card (NIC) from the PC to the IP network and the other port is plugged
directly into a LAN or into an IP network device such as a router, DSL modem or cable modem.
Dterm IP Branch: Designed for small branch offices the Dterm IP Branch resides at the distant office. On
one side it has an AMP connector that is used to interface with Dterm terminals. On the other side it
connects to an IP packet network though a 10BaseT Ethernet port or circuit network though a DB25
WAN port. It communicates over the IP network or circuit network to the Dterm IP Gateway units.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 1
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Extended Enterprise IP Solution (Con’t)
Typical IP Gateway, Branch and Adapter configurations
Required Equipment for NEC’s Extended Enterprise IP Solution
The table below shows the equipment list for NEC’s Extended Enterprise IP Solution.
Equipment Name
D
term
IP Gateway
12 Port Unit
Function
term
Dterm IP Gateway
8 Port Unit
IP Gateway is a rack-mountable (or desktop) digital voice
The D
termination device that connects to the Dterm station ports of the NEAX or Elite
system. The Dterm IP Gateway’s main function is to extend Dterm station ports
off of the corporate NEAX or Elite system to users over the LAN or WAN,
such as telecommuters or small branch office workers.
Dterm IP Adapter
(IPA-U10 Unit)
The Dterm IP Adapter connects to a Dterm Series E display terminal to provide
voice access to a corporate NEAX or Elite system for a single user or local
user. Voice and signaling traffic generated by the Dterm Series E will be
placed in IP packets and sent out to the LAN via a 10Base T Ethernet
connection to the Dterm IP Gateway.
Used for connecting a single user.
Dterm IP Branch
12 Port Unit
Dterm IP Branch
8 Port Unit
Page 13- 2
The Dterm IP Branch converts NEAX or Elite systems voice and signaling into
packets, which can be sent and received through a network connection. The
Dterm IP Branch supports up to 8 or 12 users per stackable unit.
Used for connecting multiple users from a single location.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
IP Station
IP station is a Dterm IP terminal, Dterm Series E/Series i with an IP Adapter Unit, Dterm IP
INASET, and Dterm SP20/SP30 Softphone. IP stations provide a converged infrastructure at
the desktop, with a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet connection to corporate Local Area
Networks (LAN). The IP station can communicate with other IP stations or CCIS network (IP
based) on a peer-to-peer connection basis and the IP stations can communicate with legacy
stations and trunks (TDM based) via IPPAD (IP Packet Assembler/Disassembler). The IP
stations provide users with all features currently available in Dterm Series E/Series i terminals.
The following figure shows a typical network configuration using IP stations.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 3
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Peer-to Peer Connections between IP Enabled Dterm
The IP stations can communicate with other IP stations over the LAN, on a peer-to-peer connection
basis. Call control is provided by the Main Processor (MP) with Ethernet adapter card, and voice
packets are transmitted between IP stations over the LAN (not through Time Division Switch). Voice
compression of G.729a (8 kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3 kbps/6.3 kbps) is available for its connections.
Peer-to-Peer Connections over CCIS Networking via IP
The IP stations can communicate with other 2000 IPS/2400 IPX systems over the CCIS networking via
IP, on a peer-to-peer connection basis. MP controls a connection between the IP station and IP trunk
built into the MP. The built-in IP trunk communicates with IP trunks of the distant systems (2000
IPS/2400 IPX) over CCIS networks via IP. Voice packets are transmitted over the LAN and WAN (via
router). Voice compression of G.729a (8 kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3 kbps/6.3 kbps) is available for its
connections.
Page 13- 4
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Connections to Legacy Stations and Trunks
The IP station can communicate with legacy stations and trunks (including H.323 trunks) via IP-PAD
that converts voice packet data to PCM signals. Call control signals are transmitted to MP over the
LAN, while voice packets are transmitted via IP-PAD. The number of IP-PADs depends on the traffic
volume of connections between the IP station and legacy stations and trunks.
Remote Connections of IP Stations
The IP stations can be located at remote sites over an intranet/internet/PSTN/ISDN via routers. This
allows IP station users at remote sites to use the NEAX 2000 IPS features as same as those at local
site. The number portability among the sites is available, so that the same IP station user can login at
any site, using the single login code and password. The IP station has two operating modes: Local
Connection Mode and Remote Connection Mode. Each operating mode can have individual VoIP
communication parameters such as CODEC selection list and usable bandwidth, so that the
appropriate communication is available even if the IP station user logs in at either local site or remote
site.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 5
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Automatic Program Download for IP Enabled Dterm
This feature provides the method to download the latest firmware program of IP Enabled Dterm from the
FTP/TFTP server automatically by system programming. The following three patterns of program
download are available.
ƒ Program Download at Appointed Time
ƒ Program Download at Login Time
ƒ Program Download for Designated Terminals
Service Conditions
1. Up to 952 IP terminals can be accommodated per system.
2. Total number of ports for IP terminals, legacy stations/trunks (except for AP cards) and IP PADs is
up to 1020 per system. See chapter 1 page 21 for capacities of stand alone and network
configurations.
Note: Legacy stations/trunks means the ones connected to the Time Division Switch (TDSW). Examples of
legacy station/trunk cards are LC, DLC, COT, PRT, CCT, DTI, 8RST (DTMF receivers), CFTB (Conference
trunk), etc.
3. IP terminals are accommodated in the Virtual PIMs (Virtual FPs) so that the hardware-PIMs are not
required to accommodate IP Enabled Dterm terminals. The Virtual PIM is software-defined PIM used
for data assignment for IP Enabled Dterm terminals and Virtual IP trunks (for CCIS Networking via IP).
Maximum nine (15) Virtual PIMs are provided per system. Total number of the Virtual PIMs (for IP
terminals) and hardware-PIMs is up to 16 per system.
4. Minimum one hardware-PIM is required per system to accommodate the MP card. The number of
hardware- PIMs depends on the number of legacy stations/trunks and IP-PADs. Up to two hardwarePIMs (128 LT ports) can be controlled by the MP without the addition of an FP card. With three FP
cards, up to eight hardware-PIMs (512 LT ports) can be controlled [One FP card controls up to two
hardware- PIMs (128 LT ports)].
Page 13- 6
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
5. The IP-PAD is required for connections between IP terminals and legacy stations/trunks. The IP-PAD
converts voice packet data to PCM signals. The number of IP-PADs depends on the traffic volume of
those connections. Up to eight IP-PADs can be accommodated per system, thus providing 256 PCM
channels in total. Up to two IP-PADs can be controlled by the MP without FP cards, and additional IPPADs can be controlled by the FP cards (two IP-PADs per FP card).
ƒ
8IPLA/24IPLA
PN-8IPLA card provides 8 channels of IP-PAD with VCT function per card. Adding PZ-24IPLA
daughter-card on the 8IPLA card provides up to 32 channels of IP-PAD with VCT function.
Maximum of 8 IP-PAD cards can be accommodated per system, thus providing 256 PCM
channels in total. By system data setting, the used ports for IP-PAD can be changed to
8/16/24/32 ports. After changing the data, the IP-PAD reset is required.
Note: Up to 24 channels of IP-PAD are provided when using G.723.1 codec.
6. The following types of connections are available on a peer-to-peer basis:
ƒ Connections between IP terminals
ƒ Connections for CCIS networking via IP from/to IP terminals
(Distant systems must be 2000 IPS or 2400 IPX)
7. The IP-PADs are required for the following connections/statuses:
ƒ Connections between IP terminals and legacy stations/trunks
ƒ Connections between IP terminals and IP trunks (H.323)
ƒ Connections for CCIS networking via IP from/to legacy stations/trunks
ƒ While IP terminals are on hold (Consultation Hold, Call Transfer, Music-on-Hold, etc.)
ƒ When any override service is activated (Executive Override, etc.) including IP terminals.
ƒ Three/four-party conference including IP terminals
8. Voice compression is available for following connections.
ƒ Connections between IP terminals
ƒ Connections via IP-PAD (for CCIS networking via IP from/to legacy stations/trunks)
ƒ Voice compression can be assigned on a call basis or terminal basis, by system programming.
ƒ The following type of voice compression is available:
G.711 (64 kbps)
G.729a (8 kbps)
G.723.1 (5.3 kbps/6.3 kbps)
9. The Device Registration Server (DRS) is built into the MP card (System-based DRS). The Systembased DRS can provide log-in/log-out function and registration authorization function of IP terminals.
Up to 952 IP terminals can be managed by the System-based DRS.
10. Payload size of voice packet can be assigned from 10 milliseconds to 40 milliseconds in 10
milliseconds increments by system programming. However, available payload size depends on the
type of voice codec.
Codec Type
G.711
G.729a
G.723.1
Payload Size
Available Range
10 milliseconds to 40 milliseconds
10 milliseconds to 40 milliseconds
30 milliseconds (fixed)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Default Value
40 milliseconds
40 milliseconds
30 milliseconds
Page 13- 7
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
11. Maximum number of voice channels per IP-PAD card depends on the payload size as follows.
ƒ
8IPLA/24IPLA
Payload Size
Maximum Voice Channels per IP-PAD Card (8IPLA/24IPLA)
G.711
G.729a
G.723.1
10 ms
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms
20
32
32
32
20
32
32
32
24
-
12. Following parameters can be assigned on a Location basis. The Location is a kind of group (similar
to Tenant in a PBX) that is defined for bandwidth management and parameter settings for LAN traffic
based on the location of IP terminals. Maximum 64 Location numbers can be assigned per system.
Type of Codec selection list
Type of Service (ToS)
PAD control pattern
Echo canceller-ON/OFF
Options Per Location
Diffserve
Operation when over usable bandwidth
threshold.
Setting Area/Country
IP-PAD Group number
Jitter buffer
Usable Bandwidth
13. When the IP adapter unit is attached with a Dterm Series E/Series i terminal, other optional adapters
(except for AD/DC adapter unit) cannot be attached with the Dterm Series E/Series i terminal.
14. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) cannot be used to assign an IP address to an MP.
15. Login is restricted in following conditions.
ƒ
ƒ
When designating a non-existent station number.
("Unregistered" is displayed on the LCD.)
When designating a station number that is not assigned to Multiline Terminal.
("Illegal LEN" is displayed on the LCD.)
16. Logout should be allowed by a station class of service. If not allowed, reorder tone will be heard
and "Restrict" will be displayed on the LCD.
17. Intranet to support Quality of Service (QoS) is preferable to connect IP Stations, to reduce the
delay of connection and voice, and the inferior grade of voice quality.
18. IP Stations operate on 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps LAN based on IEEE 802. (100Mbps LAN is
recommended.)
19. IP Stations support Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). (External DHCP server is
required.)
20. Network-based DRS (external DRS) 3.0 is not supported.
21. Switching hub(s) are required.
22. Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1d) function is not available.
23. LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol, IEEE 802.3ad) function is not available.
Page 13- 8
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Service Conditions on Legacy Service Features
1. A DSS/BLF Console can be associated with the IP Enabled Dterm terminal, but the console must be
connected to a DLC card.
2. Multiple Line Operation with normal Multiline Terminal is available.
3. Service features requiring continuous voice transmission, such as the Background Music feature,
cannot be used because this traffic may reduce overall performance of the Local Area Network
(LAN).
4. CAT mode is available.
5. Soft Key and Help indication is supported.
6. Set Relocations is not available between IP Station and TDM Multiline terminal.
7. DTMF signal is sent for 112ms ~ 128ms when Key Pad is pressed.
9. IP terminals do not support Add-on Module feature.
10. IP Enabled Dterm uses only one synthesized melody (Minuet), built into an IP adapter unit. Music on
Hold using external source is not available for the IP Enabled Dterm.
11. Internal Zone Page from the IP terminals has the following conditions:
ƒ IP Enabled Dterm can page up to 3 Dterm/IP Enabled Dterm terminals.
ƒ Legacy Dterm can page up to 16 Dterm/IP Enabled Dterm terminals.
ƒ IP stations cannot provide all zone paging (receive reorder tone).
Service Conditions on System Registration
1. The IP Enabled Dterm can be registered in the NEAX 2000 IPS in Login method (with password
protected) or Automatic Login method (MAC address authentication). The registration method can be
assigned in a station class of service.
Note: the DtermSP20/SP30 (soft phone) is registered in Automatic Login method only.
2. The Login method allows the IP station user to be registered in the system by entering its own login
code (station number) and password. The station user can login to the system from any IP Enabled
Dterm terminal in the system, which is assigned to Login method. The Automatic Login method (MAC
address authentication) allows the IP Enabled Dterm to be registered in the system at the installation
time by entering its own login code (station number) and a special password for installation
engineers.
Once the terminal is registered, the station user does not have to login and logout to use the IP
Enabled Dterm.
3. Up to 8-digit password can be assigned by system programming. 0 to 9, A and B can be used as a
password. The password can be masked by “*” on the LCD of IP Enabled Dterm.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 9
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
4. The registration data by Automatic Login method (MAC address authentication) can be backed up in
the flash ROM of the MP by MAT operation or automatic system data back up at a designated time.
Therefore, the installation engineer does not have to re-register the IP Enabled Dterm when the system
reset should occur. The registration data by Login method (with password protected) cannot be
backed up.
5. When the IP terminal with a call in progress has the LAN cable extracted or a power-off occurs and
restores, in this situation, “Double Assignment” is displayed on the LCD. When the terminal is
registered by Automatic Login method the terminal can be used automatically after about two
minutes. When the terminal is registered by Login method the station user can login from the same
terminal after about two minutes, or login from another terminal (Override).
6. Logout operation from the IP terminal registered in Automatic Login method should not be done in
the normal operation. If the logout occurs, re-registration is required.
7. The registration data by Automatic Login method can be saved from the MAT by designating the
area number 80 (normal system data saving operation does not save the registration data).
Service Conditions on Encryption in System Registration
1. When the IP Enabled Dterm is registered in the NEAX 2000 IPS, the login code (station number) and
password entered from the terminal can be encrypted.
Login code: Proprietary algorithm
Password: Proprietary algorithm or MD5 algorithm
MD5 is an algorithm defined in RFC 1321 from the IETF.
The encryption algorithm can be assigned on a system-wide basis by system programming (no
encryption is also available.).
2. The encryption is available in both Login method (with password protected) and Automatic Login
method (MAC address authentication).
3. Up to 8-digit password can be assigned by system programming. 0-9, A and B can be used as a
password.
4. When the password is not assigned, the registration is not allowed and “Unauthorized” is displayed
on the terminal.
5. When the encrypted password is manipulated in the network, the registration is not allowed and
“Unregistered” is displayed on the terminal.
Service Conditions on VLAN
1. NEAX 2000 IPS supports VLAN based on IEEE 802.1Q (Tag VLAN).
2. VLAN can be assigned to IP port(s) of MP, IP-PAD and IP Enabled Dterm, and cannot be assigned to
IP ports of IP trunks and IPELC. The VLAN assignment to the IP Enabled Dterm is provided by
Configuration Mode.
Page 13- 10
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
3. One IP port can have one VLAN ID. Multiple VLAN IDs cannot be assigned to the same IP port.
4. VLAN ID can be assigned from 1 to 4094. VLAN ID = 0 is handled as Null VLAN ID and is effective
to assign priority only.
5. Switching hub must support VLAN. If the switching hub does not support VLAN, the VLAN function is
not effective even when the system data of the NEAX 2000 IPS is assigned.
Service Conditions on Remote Connections
1. The network between NEAX 2000 IPS and IP Enabled Dterm must meet the following requirement:
ƒ Waiting time for ACK signal: maximum 600ms (300ms recommended)
To check the above requirement, send Ping command from a PC to a remote IP Enabled Dterm
and see the result of the command (“Time” shows the time to receive ACK signal.). If the result
does not meet the above requirement, abnormal operation such as connection unavailable,
deterioration of voice quality or abnormal state of IP terminal may occur.
2. The remote IP Enabled Dterm can be connected to the network via either of the following devices:
ƒ Router
ƒ Dial-up router
ƒ Modem
ƒ Cable Modem
ƒ ADSL Splitter
3. The IP terminal can be assigned to Local Connection Mode or Remote Connection Mode by
entering the Administrator Mode of the IP terminal. After the operation mode of the terminal is
changed (Local to Remote, or vice versa), login operation is required again.
4. The differences between Local Connection Mode and Remote Connection Mode are as follows:
Item
Local Connection Mode
Confirmation to Connect
IP Terminal
1 time per minute
Clock Control
2000 IPS sends clock signal to
IP terminal on a minute basis.
Remote Connection Mode
1 time per day
(10 minutes from 00:00 a.m.)
2000 IPS sends clock signal to IP
Enabled Dterm when the IP
Enabled Dterm is logged in or the
clock data is entered by CM02.
5. Individual Location number can be assigned for Local Connection Mode and Remote Connection
Mode, on a station number basis, by system programming. The IP Enabled Dterm can work based
on the location number in each mode. For parameters assigned for each Location number, refer to
#12 of Overall Conditions. When the Location number for the station is changed, login operation is
required again.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 11
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
6. Because the IP station can have only two-operation mode (Location number), when the number of
remote sites (Location numbers) is over two, there is a case that the appropriate communications
may not be available. Refer to Example 2 for details.
ƒ Location number in each operation mode for each IP station:
<IP stations in Location #0: STA. 200 and 201>
Remote Connection Mode: Location #1
Local Connection Mode: Location #0
<IP stations in Location #1: STA. 202 and 302>
Remote Connection Mode: Location #1
Local Connection Mode: Location #0 or #2
<IP stations in Location #2: STA. 300 and 301>
Remote Connection Mode: Location #1
Local Connection Mode: Location #2
ƒ Operation mode for each IP terminal:
<IP terminals in Location #0>
Local Connection Mode
<IP terminals in Location #1>
Remote Connection Mode
<IP terminals in Location #2>
Local Connection Mode
ƒ Example 1: When Sta. 200 logs in Location #1
STA. 200 logs out from Location #0, and then logs in from IP terminals in Location #1. STA
200 works in Remote Connection Mode (because IP terminals in Location # 1 are assigned to
Remote Connection Mode.), under the conditions of Location #1 (because STA. 200 in
Remote Connection Mode is assigned to operate under the condition of Location #1.). In this
case, the appropriate communication is available because the operating condition of STA.
200 matches the actual Location number (Location #1).
ƒ Example 2: When Sta. 200 logs in Location #2
STA. 200 logs out from Location #0, and then logs in from IP terminals in Location #2. STA.
200 works in Local Connection Mode (because IP terminals in Location # 2 are assigned to
Locale Connection Mode.), under the conditions of Location #0 (because STA. 200 in Local
Connection Mode is assigned to operate under the condition of Location #0.). In this case, the
appropriate communication may not be available because the operating condition of STA. 200
(Location #0) does not match the actual Location number (Location #2).
Page 13- 12
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
7. Following features are not available for IP terminals at remote sites:
ƒ Multiple Line Operation
ƒ Assignment of feature keys which the lamp indication and ringer is controlled by other IP
terminals
Service Conditions on Automatic Program Download
1. For program download, the FTP or TFTP server is required.
2. This service is available for the IP Enabled Dterm with Peer-to-Peer connections. Terminals with
IPELC connections are not supported.
3. Maximum of four terminals can be downloaded at the same time regardless of the type of
download.
4. Firmware version filed in FTP/TFTP server is assigned by the system data (CM0C YY=00-07,
1st=02). When the latest firmware version is filed in the server, be sure to update the system data.
5. When the FTP server is used for program download, login from the IP Enabled Dterm with a login
name "anonymous" and password "2000 IPS" (authentication by FTP server is required).
6. Conditions on Program Download at Appointed Time
ƒ Program Download at Appointed Time service is available by the system data assignment
(CM15YYY=482) on a station class of service basis.
ƒ By the same command mentioned above, program download can be retried just one time.
When the download results in failure two times in succession, the IP Enabled Dterm operates
with previous firmware.
ƒ When this service is executed, neither Program Download at Login Time nor Program
Download for Designated Terminal can be executed.
ƒ PBX system checks the firmware version of each terminal starting from the terminal with the
smallest LEN number and executes this service if required.
ƒ This service is executed only for the idle terminals. This service is not executed for the terminals
in Logout or busy status.
ƒ The actual starting time of the Program Download at Appointed Time may be varied with a
range of +/--1 minute. When 448 of IP Enabled Dterm have to be upgraded, for example, it takes
about 450 minutes to be completed, without retry.
ƒ CMFA YY=50 1st=01/02 counts the number of terminals that are successfully downloaded and
the number of terminals that result in download failure only when the PBX sends the latest
program download message to the terminals. If the terminals are busy or logged out, CMFA
YY=50 1st=02 does not count the number of terminals in download failure because the PBX
does not send the download message to the terminals.
ƒ Program Download at Appointed Time can be suspended by CMFA YY=50 1st =00: CCC (clear)
during executing the download. However, you cannot suspend the download of the terminal
with "Downloading..." displayed.
7. Conditions on Program Download at Login Time
ƒ Program Download at Login Time service can be assigned on a system basis by CM0C YY=90
1st =02.
ƒ When this service is assigned, retry in download failure status is not available.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 13
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
8. Conditions on Program Download for Designated Terminals
ƒ Program Download for Designated Terminals is assigned and executed on the Primary
Extension number basis.
ƒ This service is executed only for idle terminals. This service is not executed for the terminals in
Logout status.
ƒ When this service is assigned, retry in download failure status is not available.
Required Equipment for IP Station
Equipment Name
PZ-M606-A
SPN-32IPLAA IP PAD
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD
PZ-24IPLA
IPW-2U Unit
IP-R Unit
AC-R Unit
ACA-U Unit
SN1604 Power Hub
IP Terminals
Power
Function
On board Ethernet Interface card. One per system
32ch IP Interface card for IP PAD
16ch Codec card for IP PAD Compression
Max. 2 per 32IPLA Card (optional)
Min. one 16VCT is required per 32IPLA
8ch IP PAD card w/compression
24ch Expansion card for IP PAD. Mounts on 8IPLA.
IP Adapter Unit for Dterm Series E terminals
IP Adapter Unit for Dterm Series i terminals
AC/DC Adapter for Dterm Series i terminals
AC/DC Adapter for Dterm Series E terminals
This power hub is a 12-port device that connects to a port
on the customer’s provided data switch and to the cable
supplying the network connectivity to the Dterm Series E.
Dterm IP terminals
Dterm Series I terminals w/IP adapter
Dterm Series E terminals w/IP adapter
INASET terminals
SP20/SP30 Softphones
Power for IP stations can be provided by one of three
mechanisms. The first is via a local AC power supply
(ACA-U). The second is an SN1604 Power Hub. The third
is the Cisco Catalyst switch power feed.
CCIS Networking via IP
This feature provides CCIS networks with Voice over IP (VoIP) capabilities to provide a
converged infrastructure over corporate Wide Area Networks (WAN). The IP Enabled Dterm can
communicate with other IP Enabled Dterm over the CCIS network (IP based) on a peer-to-peer
connection basis. The legacy terminals (TDMbased terminals) can communicate with other
legacy terminals or IP Enabled Dterm terminals over the CCIS network via IP Packet
Assembler/Disassembler (IP-PAD). Voice compression of G.729a (8 kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3
kbps / 6.3 kbps) is available for those connections. The CCIS Networking via IP provides users
with all TDM-based CCIS functionality, such as feature transparency, centralized
management, and centralized facilities.
Page 13- 14
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
There are two types of connections available for CCIS Networking via IP:
CCIS Networking via IP (Peer-to-Peer Connections Basis)
When the distant systems are 2000 IPS, the systems are connected on a peer-to-peer basis. The CCIS
call control signals are transmitted between the built-in IP trunks (CCIS Handler; CCH) on the MP card,
over the Local Area Networks and Wide Area Networks (LAN and WAN). For connections between IP
Enabled Dterm terminals, voice signals are also transmitted over the LAN and WAN. For connections
between legacy terminals, voice signals are transmitted via IP-PADs. This connection is also available
when the distant systems are 2400 IPX that supports peer-to-peer connections.
Example IP Enabled Terminals Peer-to-Peer Connection
Example IP between Legacy Termainls via Peer-to-Peer Connection
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 15
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
CCIS Networking via IP (Non Peer-to-Peer Connections Basis)
IP trunk connections over CCIS (No.7 CCIS Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling) Networking via IP
is used to provide telephony services between the NEAX2000 IVS Retro, IVS2, IPS or NEAX 2400
IMX/IPX on opposite side which do not support peer-to-peer connections. The IP-PAD is required for
connections between IP terminals and IP trunks. A maximum of one IP trunk card can be
accommodated per PIM with a maximum of eight IP trunk cards per system. Voice compression of
G.729a (8 kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3 kbps / 6.3 kbps) can be provided by the IP trunks with VCT cards.
Communications cost can be reduced, by utilizing IP Trunks in the system to convert voice signals into
IP packets and transmit them over the data network. All CCIS centralized and transparent features can
be used connecting up to 255 NEAX systems in a network for a total of 130,560 station ports.
Point-to-Multipoint Connection
Point-to-Multipoint Connection is a connection type, which designates multiple destination IP
addresses, per IP trunk, as shown below. One IP trunk can be connected to multiple opposite offices in
Point-to-Multipoint connection.
IP Trunk: Point-to-Multipoint Connection
Page 13- 16
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Service Conditions (IP CCIS via IP Trunk cards)
1. Maximum voice channels per IP trunk card depends on the payload period as follows (payload
period can be assigned in system programming):
Payload Period
10 ms
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms
Maximum Voice Channels per IP Trunk
4
8
16
16
2. Maximum 127 voice channels can be provided per system (point-to-multipoint connection).
3. IP trunk cards must be connected with the intranet via router.
IP Trunk Card Specifications
Description
QoS signaling
Speech encoding/decoding
Payload period
FAX communications protocol
FAX mode detection timer
PAD control
Tandem connection
IPT connection mode
Dynamic jitter buffer
Specifications
IP Precedence/Diffserv
G.711/G.729a/G.723.1
G.711/G.729a : 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms
G.723.1 : 30 ms (fixed)
T.30
0 to 5 min. (1 min. increment)
Controlled in a node basis
IPT to IPT/IPT to ACIS: available (but voice quality may deteriorate)
IPT to ISDN : available
Fixed Connection Mode or Automatic Disconnect Mode can be
assigned per IPT trunk or destination node in system programming.
10 to 600 ms (10 ms increment)
Required Equipment for IP CCIS via IP Trunk cards
Equipment Name
SPN-IPTB-A
PN-IPT
SPN-4VCTI-A
W/Cable
Functional Name
IPT
VCT
Function
IP Trunk Card Accommodates the IP network and
transmits/receives compressed voice or signals over IP
network. 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is
connected directly to this card.
4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk (max of four per IPTB)
Voice compression protocols:
G723.1, G729A, G711, FAX (14.4 kbps),DTMF signals
Used together with PN-IPTB card.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 17
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
H.323 Connection
VoIP or Voice over IP allows the system to transmit voice conversations over a corporate
Intranet using ITU-T H.323 protocol. For Dterm IP-to-Dterm IP connection via the IP network with
H.323 protocol, the IPT card and IP-PAD card are required to transmit and receive the control
signal and voice data. For voice compression, the 16VCT card and 4VCT card are required.
For Legacy terminal connection via the IP network with H.323 protocol, the IPT card is
required.
Page 13- 18
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
H.323 Features
The following service features are available when connecting with H.323 terminal (NEC product). For
other vender products, confirmation test is required.
H.323 Features
Call Forwarding-All Calls
Speed Calling-Station
Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer
Bearer Service
Call Forwarding-Busy Line
Tandem Switching of TIE Trunks-2/4-Wire
Split Call Forwarding
The Line Connection with PAD Control
Call Transfer-All Calls
Outgoing Trunk Busy Announcement
Hotline
Brokerage Hot Line-Outside
Do not Disturb-D
term
Least Cost Routing-3/6-Digit
Calling/Called Number Display
LCR-Time of Day Routing
Digital Display-Trunk
Attendant Manual Override
Speed Calling-System
Echo Canceler Control
Service Conditions for H.323
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The data network used for H.323 must be a corporate Intranet.
Gatekeeper is required for H.323 network.
IP trunk cards must be connected with a corporate Intranet via a router.
CCIS feature key FD is required.
Maximum number of nodes in the network depends on the capability of the Gatekeeper.
Maximum one IP trunk card can be accommodated per PIM and maximum eight IP trunk cards per
system.
7. Maximum voice channels per IP trunk card depends on the payload period as follows (payload
period can be assigned in system programming):
Maximum Voice Channels per IP Trunk
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
20 ms
6
5
–
30 ms
8
7
8
40 ms
12
10
–
Note: Maximum 96 channels can be provided per system
Payload Period
8. The same IP trunk card cannot be shared with CCIS network via IP and H.323.
9. Tone signals to an extension are provided by the system.
10. When a LAN cable is unplugged from the IP trunk card, the associated calls are disconnected.
11. When connected with the system by other manufacturer, a pre-connection test is required.
12. DTMF Relay is supported.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 19
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
H.323 IP Trunk Specifications
Description
QoS signaling
Speech encoding/decoding
Payload size
Call model
H.323 procedure
Supplementary service (defined in H.450)
Registration on Gatekeeper
DHCP server
FAX communications
PAD control
Echo canceller
Tandem connection
IPT connection mode
Dynamic jitter buffer
Specifications
IP Precedence/Diffserv
(assigned on an IP trunk basis)
G.711/G.729a/G.723.1
G.711/G.729a : 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms
G.723.1 : 30 ms (fixed)
Gatekeeper Routed/Direct
Normal Connect/Fast Connect
Not available
Static registration
Not supported
Not available
Controlled in a node basis
Controlled in a node basis
IPT to IPT/IPT to ACIS
: available (but voice quality may deteriorate)
IPT to CCIS : available
IPT to ISDN : available
IPT to analog C.O. : available
IPT to MFC : not available
Point to Multipoint
10 to 600 ms (10 ms increment)
Required Equipment for H.323
Equipment Name
SPN-IPTB-A
PN-IPT
SPN-4VCTI-A
W/Cable
Page 13- 20
Functional Name
IPT
VCT
Function
IP Trunk Card Accommodates the IP network and
transmits/receives compressed voice or signals over IP
network. 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is
connected directly to this card.
4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk (max of four per IPTB)
Voice compression protocols:
G723.1, G729A, G711, FAX (14.4 kbps),DTMF signals
Used together with PN-IPTB card.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
FAX and Modem over IP
This feature allows the system to transmit facsimile or modem communications over IP
network, via Local Area Networks (LAN) and corporate Wide Area Network (WAN). Since PBX
regards facsimile and modem equipment as one of ordinary telephones, IP Packet
Assembler/Disassembler (IP-PAD) and Voice Compression Trunk (VCT) are required for
facsimile uses over IP network same as legacy stations. The facsimile transmission procedure
(T.30 or G.711/G.726 pass-through) is supported with IP-PAD/VCT. The following figure shows
a typical configuration of facsimile or modem use on Peer-to-Peer CCIS network.
IPS
IPS
MP
MP
LAN or
WAN
LC
IP-PAD
LC
IP-PAD
FAX
FAX
PC built-in Modem
FAX
PC built-in Modem
Example of FAX and Modem over IP connection
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 21
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Service Conditions
1. IP-PAD and VCT are required for facsimile use on Peer-to-Peer CCIS network or Remote PIM over
IP function.
2. PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) card and PN-16VCTA (16VCT) card do not support FAX and Modem over IP.
3. IP-PAD card and 16VCT card support Fax and Modem over IP with the following FAX protocol.
Protocol
Cards
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-A
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E +
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B
G.711
Pass-Through
X
(Series 3300
software or later)
X
(Series 3300
software or later)
X
(Series 3400
software or later)
X
(Series 3300
software or later)
G.726
Pass-through
X
(Series 3300
software or later)
—
—
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E +
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-C +
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A
—
T.30
—
—
—
—
—
X
(Series 3400
software or later)
X
(Series 3200
software or later)
X
(Series 3200
software or later)
—
X
(Series 3200
software or later)
X: Available —: Not available
4. The analog Media Converter used by 2400 IPX cannot be accommodated in 2000 IPS. It is possible
to connect facsimiles between 2400 IPX and 2000 IPS.
5. A problem may occur such as “expected transmission speed is not obtained” or “not connectable”,
depending on a facsimile model even if it supports T.30.
6. If a Super G3 facsimile is used, the transmission speed will be equivalent to G3.
7. If a facsimile with Error Correction Mode (ECM) function is used, ECM does not work.
8. Connection speed for Modem over IP are:
a. G.711 Pass-through 24kbps – 14kbps
b. G726 Pass-though 14.4kbps – 9.6kbps
Page 13- 22
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Required Equipment for FAX or Modem over IP
Item
Description
Stock #
Q’ty
Remarks
1
PZ-M606-A
151492
1/Sys.
2
SPN-32IPLAA IP PAD-E
153158
2/FP
3
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B
153136
4
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B
153153
5
PZ-24IPLA
151254
On board Ethernet Interface Card
(ETHERNET TCP/IP)
IP Interface Card for IP PAD w/o FP: Max 2
w/ FP: Max 2/FP, Max 8/Sys.
2/32IPLA 16ch Codec Card for IP PAD (Option)
Max. 2/32IPLA Card
2/FP
IP Interface Card for IP PAD w/VCT
1/8IPLA Expansion Internet Protocol Line
Circuit for IP PAD w/VCT
Connectable combinations between facsimile stations are shown below.
Connectable Combinations
Source
Via
Remarks
Destination
IPS FAX station
Local
IPS FAX station
IPS FAX station
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
IPS FAX station
IPS FAX station
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
IPSDM FAX station
IPS FAX station
Peer-to-Peer Local
IPSDMR FAX station
IPS FAX station
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
IPX FAX station
IPS FAX station
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
IPX MC FAX station
Station-to-Station connection
Station-to-Station connection
(Remote PIM over IP)
Required bandwidth for FAX Connection
32IPLA-A/16VCTA-A
Connection Conditions
Required Bandwidth (One-way)
T.30, G711, Payload=40ms
150 kbps (estimated)
T.30, G729a, Payload=40ms, Communication
speed=14.4Kbps
(No IP Header compression in Router)
23.6 Kbps (FAX Payload=78byte)
T.30, G729a, Payload=40ms, Communication
speed=14.4Kbps
(with IP Header compression in Router)
16.6 Kbps (FAX Payload=78byte)
Note: This data does not include MAC Header.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 23
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
8IPLA/24IPLA
Connection Conditions
Required Bandwidth (One-way)
G.711 pass-through, Payload=40 ms
(No IP Header compression in Router)
72 kbps (FAX Payload=320 byte)
G.711 pass-through, Payload=40 ms
(with IP Header compression in Router)
65 kbps (FAX Payload=320 byte)
G.726 pass-through, Payload=40 ms
(No IP Header compression in Router)
40 kbps (FAX Payload=160 byte)
G.726 pass-through, Payload=40 ms
(with IP Header compression in Router)
33 kbps (FAX Payload=160 byte)
Note: This data does not include MAC Header.
Required bandwidth for Modem Connection
Connection Conditions
G.711 pass-through
40 ms
Required
Bandwidth (Oneway)
72 kbps
30 ms
74.67 kbps
20 ms
80 kbps
Payload
length
10 ms
40 ms
G.726 pass-through
G.711 pass-through
96 kbps
40 kbps
42.67 kbps
20 ms
48 kbps
10 ms
64 kbps
40 ms
65 kbps
30 ms
65.33 kbps
20 ms
66 kbps
40 ms
Page 13- 24
No
30 ms
10 ms
G.726 pass-through
IP Header
compression in
Router
Yes
68 kbps
33 kbps
30 ms
33.33 kbps
20 ms
34 kbps
10 ms
36 kbps
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Remote PIM over IP
Remote PIM over IP targets users who have 1-15 relatively small offices that accommodate
10-30 extensions at the Remote Site.
When IPSDMR and 2000 IPS PIM are installed at
remote site, and connected to a 2000 IPS or IPSDM at main site over IP network, the Main Site
system controls and maintains the remote DM and PIM operation as one single system. If a
communication failure occurs between the Main Site and Remote Site, the Remote Site
automatically changes over to a survival mode and operates as a stand-alone system.
IPSDMR: IPS Distributed Model Remote (with CP31-A)
IPSDM: IPS Distributed Model (with CP24-A/B)
The NEAX IPS-DMR is designed primarily for distributed IP networking but also supports
traditional analog and digital trunks for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN). The NEAX IPS-DMR supports up to 128 peer-to-peer IP stations and 40 TDM ports in
a single modular chassis. Up to two chassis can be stacked providing maximum capacity of 80
TDM ports while still supporting as many as 128 peer-to-peer IP stations.
Note: The MP card at Remote Site has the same system data as the CPU at the Host Site; the Host
Site automatically downloads system data to the Remote Site at the time of setup. In normal operation,
Main Site automatically downloads a copy the system data to Remote Site through the network once a
day.
Because the CP31 is designed as a Remote PIM CPU, the following options that are built-in on
the CP24 are not available with the CP31:
ƒ
No built-in modem.
ƒ
No built-in DAT.
ƒ
Only one RS Port.
ƒ
No built-in DK (external/relay key).
ƒ
No MN Alarm Indication
Network Conditions and Payload
Item
Requirement
Protocol
TCP/IP transparent
Maximum
Delay Time
120ms(one way)/240ms(return)
150ms(one way)/300ms(return)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Remarks
Support the quality class A,
B of IP Telephone
Page 13- 25
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Bandwidth Requirement
With G7.23.1
(5.3k/6.3k)
Compression
With G729a ( 8k)
Compression
Without Compression
(G.711)
Control
4.1 Kbps
4.1 Kbps
4.1 Kbps
Voice
31.8/37.8 Kbps
48 Kbps
432 Kbps
Control
4.3 Kbps
4.3 Kbps
4.3 Kbps
Voice
42.4/50.4 Kbps
64 Kbps
576 Kbps
Control
4.3 Kbps
4.3 Kbps
4.3 Kbps
Voice
63.6/75.6 Kbps
96 Kbps
864 Kbps
Control
4.5 Kbps
4.5 Kbps
4.5 Kbps
Voice
84.8/100.8 Kbps
128 Kbps
1152 Kbps
Control
4.5 Kbps
4.5 Kbps
4.5 Kbps
Voice
127.2/151.2 Kbps
192 Kbps
1728 Kbps
Control
4.9 Kbps
4.9 Kbps
4.9 Kbps
Voice
169.6/201.6 Kbps
256 Kbps
2304 Kbps
Control
4.9 Kbps
4.9 Kbps
4.9 Kbps
Voice
254.4/302.4 Kbps
384 Kbps
3456 Kbps
Control
5.8 Kbps
5.8 Kbps
5.8 Kbps
Voice
339.2/403.2 Kbps
512 Kbps
4608 Kbps
Control
5.8 Kbps
5.8 Kbps
5.8Kbps
Voice
381.6/453.6 Kbps
576 Kbps
5184 Kbps
Control
6.7 Kbps
6.7 Kbps
6.7 Kbps
Voice
508.8/604.8 Kbps
768 Kbps
6912 Kbps
Established
Voice Calls
6
8
12
16
24
32
48
64
72
96
Note: This information is an estimation based on an established call. Slightly Higher Control values will occur
at time of call origination and termination.
Base values
ƒ Originating from a station: 9.6 Kbps/Call (estimated)
ƒ Terminating to a station: 5.76 Kbps /Call (estimated)
ƒ Originating to C.O: 11.5 Kbps/Call (estimated)
ƒ Terminating from C.O: 5.76 Kbps/Call (estimated)
ƒ Keep Alive to Remote Site: 0.032Kbps (estimated)
ƒ Other control packets for Remote Site: 4Kbps (estimated)
ƒ G.723.1 voice: 5.3Kbps (one-way)
ƒ G.729a voice: 8Kbps (one-way)
ƒ G.711 voice: 64Kbps (one-way)
The above base values are primarily used for call setup with the exception of keep alive; 0.032Kbps with no voice
traffic. Connections between IP PAD are half duplex, established call utilization is G.711 voice: 64Kbps, G.723.1
voice: 5.3/6.3Kbps, or G729a voice: 8Kbps. Peer-to-Peer IP station calls are full duplex, compression can be
specified by location numbers in system data. Peer-to Peer IP station calls even though full duplex will utilize
one-way for Bi-directional networks such as T1. Peer-to Peer IP station calls over Asymmetrical networks such as
ADSL may realize higher bandwidth utilization, compression can be specified by location numbers in system data.
Page 13- 26
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Advantages
The system regards the terminals accommodated in both Host Site and Remote Site as the extensions
in the same office. Feature transparency is superior to CCIS.
The Digital Remote PIM cannot accommodate AP cards; Remote PIM over IP can accommodate AP
cards such as ISDN PRI and T1.
This feature can reduce the bandwidth used on the WAN that is connected to CO lines at Remote Site,
rather than Dterm IP at remote locations.
Since all Remote PIM over IP sites are treated as extensions in the same office, software and
applications only have to be implemented in the host site. This provides centralized use of application
for example distributing ACD agents in the DMR locations. CCIS requires each location to have
separate software and applications.
CCIS over IP can be combined with Remote PIM over IP to accommodate larger network
configurations. Up to 255 host sites can be connected via CCIS, each host site can have up to 15
Remote PIM over IP locations.
Service Conditions
1. Host site can be NEAX 2000 IPS, NEAX IPS DM, or NEAX 2000 IVS Retro system. Remote
PIM over IP is available in any combination of the following CPUs.
Main Site: CP24-A/B, CP27-A, CP26-A, CP28-A
Remote Site: CP31-A, CP24-A/B, CP27-A, CP26-A, CP28-A
2. Software and Key FD for the whole system must be loaded at the Host Site. No software or
key’s can be loaded into the Remote Site.
3. All system data changes for the whole system must be performed in the Host Site. No system
data changes can be done in the Remote Site.
4. The CPU card at Remote Site has the same system data as the CPU at Main Site; the Host Site
automatically downloads its system data to the Remote Site at the time of setup. In normal
operation, Host Site automatically copies the system data to Remote Site through the network
once a day.
5. Remote Site automatically operates by itself (survival mode) when Keep Alive signal (sent every
30 sec) between the Host Site and Remote Sits is interrupted. When Keep Alive is interrupted
the Remote Site is reset to change the operation from normal mode to survival mode.
6. Remote Site in survival mode checks at 30 seconds intervals if the communications to Main Site
are possible. When Keep Alive is detected, the Remote Site automatically is reset to change the
operation from survival mode to normal mode.
7. When unstable conditions occur in the network, the Remote Site can be manually set to
survivable mode (override automatic) until stability in the network is established. This prevents
the Remote Site from resetting normal mode to survivable mode etc.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 27
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Required Hardware and Software
Host Site
Equipment Name
PZ-M606-A
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD
PZ-24IPLA
SPN-32IPLAA IP PAD
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A
R-PIM 1 Site License
Remarks
On board Ethernet Interface card
8 Port PAD with built-in compression
24 Port PAD Expansion, mounts on SPN-8IPLA
Provides Packet assembly/disassembly to accommodate
Legacy Line/Trunk interface.
for compression or T.30 FAX (Optional)
1 required for each Remote site
Note: Registration of Host CPU and software required
DMR Site
Equipment Name
PZ-M606-A
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD
PZ-24IPLA
SPN-32IPLAA IP PAD
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A
Remarks
On board Ethernet Interface card
8 Port PAD with built-in compression
24 Port PAD Expansion, mounts on SPN-8IPLA
Provides Packet assembly/disassembly to accommodate
Legacy Line/Trunk interface.
for compression or T.30 FAX (Optional)
Note: Registration “not” required
Page 13- 28
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
List of Service Features Operation
Service Features
Remote site
Main Site
Normal Mode
Survival Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
COT, LDT, ODT
X
X
X
Attendant Console
X
─
─
Add-On Module
X
─
─
DSS Console
X
─
─
ISDN Terminal
X
─
─
IPT (CCIS, H.323)
X
─
─
Built-in IPT
X
─
─
OAI client
X
X
─
PS, ZT
X
─
─
Trunk IC/OG call (CO, Tie line)
X
X
X
Caller ID Display (MFC, T1-ANI)
X
─
─
Caller ID Display (ISDN)
X
X
X
CCIS (Digital, Analog)
X
X
X
SMDR
X
─
─
MAT (RS232C)
X
X
X
MAT (LAN)
X
X
X
MAT (Modem)
X
─
─
System Data change by MAT
X
─
─
SNMP
X
─
─
VLAN
X
X
X
Fault Message registration
X
─
X
Announcement Service
X
─
─
Multiline Terminal, SLT operation
IP Enabled D
term
operation
X: Available ─: Not Available
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 29
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Planning and Installation
Vendor Support for Open System Standards
The vendor should be committed to supporting open system industry standards, such as
H.323, 802.1p and 802.1q, MGCP, TAPI, JTAPI, etc.
Voice Messaging:
Scalable, cost-effective voice messaging solution that supports industry standards, such as
AMIS-A, VPIM, LDAP and IMAP.
Bandwidth requirements
One of the most important factors in the success of your IP network is to determine the
necessary network bandwidth needed for your application. Determining the appropriate
bandwidth is truly a function of two factors:
ƒ
ƒ
Number of Users (Phones)
Voice Compression for each user
Number of Users: The number of users is the number of simultaneous users (digital phones)
that will be required.
Voice Compression: NEC’s IP solutions deploy voice compression in order to extend multiple
users across fewer data channels. The following compression algorithms are supported:
G.711, G.723.1 and G.729A. Depending on the voice compression algorithm selected and the
number of voice frames encapsulated in one data packet.
Select the Proper Voice Compression: The best voice quality is achieved by using the noncompression voice algorithm G.711. The maximum quality comes at the expense of the
highest utilized bandwidth. The largest vice compression is achieved by using G.729A. If you
are using this algorithm, you will save on bandwidth and still achieve voice quality that is
regarded as near toll. If absolute conversation quality is your focus and bandwidth is no
object, you probably want to select G.711. If bandwidth is a priority you will need to employ
G.729A.
Page 13- 30
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Network Consideration
There are several network considerations that must be met before deployment of IP
Telephony. These items are:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The network must support the Internet Protocol and the local interface must meet 802.3
Ethernet standards.
It is recommended that the managed network be based on Switched, Fast Ethernet
environment for IP telephony.
Packet Delay or Latency, one-way should be less than 100 milliseconds optimal, with a
maximum of 250 milliseconds one-way.
Jitter, or out of sequence packets, should be between 10 -150 milliseconds optimal with
a maximum of 300 milliseconds while packet loss of 1% or less is recommended with
the maximum of 3% from end to end.
Network Bandwidth
Network bandwidth requirements are based on the total number of IP trunks or IP stations
installed in the PBX. The multiple algorithms available the bandwidth needed for a voice call
out to an IP network can range from 10.7 Kbps to 96 Kbps.
The most common algorithm used for NEAX IP trunks is G.729A, which allows the voice to be
compressed to 8KBps. Once the layer 3 (IP) overhead is added to the voice payload, the
approximate bandwidth is 16KBps for a single voice stream out of the PBX to an IP network.
This bandwidth calculation does not include layer 2 overhead and will vary depending on the
type of transport (Frame Relay, ATM, Ethernet etc.). Depending on what type of algorithm is in
place and how many devices are deployed dictates the amount of bandwidth needed.
The bandwidth for call setup for the CCIS signaling channel over IP is 7.2 Kbps per call and
the FCCS signaling channel is 83.2Kbps per call. Call teardown requires the same amount of
bandwidth. This number varies and 7.2 Kbps and 83.2 Kbps are averaged values from the
start sequence until setup or teardown is accomplished.
This means to make an FCCS or CCIS call from PBX A to PBX B, PBX A will transmit 83.2
Kbps (FCCS) or 7.2 Kbps (CCIS) as the F/C channel until the call is established. Once the call
is established, PBX A will stop sending the 83.2 Kbps/7.2 Kbps setup information and will
begin sending the appropriate voice payload per the encoding/decoding algorithm selected
(G.711, G.729A, G.723.1).
To make multiple calls, the system will send 7.2 Kbps/83.2 Kbps for each call until all the calls
are established. During tear down 7.2 Kbps/83.2 Kbps will be transmitted for each call again.
If an IP station has been idle for up to 4 seconds, a 7.6Kbps “Keep Alive” packet will be sent to
those respective devices. A “Keep Alive” packet is not generated to an idle station if it is
configured across a WAN. This same process occurs on IP trunk routes. A “Keep Alive”
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 31
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
packet is sent to the trunk route for each system or Point Code in the network. If traffic is
present on either IP stations or trunk routes, no “Keep Alive” packet is generated.
Bandwidth utilization
The following chart shows the amount of bandwidth for IP overhead per the fill times set in the
PBX system. The higher the fill time used, better performance from the PBX and IP network
can be realized due to the smaller number, yet larger (in size) packets generated.
Filler Time
Codec
10 msec
32 Kbps
32 Kbps
N/A
N/A
G.711 (64 Kbps)
G.729a (8 Kbps)
G.723.1 (6.3 Kbps)
G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps)
20 msec
16 Kbps
16 Kbps
N/A
N/A
30 msec
10.67 Kbps
10.67 Kbps
10.67 Kbps
10.67 Kbps
40 msec
8 Kbps
8 Kbps
N/A
N/A
This chart shows the total amount of bandwidth in layer 3 per voice call during the transmit
stream from an IP trunk or IP station. The value shown is based on the fill time from the table
above and the bandwidth required by the encoding/decoding algorithm that is used (codec).
Total Bandwidth per transmit stream
Codec
10 msec
96 Kbps
40 Kbps
N/A
N/A
G.711 (64 Kbps)
G.729a (8 Kbps)
G.723.1 (6.3 Kbps)
G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps)
20 msec
80 Kbps
24 Kbps
N/A
N/A
30 msec
74.67 Kbps
18.67 Kbps
16.97 Kbps
15.97 Kbps
40 msec
72 Kbps
16 Kbps
N/A
N/A
This chart shows bandwidth usage (G.729A) based on an idle state followed by a keep alive
message with a call setup and voice usage next. Time is not to scale.
Bandwidth per Process
Call Setup
Voice Usage
Page 13- 32
25
22
28
Time (not to scale)
19
16
13
10
7
4
Call
Teardown
1
16
Keep
14
12
10
Bandwidth in
8
Kbps
6
4
2
0
S1
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
Quality of Service (QoS)
In order to obtain quality of service (QoS) for the voice traffic, routers or layer 3 switches in the
network must support a queuing mechanism. The queuing mechanism allows for the
prioritization of the voice packets to pass through the router before the routine data traffic. The
NEAX PBX system allows for customizing the priority of the voice traffic out of the PBX. This
prioritization occurs with the IP precedence bits inside the IP header. With a higher level of
prioritization, the voice traffic will not accumulate as much delay as traffic with lower levels of
priority. With Diff-Serve (Differentiated Services), prioritization can be made if the routing
devices support it. NEAX PBX IP trunks support Diff-Serve.
QoS should be pushed as close to the network edge as possible. At the edge, this is
considered CoS (Class of Service). A layer 2 switched environment is recommended to obtain
full throughput to a routing device for NEAX IP telephony and for CoS management.
Specific ports on the data switch may be prioritized for QoS or CoS. If this is available, the port
that is connected to a NEAX IP telephony device should be prioritized in this manner.
Additionally in the network, the port that has been prioritized, in the above manner, must also
be set as a trusted value in the network. When CoS is used on the edge, map it to a higher
level (layer 3) QoS value. This mapping allows for a consistent prioritization throughout the
entire network. By using the prioritization methods described for the PBX and the network
optimal data transfer in the core and edge devices throughout the network may be
accomplished.
Device Registration Server (DRS) and DHCP
The Device Registration Server (DRS) is built into the MP card (System-based DRS). The
System-based DRS can provide log-in/log-out function and registration authorization function
of IP Enabled Dterm terminals. Up to 952 IP Enabled Dterm terminals can be managed by the
System-based DRS. Once the Device Registration Server (DRS) is located, depending on the
configuration chosen, the IP Enabled Dterm will prompt for a login and password. Networkbased DRS (external DRS) 3.0 is not supported.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) can be used for ease of administration for IP
Enabled Dterm terminals in the network. The IP adapter can be set to use a DHCP server to
supply its IP address and the address of the DRS. Network administrators can set up the
option in the DHCP server to give the IP Enabled Dterm terminal the information needed to find
the DRS.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 13- 33
Chapter 13 Voice Over IP (VoIP)
System Conditions/Limitations (Peer-to-Peer IP)
Limitations
Add-on-Module:
term
D
IPdoes not support Add-on Module feature.
Analog Port Adapters:
term
When the IPW-2U unit is attached with a D
Series E terminal, other optional adapters (except for
term
ADA-U Unit) cannot be attached with the D
Series E terminal.
Back Ground Music (BGM):
Service features requiring continuous voice transmission such as Background Music feature cannot be
used because the traffic may reduce overall performance of the Local Area Network (LAN).
Internal Zone Paging:
There is a maximum of eight D
access IP Dterm.
terms
IP per Internal Zone Page Group. Internal All Zone Paging will not
Set Relocation:
Set Relocation is not available between D
term
IP terminals. This feature is for legacy terminals only.
Note: Legacy stations/trunks means the ones connected to the Time Division Switch (TDSW). Examples of
legacy station/trunk cards are LC, DLC, COT PRT, CCT, DTI, 8RST (DTMF receivers), CFTB (conference trunk),
etc.
Conditions
DSS/BLF:
term
A DSS/BLF Console can be associated with the D
DLC card.
IP, but the DSS/BLF console is connection to
IP-PAD:
The IP-PADs are required for the following connections/statuses:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
term
IP terminals and legacy stations/trunks
Connections between D
term
Connections between D
IP terminals and IP trunks (H.323)
Connections between legacy stations/trunks and IP trunks (H.323)
Connections for CCIS networking via IP from/to legacy stations/trunks
term
IP terminals are on hold (Consultation Hold, Call Transfer, Music-on-Hold, etc.)
While D
When any override service is activated (Executive Override, etc.)
term
IP terminals
Three/four-party conference including D
Page 13- 34
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office
Signaling (CCIS)
The NEAX 2000 IPS offers a very powerful proprietary networking feature called Common
Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS). This functional and extremely flexible “intelligent
network” capability allows two or more NEAX® telecommunications systems to be networked
together to provide feature transparency and to centralize many important telecommunications
functions such as Attendant Consoles, Call Accounting / Billing Systems, Voice Processing
Systems, Management systems, and Trunk Facilities, to name a few.
A variety of NEC’s NEAX family of telecommunications systems can be networked together
using CCIS, creating a proprietary corporate network. This network can serve multiple
company facilities in the same building or town, in different towns, in different states, and even
in different countries. Centralized services provide a great cost reduction in the initial system
hardware costs, ongoing maintenance costs, trunk and tie line costs and overall operations
costs. Feature transparency increases user productivity by providing a common numbering
plan for simplified on-net calling and a common feature package. Feature transparency allows
most features to be accessed using similar procedures throughout the local, national, or global
corporate network.
Alternate Routing capabilities provide increased network reliability, additional cost savings, and
increased user productivity. Based on the industry standard CCITT Signaling System #7,
which is the frame work for ISDN, CCIS offers 64k “Clear” channel voice/data transmissions.
The CCIS “Intelligent Network” can be configured to provide redundant signaling channels and
multiple alternate routing schemes for maximum network reliability. CCIS is so flexible it can be
used with standard digital T1 spans, analog tie lines, or satellite transmission systems.
The CCIS architecture is similar to ISDN. Both use 23B + D type trunks. Both networking types
conform to and comply with the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) 7 Layer Model.
The NEAX 2000 IPS can be interfaced to another NEAX PBX by No. 7 CCIS Signaling
(Analog/Digital), CCIS Networking via IP (non Peer-to-Peer connection), or via IP (Peer-toPeer connection). For adding No. 7 CCIS to the system, it is necessary to install the 24
channel DTI (Digital Trunk Interface) for a digital network or LDT (Loop Dial Trunk)/ODT (2
wire E&M or 4 wire E&M Trunk) for an analog network via a MODEM, and a PLO (Phase
Locked Oscillator) for network synchronization. Also, it is necessary to install a CCH (Common
Channel Handler). The CCH receives/transmits common signaling data to/from the distant
office. In each local office, the PBX can provide Centralized Billing function in addition to a
variety of inter-office service features. For addition of the Centralized Billing function, an AP
(Application Processor) is required when the NEAX 2000 IPS is the center office and Built-in
SMDR when the NEAX 2000 IPS is used as a tandem or local office.
Note: Centralized Day/Night Mode Change and Centralized Fault Message require CCIS No.7 networking with
the IPX.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-1
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
For Dterm IP to Dterm IP connection via CCIS (Peer to Peer connection), the voice data is
transmitted and received directly between Dterm IPs via Intranet (CCIS via IP). For Dterm IP to
Legacy terminal connection via CCIS, the IP-PAD card is required to transmit and receive the
voice data. This card is used to control and convert the voice to data. The control signals are
managed by the MP card in either of the connection above.
The illustration below shows a system outline of CCIS Connection.
System Outline of a CCIS Connection
Page 14-2
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Common Channel Interoffice Signaling
(1) 64 Kbps D Channel
Office
Office
A
B
(23) - 64 Kbps Clear Channel Bearer Channels
Signaling
Addressing
Information
CCIS uses a common channel to provide the signaling information between two
systems (nodes). The information transmitted in the signaling channel between two
systems includes addressing information, supervisory information, and centralized
network information. This signaling information is to be transmitted between all
network nodes for a fully integrated network.
This information includes dialed digits (called number) and calling party
identification. CCIS provides the ability to provide calling number identification or
the name of the calling party to any display station across the network. Users can
screen calls by looking at the display prior to answering the call.
Supervisory
Information
This information includes station status, call set up and termination information.
Network
Information
This information includes centralized billing information, system fault data
messages, message waiting indication control information, voice processing
integration information, and data related to other network feature control.
CCIS and ISDN
Since the first CCIS system was installed in 1985, CCIS has proven to be the most reliable and
versatile proprietary network system available. The delays in achieving nation wide ISDN
compatibility, and the fact that a total global ISDN network is not yet available, exemplify the
true values of an intelligent proprietary CCIS network. Additionally, it is easy to understand that
a global network that only needs to be compatible with one family of telecommunications
products can easily offer much more feature transparency and centralization than a global
network that is intended to be compatible with all telecommunications systems. For this reason
alone, the benefits of a CCIS network are much greater than those of an ISDN network. And
with CCIS, it is possible to create a mixed network of CCIS and ISDN.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-3
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Digital and Analog CCIS
The PBX can provide No. 7 CCIS via either a digital network or an analog network. Regardless
of the relevant network being a digital network or an analog network, CCH (Common Channel
Handler) to control the common signaling channel is required.
Digital CCIS
Digital CCIS uses standard 24 channel digital T1 facilities to provide 23 B (voice/data) channels and 1
D (signaling) channel for the first CCIS dedicated T1 span. Additional T1 spans can be added and all
24 channels of each additional T1 span could be used for voice and/or data transmission. In this case,
the D channel of the first T1 span is using non-facilitated associated signaling for the additional T1
spans. A second D channel of the first T1 span can be configured to provide a redundant signaling link
between nodes to increase network reliability. To provide even more reliability, one channel of a
second T1 span can be programmed to serve as the redundant signaling link. In this configuration,
network reliability is at a maximum because if the first T1 span fails, the 23 B channels and the
redundant D channel of the second T1 span would keep the network operational.
The D channel can be programmed to transmit the signaling information at rates of 48K, 56K, or 64K
bits per second. At these high transmission rates, one D channel can easily handle the signaling
requirements for multiple T1 spans (non-facilitated associated signaling).
®
When using a Satellite system as the transmission medium, the NEAX Family of systems are usually
configured for digital CCIS, however, it should be noted that many Satellite systems can be configured
to accept multiple analog tie lines which would be compatible with analog CCIS.
Analog CCIS
For applications requiring analog tie lines, CCIS requires the use of modems at each end of the
dedicated signaling tie line. These modems can operate as high as 56K baud rate. The voice and data
lines (B channels) also use standard analog tie lines. If the customer requires 7 voice / data channels
between nodes, 8 tie lines are ordered providing one extra tie line to be dedicated as the signaling
channel. This may appear to require more tie lines then a non-CCIS network but actually less tie lines
are required when CCIS is used thanks to the intelligent Look Ahead Routing feature.
Page 14-4
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
IP CCIS
Peer-to-Peer Connections
Peer-to-peer connections over CCIS Networking via IP are available when the distant systems
are 2000 IPS or 2400 IPX supporting peer-to-peer connections. The built-in IP trunks (CCH)
on the MP card are assigned with the Virtual Application Processors (AP), and can support up
to 127 trunks per system. One Virtual AP can support up to 64 trunks, and up to two Virtual
APs can be assigned per system.
The 8 IPLA IP PAD is required for connections between legacy stations/trunks, and IP
terminals and legacy stations/trunks over the CCIS networking via IP. The IP-PAD converts
voice packet data to PCM signals, and one IP-PAD can provide 8 PCM channels or one 8
IPLA plus one 24 IPLA can provide 32 PCM channels. The number of IP-PADs depends on
the traffic volume of those connections, and up to eight 8 IPLA IP PADs with 24 IPLA daughter
boards can be accommodated per system, thus providing 256 PCM channels in total. Up to
two IP-PADs can be controlled by the MP without FP cards, and additional IP-PADs can be
controlled by the FP cards (two IP-PADs per FP card).
Note: Legacy stations/trunks means the ones connected to the Time Division Switch (TDSW). Examples of
legacy station/trunk cards are LC, DLC, COT, PRT, CCT, DTI, etc
Voice Compression
Voice compression is available for CCIS networking via IP to/from legacy stations/trunks.
The following type of voice compression is available:
G.711 (64Kbps)
G.729a (8Kbps)
G.723.1 (5.3Kbps/6.3Kbps)
Voice compression can be assigned on a call basis or terminal basis, by system programming.
The 8 IPLA IP-PAD and the 24 IPLA daughter board both have built-in VCT capability to provide voice
compression which is required for G.729a and G.723.1.
Service Conditions
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Intranet must be used for a CCIS network via IP. (Internet is not supported.)
Maximum number of nodes in the CCIS network via IP is 255.
All CCIS features are available in the CCIS networking via IP.
When T1 timeout of IAI is occurred, an outgoing CCIS call can be routed over alternate trunk
route. This alternate routing can be allowed or denied on a trunk route basis by system
programming.
Note: The alternate routing is not available for tandem calls.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-5
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
CCIS Networking via IP between IP Terminals
CCIS Networking via IP between Legacy Terminals
Page 14-6
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
CCIS Networking via IP (Non Peer-to-Peer)
When the distant NEAX system does not support peer-to-peer, the systems are connected with IP
trunks (including Voice Compression Trunks (VCT)), via Time Division Switch (TDSW). Voice signals
of IP terminals are transmitted via IP-PADs, while those of legacy terminals are directly connected to
the IP trunks. Call control signals between the systems are also transmitted over the IP trunks. Voice
compression of G.729a (8Kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3Kbps/6.3Kbps) can be provided by the IP trunks with
VCT cards.
Service Conditions on Non Peer-to-Peer Connections
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
IP trunk connections over CCIS Networking via IP are available when the distant systems are
NEAX 2000 IVS2, NEAX 2400 IPX or Electra Elite IPK that do not support peer-to-peer
connections.
The IP-PAD is required for connections between IP Enabled Dterm terminals and IP trunks.
Maximum one IP trunk card can be accommodated per PIM. Maximum eight IP trunk cards can
be accommodated in the system
Maximum voice channels per IP trunk card depends on the payload period as follows (payload
period can be assigned in system programming):
Payload Period
10 ms
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms
ƒ
ƒ
Maximum Voice Channels
per IP Trunk
4
8
16
16
Maximum 127 voice channels can be provided per system (point-to-multipoint connection).
IP trunk cards must be connected with the intranet via router.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-7
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Centralized Billing
This feature is used to collect billing information from each office within the network and direct
it to the associated center office. Billing information is then forwarded to the central billing
centers via RS232C interfaces.
Service Conditions
1. The Centralized Billing system is composed of local office, tandem office, and center office.
2. The NEAX 2000 IPS is generally used as a local office; however, it can be used as a center office
for centralized billing if all the PBXs within the network are NEAX 2000 IPS.
3. When the NEAX 2000 IPS is used as a center office, the billing information is sent to a SMDR
system using the NEAX 2400 format and an AP00.
4. When a NEAX 2400 IPX is used as a center office, either the Sub Line or the My Line number
can be selected by system programming to be sent to the SMDR terminal. When the NEAX 2000
IPS is used as a center office, only the My Line number can be sent to the SMDR terminal. When
a call is originated from a station (Station A) of a local office (without AP00), via a COT of a center
office (with AP00), a message is sent to the center office from the local office via CCIS. According
to the station number of the calling party, the AP00 of the center office generates billing
information to the SMDR terminal.
5. Maximum digits of station number is as follows:
Local office/Tandem office
ƒ using Internal SMDR: six digits
ƒ using AP00 : four digits (if fifth digit of all stations uses a comman leading digit then five
digits)
Center office: four digits (if fifth digit of all stations uses a comman leading digit then five digits)
6. Center office
ƒ
ƒ
Page 14-8
Maximum of eight local offices can be accommodated.
Maximum of 3,600 calls per hour can be received. If the center office exceeds 3600, billing
information is stored at local office.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
7. Local office
ƒ
By predetermined office data, local office number of the calling station can be forwarded to
the center office, and output to the SMDR.
ƒ
In case of using internal SMDR
a. The billing information cannot be output at local office.
b. When a failure of center office occurs or CCIS link is disconnected, the billing
information is stored up to 1,024 calls at local office. System initializing loses
stored information.
c. Maximum of 3,600 calls per hour can be sent to center office/tandem office.
ƒ
In case of using AP00
a. Internal SMDR cannot be used.
b. Maximum of 3,600 calls per hour can be sent to center office/tandem office.
c. The billing information can be sent to center office/tandem office and at the
same time it can be output at local office.
ƒ
The billing information can be stored as follows and system initializing does not lose stored
information.
a.
b.
c.
d.
AP00B MRC-C(AP) without expansion memory: up to 800 calls
AP00B MRC-C(AP) with expansion memory: up to 27000 calls
AP00B MRC-E(AP) without expansion memory: up to 1965 calls
AP00B MRC-E(AP) with expansion memory: up to 22925 calls
8. Tandem Office
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
One center office and maximum of seven local offices can be accommodated.
Maximum of 3,600 calls per hour can be received from local office. If the center office exceeds
3600, billing information is stored at local office.
Maximum of 3,600 calls per hour can be sent to center office.
Tandem office also can function as a local office.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-9
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Centralized E911 – CCIS
This feature allows the system to transmit a calling party number to the 911 Emergency
system over CCIS tandem connection.
Service Conditions
1. The Calling Party Information Transferring Service must be provided between calling office and
tandem office.
2. The calling through CCIS must be Least Cost Routing (LCR) calling.
Page 14-10
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Call Set Up Times
Standard tie line networks typically require from two to eight seconds to complete the set up of
a call and return ring back tone to the caller. With a CCIS network, call set up times are much
lower averaging from 100 msec. to two seconds depending on the number of systems in the
network.
Look Ahead Routing
In a standard non-CCIS network using tie lines to connect two nodes, when a station in node A
calls a station in node B a tie line is seized and the call set up information is transmitted (in
band) to attempt to ring down the called station. If that station is busy, busy tone is heard
through the tie line from the destination system. This acceptable practice has been used for
many years in spite of how inefficient it may be. The above scenario illustrates why many nonCCIS tie line networks require tie line usage for calls that never get completed. This is not very
efficient and often results in customers needing to purchase more voice/data tie lines then
what would really be needed if an intelligent network were employed.
The intelligent CCIS network provides a Look Ahead Routing feature that helps to reduce the
load on network tie lines (voice/data channels) thereby reducing the total number of voice/data
channels (tie lines) required between two nodes. When an on-net call is placed to a remote
node, the system will “Look Ahead” to the destination system to determine if the called station
is available. This is accomplished by communications between the systems over the D
channel. If the called station is not available, busy tone is provided to the calling party locally
and a voice/data channel (tie line) is not used. This provides a decrease in the overall number
of tie lines needed to carry the traffic loads between network nodes, further reducing ongoing
operation costs and system hardware requirements.
The benefits of Look Ahead Routing are also realized in applications where trunk facilities are
strategically distributed throughout the network. CCIS will “Look Ahead” when a user in node A
tries to access a trunk facility from node B. A tie line from node A to node B would only be
used if the trunk facility requested is available.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-11
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Shared Trunk Facilities and Alternate Routing
Many network applications dictate a need to strategically distribute trunk facilities throughout
the network. The practice of sharing trunk facilities across a network is beneficial because it
reduces the overall network trunking requirements and provides additional lower cost route
choices. When combining this practice with the Alternate Routing capabilities of CCIS, a large
increase in network reliability and user productivity can be realized while reducing network
operations costs.
The flexibility surrounding CCIS allows multiple alternate routing schemes, which can be
created to enhance network reliability while they are specifically designed to consider Least
Cost Routing (LCR) benefits. This provides the user with multiple alternate routes that are
automatically selected with call costs as the primary factor in route selection. As shown in the
following diagram, CCIS intelligence will also automatically use the pre-configured alternate
route for the D channel (if configured for link redundancy) in the event that the primary D
channel route is disabled.
Alternate Routing
LINK FAILURE
VOICE/DATA
NETWORK
ALTERNATE ROUTE
Page 14-12
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Centralized System Maintenance and Administration
A centralized system maintenance and administration facility can be designated at one node in
the network allowing all nodes in the CCIS network to be maintained from a single location.
This reduces travel costs and maintenance times. All system messages, fault data, and cyclic
diagnostic reports will be transmitted over the D channel to the designated central facility as
shown in the following diagram. The individual system messages and diagnostic data of each
node can be easily identified, since each system node has an assigned name allowing
messages from multiple sites to be separated. Additionally, each node will buffer and output
system messages and diagnostic data to a local printer at the node generating the information.
This feature applies to the NEAX 2400s sharing a network with NEAX 2000s. The NEAX2000
IPS will pass fault information originating from the NEAX 2400s through to other NEAX2400s.
When a NEAX 2400 IPX is in the network, the NEAX 2000 IPS will send its fault data to the
NEAX 2400 IPX designated as Central Fault MAT.
System administration also benefits from the ability to perform high speed adds, moves or
changes from the centralized facility for any node in the network without the addition of costly
peripheral equipment. The costs savings in this area are immediately realized.
Centralized Maintenance Facility
RS-232C Interface
NEAX
2400
NEAX2400
FAULT RECORD
CENTRALIZED
MANAGEMENT CENTER
FAULT RECORD
NEAX2000
FAULT RECORD
CCIS LINK
NEAX2400 or
NEAX2000
FAULT RECORD
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-13
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Centralized Call Accounting/Billing Systems
Standard tie line networks require independent call accounting / billing equipment for each
node in the network. This results in a costly investment of peripheral equipment, higher
maintenance costs, and the need to service this equipment at each node.
In a CCIS network, it is not necessary to purchase independent call accounting / billing
equipment for each node in the network. One call accounting / billing system can be centrally
located, connected to any one system in the network, and the intelligent CCIS network will
transmit the SMDR data from each system in the network over the D-channel to the
designated centralized collection point, as shown in the following diagram. This increases
reliability by minimizing hardware requirements, simplifies call costing data analysis, and
provides a large reduction in operation costs.
Centralized Call Accounting / Billing
RS-232C Interface
NEAX
2000
CALL RECORD
NEAX2400
CALL RECORD
NEAX2000
CENTRALIZED BILLING
CENTER
CALL RECORD
CCIS LINK
NEAX2400 or
NEAX2000
Page 14-14
CALL RECORD
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Centralized Voice Processing / Messaging
Voice Processing Systems such as voice mail, fax mail, and Integrated Voice Response (IVR)
systems can be centralized in a CCIS network. This eliminates the need for costly independent
systems to be purchased and maintained for each node in the network. Maintenance is
simplified by locating the system at the centralized maintenance facility or any other facility
within the CCIS network. The information required for full integration from any of these types of
systems will be transmitted over the D-channel to the required node as required by the
integration logic of the voice processing system. Increased network reliability and substantial
operating cost savings can be realized.
CCIS Centralized Voice Mail
NEAX2400/NEAX2000
NEAX2400/NEAX2000
MCI
NEAX2400
VOICE MAIL
SYSTEM
CCIS LINK
NEAX2400/NEAX2000
NEAX2400/NEAX2000
Centralized Attendant Consoles
CCIS allows the centralization of attendant consoles to service calls from any system in the
network. By centralizing attendant services, a greater number of calls can be handled with
fewer consoles based on economies of scale. System hardware requirements can be reduced
and overall operations costs are lower. CCIS uses the Look Ahead feature discussed earlier to
minimize tie line usage as both on-net and off-net calls are centrally serviced and distributed
throughout the network.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-15
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Uniform Numbering Plans
CCIS offers complete flexibility when designing network numbering plans. Two primary
numbering schemes can be used.
One scheme uses a four- or five-digit station numbering plan with no system node identifier. In
this scheme, station numbers are not repeated throughout the network and usually the first
digit is used as an indicator of which node the station is at. For example; a three-node system
might use station numbers 1000-2999 at node 1; 3000-4999 at node 2; and 5000-6999 at node
3. The intelligence of CCIS and LCR will automatically route the call to the correct node.
The second scheme uses a one, two or three digit node identification code followed by free
station numbering. In this scheme station numbers can be repeated at each node in the
network, if desired. This scheme is especially beneficial to those customers who are upgrading
a network or who are networking multiple facilities for the first time and wish to maintain their
existing numbering plans at each facility. It is also very useful in very large networks where it
may be necessary to repeat station numbers at different facilities due to the total number of
stations in the network.
CCIS Feature Chart
CCIS Feature Name
Attendant Camp-On with Tone Indication-CCIS
Attendant Controlled Conference-CCIS
Automatic Recall-CCIS
Brokerage-Hot Line-CCIS
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)-CCIS
Busy Verification-CCIS
Call Back-CCIS
Call Forwarding-All Calls-CCIS
Call Forwarding-Busy Line-CCIS
Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer-CCIS
Call Forwarding-Intercept-CCIS
Call Forwarding-Override-CCIS
Call Processing Indication-CCIS
Call Transfer-All Calls-CCIS
Call Transfer-Attendant-CCIS
Calling Number Display-CCIS
Call Transfer-All Calls-CCIS
Centralized Billing-CCIS
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change-CCIS
Consultation Hold-All Calls-CCIS
Deluxe Traveling Class Mark-CCIS
Dial Access to Attendant-CCIS
Direct-in Termination-CCIS
Page 14-16
NEAX2400 Required
YES
YES
YES
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
CCIS FEATURE CHART (Cont.)
CCIS Feature Name
Distinctive Ringing-CCIS
Do Not Disturb-CCIS
Dual Hold-CCIS
Elapsed Time Display-CCIS
Flexible Numbering of Stations-CCIS
Hands-Free-Answer Back-CCIS
House-Phone-CCIS
Hot Line-CCIS
Incoming Call Identification-CCIS
Individual Attendant Access-CCIS
LDN Night Connection-CCIS
Link Alarm Display-CCIS
Message Waiting Lamp Setting-Attendant-CCIS
Message Waiting Lamp Setting-Station-CCIS
Miscellaneous Trunk Access-CCIS
Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction-CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding-All Calls-CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding-Busy Line-CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer-CCIS
Name Display CCIS
Night Connection Fixed-CCIS
Night Connection Flexible-CCIS
Outgoing Trunk Queuing-CCIS
Paging Access-CCIS
Restriction from Outgoing Calls-CCIS
Service Display-CCIS
Single Digit Station Calling-CCIS
Station Controlled Conference-CCIS
Station to Station Calling-CCIS
Station to Station Calling-Operator Assistance-CCIS
Toll Restriction-3/6 Digit-CCIS
Trunk Answer from Any Station-CCIS
Trunk to Trunk Restriction-CCIS
Uniform Number Plan-CCIS
Voice Call-CCIS
Voice Mail Integration-CCIS
Asynchronous Data Switching – CCIS
Data Interface - Automatic Answer – CCIS
Data Line Security – CCIS
Data Transparency – CCIS
Simultaneous Voice and Data Transmission – CCIS
Synchronous Data Switching – CCIS
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
NEAX2400 Required
YES
Page 14-17
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
System Capacity
System Capacity for CCIS with Digital Interface
Description
DTI Card
CCH Card
AP00 Card (for Centralized Billing)
Trunks for DTI
CCIS Routes
Trunks per DTI Card
CCT Card
Trunks for CCT
Trunks per CCT Card
M10 Card
24DTI
30DTI
8
8
1
192
8
24
8
8
—
—
1
—
1
248
8
31
—
—
—
4
—
—
—
4
Capacity
24CCT
8
—
8
200
25
4
30CCT
—
—
1
—
8
—
8
248
32
4
System Capacity for CCIS with Analog Interface
Description
CCH Card
AP00 Card (for Centralized Billing)
ODT Card
ODT Trunks
Capacity
8
1
128
254
System Capacity for CCIS Networking via IP
Description
CCIS Trunks (IP)
CCIS via IP (non Peer-to-Peer)
SPN-IPTB
SPN-4VCTI
CCIS via IP (Peer-to-Peer)
PZ-M606-A
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B
PZ-24IPLA
Page 14-18
Capacity
255
8
32
1
8
8
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Required Equipment
Required Equipment for Digital CCIS
Equipment
Name
Functional
Name
Function
Application Processor Card
Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for SMDR, Hotel Printer,
CIS, PMS, MCI, CS report functions.
One card per system.
PN-AP00-B
AP00
PN-24CCTA
CCT
CCIS (1.5 Mbps) Trunk Card
Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of CCIS.
PN-24DTA-C
DTI
T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-30DTC-C
DTI
E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card
Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-SC00
CCH
Common Channel Handler Card
Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
CCIS.
PN-M10
M10
Optical Fiber Interface Card
Provides optical fiber interface for T1/E1 Digital Trunk Interface
(1.5 M/2 Mbps) or Remote PIM.
Line length: 6.2 miles (10 km) or less
Line coding: CMI
PZ-M537
EXPMEM
Memory Expansion Card for AP00 Card
The system capacity is expanded when PZ-M537 is mounted on
PN-AP00-B (AP00) card.
Memory Expansion for AP00 is shown in the table below.
SYSTEM CAPACITY
SMDR call record
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
NO EXPMEM
1600
WITH EXPMEM
27000
Page 14-19
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
Required Equipment for Analog CCIS
Equipment
Name
Functional
Name
Function
Application Processor Card
Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for
SMDR, Hotel Printer,
CIS, PMS, MCI, CS report functions.
One card per system.
PN-AP00-B
AP00
PN-SC00
CCH
Common Channel Handler Card
Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling
channel of CCIS.
PN-2ODTA
ODT
2-line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card
Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M
trunk.
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
Both Circuits 0 and 1 must be set to the same
purpose
(2-wire or 4-wire) in one card.
PZ-M537
EXPMEM
Memory Expansion Card for AP00 Card
The system capacity is expanded when PZ-M537 is
mounted on
PN-AP00-B (AP00) card.
Memory Expansion for AP00 is shown in the table
below.
SYSTEM CAPACITY
SMDR call record
NO EXPMEM
1600
WITH EXPMEM
27000
Required Equipment for CCIS Networking via IP
Description
CCIS via IP (non Peer-to-Peer)
SPN-IPTB
SPN-4VCTI
CCIS via IP (Peer-to-Peer)
PZ-M606-A
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B
PZ-24IPLA
Page 14-20
Remarks
Network Interface:
ETHER/FAST ETHER
Codec Card for IP Trunk
On board Ethernet Interface Card
(ETHERNET TCP/IP)
IP Interface card for IP Pad
24-channel daughter board for 8IPLA
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
IP Specifications
Item
Voice Encoding
IP-PAD
FAX Communication
Feature
Specifications
G.729a
G.723.1
G.711
8/32 channels per card
Automatically seized per call
FAX Relay Method (T.30)
Remarks
8 Kbps CS-ACELP
5.3/6.3 Kbps MP-MLQ/ACELP
64 Kbps PCM
G3 FAX (up to 14.4 Kbps)
Super G3 Reciprocal: Not allowed
FAX communication with H.323:
Not available
PN-32IPLA (IPPAD) card
(PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card is not available.)
FAX Relay Method
(Pass-through (G.711/G.726))
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card
(PN-32IPLA (IPPAD) card is not available.)
DTMF Signal
Inter-office/Intraoffice
Signaling
H.245
H.245
H.323 IPT/IP-PAD/Dterm IP
Dterm IP-to-Dterm IP connection
Dterm IP-to-IP-PAD connection
Dterm IP-to-2000 IPS connection
Point-to-Multipoint connection
H.323 IPT/4VCT card
and IP PAD card are required
Jitter Control
Quality of Service
(QoS)
LAN Interface
Dynamic Jitter Buffer
• TOS, IP Precedence
• DiffServ
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Echo Canceller
(IP-PAD)
G.168 (64 ms.)
PROTIMS over IP
CCIS over IP
H.323
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Auto Negotiation is available.
100BASE-TX is recommended.
Page 14-21
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
IP Specifications Continued
Payload
Size
Dterm IP/
CCIS
Virtual
IPT
(32IPLA +
16VCT)
10 ms.-40 ms.
(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed)
Maximum voice channels per card
G.729a G.711 G.723.1
10 ms.: 12 ch
12ch
_
20 ms.: 20 ch
20ch
_
30 ms.: 30 ch
30ch
24ch
40 ms.: 32 ch
32ch
_
Dterm IP/
CCIS
Virtual
IPT
(8IPLA +
24IPLA)
10 ms.-40 ms.
(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed)
Maximum voice channels per card
G.729a G.711 G.723.1
10 ms.: 20ch
20ch
20 ms.: 32ch
32ch
30 ms.: 32ch
32ch
24ch
40 ms.: 32ch
32ch
-
H.323
IPT
20 ms.-40 ms. (10 ms.
increments)
(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed)
Maximum voice channels per card
G.729a G.711 G.723.1
20 ms.: 6ch
5ch
30 ms.: 8ch
7ch
8ch
40 ms.: 12ch
10ch
-
0 dB to +16 dB
(+2 dB increments)
0 dB to –16 dB
(–2 dB increments)
0 dB to –16 dB
(For North America)
0 dB to –12 dB
(For other than North America)
Setting is available per Location No.
For connection between Dterm IPs
PAD Control
Page 14-22
For connection via the IPT card
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)
DTI Specifications
Characteristics
24-Channel
30-Channel
Line Rate
Line Code
Line Impedance
1.544 Mbps ± 50 ppm
AMI with ZCS/B8ZS*
100 ohms
Pulse Amplitude
(Base to Peak)
3 volts ± 0.6 volts
Pulse Width
324 ns ± 30 ns
2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm
HDB3 (High Density Bipolar 3)
75 ohms + 100 µH
(Coaxial Cable)
120 ohms + 160 µH
2.37 volts nominal
(Coaxial Cable)
3 volts nominal
(Twisted-Pair Cable)
244 ns nominal
Output
Input
2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm
1.5 volts – 2.7
(Coaxial Cable)
1.5 volts – 3.3 volts
(Twisted-Pair Cable)
Line Rate
Pulse Amplitude
(Base to Peak)
1.544 Mbps ± 2000 bps (130 ppm)
1.5 volts – 3 volts
Frame Synchronization
Pattern
100011011100
Input Jitter
ITU-T Fig. 1/G743
ITU-T Fig. 1/G743
Wander
+138UI, -193UI or
-138UI, +193UI
ITU G823
Cable Length from
PBX to MDF or
External Equipment
Max. 200 m (656.2 ft.)
[With 0.65 gauge (22 ABAM)
twisted pair cable]
Maximum 400 m (1312.4 ft.)
[With 0.65 gauge (22 ABAM)
twisted pair cable]
*AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion
ZCS: Zero Code Suppression
B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 14-23
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network
(ISDN)
ISDN Primary Rate Interface
ISDN is becoming a basic requirement for any PBX system sold today. The NEAX 2000 IPS
supports many ISDN BRI/PRI features and services. AT&T and Northern Telecom
specifications are both supported by the NEAX 2000 IPS. ISDN PRI trunks can use all of the
same features of the NEAX 2000 IPS that any DID or DOD type trunk can use. For example,
ISDN PRI trunks can terminate to the PBX and use features such as Internal Automated
Attendant, DISA, Attendant Overflow, etc. In a typical installation, ISDN trunks will be
terminated as DID type lines, but the IPS also allows ISDN trunks to terminate as ring down
type lines. As this section will convey, the NEAX2000 IPS provides a very attractive ISDN PRI
package.
ISDN FEATURE LIST
CALL-BY-CALL SERVICE SELECTION
CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE
(DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT))
CPN TO NETWORK—PRESENT
CPN TO TERMINATING USER—DISPLAY
DID ADDRESSING
DID AND DOD ADDRESSING
EVENT BASED CCIS
ISDN TERMINAL
MEGACOM® ACCESS/WATS
MEGACOM® 800 SERVICE/800 WATS/ULTRA WATS
MULTIQUEST® /900 SERVICE
SUB-ADDRESS—PRESENT
TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION
PRI Services & Features
Services provided by ISDN carriers are separate and different from features supported by
ISDN carriers. Services, in general terms, are often entire packages provided by the carriers,
such as AT&T’s Megacom®, which provides routing options and many reporting features.
Features of ISDN trunks provide the user with items such as Calling Party Number (CPN) and
Sub-Addresses. The distinction between services and features should be recognized to a
certain extent. This section will explain which features and services the NEAX2000 IPS
supports.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-1
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
Call-By-Call Service Selection
Services can be selected on a call-by-call basis to all channels of a single PRI interface according to
applications. That is, unlike Trunk Provisioning Service in which services are assigned to specific
channels, services may be used on any available channel.
Service Conditions
1. The services that can be designated include ACCUNET, MEGACOM, MEGACOM 800, INTERNATIONAL
800, SDN, MULTIQUEST (AT&T), and PRIVATE, INWATS, OUTWATS, FX, TIE (Northern Telecom).
2. Channel selection is possible by the LCR function only.
Note: During call termination, there is no indication of which service is being used.
3. Up to 5-digit Network ID of Network-Specific Facilities Information Element can be sent to ISDN Network.
4. Transit Network Selection Information Element can be sent to ISDN Network.
5. Service conditions #3 and #4 are available with the following firmware of PN-24PRTA:
SC-2795 IXS PRT PROG-A1: Issue 2.01 or later
SC-2888 IXS PRT PROG-A2: Issue 1.01 or later
When the firmware issue is earlier than above, up to 3-digit Network ID can be sent to the ISDN Network.
Called Party Recognition Service (Direct-In Termination (DIT))
This feature provides an incoming Direct-In Termination (DIT) call via an ISDN trunk to be connected to
a predetermined station. This application can be used for a station or modem. For incoming calls in a
Primary Rate Interface trunk, this service feature should be used only when DID trunks are not desired.
Note: Refer to the Business Features and Specifications manual for details on service Conditions
CPN To Network–Present
This feature allows the ISDN network to be informed of the calling party number (CPN) when a call
originates from a terminal connected to the System.
Service Conditions
1. The data provided as the calling station number is assigned via MAT/CAT for each ISDN circuit or station.
In addition, if no data has been assigned as the calling station number, the system will not provide any
information to the network.
2. A maximum of 16 digits can be assigned as the calling station number.
3. The maximum number of area codes and office code patterns is 15.
4. Transmission of CPN to the ISDN network can be programmed by the Class of Service. Programming is
required for each station.
5. The delivery of CPN information is subject to local regulations.
Page 15-2
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
CPN To Terminating User–Display
This feature provides a visual display of the originating station’s number and subaddress information on
a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console for incoming ISDN calls. This provides the terminal user
with a quick and accurate way to identify the originating station’s number (Calling Party Number).
Service Conditions
1. This feature is available on the Multiline Terminal with Display, Attendant Console and Dterm PSIII.
2. A maximum of 16 digits forming the originating party’s number (CPN), including the PBX access code, can
be displayed. For sub-address, a maximum of 8 digits can be displayed. If the subaddress exceeds 8 digits,
the first 8 are displayed.
3. The CPN is flashing while the Multiline Terminal is ringing on its Prime Line. The duration of display after
the call is answered can be selected by system data programming (display for 6 seconds or continuously).
4. If the ISDN network provides Name Display service (NI-2/DMS100), the calling party name can be
displayed in place of the CPN (A maximum of 16 characters).
5. The calling name from ISDN can be received by terminating systems (CM30 YY=02, 03) such as
TrunkDirect Appearance (02), Trunk Direct Appearance + TAS (03), Direct-In Termination (04), Automated
Attendant(09), ISDN Indial (18), and Attendant Console (14). In addition, Sub-address termination is
available.
6. The 24PRT card is required.
7. When Call Forwarding or Call Transfer routes an incoming call from ISDN to a Multiline Terminal/PS inthe
own office, the calling name is displayed on the destination station of Call Forwarding or Call Transfer.
8. Calling Name Display on ISDN Terminals is not supported.
9. Calling Name Display or Calling Number Display can be selected as the initial display in station Class of
Service.
10. The display can be changed to the calling name or calling number by pressing the display selection key on
a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console while the number or name is displayed.
11. When the terminating system (CM30 YY=02, 03) is set to Trunk Direct Appearance or Attendant Console,
the calling name is displayed only after the called party answers the call.
12. Conditions on Tandem Connection
a. The calling name received from ISDN is relayed, only via CCIS, with tandem connection. (a
maximum of 16 characters)
b. When Call forwarding routes an incoming call from ISDN to CCIS, the calling name is relayed via
CCIS to the destination of Call Forwarding.
c. When the calling name from NI-2 is received as a FACILITY message, the name cannot be relayed
to CCIS. Only when the calling name from NI-2 is received as a SETUP message, the name can
be relayed to CCIS.
d. Only when the calling name from DMS100 is received as a SETUP message, the name can be
relayed to CCIS.
13. Conditions with Other Services
a. The calling name received from ISDN has priority over the calling name registered to Station
Speed Dialing by CM74, so the former is displayed even though the latter has been assigned by
CM74.
b. If the calling name is not received from ISDN, the calling name assigned by CM74 is displayed if
available.
c. When a call is relayed to CCIS with tandem connection, the calling name is not relayed to CCIS, if
the name is not received from NI-2, even though the calling name has been assigned by CM74.
However, when Call Forwarding - No Answer routes an incoming call from ISDN to CCIS with
tandem connection, the calling name assigned by CM74 is relayed to CCIS.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-3
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
DID Addressing
This feature allows incoming ISDN-PRI calls to terminate to stations, Attendant Console, Automated
Attendant, etc., based on the Called Party number. Direct Inward Dial trunks will be terminated to
preprogrammed desti-nations without Attendant assistance.
Service Conditions
1. If the network is notified that the destination station for the DID call is busy or a connection-controlled
station, the network gives the calling station a Busy Tone. (This depends upon call forwarding services
being in service.)
2. If the called station is nonexistent, the DID call can be routed to the Attendant Console, another predesignated station, or to receive Reorder Tone.
Note: Refer to the Business Features and Specifications manual for more details of DID service.
DID and DOD Addressing
This feature allows the system to use DID and DOD on the same B channels. Trunk Provisioning
Service Selection is not required. (B-channels can be used for DID and DOD without separating the
trunk routes.)
Service Conditions
1. Confirm the DID and DOD selection with the customer’s local exchange carrier prior to installation.
2. The DID/DOD is supported without service provisioning, since no facility indication to the network is
required.
Note: For more details, refer to “Direct Inward Dialing” and “Direct Outward Dialing” in the Business Features
and Specifications manual.
ISDN Terminal
This feature provides the system with an ISDN Terminal or Terminal Adapter (TA). ISDN Terminal to
ISDN Terminal, ISDN Terminal to ISDN Trunk, ISDN Trunk to ISDN Terminal, ISDN Terminal to Single
Line Telephone, ISDN Terminal to Multiline Terminal, and ISDN Terminal to PS connections are
available.
Service Conditions
1. The ILC (ISDN Line Circuit) card and the ICH (ISDN Channel handler) card are required.
2. The ISDN Terminal must be locally powered.
3. The following connections are available:
ƒ Point to Point connection
ƒ Point to Multipoint connection
ƒ National ISDN 1
ƒ AT&T
4. The following features are available:
ƒ Individual Terminal Calling (Point to Multipoint connection)
ƒ Group Calling (Point to Multipoint connection)
ƒ Called Party Recognition Service (DIT)
ƒ DID Addressing
ƒ DID and DOD Addressing
ƒ CPN to Network-Present
ƒ CPN to Terminating User-Display
ƒ Sub Address-Present
ƒ Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)
ƒ Restriction from outgoing call
ƒ Toll restriction
Page 15-4
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
ƒ
Station to Station Calling
ƒ Station Hunting
ƒ Simultaneous voice and data transmission
ƒ Asynchronous Data Switching
ƒ Synchronous Data Switching
ƒ Half/Full Duplex Switchover
5. The ISDN Terminal can provide Voice and data communication via the CCIS network. The CCIS network
must be digital.
6. During communication via the CCIS network, the link reconnection is not available.
7. The conditions about station services are as follows:
ƒ Station Hunting
When a Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal or an ISDN Terminal calls a busy Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal, another Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal in Station Hunting group is
called. When a Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal or an ISDN Terminal calls a busy ISDN
Terminal, an-other ISDN Terminal in Station Hunting group is called.
Note: An ISDN Terminal cannot be included in the same Station Hunting group as Single Line
Telephone/Multi-line Terminals.
ƒ
Call Forwarding
An ISDN Terminal cannot set Call Forwarding - All Calls/- Busy Line/-Don’t Answer, and cannot be the
destination of a Call Forwarding. When an ISDN Terminal is a calling station, it can be forwarded to
another Single Line Telephone/Mul-tiline Terminal but cannot be forwarded to central office trunk or tie
line trunk.
ƒ
Call Transfer
A Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal cannot transfer a call in progress with an ISDN Terminal to
another station. In the same way, an ISDN Terminal cannot transfer a call in progress with a Single
Line Telephone/Mul-tiline Terminal to another station. While a Single Line Telephone/Multiline
Terminal converses with CCIS trunk and ISDN trunk, the Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal
cannot transfer the call to an ISDN Terminal.
ƒ
Call Pickup, Call Pickup - Designated group
An ISDN Terminal cannot be assigned to Call Pickup group and cannot pickup a call to another station.
A Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal cannot pickup a call to an ISDN Terminal.
ƒ
Executive Override
During voice communication between a Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal and an ISDN
Terminal, another Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal can interrupt into only Single Line
Telephone/Multiline Terminal. During data communication with an ISDN Terminal, Executive Override
is not allowed.
ƒ
Busy Service (Step Call, Call Back)
When a Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal calls a busy ISDN Terminal, busy service such as
Step Call and Call Back cannot be provided to the ISDN Terminal. It is the same when an ISDN
Terminal calls a busy Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal.
8. When a Single Line Telephone is calling an ISDN Terminal or an ISDN Terminal is busy, hooking service is
not available. Therefore, at this time other services are not available.
9. A Multiline Terminal can call an ISDN Terminal via Primary Extension or Sub Line. And a Multiline Terminal
can be called from an ISDN Terminal via Primary Extension or Sub Line.
10. When a Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal calls an ISDN Terminal, it can send the calling station
number to the ISDN Terminal. At this time, ISDN trunk number and local number are also attached to be
sent.
11. Station to Station calling between an attendant console and an ISDN Terminal is not available.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-5
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
12. In case of Point to Multipoint connection, a Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal must dial ISDN Multipoint station number assigned by CM1B, not the ISDN Terminal number assigned by CM10.
13. When a Multiline Terminal calls an ISDN Terminal or an ISDN Terminal calls a Multiline Terminal, a calling
station number is displayed to the calling Multiline Terminal or the ISDN Terminal. In case of Point to
Multipoint connection, the calling station number displayed is the ISDN station number assigned by CM10.
14. Station to Station calling between a PS station and an ISDN Terminal is available.
15. Only Preset Dialing can be used from an ISDN Terminal, Overlap dialing is not available.
16. For E-CCIS you must have 64K unrestricted digital data connections (circuit mode). The Telephone
Company cannot overflow these ISDN calls to analog lines.
17. Group Call, This feature terminates a call to all ISDN Terminals or Terminal Adapters accommodated on
the same bus. Group Call is available for following connections:
ƒ ISDN trunk to ISDN Terminal
ƒ ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal
ƒ Single Line Telephone to ISDN Terminal (Series 3200 R6.2 enhancement)
ƒ Multiline Terminal to ISDN Terminal (Series 3200 R6.2 enhancement)
MEGACOM ® Access/WATS
AT&T’s MEGACOM ® (WATS) network, as well as WATS from other carriers, can be used.
Service Conditions
1. The available WATS service is limited to MSB (Maximal Subscribed WATS Band).
2. No specific band will be indicated to the Network.
MEGACOM ® 800 Service/800 WATS Ultra WATS
AT&T’s MEGACOM ® 800 (Inward WATS) network, as well as 800 WATS provided by other carriers,
can be used.
Service Conditions
1. Command 76 can be used to convert indialed digits.
2. The Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) must match the station numbering plan (CM20).
3. Multiple DNISs are supported.
MULTIQUEST ® /900 Service
AT&T’s MultiQuest ® service can be used. (It is a “900”-type service.) Also, 900 service provided by
other carriers can be used.
Service Conditions
1. The DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service) must match the numbering plan (CM20) of the 2000 IPS.
2. Multiple DNIS numbers are supported.
3. Command CM76 can be used to convert DNIS digits received from the ISDN Network.
Subaddress–Present
This feature allows a primary rate interface ISDN trunk to transfer the called party subaddress
information to a destination ISDN station when the call is originated by the system. Dialing the called
party station number and subaddress is required.
Service Conditions
1. If the calling party fails to dial the called party subaddress, ISDN cannot transfer any called party
subaddress information to the destination party.
Page 15-6
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
2. If a calling party does not wish to provide a called party subaddress, the call must terminate with the # key
(Immediate Start). If the # key is not entered, a Timing Start operation begins. The Timing Start uses the
interdigit timeout operation.
3. Subaddress dialing is available only on those telephone terminals that can generate push-button (DTMF)
signals.
4. The called party subaddress must not exceed 8 digits.
5. The called party subaddress can be sent with trunk direct dial access.
6. This feature cannot be used when a call is originated to ISDN using Speed Dialing or Call Forwarding
features.
Trunk Provisioning Service Selection
Each channel of a PRI interface can be dedicated to a particular service. Services are designated to
specific channels; once designated, a channel can be used only for that service.
Service Conditions
1. The services that can be designated include MEGACOM ® /WATS and MEGACOM ® 800/800WATS.
2. Arrangement with the carrier at the time of provisioning is needed.
Event Based CCIS
This feature allows a PBX customer that does not have a tie line (or when a customer cannot
use the tie line due to the busy or fault of the line), to use the various CCIS feature by using
the ISDN line as a CCIS virtual tie line, on the 2400 IPX - 2000 IPS connection or the 2000 IPS
- 2000 IPS connection.
Service Conditions
1. Event Based CCIS is available between 2000 IPS to 2400 IPX and 2000 IPS to 2000 IPS.
2. The maximum number of virtual tie lines is 16 channels per system. This includes the common signaling
channels and voice channels.
3. The ISDN line used for the virtual tie line can also be used as a regular ISDN line.
4. This feature supports voice calls only. (Supported object at PBX transmission side: Single Line Telephone,
Multiline Terminal, DID/E&M/Ring Down (analog/T1) tandem calls). The data calls are transmitted via the
regular ISDN network.
5. The Peg Count (the number of originating call from the ISDN trunk) is counted when using the ISDN line for
the virtual tie line by route basis.
6. Billing information of the virtual tie line using the ISDN line is treated as regular tie line calls.
7. Billing information of the virtual tie line using the ISDN line is treated on tandem calls.
8. The voice channel of the virtual tie line is released at a programmable time after the call finishes.
9. The CCH (Common Channel Handler) card is required for providing Event Based CCIS.
10. For Event Based CCIS using PRI, the following services must be ordered from Telco on the PRI Span:
ƒ Each B channel must be capable of making and receiving 64K voice calls.
ƒ Each B channel must be capable of making and receiving 64k Unrestricted Digital Data calls.
ƒ The ISDN PRI span must be ordered with ISDN Indial (DID) service.
11. The PRI trunks should be ordered with the following components included:
ƒ Protocol must be National ISDN-1
ƒ Calling and Called Party Sub-Address
ƒ NIUF Capability Package S
ƒ Two B-channels capable of Voice and Data simultaneously on both B-channels
ƒ Two Directory numbers, each with a SPID
12. For any feature that requires a tandem connection (Call-Forward CCIS, etc.), additional Telco BRI circuits
are required. More than one BRI trunk is required to allow calls to go back to the PBX that transferred or
forwarded a call.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-7
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
Business Feature List
Business Feature List
Account Code
Elapse Call Timer
Answer Key
Forced Account Code
Attendant Delay Announcement
Group Listening
Attendant Overflow
Hold - Call
Authorization Code
Hold - Exclusive
Automated Attendant
Hold - Nonexclusive
Broker’s Call
Last Number Redial
Call Forwarding
Least Cost Routing 3/6 Digit
Call Forwarding - All
Maintenance Administration Terminal(MAT)
Calls Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Fault Messages
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Peg Count
Call Forwarding - Outside
Night Service
Multiple Call Forwarding - All
Call Rerouting
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy
Day/Night Mode Change - ATTCON
Multiple Call Forwarding - No Answer
Day/Night Mode Change - Station
Split Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Night Connection - Fixed
Call Forwarding - Override
Night Connection - Flexible
Group Division
Trunk Answer from Any Station(TAS)
Call Park - System
Route Advance
Call Pickup - Direct
Save and Repeat
Call Pickup - Group
Stack Dialing
Class of Service
Station Hunting - Circular
Code Restriction
Station Hunting - Terminal
Conference
Station Hunting - Secretarial
Consecutive Speed Dial
Station Message Detail Recording(SMDR)
Consultation Hold
Station Speed Dialing
Delayed Ringing
System Speed Dialing
Direct Inward Termination(DID)
Tenant Service
DID Call Waiting
Trunk Queuing - Outgoing
DID Digit Conversion
Trunk to Trunk Connection
Direct Inward System Access(DISA)
Uniform Call Distribution(UCD)
Direct Inward Termination(DIT)
"Silent Monitor"
Distinctive Ringing
Voice Mail Integration
Do Not Disturb
Page 15-8
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
ISDN Network Requirements for Layer One (1)
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Interface:
Framing:
Line Coding:
D-Channel Rate:
D-Channel:
T1 (1.544 M) only
ESF (24 Multi-frame) only
B8ZS only
64 kbps only
T1 Channel 24 (24th channel)
Note: Individual B-Channels cannot be looped back, local or remote.
Supported Network Services (Trunk provisioned only)
AT&T
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Software Defined Network
Global Software Defined Network
International 800 Service
International MEGACOM
AT&T’s Alternate Destination Call Redirection feature is supported by the NEAX 2000 IPS.
NT
ƒ
Incoming Note
- Private
-Tie
- WATS
- 800 WATS
ƒ
Outgoing Note
- DID/DOD
Note: Services that do not require NSF can be supported by NEAX 2000 IPS.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-9
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
ISDN PRI Specifications
DTI
The Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) interfaces the PBX directly to 24/30-channel PCM transmission line.
The DTI has the following functions.
For 24DTI:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Two Directory numbers, each with a SPID
Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI/B8ZS Format)
Alarm Detection/Insertion
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
Loop-Back Test (Local/Remote Loop Back)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)
For 30DTI:
ƒ Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (HDB3 Format)
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Alarm Detection/Insertion
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
Loop-Back Test (Local/Remote Loop Back)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)
For connections of 24DTI and transmission line, twisted-pair cable can be used. For connection of
30DTI and transmission line, either coaxial cable or twisted pair cable can be used.
DCH
The D-Channel Handler (DCH) provides the D-Channel signaling interface through the DTI to an ISDN
exchange, and it is responsible for signaling between the PBX and the ISDN exchange under control of
the system MP.
PRT
The Primary Rate Interface Trunk (PRT) provides the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (1.5 Mbps PCM-23B
+ D/2 Mbps PCM-30B + D) and a built-in D-Channel Handler (DCH). The PRT has the following
functions.
For 24PRT:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI/B8ZS Format)
Alarm Detection/Insertion
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
Loop-Back Test (Local/Remote Loop Back)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)
For 30PRT:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (HDB3 Format)
Alarm Detection/Insertion
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
Loop-Back Test (Local/Remote Loop Back)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)
Page 15-10
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
For connections of 24PRT and transmission line, twisted-pair cable can be used. For connection of
30PRT and transmission line, either coaxial cable or twisted pair cable can be used.
Note: ISDN requires B8ZS Line coding with Extended Superframing (ESF) format.
BRT
The Basic Rate Interface Trunk (BRT) provides one or two physical interface to the ISDN-Basic Rate
Interface service (192 kbps PCM-2B + D).
The BRT has the following functions.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI/B8ZS Format) (S/T Interface)
Signaling Insertion/Extraction
Frame Synchronization
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
For connections of BRT and transmission line, twisted-pair cables can be used.
Note: We recommend the point-to-point connection when connecting the system to the public network using the
BRT card (Set the second data of CM35 Y=79 to 0). For the point-to-multipoint connection using the BRT card,
when the system is established far from the public network, a communication error occurs easily because the
ISDN signal fades away.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-11
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
Feature Compatibility Table
Inter-Exchange Carrier Network Voice Services and Features /
NEAX2000 Compatibility
SERVICES AND FEATURES
INTER-EXCHANGE CARRIERS
CALL BY CALL SERVICE
SELECTION
Basic Call Note 1
WATS
800 Service
Virtual Private Network
900 Service Note 2
900 Service Flexible Billing
International WATS
International 800 Service
Foreign Exchange (FX)
Tie Line
DEDICATED ACCESS
PROVISIONING
Basic Call Note 1
WATS
800 Service
Virtual Private Network
900 Service (Note 2)
900 Service Flexible Billing
International WATS
International 800 Service
Foreign Exchange (FX)
Tie Line
FACILITY MANAGEMENT
B-Channel Negotiation
D-Channel Back-Up
Non-Facility Associated Signaling
Release Link Trunks
AT&T AT&T
4ESS NET
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
AT&T AT&T
4ESS NET
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
AT&T AT&T
4ESS NET
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
X = Feature Available / − = NOT Available
Page 15-12
NTI
MCI SPRINT
DMS
NET
NET
250
X
Note 1 Note 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
−
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
NTI
MCI SPRINT
DMS
NET
NET
250
X
Note 1 Note 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
−
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
NTI
MCI SPRINT
DMS
NET
NET
250
−
−
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
NEAX2000
Note 1
X
X
−
X
−
X
X
X
X
NEAX2000
Note 1
X
X
X
X
−
X
X
X
−
NEAX2000
−
−
−
−
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
VOICE FEATURES
CPN to Network
Presentation Restrict/Allow
CPN/BPN Delivery
Provisioned by Service
Call by Call Request
While All Trunks Busy
CPN Sub-Address
Calling Party Name
Dialed Number ID Service (DNIS)
Original CdPN
Original CdPName
Redirecting Number
Redirecting Name
Redirection Number
Redirection Name
Called Party Sub-Address
Connected Party Number
Connected Party Name
User To User
Message Associated UUI
Call Associated TSC
Non-Call Associated TSC
Network Ring Again
Customer Group Info. Transport
Alternate Destination
Account Code Prompt and Send
AT&T AT&T
4ESS NET
X
X
X
X
X
−
X
−
X
−
−
X
−
−
−
X
X
−
−
X
X
X
−
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
X
−
X
−
−
X
−
−
−
X
X
−
−
X
X
X
−
−
X
X
NTI
DMS
250
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
X
X
−
−
−
X
X
X
−
X
MCI
NET
SPRINT
NET
NEAX2000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
X
X
−
−
−
X
X
X
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
X
X
−
−
−
X
X
X
−
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
X
−
X
−
−
−
−
−
−
X
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
X = Feature Available / − = NOT Available
Note 1: The use of a Basic Call type of call is unique to NTI in the direct connection to the long
distance network. This is sometimes referred to by the IEX carriers as "Megalink" service.
Note 2: AT&T and NTI have used different signaling to indicate the "900 service" selection. The
NEAX2000 IVS supports the AT&T defined signaling.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-13
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
Local Exchange Carrier Network Voice Services and Features/
NEAX2000 Compatibility
SERVICES AND FEATURES
INTER-EXCHANGE CARRIERS
CALL BY CALL SERVICE
NTI
NEAX2000
AT&T AT&T
MCI SPRINT
SELECTION
DMS
4ESS NET
NET
NET
SWITCHED DATA
250
64 kbps Clear Channel
X
X
X
X
X
X
64 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
56 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
International 64 kbps Clear
X
X
X
X
X
X
International 64 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
International 56 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
HO 384 kbps
X
X
X
X
−
−
H11 1526 kbps
X
X
X
X
−
−
N x 64 kbps
X
X
−
−
−
−
NTI
AT&T AT&T
MCI SPRINT
VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
NEAX2000
DMS
4ESS NET
NET
NET
250
64 kbps Clear Channel
X
X
X
X
X
−
64 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
56 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
International 64 kbps Clear
X
X
X
X
X
−
International 64 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
International 56 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
HO 384 kbps
X
X
X
X
−
−
H11 1526 kbps
X
X
X
X
−
−
N x 64 kbps
X
X
−
−
−
−
DEDICATED ACCESS
NTI
AT&T AT&T
MCI SPRINT
PROVISIONING
DMS
NEAX2000
4ESS NET
NET
NET
SWITCHED DATA
250
64 kbps Clear Channel
X
X
X
X
X
X
64 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
56 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
International 64 kbps Clear
X
X
X
X
X
X
International 64 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
International 56 kbps Restricted
X
X
X
X
X
−
HO 384 kbps
X
X
X
X
−
−
H11 1526 kbps
X
X
X
X
−
−
N x 64 kbps
X
X
−
−
−
−
X = Feature Available / − = NOT Available
Page 15-14
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
64 kbps Clear Channel
64 kbps Restricted
56 kbps Restricted
International 64 kbps Clear
International 64 kbps Restricted
International 56 kbps Restricted
HO 384 kbps
H11 1526 kbps
N x 64 kbps
NTI
DMS
250
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AT&T AT&T
4ESS NET
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
MCI
NET
SPRINT
NET
NEAX2000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Local Exchange Carrier Network Voice Services and Features/NEAX2000 Compatibility
SERVICES AND FEATURES
CALL BY CALL SERVICE
SELECTION
Basic Call
Maximal Band
Banded
800 Service (INWATS)
FX LINE
TIE LINE
Virtual Private Network
Electronic Tandem Network
Operator Access (Note 2)
LEC Operator
Default IEX Operator
Other IEX Operator
LEC CARRIERS
AT&T
NTI
SIEMENS
5ESS DMS100
EWSD
X
X
X
WATS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
X
−
−
X
X
−
X
−
−
X
X
−
X
X
X
DEDICATED ACCESS
AT&T
NTI
PROVISIONING
5ESS DMS100
Basic Call
X
X
WATS
Maximal Band
X
X
800 Service (INWATS)
X
X
FX LINE
X
−
TIE LINE
X
−
Virtual Private Network
X
X
Electronic Tandem Network
X
−
X = Feature Available / − = NOT Available
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
X
X
−
SIEMENS
EWSD
X
−
−
−
−
−
−
NEAX2000
X
X
−
X
−
−
X
−
X
X
−
NEAX2000
X
X
X
−
−
X
−
Page 15-15
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
AT&T
NTI
5ESS DMS100
Operator Access (Note 2)
LEC Operator
Default IEX Operator
Other IEX Operator
FACILITY MANAGEMENT
D-Channel Back-Up
Non-Facility Associated Signaling
VOICE FEATURES
CPN to Network
Presentation Restrict/Allow
CPN/BPN Delivery
Calling Party Name
Original CdPN
Original CdPName
Redirecting Number
Redirecting Name
Redirection Number
Redirection Name
Connected Party Number
Connected Party Name
User To User
Message Associated UUI
Network Ring Again
Network Message Waiting
Message Waiting Indicator
Message Waiting Activation
SIEMENS
EWSD
NEAX2000
X
X
−
−
X
X
X
−
−
−
−
−
X
X
−
−
−
−
X
X
−
−
−
−
AT&T
NTI
5ESS DMS100
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
X
−
X
−
X
X
X
−
X
−
X
−
X
X
X
−
−
−
X
−
X
−
−
−
X = Feature Available / − = NOT Available
X
X
SIEMENS
EWSD
X
X
X
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
X
−
−
−
NEAX2000
X
X
X
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Note 1: The Siemens EWSD offers PRI support via both a National ISDN (Bellcore) and an AT&T
"Custom" implementation. The above information pertains to the "Custom" implementation only (NTI has
no National ISDN support). Although this interface is based on the AT&T 5ESS, NEC products have not
been tested on the EWSD. Please contact NEC Product Management for any potential sales requiring PRI
connection via the EWSD "Custom" interface.
Note 2: Support for Operator Access by the AT&T and NTI systems are realized in different ways. The
NEAX2000 supports the AT&T implementation.
Page 15-16
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
Local Exchange Carrier Network Data Services and Features / NEAX2000 Compatibility
SERVICES AND FEATURES
Call By Call Service Selection
LEC CARRIERS
AT&T
NTI
SIEMENS
5ESS DMS100
EWSD
NEAX2000
X
−
−
−
−
−
NEAX2000
64 kbps Clear Channel
64 kbps Restricted
56 kbps Restricted
HO 384 kbps
H11 1526 kbps
N x 64 kbps
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
X
−
−
X
−
−
AT&T
NTI
SIEMENS
5ESS DMS100
EWSD
X
X
−
X
X
−
X
X
−
X
−
−
X
−
−
X
−
−
DEDICATED ACCESS
PROVISIONING
AT&T
NTI
SIEMENS
5ESS DMS100
EWSD
NEAX2000
SWITCHED DATA
64 kbps Clear Channel
64 kbps Restricted
56 kbps Restricted
HO 384 kbps
H11 1526 kbps
N x 64 kbps
VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
SWITCHED DATA
64 kbps Clear Channel
X
64 kbps Restricted
X
56 kbps Restricted
X
HO 384 kbps
−
H11 1526 kbps
−
N x 64 kbps
−
VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
64 kbps Clear Channel
X
64 kbps Restricted
X
56 kbps Restricted
X
HO 384 kbps
−
H11 1526 kbps
−
N x 64 kbps
−
X = Feature Available / − = NOT Available
−
−
−
−
−
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
−
X
−
−
−
−
−
X
X
X
X
X
X
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-17
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
NEAX 2000 IPS systems equipped with Basic Rate Interface (BRI) provides the user
with a vehicle for circuit switched data at rates of 64 or 128 kbps to the desktop. ISDN
BRI connects BRI terminals (stations) to the PBX. ISDN PRI is used to connect the PBX
to the public network. Circuit switched data is the focus of the NEAX2000’s Basic Rate
Interface. Features such as Group Four Fax, video conferencing, and data calls are the
main objective of BRI on the NEAX2000 IPS.
Applications
The NEAX2000 IPS supports National ISDN - 1 and AT&T 5ESS specifications for Basic Rate
Interface.
ƒ
Desktop Video Applications
From the desktop, users can place and receive 128 K video conference calls.
PSTN
BRI
PRI
BRI
NT- 1
Desktop Video
Desktop Video
NEAX2000 IPS
ƒ
Video Conferencing for large conference rooms or classrooms.
Using an I-MUX to receive 3 BRI ports, a bandwidth of 384 kbps is possible. This provides good quality
video for large conference rooms.
Video CODEC
I-MUX
Video CODEC
PRI
BRI x 3
PSTN
I-MUX
BRI x 3
Page 15-18
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
ƒ
ISDN Data Modems
ISDN Data Modems will provide users with access to the Internet at speeds of 64 or 128 kbps. ISDN
modems can place and receive ISDN calls at 56, 64, and 128 kbps. Data calls within the PBX or external
using ISDN PRI can greatly increase the user’s productivity by using the higher rates of ISDN BRI. NEC
America has successfully tested the IBM Waverunner series of ISDN modems.
ƒ
Group four Fax
Fax machines capable of G4 can send faxes at speeds of 56 kbps using ISDN BRI.
System Requirements
BRI stations within the NEAX2000 IPS can place calls to other BRI stations or outside the PBX by using
ISDN PRI lines to the public network. Each IPS system can support up to 24 BRI Terminal ports.
The PN-2ILCA card is used for to connect the BRI terminal to the PBX. An SPN-SC03 card is required
to control D channel activity for the BRI terminals. One SC03 card supports four 2ILCA cards. The
NEAX 2000 IPS can support 48 ILCA cards that mount in LT slots and 12 SC03 cards that mount in AP
slots.
SPN-SC03
ONE SC03 SUPPORTS
FOUR 2ILCA
PN-2ILCA
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-19
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
ISDN Equipment List
Functional
Name
BRT
Card Name
PN-BRTA
PN-4BRT-D
BRT
PN-24DTA-C
DTI
PN-2ILCA
ILC
PN-24PRTA
PRT
PN-SC00
CCH
PN-SC01
DCH
PN-SC03
ICH
Function
1-line Basic Rate (2B + D) Interface Trunk Card
Accommodates one 2-channel PCM digital lines.
4-line Basic Rate (2B + D) Interface Trunk Card
accommodates four 2-channel PCM digital lines.
Digital Trunk Interface (23B + D, 1.5 Mbps) Card
accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card provides a physical
interface to ISDN Terminals. Occupies 8 time slots
per one card.
ISDN Primary Rate (23B + D) Interface Card
provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH)
Common Channel Handler Card transmits/receives
signal on the common signaling channel of No. 7
CCIC.
D-channel Handler Card transmits/receives signal
on the D-channel of ISDN Primary Rate (23B + D)
interface or WCS Roaming interface.
ISDN-channel Handler Card provides the Dchannel signaling interface and controls. Maximum
four ILC cards (Layer 2 and 3)
ISDN PRI Required Equipment
Equipment
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24PRTA
PN-SC01 (DCH)
Description
24-Channel DTI Card
24-Channel PRT Card
D-Channel Handler Card
Qty
1-8
1-8
1-8
Remarks
1 DTI/Card
ISDN BRI Required Equipment
Equipment
PN-BRTA (BRT)
PN-4BRT-D (BRT)
Description
1-Line BRT Card
4-Line BRT Card
Qty
1-12
1-24
Remarks
ISDN Terminal Required Equipment
Equipment
PN-SC03
PN-2ILCA
Description
ISDN Channel Handler Card
ISDN Line Circuit Card
Qty
1-24
1-48
Remarks
Supports 4 ILC Cards
Supports 2 Terminals
Event Based CCIS Required Equipment
Equipment
PN-SC00
Page 15-20
Description
Common Channel Handler Card
Qty
1-8
Remarks
Supports 1 DTI Card
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network (ISDN)
Capacity for ISDN-PRI
Description
DTI Card
DCH Card
Trunks for DTI
PRT Card
Trunks for PRT
ISDN Routes
ICH Card
ILC Card
Port per DTI Card
Port per DCH Card
Port per PRT Card
Port per ICH Card
Port per ILC Card
Capacity
24DTI
8
8
192
8
24
48
24
1
4
8
24PRT
8
192
8
24
48
24 + 1 (DCH)
4
8
System Capacity for ISDN-BRI
Description
BRT Card (BRTA/4BRT-D)
Trunks for BRT (BRTA/4BRT-D)
ICH Card (SC03)
ILC Card (2ILCA)
Port per BRT Card (BRTA/4BRT-D)
Port per ICH Card (SC03)
Port per ILC Card (2ILCA)
Capacity
12/24
24/192
24
48
2/8
4
8
Documentation
More information regarding the ISDN capabilities of the NEAX 2000 IPS can be found in
the NEAX 2000 IPS ISDN System Manual and the NEAX 2000 IPS ISDN Features and
Specifications.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 15-21
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Chapter 16 Wireless System
NEAX 2000 IPS Wireless Communication System (WCS)
NEC’s wireless technology offers high system capacity, proven system reliability, high voice
quality, network integration, investment protection into the future, and extensive user mobility.
The NEAX 2000 IPS Wireless Communication System (WCS) provides interface for Personal
Station (PS) via a Zone Transceiver (ZT). When installing the WCS, there are three types of
Configuration Applications:
1. Integrated Type: NEAX 2000 IPS Wired for Wireless
The NEAX 2000 IPS provides both PBX and WCS functions together.
2. Adjunct Type [1]: Analog PBX Interface
The WCS is positioned as a behind system of the existing PBX linked by LC-COT connection.
3. Adjunct Type [2]: CCIS Interface
The WCS is positioned as a behind system of the existing PBX linked by CCIS.
Wired for Wireless
This feature allows the NEAX 2000 IPS to have the Wireless PBX feature. NEAX 2000 IPS provides
several integrated features adding on the adjunctive configuration.
Service Conditions
1. The service conditions of each feature are the same as for the Single Line Telephone, except for
the following:
Calling Number Display – PS
Last Number Redial – PS
Speed Dial – PS
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
2. The station number of a Dterm PS III can be assigned flexibly. The limitation of the number and
maximum digits depends on the NEAX 2000 IPS.
Analog PBX Interface
This feature allows the WCS to be integrated with many types of PBXs and to activate various PBX
services by sending hookflash signal and DTMF tone.
Service Conditions
1. The signal type of the following cases can be programmed on a route-by-route basis between the
WCS and the PBX.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
To dial for placing a call.
To dial for accessing to the PBX service.
To dial after sending hookflash.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-1
Chapter 16 Wireless System
2. The signal type of dial while a call is established is DTMF. It is not programmable.
3. If the PBX requires pause timing between a trunk access code and an external number, the WCS
can automatically insert the pause timing.
4. The called/calling party number is not displayed on the LCD of a Dterm PS III.
5. The interface between a PBX and the WCS is a LC and a COT. The same number of LC and COT
as Dterm PS III are required.
6. Code Restriction and Class of Service are provided by the PBX.
7. Any type of call is originated via the PBX, even a Dterm PS III-to-Dterm PS III call.
8. The trunk circuit of the WCS can recognize a momentary open signal as a release signal, if the PBX
provides it.
9. The station number of a Dterm PS III can be assigned flexibly. The limitation of the number and
maximum digits depends on the NEAX 2000 IPS.
CCIS Interface
This feature allows the WCS to be integrated with NEC PBXs with CCIS interface.
Service Conditions
1. The service conditions of each feature are the same as those of the Single Line Telephone of CCIS
features, except the following features:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Calling Number Display – PS
Last Number Redial – PS
Speed Dial – PS
2. If the PBX requires pause timing between a trunk access code and an external number, the WCS
can automatically insert the pause timing.
3. The interface between a PBX and the WCS is CCIS. The number of voice link depends on the
traffic except PS-to-PS calls.
4. Code Restriction and Class of Service are provided by the PBX.
5. Any type of call is originated via the PBX, even a Dterm PS III-to-Dterm PS III call.
6. The station number of Dterm PS III can be assigned flexibly. The limitation of the number and
maximum digits depends on the NEAX 2000 IPS.
7. If the SMDR is needed, AP00 card is required and the upper PBX must have a center node feature
of Centralized Billing - CCIS.
Page 16-2
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Wireless Roaming
The NEAX 2000 IPS supports the JT-Q931a protocol and JT-11582 for signaling at Qreference point between PBXs on the private network. By supporting this protocol, the PSs can
be used in any Calling Area on the private network.
Roaming can be executed only on trunk connection between PBXs based on JT-Q931a
protocol or IP. To each trunk route of JT-Q931a digital trunks/IP trunks, it can be specified
whether Roaming is provided or not. The JT-Q931a digital trunks/IP trunks can be used by
single line telephone stations and Dterm stations for originating or receiving calls as same as
common trunks.
The Data Base Module (DBM) card (PN-AP00-B) is required per PBX. The DBM card cannot
be used as billing application processor (for SMDR, MCI, PMS or Hotel printer). System data
stored in the memory of the DBM card can be saved, loaded and verified from a MAT. A
Roaming network can consist of maximum 512 PBXs. Visitor Location Register (VLR)
information for maximum 512 Visitor PSs can be recorded to a system. VLR information is the
various information of Visitor PS and is made in the memory of DBM on the Visitor PBX when
the PS is roaming. When the VLR information exceeds for more than 512 PSs, DBM
overwrites the oldest VLR information.
One of the following two Roaming service is available in the PBX.
ƒ Roaming service via Dp channel private line using Q931a digital trunks; Multi-Site
Roaming
ƒ Roaming service via IP network using Virtual IPT; Q931a Roaming over IP Trunk
The following sections describe the system outline and system configuration of Multi-Site
Roaming/ Q931a Roaming over IP Trunk.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-3
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Wireless Definitions
Virtual Station:
Virtual Station exists only on the system data, provided via non-hardware
supported LEN. The Virtual station must be assigned by the system data
programming for operating Home PSs and Visitor PSs used for Roaming.
Individual PS number:
Individual PS number is assigned to a PS to identify the PS on the Roaming
network. It must be a unique number in the network.
Network ID method:
Network ID method is one method to operate Roaming. A Roaming PS must
have two SYS-ID on the Network ID method. One is main SYS-ID for Home
PBX, and another is Network ID for Roaming network. The Network ID is
used to define whether the PS can operate under the control of PBXs on the
Roaming network. The network ID must be the same for all PBXs within the
same network.
Visitor PBX:
When a PS leaves control of a PBX to which it belongs originally, and is
operating in a zone of another PBX, the PBX is called “Visitor PBX”.
Visitor PS:
When a PS leaves control of a PBX to which it belongs originally, and is
operating in a zone of another PBX, the PS is called “Visitor PS”.
Home PBX:
Home PBX is a PBX to which a PS ordinarily belongs.
Home PBX ID:
Home PBX ID is a unique number to identify the PBX on the Roaming
network.
Home PS:
When a PS operates under control of a PBX to which the PS originally
belongs, the PS is called “Home PS”.
Roaming number:
Roaming number is assigned to a Visitor PS temporarily, when the PS is
roaming to a Visitor PBX. The actual Roaming number is Virtual station
number assigned as a pilot station of Station Hunting group on the Visitor
PBX.
HLR:
Home Location Register. A database to store the location registration data of
the Home PS.
VLR:
Page 16-4
Visitor Location Register. A database to store the location registration data of
the Visitor PS temporarily, when the Visitor PS is in the zone of another PBX.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Multi-Site Roaming
In a mixed network of both NEAX 2400 IPX and NEAX 2000 IPS systems or a network of NEAX 2000
IPS systems supporting wireless users in a private network, some users may desire the ability to take
their handsets from one site to the other and still remain in touch with those who are calling. Dterm PS III
users can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by the plural PBXs which are
interfaced by JT-Q931-a, common wireless roaming protocol for network wide roaming capabilities.
Configuration Application: Integrated Type and Adjunct Type with CCIS interface
Service Conditions
1. A roaming service network can be provided by maximum 512 PBXs.
2. One AP00 card for Data Base Module (DBM) is required per PBX.
3. Visitor Location Register (VLR) information for maximum 512 Visitor PSs can be recorded to a
system. When the VLR information exceeds for more than 512 Visitor PSs, AP00 deletes the
oldest VLR information in the system.
4. When a call terminates to a Multiline Terminal from a PS, the ringing of the Multiline Terminal is as
follows, regardless of Home PS or Visitor PS:
ƒ
ƒ
When the PS is under control of the same PBX: Ringing for Internal call
When the PS is under control of the other PBX: Ringing for External call
5. When the Home PS is roaming, the Home PBX cannot route Announcement-PS No Answer /-PS
Out of Zone to the calling party. If the Visitor PBX allowed it will inform the Home PBX that the PS
cannot answer, the Home PBX activates Call Forwarding-Not Available.
6. Billing of Home PS is executed to its Virtual LC Number.
7. While the Home PS is roaming, billing information cannot be recorded.
8. The Visitor PS can allow following service features.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Originating a call to a station of the same office
Originating a call to a station of the different office
Terminating a call from a roaming trunk
PS Exclusive Hold
Call Forwarding
9. The visitor PS cannot allow Calling Name Display.
10. Maximum 64 Visitor PSs can originate or receive a call in a network at the same time.
11. The Visitor PS can answer a call only from the roaming trunk.
12. Billing of Visitor PS is executed to its Virtual LC Number.
13. Billing information for the Visitor PS can be recorded only when the Visitor PS originates a call.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-5
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Q. 931a Roaming over IP Trunk
Dterm PS III user can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by the plural PBXs,
which are interfaced by JT-Q931-a protocol over IP Trunks.
Q931a Roaming over IP Trunk is
available only on the Point-to-Multipoint connection. Roaming by Q931a digital private line and
Roaming by IP network cannot be used together in one PBX. A Roaming IP network consists of
maximum 255 PBXs. Roaming via Virtual IPT and Roaming via Physical IPT cannot be used together
in one PBX. IP-PAD card is required for the Roaming via Virtual IPT, when the called/calling station is
the legacy terminal (Dterm/Single Line telephone/ATTCON, etc.).
Configuration Application: Integrated Type and Adjunct Type with CCIS interface
Service Conditions
1. A roaming service network can be provided by maximum 512 PBXs.
2. One AP00 card for Data Base Module (DBM) is required per PBX.
3. Both Multi-Site Roaming (using DTI) and this feature cannot be provided in the same system. i.e.
the roaming network must be configured in only DTI trunks or IP trunks.
4. Visitor Location Register (VLR) information for maximum 512 Visitor PSs can be recorded to a
system. When the VLR information exceeds for more than 512 Visitor PSs, AP00 deletes the
oldest VLR information in the system.
5. When a call terminates to a Multiline Terminal from a PS, the ringing of the Multiline Terminal is as
follows, regardless of Home PS or Visitor PS:
ƒ
ƒ
When the PS is under control of the same PBX: Ringing for Internal call
When the PS is under control of the other PBX: Ringing for External call
6. When the Home PS is roaming, the Home PBX cannot route Announcement-PS No Answer /-PS
Out of Zone to the calling party. If the Visitor PBX allowed it will inform the Home PBX that the PS
cannot answer, the Home PBX activates Call Forwarding-Not Available.
7. Billing of Home PS is executed to its Virtual LC Number.
8. While the Home PS is roaming, billing information cannot be recorded.
9. The Visitor PS can allow following service features.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Originating a call to a station of the same office
Originating a call to a station of the different office
Terminating a call from a roaming trunk
PS Exclusive Hold
Call Forwarding
10. The visitor PS cannot allow Calling Name Display.
11. Maximum 64 Visitor PSs can originate or receive a call in a network at the same time.
12. The Visitor PS can answer a call only from the roaming trunk.
13. Billing of Visitor PS is executed to its Virtual LC Number.
14. Billing information for the Visitor PS can be recorded only when the Visitor PS originates a call.
Page 16-6
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Wireless – Short Text Message Notification (OAI)
This feature enables a Short Text Message (hereafter, STM), once arrived at a mail box of the
STM Server (external equipment), to be automatically distributed to the addressee Dterm PS III
via Open Application Interface (OAI). This feature also provides “TM Full” notification on the
display (LCD) of the address Dterm PS III that is busy, and if the Dterm PS III is out of zone, the
feature makes retransmission of the STM after the PS returns to the zone.
Note: This describes STM Facilities available for external STM OAI application. Actual functionality depends on
the application.
Configuration Application: Integrated Type
Service Conditions
The feature is available only for My Line (L1) of a two-line Dterm PS III (not provided for Sub Line (L2)).
1. STM transmission route is only one way: STM server → Dterm PS III
2. One STM can contain 128 byte data at the maximum.
3. The following features are not available at this feature.
ƒ Call Forwarding - All Calls
ƒ Call Forwarding - No Answer
ƒ Call Forwarding - Busy Line
ƒ Call Forwarding - Not Available
4. If the following occur, STM is not distributed, but stays in the mail box of the STM server. The STM
is safely transmitted later by this feature’s retransmission function.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Addressee Dterm PS III is out of zone.
Addressee Dterm PS III is power off.
The line of addressee Dterm PS III is busy, on hold, or ringing.
Dterm PS III is in a state of hand-over. Note
5. With this feature, PCS Roaming is not available.
Note: When hand-over unexpectedly starts while the message transmission is partially in progress, this feature
sees this as a squelch disconnection and performs message retransmission after the hand-over is completed.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-7
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Features
Feature Matrix by Configuration Type
Feature
Analog PBX Interface
Announcement - PS No Answer
Announcement - PS Out of Cell
Automatic Release - Out of Cell Calls
Call Forwarding - Not Available
CCIS Interface
Calling Name Display - PS
Calling Number Display - PS
DTMF Signal Sender
Group Call Automatic Conference (6/10 Party)
Group Calling - 2 Way Calling
Handover
Individual PS Calling
Last Number Redial - PS
Multi Line Operation - PS
Multi Site Roaming
NEAX2000 IPS Wired for Wireless
Number Sharing
Out of Zone Indication
Overlap Dialing
PS Authorization
PS Location Registration
Preset Dialing
Q. 931a Roaming over IP Trunk
Radio Channel Changeover
Short Message Notification (OAI)
Speech Encryption
Speed Dial - PS
Station Hunting - Not Available
Voice Mail Indication
X = available
– = not available
Page 16-8
Adjunct Type
Analog PBX
CCIS
Interface(1)
Interface(2)
X
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
–
X
–
X
–
X
X
X
–
–
–
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
–
X
–
–
–
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
X
X
–
–
X
X
X
X
–
–
–
–
Integrated Type
NEAX 2000 IPS
Wired for Wireless
–
X
X
X
X
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Feature Descriptions
Feature
Description
Analog PBX
Interface
This feature allows the IPS/WCS to be integrated with many types of
PBXs and to activate various PBS services by sending hook flash
signal and DTMF tone.
Announcement
- PS No Answer
/Announcement
- PS Out of
Zone
This feature allows calls to a Dterm PS III, which cannot be paged, in a
predetermined period of time to be routed to the announcement
notifying the calling party that the Dterm PS III cannot answer.
Announcements can be divided between Announcement - PS No
Answer and Announcement - PS Out of Zone depending on the Dterm
PS III condition.
Automatic
Release - Out
of Zone Calls
When a Dterm PS III user engaged in a call moves out of the service
area or enters a radio zone where all the channels are busy and the
communication becomes unavailable, the call will be disconnected
automatically, and the other party receives reorder tone.
When a PS is power off or out of zone, a call directed to the PS is
Call Forwarding forwarded to a VMS, and a voice mail message can be recorded to
the VMS and checked from the PS. Also the VMS can page the PS
- Not Available
automatically after the voice mail message is recorded.
CCIS Interface
This feature allows the IPS/WCS to be integrated with NEC PBXs
with CCIS interface.
Calling Name
Display – PS
Without answering incoming calls or hold calls terminates to the Dterm
PS III, the calling party’s name can be confirmed by the indications
on the LCD.
Calling Number
Display – PS
This feature provides a display on the LCD of a Dterm PS III receiving
a call, indicating the station number.
DTMF Signal
Sender
This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to send the DTMF signal (tone)
to the called party (terminal, voice mail system, etc.) while engaged
in communication.
Group Call Automatic
Conference
(6/10-Party)
This feature permits a Dterm PS III user, Dterm user or Single Line
Telephone user within the system to establish a conference among
as many as six or ten parties. From a Dterm PS III/Dterm /Single Line
Telephone, a maximum of 9 PSs can be paged simultaneously
except the conference leader. The PSs are assigned to the
simultaneous paging groups as a participant by the system data
beforehand.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-9
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Group Call - 2
Way Calling
This feature permits a Dterm PS III/Dterm /Single Line Telephone can
page a maximum of fifteen parties simultaneously except the group
call leader. After one of paged parties answers, the paging becomes
the 2 Way Calling between the leader and the first answered party,
and paging other parties stops automatically. The PSs are assigned
to the simultaneous paging group as participants by the system data
beforehand.
Handover
When the signal transmission quality becomes inferior, a Dterm PS III
re-originates a call automatically and seizes another radio channel,
making the WCS handover the call to another zone transceiver to
maintain the speech quality.
Individual PS
Calling
This feature allows the calling party to page the individual Dterm PS III.
Last Number
Redial – PS
This feature enables a Dterm PS III to store the numbers dialed in the
previous five calls including the last number dialed. The stack dial
numbers are sequentially displayed on the LCD, allowing the station
user to make an out-going call by selecting the desired dialed
number from the display.
Multi-Line
Operation – PS
Dterm PS III equipped with two line keys, L1 key and L2 key, and
different station numbers can be assigned to each of two lines. The
number assigned to L1 key of the PS is called My Line and the other
number assigned to L2 key is called Sub Line. My Line and Sub Line
of a Dterm PS III can be assigned to appear on the Flexible Line Keys
of a Dterm and the Dterm can share the Dterm PS III lines.
Multi-Site
Roaming
Dterm PS III users can originate or receive a call in any place of a
network provided by the multiple PBXs that are interfaced by JTQ931a.
NEAX 2000 IPS
Wired for
Wireless
This feature allows the NEAX 2000 IPS to have the Wireless PBX
feature. NEAX 2000 IPS provides several integrated features adding
on the adjunctive configuration.
This feature allows the Dterm user to have a Dterm PS III as Sub Station
and to get service with one telephone number. In case that one user
has both Dterm and Dterm PS III, with this feature used, the user is not
required to have separate two telephone numbers.
Number
Sharing
Page 16-10
ƒ
ƒ
When user is at his desk, a call is terminated to Dterm.
When user leaves his desk with Dterm PS III, a call is
automatically terminated to Dterm PS III. In this feature, the
Dterm and Dterm PS III are referred as Main Station and Sub
Station, respectively.
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Out of Zone
Indication
When a Dterm PS III user moves out of the service area and the
electric field strength becomes weak, this feature notifies it to the
user with the warning tone and the LCD display.
Overlap Dialing
This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to receive dial tone and dial the
desired number to originate a call.
PS
Authorization
This feature is to confirm the identity of a Dterm PS III to avoid an
unauthorized Dterm PS III from accessing the system.
PS Location
Registration
This feature allows the WCS to supervise the location of each Dterm
PS III, upon receiving the location registration request, to allow call
termination.
Preset Dialing
This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to confirm the number to be
dialed before originating a call.
Q.931a
Roaming over
IP Trunk
Dterm PS III user can originate or receive a call in any place of a
network provided by the plural PBXs, which are interfaced by JTQ931-a protocol over IP Trunks.
Radio Channel
Changeover
This feature is to supervise and changeover the channel
automatically to avoid the interference and to maintain the speech
quality.
Speech
Encryption
This feature protects a call from being tapped.
Speed Dial – PS
This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to dial the certain frequently
called numbers using two-digit abbreviated call codes.
This feature allows a call placed to a Dterm PS III station, which is out
of zone or power off to be forwarded to an idle station in a hunt
group. Two Station Hunting arrangements are available.
Station Hunting
- Not Available
ƒ
ƒ
Voice Mail
Indication
Station Hunting - Circular processes the call no matter which
station in the hunt group is called.
Station Hunting - Terminal initiates a hunt only when the pilot
number of a hunt group is called.
When a message is mailed in the Dterm PS III, an indication of the
envelope icon is displayed in the LCD of the Dterm PS III.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-11
Chapter 16 Wireless System
System Description
Dterm PS III
The user terminal for the NEAX 2000 IPS Wireless system is the Dterm PS III. This terminal is
specifically designed for the mobile user, offering portability, durability and functionality.
Portability has two aspects to it. First, the handset must be easily carried by the mobile user. At slightly
more than 3.8 ounces with dimensions of 5” x 1.5” x 7/8” and with a variety of carrying case options,
users can carry the Dterm PS III easily. Second, to be truly portable the handset must also operate over
a long period without having to “return to base” for a recharge. With Talk Time at 6 hours and Standby
Time at 300 hours, the Dterm PS III will serve through most, if not all, of a typical day on the job.
Durability is another important feature of the Dterm PS III. Once the cord is cut and the user is carrying
the handset with them, it will be dropped, banged into cabinets, and generally suffer a fate not
experienced by business desktop terminals. Drop-tested to 6 feet, designed to endure hostile
environments (temperatures to 122o F), and adaptable to outdoors use with a special case, this
handset can meet the needs of most wireless users.
A wireless handset is no good to the user if it does not deliver the features and functions needed for
effective communication. The Dterm PS III supports a wide range of timesaving, convenient business
features such as:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Call Hold & Transfer
Directory Dial-by-name (100 entries)
Station Speed Dial (10 with name)
Last Number Redial (20)
Calling Party Number redial (20)
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Automatic Answer (immediate or delayed)
Headset Operation
4 Line by 18 Digit LCD Display (with scrolling)
Modem Data (up to 19.2 kps)
Vibration Alert
The basic Dterm PS III package includes the Dterm PS III Handset and one Hand Strap. A User Card
explaining basic operation and a comprehensive user guide is also available.
Page 16-12
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Dterm PS III Accessories
To enhance the use of the Dterm PS III, NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. offers several choices in each area
of handset accessories. They are:
Lithium-Ion Battery
(PS III Battery Pack) that provides up to 6 hours of continuous talk time and 300 hours on standby. Additional
batteries may be required for extended use applications that require “around the clock” coverage.
Battery Charger
Battery Charger for the Dterm PS III includes the Dterm PS III charging slot only. Recharging time is a maximum of 4
hours.
Headsets
Headsets for the Dterm PS III come in two configurations. The first is a classic banded headset with the
microphone extension. The second is an ear bud type with an in-line microphone. The banded headset is
typically used in cases of prolonged active use (e.g., customer service agent) while the ear set is for occasional
use or where concealment is desired (e.g., hotel security).
Dterm Leather Cases
Dterm Leather Cases are available in three models. (1)A Leather Case for carrying the PS III when the large
majority of use is indoors. It utilizes a unique integrated swivel clip that allows the handset to rotate out of the way
(e.g., in case of sitting), and a quick release mechanism to allow for easy retrieval for use. (2)A Leather Case for
carrying the PS III when the large majority of the use is indoors and has an integrated belt clip that doesn’t swivel.
(3)The Weather Case model offers a weather resistant material for users whose job is outdoors a majority of time.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-13
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Zone Transceiver II (ZT)
Access to the communications network by the Dterm PS III user is gained through radio connection with
one of the several Zone Transceivers installed on the premise. ZTs are placed strategically around the
establishment in an overlapping fashion to provide continuous radio coverage throughout the specified
area. The number of Zone Transceivers needed to provide service for any single establishment is
defined by several factors:
ƒ
The total area requiring wireless service, which is a function of the area of operation of the users of the
Dterm PS III handset. Even in the case of providing a small number of handsets, if staff whose job requires
wireless service throughout the whole facility uses them, the number of ZTs is determined by the size of
the facility, not the number of users.
ƒ
The configuration, environment and construction of the building(s) in the areas requiring coverage have
considerable impact on the effective coverage area of any one Zone Transceiver. Spacing of ZTs is
adjusted according to these conditions resulting in considerably different quantities needed to cover equal
amounts of square footage when compared from site to site.
ƒ
Special conditions, such as coverage inside elevators and stairwells (both are typically not covered). In
addition, accommodating high traffic areas will result in additional Zone Transceivers. Typical
deployments provide access to at least 2 ZTs from most locations identified for coverage. By placing ZTs
in closer proximity to each other than normal spacing, access to more ZTs in any one spot is supported.
In any one zone (an area covered by one ZT, but potentially equipped with more), up to 36 simultaneous
calls can be supported within the given 10MHz of the U-PCS band.
ƒ
Each Zone Transceiver provides for up to three simultaneous connections to Dterm PS III users within the
covered area. As users communicating through a ZT move out of its range and into an area covered by
another ZT, the connection is automatically switched (called a handover) to the new ZT (noticeable by a
momentary disruption in talk path (Note)). With the proper placement of ZTs throughout the facility, users
can move about the area while communicating (or idle) and have their calls follow them.
ƒ
The ZT is supplied with mounting hardware and can be installed on walls, mounted on solid ceilings or
placed above drop ceilings. The Zone Transceiver II is also offered with a weather resistant outdoor
enclosure, mountable on outside building walls or poles. Options for both fan cooled or heated
enclosures are also available.
ƒ
NEC offers both ZT IIS and ZT IIU units and a combination of both. ZT IIU can be deployed using 1 pair
or 2 pair wiring. ZT IIS uses 2 pair wiring only.
Note: With ZTs version 7.2 or higher seamless handover can be achieved.
Page 16-14
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Wireless Specifications
System Specifications
Description
Wireless
Protocol
Distance
between PBX
and ZT
Specifications
Remarks
Based on second generation wireless
telephone system standard RCR-STD-28
FCC Sub part D, UTAM complied
• ZT II-S
Wire Diameter
26 AWG
24 AWG
22 AWG
19AWG
PBX Power
Supply at -48 V
2500 ft.
(762 m)
4000 ft.
(1219 m)
5500 ft.
(1676 m)
8000 ft.
(2438 m)
PBX Power
Supply at -45V
2000 ft.
(609 m)
3200 ft.
(975 m)
4700 ft.
(1432 m)
7000 ft.
(2131 m)
PBX Power
Supply at -43V
1800 ft.
(548 m)
2900 ft.
(883 m)
4400 ft.
(1340 m)
6400 ft.
(1948 m)
Local Power
Supply
3900 ft.
(1189 m)
4400 ft.
(1341 m)
5500 ft.
(1676 m)
8000 ft.
(2438 m)
• ZT II-U
Wire Diameter
PBX Power
Supply at -48 V
PBX Power
Supply at -45 V
PBX Power
Supply at -43 V
26 AWG
2500 ft.
(762 m)
24 AWG
4000 ft.
(1219 m)
22 AWG
5500 ft.
(1676 m)
19AWG
8000 ft.
(2438 m)
4W
4300 ft.
(1310 m)
6900 ft.
(2103 m)
9500 ft.
(2895 m)
13000 ft.
(3958 m)
2W
2000 ft.
(609 m)
3200 ft.
(975 m)
4700 ft.
(1432 m)
7000 ft.
(2131 m)
2W
3500 ft.
(1066 m)
1800 ft.
(548 m)
5600 ft.
(1706 m)
2900 ft.
(883 m)
8200 ft.
(2499 m)
4400 ft.
(1340 m)
12200 ft.
(3718 m)
6400 ft.
(1948 m)
4W
3100 ft.
(944 m)
5000ft.
(1524 m)
7600 ft.
(2316 m)
11000 ft.
(3352 m)
11000 ft.
(3350 m)
13000 ft.
(3958 m)
13000 ft.
(3958 m)
13000 ft.
(3958 m)
2W
4W
Local Power Supply
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-15
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Zone Transceiver II Specifications
ITEM
ZT II S
Output Power
Type of Interface
Number of Simultaneous Speech Path
Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS
6.8 mW
S Interface
Maximum 3
• PBX Power Supply (DC –48 V)
• Local Power Supply (AC 100 V/200 V)
Power Consumption
Operating Conditions
Maximum 4 W
Ambient Temperature: –10 50 °C
Relative Humidity : 45 85 % (non condensing)
Installation Location : Indoor
Dimensions (unit: mm)
Weight
ZT II U
Output Power
Type of Interface
Number of Simultaneous Speech Path
Power Supply
160 (W) x139 (D) x40 (H) (Excluding Antenna)
Approx. 400 g
Power Consumption
Operating Conditions
Dimensions (unit: mm)
Weight
6.8 mW
U Interface
Maximum 3
• PBX Power Supply (DC –48 V)
• Local Power Supply (AC 100 V/200 V)
Maximum 3 W
Ambient Temperature: –10 50 °C
Relative Humidity : 45 - 85 % (non-condensing)
Installation Location : Indoor
160 (W) x139 (D) x40 (H) (Excluding Antenna)
Approx. 400 g
System Capacity
Note: All existing CSH cards in a system should be SPN-SC03B 8CSH-C (AP) when accommodating
257 or more PSs.
Page 16-16
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
WCS Required Equipment
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
QTY
PZ-PW122
(DC/DC PWR)
–48V Power supply card for ZT
One per PIM
16 ZT powered/card
1-8
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
ZT Interface card for S-interface
8 per PIM
1-64
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)
ZT Interface card for U-interface
4 per PIM
1-32
PN-SC03-B (CSH)
ZT Handler card for S-interface/
U-interface
1 per 4 2CSIA cards
1 per 2 4CSIA cards
1-16
PN-4COT
PN-8COT
COT for Analog Interface
4COT: 4 PS per card
8COT: 8 PS per card
SPN-24CCTA
1.5M AMI (24ch) CCIS Interface Trunk
PN-24DTA-C(24DTI)
24-channel DTI card
1-8
PN-30DTC-C (30DTI)
30-channel DTI card
1-8
PN-SC01 (DCH)
D-channel Handler card
1-8
PN-AP00-B (DBM)
Roaming Data Base Module card
1
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Ethernet Control card
1
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
32-channel IP-PAD card
1-8
PN-16VCTA (16VCT)
16-channel CODEC card
1-16
IPTRK BUS CA
Set of 3 BUS Cables between IP-PAD
and 16VCT cards
Length: 0.1 m (0.33 ft.)
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
8-channel IP-PAD card
1-8
PN-24IPLA (24DSP)
24-channel expansion DSP card for 8channel IP-PAD card
1-8
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
REMARKS
Analog Interface
CCIS Interface
Wired for Wireless
4COT: 64
8COT:32
As req.
Max. 8 per sys
For Multi-Site
Roaming
For Q931a Roaming
over IP Trunk
(Virtual IPT)
1-8 sets
Page 16-17
Chapter 16 Wireless System
WCS Required Equipment (Cont.)
EQUIPMENT
• 10BASE-T Cable
(TIA/EIA category
3 or larger)*
DESCRIPTION
QTY
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Cable
between ETHER card and Ethernet
Cable Length:
Maximum 100 m (328 ft.)
As required
REMARKS
For Q931a Roaming
over IP Trunk
(Virtual IPT)
• 100BASE-TX
Cable (TIA/EIA
category 5)*
Router*
As required
PN-AP00-B (DBM)
Roaming Data Base Module card
1
PN-IPTB (IPT)
IP Trunk card
1-8
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
4-channel CODEC card
1-32
IPTRK BUS CA
Set of 3 BUS Cables between IPT and
4VCT cards
Length: 0.1 m (0.33 ft.)
1-32 sets
• 10BASE-T Cable
(TIA/EIA category
3 or larger)*
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Cable
between IPT card and Ethernet
Cable Length:
Maximum 100 m (328 ft.)
As required
For Q931a Roaming
over IP Trunk
(Physical IPT)
• 100BASE-TX
Cable (TIA/EIA
category 5)*
Router*
As required
PN-AP00-B (DBM)
Roaming Data Base Module card
1
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Ethernet Control Card
1
• 10BASE-T Cable
(TIA/EIA category
3 or larger)*
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Cable
between ETHER card and Ethernet
Cable length:
Maximum 100 m (328 ft.)
1
For Short Message
Notification (OAI)
• 100BASE-TX
Cable (TIA/EIA
category 5)*
Page 16-18
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 16 Wireless System
UTAM Regulations and Reason for Existence
In 1994, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) finalized an order to create the
Personal Communications Services band for the purpose of encouraging the growth of
emerging technologies in the telecommunications area. In assigning the PCS frequency
spectrum, the FCC re-designated frequencies in the two GHz band currently used under
licenses granted for point-to-point private microwave transmission, referred to as Private
Operation Fixed Systems (POFS).
Because these users hold valid licenses, and in good faith had invested substantial sums of
money in the transmission systems, the FCC decided that the new PCS ventures that were to
benefit from the reallocation of these frequencies would be responsible for covering the costs
associated with replacing these two GHz microwave systems with microwave systems
operating in other frequencies, or with alternative services which provide comparable
transmission.
Thus, with a proposal from the PCS industry, the FCC appointed an organization named
UTAM, Inc. (Unlicensed Transition and Management for Microwave Relocation) to serve as the
single representative of the Unlicensed PCS (U-PCS) industry.
UTAM has identified, by counties within each state, certain areas in which a significant number
of U-PCS radiating devices can be installed without causing harmful interference to any
microwave receiver in an adjacent area. Having identified these areas, UTAM executes
collective Prior Coordination Notices (PCNs) on a per-county basis. Upon execution of these
notices, UTAM categorizes these areas as a ZONE 1 County. ZONE 2 Counties are those
counties not brought to a ZONE 1 status by UTAM. U-PCS installations within these counties
must be coordinated on a site-by-site basis.
As a member of UTAM, NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. is responsible for verification and reporting
the location of all WCS systems and number of units installed on each. To comply with this
regulatory requirement, NEC has developed features in the WCS system that requires NECAM
remote activation for any new system or additional ZTs. This means after the system or ZT is
installed and programmed, your technical staff on site must contact National Technical
Assistance Center (NTAC) at 1-800-852-4632) to request site activation or the Wireless
Coordinator of NEC will contact the Installation Contact and provide him/her with a Wireless
ID. The Wireless ID is used when accessing the NEC Location Verification Process Server.
The LVP Server is used to provide a LVP Code that is entered into the System programming of
the PBX. By this means the Wireless Feature is activated within the PBX.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 16-19
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System
Hospitality features are included in the basic system software of the NEAX 2000 IPS.
Additional software is not required. Any Business system can use the Hospitality features and
any Hospitality system can use any Business features as necessary.
The NEAX 2000 IPS Hotel/Motel features allow the hotel’s administrative staff to control the
telephone activity and check status of guest rooms. Service staff can also communicate the
condition of the guest rooms back to the front desk. By dialing access codes from the guest
room stations, the service staff can report to the front desk area that a room Needs repair,
Repairs are complete, Cleaning in progress, Cleaning complete, Room has been checked, and
other important service functions. By dialing access codes from the guest rooms, the time
spent dialing, waiting for answer, and communicating the message to someone is eliminated.
The NEAX2000 IPS Hospitality package offers the features that will be described in detail in
the following sections.
Hotel Feature List
Feature Name
Guest
Automatic Wake Up
X
Check In/Check Out Note
–
Direct Data Entry
X
Do Not Disturb-Hotel/Motel
X
Do Not Disturb-System
–
Hotel/Motel Attendant Console
–
Hotel/Motel Front Desk
–
Instrument
House Phone
X
Maid Status
X
Message Registration
–
Message Waiting
–
Property Management System
–
(PMS) Interface
Room Cutoff
–
Room Status
–
Single Digit Dialing
X
X: Applicable –: Not applicable
Application
Front Desk
Administrative
Terminal
X
X
–
X
–
–
X
X
–
X
–
–
Hotel
Console
X
–
–
X
X
X
PMS
X
X
X
X
–
–
–
X
–
–
X
X
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
X
–
X
X
X
–
–
–
–
–
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
Note: When MP built-in PMS on IP is provided, you can set and cancel this hotel feature only from PMS.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 17-1
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Application Processor
ƒ
PMS with AP00 on RS-232C
The Application Processor (AP) manages guest or administration room status and stores call
information on each guest or administrative station. The AP also provides interface ports for a
Property Management System (PMS), Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) and a Hotel
Printer.
ƒ
MP built-inPMS over IP
The Main Processor (MP) manages guest or administration room status and stores call
information on each guest or administrative station. The MP also provides a LAN interface port
for a Property Management System (PMS) terminal or a Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) terminal.
Hotel Console
The DESKCON is programmed as a Hotel Console. The Hotel Console can access Room Cutoff
(individual and group), Automatic Wake Up, Message Waiting, or Do Not Disturb (individual and group)
with the function keys; in addition to the attendant features and functions.
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Terminal
The Dterm can be programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel Front Desk Terminal. This allows setting and
canceling of the following hotel features:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Automatic Wake Up
Check In/Check Out Note
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb-Override
Message Waiting
Room Cutoff
Room Status Note
Note: When MP built-in PMS on IP is provided, you can set and cancel these hotel features only from PMS.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
The Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) sends out the outgoing/incoming C.O. call information
to an external SMDR terminal (Personal Computer). The SMDR is usually used in conjunction with the
PMS and used for the following purposes.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Management of guest/administrative station call
o The PMS does not manage the guest/administrative station call
Backup of guest/administrative station call for a PMS failure
Management of either guest or administrative station call
o For example, the SMDR manages an administrative station call, and the PMS
manages a guest station call
Page 17-2
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System
Hotel Printer
When PMS with AP00 on RS-232C is provided, the various system messages and the guest room
status can be obtained through a locally provided Hotel Printer. The following information is
automatically printed out as a system message:
Wake Up attempts whether successful or not
Remaining messages for the station which are set to Check Out
Codes and quantities of the goods requested from a guest room by Direct Data Entry
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
If the print out function key is provided on the Front Desk Terminal, the status of the following features
are printed out when the feature is set or reset and Room Status print out is activated:
Automatic Wake Up
Check In/Check Out
Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Room Cutoff
Room Status-individual guest station/all guest stations
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Features
Automatic Wake-up
This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call guest rooms or administration
stations at specified times. Upon answering, the guest is connected to a recorded announcement or
music source. A printout of Unanswered, Busy or Blocked Automatic Wake-Up attempts for each guest
room is provided using the Hotel/Motel printer.
Setting and canceling can be initiated from the following:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Attendant Console
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
Guest Station
Administrative Station
Property Management System (PMS) terminal
1. The time is entered on a 24-hour system in one-minute increments.
2. A maximum of 32 stations can be set for the same Automatic Wake-Up time. When the setting
exceeds 32, the excess stations will be set to an earlier time in five-minute intervals.
3. Wake-Up attempts, whether successful or not, can be printed out at a locally provided printer. The
results of execution of Automatic Wake-Up set and cancel are also printed.
4. The Automatic Wake-Up call will ring a station in Do Not Disturb.
5. When Automatic Wake-Up call is received, the station receives music or an announcement. A DAT
or COT card (with locally provided music or announcement source) is required. As an option, a PNDK00 card can be programmed to provide a contact closure for starting the external announcement
or music source when used with a COT card.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 17-3
Chapter 16 Wireless System
6. Data for Automatic Wake-Up programming is canceled by Check Out operation.
7. The number of Automatic Wake-Up call attempts is programmable from one to five times.
8. If the station does not answer, is busy, in Line Lockout, or ringing, recalling is initiated one minute
later. Recalling is repeated up to five times. Each call that fails is printed. When the final attempt
results in failure, a buzzer is sounded at the printer and a flashing LED on the DSS/BLF Console is
available to indicate which station does not answer.
9. Call Forwarding and other features will not reroute Automatic Wake-Up calls.
Check In / Check Out
When this feature is activated, the following operations occur:
Check In:
Room Cutoff is cleared.
Check Out:
Room Status printout is supplied.
Do Not Disturb is reset.
Room Cutoff is set.
Message Waiting is reset.
Automatic Wake Up is cleared.
Multiline Terminals with LCD can be assigned as Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments. This feature can
only be activated from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument or the Property Management System
(PMS). This feature only applies to guest room stations. Refer to the Hotel/Motel Front Desk
Instrument and Property Management System Features and Specifications for more information on
Check In/Check Out.
Note: When MP built-in PMS on IP is provided, you can set and cancel these hotel features only from PMS.
Direct Data Entry
This feature allows a maid or other hotel personnel to enter numeric data to the Property Management
System (PMS), using the guest room station for entry through dial operation. The same numerical data
can be output to a Hotel/Motel Printer by system data programming.
This feature is activated from a guest room telephone.
The digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 can be used for the input data.
The input data can be sent out to the PMS and/or Hotel/Motel Printer. The output option can be
selected by system data programming.
A maximum of 30 digits can be entered in one operation to the PMS and/or Hotel/Motel Printer. If data
exceeds 30 digits, the guest room station receives reorder tone.
If the input data to be sent is less than 30 digits, “#” can be used to end the digit string. (The “#” is not
sent to the PMS and Hotel/Motel Printer.)
Example: Access code + 1234567890#
Page 17-4
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System
When the Hotel/Motel Printer is used, “*” can be used to separate the data entry (“*” is not printed out,
but is sent out to the PMS). In this case, the input data including “*” is up to 30 digits.
Example: Access code + 001*002*12345*3#
Reorder tone will be received instead of service set tone if the PMS does not respond within 15
seconds or sends a negative answer to the NEAX 2000 IPS.
Do Not Disturb Console
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Do Not
Disturb (DND) Console. This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF
Console. DND set status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button. In
addition, the Multiline Terminal user can set/cancel the DND status of other stations using the DND
Console.
Do Not Disturb-Hotel/Motel
This feature allows the Attendant Consoles, Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments, guest stations or
Property Management System (PMS) terminals to place individual stations into Do Not Disturb. Calls
can be placed from stations set in DND.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Automatic Wake Up and Timed Reminder will override Do Not Disturb.
A station in Do Not Disturb can be called from the Attendant Console or the Hotel/Motel Front
Desk Instrument using the DNDOVR key.
Do Not Disturb is automatically cleared when Check Out is performed.
Depending on system programming, an incoming call addressed to a station in DND condition is
routed to one of the following on a per tenant basis:
o Reorder tone
o Attendant Console
o A pre-assigned station
Call Forwarding - Busy settings by stations in DND will result in calls being forwarded, even if
the stations are idle.
Do Not Disturb-System
This feature simultaneously restricts incoming calls to a pre-assigned group of stations by operation
from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments. Attendant Consoles and Hotel/Motel Front Desk
Instruments can use the DND OVR key to override this Do Not Disturb setting.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Stations are assigned to the Do Not Disturb (DND) Group in Class of Service.
Calls to extensions whose stations are in Do Not Disturb will receive reorder tone.
The station in Do Not Disturb can originate calls in the normal manner.
Verification of stations in Do Not Disturb is possible from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
and Attendant Consoles.
Only Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments and Attendant Consoles have the ability to place a
group of stations in Do Not Disturb. There is only one group available, and the stations within
the group are programmed in system data. There is no limitation on the number of stations in
the group.
A station included in a DND group retains the ability to place that particular station in DND.
When the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument places a group in DND, an individual station within
the group can cancel the DND setting to that station.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 17-5
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Hotel/Motel Attendant Console
The Attendant Console can be programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel Attendant Console. In addition
to the business features and functions of the Attendant, the Hotel/Motel Attendant Console can set
Room Cutoff (individual and group), Automatic Wake Up, Message Waiting, and Do Not Disturb
(individual and group).
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk
Instrument. This can be used to set and cancel standard H/M features such as the following:
ƒ Do Not Disturb
ƒ Room Cutoff
ƒ Message Waiting
ƒ Print Out
ƒ Check In/Check Out
ƒ Automatic Wake up
ƒ Room Status
ƒ Do Not Disturb Override
For each feature desired, a dedicated line key on the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument must be
assigned.
The Room Cutoff and Do Not Disturb features are applicable to a group of stations and individual
stations. There is one group available for each feature and the stations in the groups are programmed
on a per-station basis in system data.
The Print Out function provides a hard copy on the status of the following features when the feature is
set or reset:
ƒ Do Not Disturb
ƒ Room Cutoff
ƒ Message Waiting
ƒ Automatic Wake up
ƒ Room Status
ƒ Check In/Check Out
Successful and unsuccessful Wake Up attempts are printed out.
The Print Out function allows selection of output based on individual station numbers (except for Room
Status).
When Check Out is done, the following functions are set or cleared:
ƒ DND – cleared
ƒ Message Wait – cleared
ƒ Room Cutoff – set
ƒ Automatic Wake Up - cleared
Room Status Codes are totally flexible, and the user determines the meaning for each code. The
system will print the maid ID or station number (if other than guest room) that set the specific code. Up
to eight codes (1-8) are available.
Page 17-6
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System
House Phone
This feature allows selected stations to reach the Attendant simply by going off-hook.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
House Phones may be equipped without dials.
House Phone assignments are programmed into system data from the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) or the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
There is no limit to the number of House Phones permitted in the system provided the maximum
amount of available ports is not exceeded.
The Attendant has the option to process the call using the delay or non-delay operation or
passing dial tone to House Phones with dials.
The system’s response to a hookflash from a House Phone can be assigned to provide feature
dial tone or recall the Attendant.
Four house phone groups are available.
Each house phone group can be assigned to automatically call the Attendant Console or a
predestinated station.
Maid Status
This feature allows the Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument, Property Management System (PMS)
terminal, or guest room station (using special access code) to register the condition of each guest
room. There are a maximum of eight types of room conditions.
Although the system provides for a maximum of eight types of room conditions, the eight codes (1-8)
provided are not fixed for a given condition. This provides the end user with the flexibility to select any
code (1-8) to serve as the Maid Status code for any condition. When Maid Status is displayed, or
printed out, the digit(s) dialed as the code when the Maid Status was last changed are displayed or
printed.
When dialing from a guest station, a Maid Identification Code (maid ID code) can be provided (up to
two digits). This is allowed or denied in system programming. Status number Room condition (example;
see below)
1. Check In
2. Check Out
3. Under Cleaning
4. Cleaning Finished
5. Check Finished
6. Out of Service
7. Needs Maintenance
8. Maintenance Complete
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 17-7
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Message Registration
This feature provides output from the IPS to the Property Management System (PMS). This allows the
PMS system to receive call record reports for guest room phone calls. The PMS system can combine
the phone charges with the room charges, allowing for a presentable final bill to the guest upon check
out.
Message registration is a condensed SMDR record, designed to provide only the necessary call
information to the PMS system.
This feature is a function of the PMS feature and is optional. The standard SMDR output can be used
along with this feature.
Message Waiting
This feature allows the Attendant Console, Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument, administrative
station, or Property Management System (PMS) terminal to light a lamp (on an uninterrupted or
interrupted basis) on a Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal to indicate a message is waiting.
In addition to the lamp indication control, this feature also provides the Voice Message Waiting service
that an originating station user can set the Message Waiting with a prerecorded message by using the
Digital Announcement Trunk card (PN-2DATA)
Voice Message Waiting - System
An originating station user can choose the prerecorded message to be set by dialing the message
number associated. The predetermined station records the messages.
Voice Message Waiting - Individual
When setting Message Waiting, an originating station user announces the message to be recorded
after dialing the station number.
Message Waiting Console
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Message
Waiting (MW) Console. This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF
Console. The Message Waiting status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with
each button. In addition, the Multiline Terminal user can set/reset MW status using the MW Console.
The MW Console only displays/cancels the set status for those stations to whom Message Wait was
set, by the station user of the MW Console. If the system is initialized (reset), the Console function
mode will return to DSS/BLF.
Page 17-8
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System
Property Management System (PMS)
The NEAX 2000 IPS provides a data interface to a customer-supplied Property Management System
(PMS) accommodating Hotel Management Features. The PMS (Model 60 only) can be any computer
connected to the PBX via a RS-232C Interface. It communicates with the PBX using the specified
protocols.
The Data Link Interface allows the PMS to accommodate both front and back-office Hotel Management
Features, by providing a means of communication between the PMS and the PBX for features such as
Check In/Check Out, Message Waiting, Station Message Detail Data, and control features such as Do
Not Disturb and Room Cutoff.
The PMS can communicate with the PBX to obtain the following information:
1. Maid Status:
This information can be entered from either a guest room telephone or Front Desk Instrument, and
will automatically be transmitted to the PMS for data update.
2. Message Waiting Lamp Status Change
This information can be entered from the Attendant Console or Front Desk Instrument. It is then
automatically transmitted to the PMS for data update. If the automatic MW lamp off feature is
activated, MW data is cleared and status is sent to PMS.
3. Station Message Detail Data
This information is transmitted to the PMS after completion of each local and toll call.
4. Wake-Up Service
This information can be entered from the Attendant Console, Front Desk Instrument or guest room
station, and is automatically transmitted to the PMS for data update.
5. Do Not Disturb/Room Cutoff
This information can be entered from the Attendant Console or Front Desk Instrument, and is
transmitted to the PMS by request from the PMS.
6. Check-In/Check-Out
When PMS with AP00 on RS-232C is provided, this information can be entered from the Attendant
Console or Front Desk Instrument, and is automatically transmitted to the PMS for status update.
7. Room data image messages indicating requests for database updates and database images.
8. Room change, room swap and room copy for data update. Note
9. Room occupancy change and room data change for data update.
10. Routine activity checks between the PMS and the PBX.
Note: Room copy is available only when MP built-in PMS over IP is provided.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 17-9
Chapter 16 Wireless System
The PMS can send the following information to the PBX:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Maid Status
Message Waiting Lamp Status Changes
Telephone Restriction Status Changes
Check-In/Out Messages
Room Data Image Inquiry
Wake-Up Status Changes
Room Change, Room Swap and Room Copy Note
Room Occupancy and Room Data Change
Status inquiry for routine activity checks
Guest Name and Guest Information to be displayed on Administration Station, Front Desk
Instrument or Attendant Console Note
Note: Room copy and Guest Room Information is available only when MP built-in PMS over IP is provided.
Room Cutoff
This feature allows the Attendant Console, Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument, or Property
Management System (PMS) terminal, or guest room telephones using a special access code, to
temporarily restrict guest room telephones from making unauthorized calls when guests are away from
their room, and when rooms are in Check Out status. There are two types of Room Cutoff conditions
depending on the type of calls restricted.
ƒ
External Call Restriction: All outgoing calls from guest room stations are restricted in the Room
Cutoff status.
ƒ
Toll Call Restriction: All toll calls from guest room stations are restricted during Room Cutoff
status. (Internal and local calls are available.)
Stations in Room Cutoff condition are able to place outgoing calls using the Attendant Assisted Calling
feature. If the station under Room Cutoff status dials a C.O. line access code and/or a special area
code, the station is rerouted to one of the following:
ƒ Reorder tone
ƒ Attendant Console
Room Cutoff is automatically set by Check Out operation and it is automatically reset by Check In
operation. Station-to-station calling and service feature access (such as Maid Status) are still available.
Room Cutoff Console
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Room
Cutoff Console. This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF Console.
The Room Cutoff status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button. In
addition, the Multiline Terminal user can set/cancel Room Cutoff to another station using the Room
Cutoff Console.
The Room Cutoff Console only displays/cancels the set status for those stations that were set into room
cutoff by the station user of the Room Cutoff Console. Indication is not provided when another Room
Cutoff console, the Attendant Console, a Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument, or a PMS changes the RC
status of a station.
Page 17-10
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System
Room Status
This feature provides the Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument with a visual display of the guest’s
room status. A supplementary print out (individual and summary) can be provided.
Items indicated are as follows:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Set status of Do Not Disturb
Set status of Message Waiting
Set status of Room Cutoff
Automatic Wake Up Time if set
Check In/Check Out status
Maid Status
The status of the function is indicated by a green LED associated with each function key:
ƒ Check In/Check Out set
ƒ Do Not Disturb set
ƒ Message Waiting set
ƒ Room Cutoff set
ƒ Automatic Wake Up set (LCD displays time set)
The Room Status of stations can be printed at the Hotel/Motel printer (if available) by pressing the print
(PR) key on the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument prior to pressing the STS key.
Single Digit Dialing
This feature provides the station user the ability to dial single digit codes to access certain features
while still allowing the same digit dialed to be used as the first digit of guest room station numbers.
This feature is available on a numbering plan basis. Up to four different numbering plans are available
per system. For multiple tenant applications, each tenant can be assigned to one of these four
numbering plans.
When this feature is assigned, digits in the numbering plan can overlap and Single Digit Dialing is
based on a time-out after dialing the first digit. The timing duration before the system stops looking for a
second digit is programmable from two-eight seconds. The default setting is four-five seconds.
Digits 0-9, *, and # can be assigned within each numbering plan for Single Digit Dialing.
The following features can be activated using Single Digit Dialing:
ƒ Trunk Answer Any Station
ƒ Trunk Access
ƒ Single Digit Station Numbering
ƒ Operator Calls (Dial 0)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 17-11
Chapter 16 Wireless System
Hotel System Capacity
Description
Capacity
Guest/Administrative Station
Front Desk Terminal
Hotel Console
Hotel Printer
I/O port for PMS/SMDR/Hotel Printer
I/O port for SMDR/PMS via LAN
I/O port for Hotel Printer
1020
8
8
2
2
1
2
System Specifications
ƒ
PMS/SMDR via RS-232C Interface (Model 60 only) and Hotel Printer Interface
Specifications
PMS/SMDR Interface
Hotel Printer Interface
Item
Physical Interface
RS-232C
RS-232C
Synchronization
Asynchronous
Asynchronous
Protocol
IMS Procedure
—
Transmission Speed
1200/2400/4800/9600 bps Note
1200/2400/4800 bps
I/O port
No. 0-3 port of AP00-B card
No. 0/3 port of AP00-B card
Note: For the port 1 and port 3 of AP00-B card with AP00 program, data speed cannot be set to 9600 bps.
ƒ
PMS/SMDR via LAN Interface (Model 90/120 only)
Item
Specifications
Physical layer
Ethernet
Connection layer
Ethernet packet format complies with the DIX standard.
TCP/IP protocol
ARP, IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP
Socket interface
Complies with 4.3 BSD socket interface
Transport protocol
TCP stream type protocol
Application port number
SMDR: 60010 (fixed)
PMS : 60050 (fixed)
Number of connections
1
Client/Server
Client : SMDR/PMS terminal
Server: PBX
Transmission code
7-bit ASCII code
Quasi-normal restriction condition
1. When connection is closed
2. Status monitoring text
Page 17-12
NEAX2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 17 Hotel/Motel System
Station Equipment
Front Desk Instrument:
Dterm Series E/Series i with Display
Terminals with 16 feature keys are recommended
Guest Room Phone:
Analog Single Line
H/M Analog Single Line
Dterm Series E Digital 2-Line
Hotel/Motel Attendant Console:
SN716 DESKCON
House Phone:
Analog Single Line
Dterm Series E/Series i Digital Terminal
Administration Phone:
Analog Single Lines
Dterm Series E/Series i Digital Terminal
NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 17-13
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
AIMWorX™
NEC’s Applications Integration Manager or AIMWorXTM is an application suite of management
software based on a call accounting foundation. It provides an easy way to cost calls with a
variety of features to use this information. AIMWorX has a wide range of predefined
administrative reports and gives you the ability to create your own.
AIMWorX first gathers Station Message Detail Records (SMDR) from the switch. This data
stream is sent each time a call is completed. It contains data about the call including; trunk and
route information, phone numbers of where the call was placed from and where it went to,
what time it started and ended, and variable information that may include authorization codes,
account codes, or office codes. AIMWorX costs each record using costing data that you have
defined to create Call Detail Records (CDR). These records provide the data to run queries
and reports.
AIMWorX supports many Single Point of Entry (SPE) plug-in modules and add-on applications.
Single Point of Entry modules share AIMWorX’s databases, allowing user information to be
entered once for many different applications. These modules add interfacing capabilities to
remote functions through tabs added to the AIMWorX screens.
Add-on applications are telecommunication packages that have separate user interfaces but
can use AIMWorX’s already established database. Examples of add-ons are Interactive
Directory, Message Center, and Visual Console.
All optional features, plug-ins, and applications are delivered on a single CD ROM. Included,
as part of the package is a security mechanism (hardware key) that allows the customer to
register the product, and to activate the desired features for the product that they selected.
Also contained on the CD ROM are online help files for each application, and a copy of all
associated application documentation that can be read by the customer using a shareware tool
included for this specific purpose.
AIMWorX is available as software only for use with customer-provided PC, or as a turnkey
hardware system. These turnkey systems are pre-loaded at our customizing center on servers
and desktop PCs from NEC Computer Systems Division (NEC CSD).
AIMWorX integrates with Property Management Systems when the AIMWorX Hospitality Links
module is purchased.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page18- 1
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
Multi-Site (Centralized Operations)
Multi-Site operation allows AIMWorX’s Call Accounting to collect data from more than one SMDR
source. Simply put, a site is a PBX or group of PBXs. If you have several separate PBXs (operating
independently, whether on- or off-premises), Multi-Site operation is required to let AIMWorX collect the
call data and process it for each site. Multi-Site collects SMDR via polling, direct connection, or a
combination of both. How AIMWorX handles each PBX is configured in its PBX setup screens.
AIMWorX databases
AIMWorX supports both Microsoft SQL database.
You may purchase client/server version of AIMWorX with SQL Server 2000 database or without a
database. AIMWorX demonstration systems may use the free version of SQL Server called Microsoft
Database Engine (MSDE). This is included on the AIMWorX CD.
Select Database Licensing Option
Description
Notes
AIMWorX Standalone DB
AIMWorX Program Disk with
Microsoft SQL 2000 Integrated Disk
1 Client Access License
AIMWorX C/S NEC Provided DB AIMWorX Program Disk with
Microsoft SQL 2000 Integrated Disk
5 Client Access Licenses
AIMWorX C/S Cust. Provided DB
AIMWorX Program Disk
No Database - Customer provided
AIMWorX Standalone DB: The AIMWorX Standalone Database includes the AIMWorX Program disk,
which has all modules on it. The core modules that are enabled are AIMWorX Manager (Call
Accounting) and Alarm Manager (included, is the freely licensable Alarm Client). The standalone
version only allows one person to access the AIMWorX application at a time, from the AIMWorX server.
AIMWorX C/S NEC Provided DB: The AIMWorX Client/Server NEC Provided Database includes the
AIMWorX Program disk, which has all modules on it. The core modules that are enabled are AIMWorX
Manager (Call Accounting) and Alarm Manager (included, is the freely licensable Alarm Client).
Processor licensing allows an unlimited number of clients to access the AIMWorX applications
simultaneously from remote PCs connected to the LAN. Access from PCs over the Internet is also
possible, if the proper TCP/IP port is enabled through an organizations firewall. Refer to AIMWorX
documentation for more information on this.
AIMWorX C/S Customer Provided DB: The AIMWorX Client/Server Customer Provided Database
includes the AIMWorX Program disk, which has all modules on it. The core modules that are enabled
are AIMWorX Manager (Call Accounting) and Alarm Manager (included, is the freely licensable Alarm
Client).
Page18- 2
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
SQL Server licensing
If you purchase SQL Server with AIMWorX, the licensing is provided in multiples of five Client Access
Licenses (CALs). All AIMWorX Client/ Server versions include the first five CALs. Purchase additional
CALs in multiples of five.
You may also choose to license the SQL Server database in processor licenses. You purchase one
processor license for each processor in the AIMWorX server and receive unlimited user login name
assignments. Purchase additional processor licenses from your NEC distributor.
Oracle database
If you choose to use an Oracle database, you must purchase it separately. Oracle 7.3.x versions may
be installed on the AIMWorX server computer or on a computer networked to the AIMWorX server. In
either case, all AIMWorX clients must have Oracle Client 7.3.x installed. This is done automatically
during the AIMWorX client installation.
Licensing
AIMWorX modules are sold and licensed on a per customer basis. You purchase an AIMWorX tier, the
AIMWorX modules you need, and the number of seats for each module. Your security key is
programmed with these variables and gives you access to the appropriate parts of the installed
program.
Seat licenses
Each module you purchase comes with five seats or instances of this module. The license server will let
you have five copies of the module active at a time. Starting a sixth copy will cause an access violation
error. Purchase groups of five seats for any module from your AIMWorX distributor.
SQL Server database licenses are sold separately, based on the database manufacturer’s
requirements.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page18- 3
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
Security
A security program on the server prohibits AIMWorX usage beyond what you have licensed. This
program keeps track of the number clients using AIMWorX, the modules you have licensed, and the
instances of each module. It interacts with your security key and the application on each client to allow
or disallow you access based on the license you purchased and what is currently running.
The security key plugs into the parallel port of the server computer. It is programmed in combination
with your serial registration number, so cannot be copied or used on other installations.
Information you need before installing AIMWorX
Before you install any of the AIMWorX modules, you need to know some information about your phone
service carrier, your switch, the trunks and routes, your organization, how you will cost the calls, and
the computers.
AIMWorX supports, but is not limited to:
ƒ C/O Line
ƒ DID-incoming only
ƒ Tie line
ƒ F/X-Foreign Exchange
ƒ TSDN
ƒ VPS
ƒ Conference
ƒ CAS line
ƒ Data DM
ƒ Hot lines
Configurations
Standalone
This allows the user to only access the AIMWorX applications from the server on which they are
installed (Network Printers and email can still be used - Also the freely licensable Alarm Clients can still
be used from Network PCs). This includes the AIMWorX Program Disk (1 CD) and the AIMWorX
Database Disk (1 CD). The AIMWorX Database Disk provides Microsoft SQL 2000 both Personal and
Standard Editions. The Standard Edition is used with Windows 2000 Professional/Server and with
Windows NT Workstation/Server. The Personal Edition is used with Windows 98. It is HIGHLY
Recommended that you install Standalone AIMWorX Systems on a Microsoft 2000 Professional or
Microsoft XP Professional Operating System.
C/S NEC
This is a Client/Server configuration that includes 5 MS SQL 2000 Client Access Licenses. Additional
Client/Access Licenses may be selected below. This includes the AIMWorX Program Disk (1 CD) and
the AIMWorX Database Disk (1 CD). The AIMWorX Database Disk provides Microsoft SQL 2000 both
Personal and Standard Editions. The Standard Edition is used with Windows 2000 Professional/Server
and with Windows NT Workstation/Server.
Page18- 4
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
C/S CUST
This is a Client/Server configuration. It does not include a database. The Database must be provided by
the customer. Currently supported Databases are Microsoft SQL 2000 (SP1 and above) and Oracle
7.3.4. The customer is responsible for purchasing the database of their choice and the database
licenses they desire. This option includes the AIMWorX Program Disk (1 CD).
Call Record and User Capacity
You can purchase AIMWorX in one of six tiers: Basic, Business, Small Corporate, Corporate,
Enterprise, and Large Enterprise. These tiers differ based on the number of user records each
supports. The smaller tiers can be run as standalone systems, while others operate in a client/server
environment only.
Basic tier
The Basic tier manages up to 200 extensions or users. It can be installed as a standalone system
or in a client/server environment and works with the NEC NEAX2000 switch family, the NEC
NEAX2400 switch family, and some non-NEC switches for SMDR collection only. This system
supports AIMWorX Manager, call accounting features, and most AIMWorX features and modules.
Business tier
The Business tier manages up to 500 extensions or users. It can be installed as a standalone
system or in a client/server environment and works with the NEC NEAX2000 switch family, the
NEC NEAX2400 switch family, and some non-NEC switches for SMDR collection only. This
system supports all AIMWorX features and modules.
Small Corporate tier
The Small Corporate tier manages up to 2,500 extensions or users. It can be installed as a
standalone system or in a client/server environment and works with the NEC NEAX2000 switch
family, the NEC NEAX2400 switch family, and some non-NEC switches for SMDR collection only.
This system supports all AIMWorX features and modules.
Corporate tier
The Corporate tier manages up to 5,000 extensions or users. It can be installed as a standalone
system or in a client/server environment and works with the NEC NEAX2000 switch family, the
NEC NEAX2400 switch family, and some non-NEC switches for SMDR collection only. This
system supports all AIMWorX features and modules.
Enterprise tier
The Enterprise tier handles up to 65,000 extensions or users. It must be installed in client/server
format. It works with the NEC NEAX2000 switch family, the NEC NEAX2400 switch family, and
some non-NEC switches for SMDR collection only. This system supports all AIMWorX features
and modules.
Large Enterprise tier
The Large Enterprise tier handles up to 125,000 extensions or users. It must be installed in
client/server format. It works with the NEAX2000 switch family, the NEC NEAX2400 switch family,
and some non-NEC switches for SMDR collection only. This system supports all AIMWorX
features and modules.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page18- 5
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
The AIMWorX Manager
The AIMWorX Manager is the foundation of AIMWorX. This allows a user to synchronize
databases and to control multiple modules via a true single point of entry. It also includes a
complete call accounting system offering over 20 reports, each of which can be fully
customized and saved for later use. Reports can be scheduled far in advance to print to file (in
a variety of formats) or to paper. Reports printed to file can be viewed over the network via a
small application loaded on the interested party’s computers. Printing times can be scheduled
to suit the specific needs of the company.
Integrating AIMWorX modules
AIMWorX modules add flexibility to your telemanagement system because you only purchase
the modules that you need. Nearly all of them interface with AIMWorX Manager. Some are
accessed directly through a tab on the Users screen, while others have separate interfaces,
but use the call accounting database. AIMWorX modules seamlessly integrate with each other.
To ensure this integration, certain modules should be purchased together. Some modules
should not be paired.
AIMWorX works optimally if these modules are paired:
ƒ Cable Manager and Asset Manager
ƒ Work Order and Trouble Ticket
ƒ Asset Manager and Billing Manager
ƒ NEAX SPE and Voice Mail SPE
ƒ NEAX SPE and Auth Code Manager
ƒ NEAX SPE, 9-1-1 OSN, and Alarm Manager
ƒ AIMWorX Manager and Multi-site
ƒ Hospitality Links and Voice Mail SPE
ƒ Traffic Analysis and NEAX SPE
These modules are mutually exclusive and should not be purchased together:
ƒ Interactive Directory 2000 and Interactive Directory 2400
ƒ Interactive Directory 2000/2400 and Message Center
Work Order should have these three modules at a minimum to work:
ƒ NEAX SPE
ƒ Asset Manager
ƒ Billing Manager
Work Order will best enhance your system’s capabilities when combined with these modules in addition
to the modules above:
ƒ Trouble Ticket
ƒ 9-1-1 SPE
ƒ 9-1-1 OSN
ƒ Interactive Directory
ƒ Auth Code Manager
ƒ Cable Manager
ƒ Voice Mail SPE
Page18- 6
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
9-1-1 SPE
9-1-1 SPE is a module that lets you download specific user location information directly to the phone
company’s ALI system. It appears as a tab on the Users screen in AIMWorX Manager and exports the
9-1-1 user database in NENA format. The 9-1-1 SPE is not involved at the time of an emergency; it
supplies user location information to the ALI system, which then supplies it to the authorities when
needed.
9-1-1 On Site Notification is a feature of Alarm Manager that will notify your own security department
with the same information when someone places a 9-1-1 call.
Alarm Manager
The Alarm Manager feature of AIMWorX provides a service that collects and forwards 9-1-1 OSN,
Traffic, Collector, Auth Code and other alarm notices to Alarm Clients. Alarm Clients must be
networked to AIMWorX, but do not need to be AIMWorX clients. Through the Alarm Manager you can
define which clients receive which alarm notices, and what happens if the alarm is not acknowledged.
Asset Manager
The Asset Manager module of AIMWorX is a way to track stock inventory once it becomes an asset.
Asset Manager lets you record all assets and assign them to categories and subcategories. It track
warranties, vendors, and manufacturers for assets and lets you bill them to a user, department, or
customer. This program works in conjunction with the other AIMWorX modules and has extensive
import and export capabilities in order to share data with your current accounting and inventory
programs.
Auth Code Manager
Auth Code Manager is in charge of tracking and monitoring authorization codes as well as granting
permissions at the time of a call. Use authorization codes to define limits and access for specific users.
Auth Code Manager interfaces to the AIMWorX database for user information and appears as a tab on
the user screen.
Billing Manager
Billing Manager is a module of AIMWorX that provides a way to charge a customer, department, or
company for calls, equipment, and services. It is not a full-blown accounting system, but a subsystem of
AIMWorX that will export phone related charges in formats acceptable to your organization's current
accounting package. This module works with the AIMWorX Manager, Asset Manager, and Work Order
to provide a billing solution for your telemanagement needs.
Bill Reconciler
Bill Reconciler compares monthly billing statements from the telephone service carrier to CDR
generated by AIMWorX. You can also save the results from this comparison and create reports using
this cost, your cost, or the billed cost, or the differences between them.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page18- 7
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
Cable Manager
Cable Manager lets you maintain information on the cable and wire layout of your facility. It lets you
perform powerful end-to-end searches and recommends a cable path, lets you review it, then reserves
it. You can define each down to the levels of rooms and closets in a drag and drop graphic
representation. On other screens, assign switch nodes and ports, frames, blocks, pairs, crossconnects, locations, and include descriptions. Cable Manager complies with EIA/TIA-568 A&B wiring
standards and the EIA/TIA-606 Wire Records Keeping procedures recommended by the International
Standards Body.
Custom SPE Writer
Custom SPE Writer lets you create AIMWorX SPE modules for applications outside of AIMWorX. Use
your own development tools to create an interface using commands that talk to the AIMWorX Arena.
Each application will then appear as a new tab on the Users screen and you can populate the external
database from inside AIMWorX.
Hospitality Links
Hospitality Links combines the power of your Property Management System (PMS), the flexibility of
your NEAX 2400 IMX/IPX Hospitality switch, and the control of AIMWorX into one solution for your
Hospitality environment. This module lets you manage your administrative call accounting while
formatting and forwarding guest calls to your PMS for billing. The AIMWorX Suite Master application is
a part of Hospitality Links and lets you manage the Flexible Suiting feature of the NEAX 2400 IMX/IPX
Hospitality switch.
Interactive Directory
Interactive Directory is an electronic phone book and more. It provides a directory of user information
including extension, fax number, phone number, emergency number, e-mail address, and twelve
custom fields of information. The directory can be published from AIMWorX Manager or you can enter
user information directly through the Interactive Directory Manager program.
NEAX 2000 SPE
NEAX SPE is a module that lets you manage some of the switch Maintenance and Administration
Terminal (MAT) functions from your AIMWorX computer. This program is a typical example of the
concept of ‘single point of entry’. Once the user information is in the AIMWorX system, you can
program the switch with information to assign phones, extensions, and other administrative duties. This
is all done from a single screen in AIMWorX Manager.
Traffic Analysis
Traffic Analysis intercepts the NEAX 2000 IPS statistics, such as peg counts, from the PBX's MAT port
and uses them to analyze your telecommunications needs. This module shows your single or multiswitch system in a graphic layout. It provides a graph of call traffic between PBXs and lets you zoom in
on specific sections to assess usage of specific paths in 30-minute segments.
Page18- 8
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
Trouble Ticket
Trouble Ticket simplifies the trouble reporting, resolution, and tracking process. It lets you see a
database of telecom problems and their associated solutions with a simple character search. Suggest
simple solutions over the phone or create work orders, on the same screen, for the more involved
problems.
Voice Mail SPE
Voice Mail SPE is an AIMWorX module that lets you program the voice mail system from a tab on the
AIMWorX Manager users screen. This interface lets you avoid the time needed and mistakes made by
entering the duplicate information into two systems. The AIMWorX Voice Mail SPE currently supports
the Octel Overture 250, Baypoint/Centigram C70, 120I, 120R, 120S, or 640, Captaris/AVT CallXpress,
and NEAXMail AD-40 and NEAXMail AD-120 voice mail systems.
Work Order
Work Order lets you create work orders that automate commands from all the other AIMWorX modules.
It uses a separate user interface that lets you schedule work orders, manage technician’s schedules,
track progress through completion, and manage inventory and billing.
Supported Operating Systems
Database
MS SQL
2000
ME
No
AIMWorX Server – Standalone Configuration
XP Home
2000 Prof.
XP Prof.
2000 Server
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
2003 Server
Yes
Database
MS SQL
2000
ME
No
AIMWorX Server – Client/Server Configuration
XP Home
2000 Prof.
XP Prof.
2000 Server
No
No
No
Yes
2003 Server
Yes
Database
MS SQL
2000
ME
No
AIMWorX Client Configuration
XP Home
2000 Prof.
XP Prof.
2000 Server
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
2003 Server
Yes
PC/Server Minimum Requirements
The minimum requirements listed below are based on current data. They are minimum
configurations only. Site requirements may vary based on call volume, Server Hardware used,
number of hard drives, etc. If in doubt, contact NEC’s Application Engineering department for
verification. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc., reserves the right to change the minimum
requirements at any time, without prior notice.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page18- 9
Chapter 18 Call Accounting
AIMWorX Standalone Minimum Requirements
Module
Basic
Business
Sm-Corporate
Corporate
CPU
P-III 400Mhz
P-III 400Mhz
P-III 400Mhz
P-III 400Mhz
RAM
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
Hard Drive Size
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
RAM
256MB
256MB
384MB
384MB
512MB
512MB
Hard Drive Size
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
RAM
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
256MB
256MB
Hard Drive Size
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
1,000,000 CDRs/1GB
Server Minimum Requirements
Module
Basic
Business
Sm-Corporate
Corporate
Enterprise
Large-Enterprise
CPU
P-III 400Mhz
P-III 400Mhz
P-III 400Mhz
P-III 400Mhz
Dual Pentium III 400Mhz
Dual Pentium III 400Mhz
Client Minimum Requirements
Module
Basic
Business
Sm-Corporate
Corporate
Enterprise
Large-Enterprise
CPU
Pentium II 350Mhz
Pentium II 350Mhz
Pentium II 350Mhz
Pentium II 350Mhz
Pentium II 350Mhz
Pentium II 350Mhz
Additional Reference Material
All additional documentation is included on the CD ROM. Also included on the CD-ROM is a copy of
Acrobat Reader to view the documentation.
Page18- 10
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Voice Mail Integration
Voice mail allows callers to leave a recorded message, in their own voice and exact words, for
another individual or group of individuals. With a voice mail application, people can
communicate precisely and personally without having to be on the same telephone line at the
same time. Voice mail applications allow communication to take place without endless games
of telephone tag. Research has shown that only one-third of all business calls achieve direct
contact, yet 40% of all messages are one way messages that do not require dialogue. Voice
mail saves time by allowing you to leave a message immediately. Voice mail bypasses the
problems of time zones, after-switchboard hours, and other obstacles to communication in this
fast-paced business world. Voice mail allows the people in your office to better manage their
communications and time.
Voice mail features can be used by accessing the VMS directly from an extension. If a station
sets its call forwarding destination to the VMS, calls to this station are connected to the VMS,
and the messages can be registered according to the VMS instruction. In addition, the
Message Waiting lamp of the station can be turned on automatically by the VMS.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. offers the following voice mail systems to integrate to the NEAX
2000 IPS system.
NEAXMail AD-8: A card-type voice processing system with various features. The card is
mounted into the LT slot on the PBX. The basic system of the NEAXMail AD-8 provides four
ports of voice mail. Adding an additional extension card provides four additional ports yielding
a maximum of eight voice mail ports.
NEAX Mail AD-120: The AD-120 is available in 4 to 72-port configurations and offers both
analog and digital station port integration. The AD-120 may cluster up to 5 72-port systems
supporting a total of 360 ports. The AD-120 also provides a range of capabilities, from voice
messaging to unified messaging.
NEAXMail AD-64: The AD-64 is available in 4 to 96-port configurations and is digitally
integrated to the NEAX 2000 IPS PBX. The NEAXMail AD-64 comes as a Level I or Level II
system and offers a “25 free seat license of TeLANophy” along with other optional features.
NEAXMail IM-16: A card type voice processing system with various features and is mounted
into the LT slot of the PBX. The basic system of the NEAXMail IM-16 provides 4 ports of voice
mail. Adding an additional extension card provides 4, 8, 12 additional ports yielding a
maximum of 16voice mail ports.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 1
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Service Conditions
1. The system transfers only DTMF signals to the connected VMS. It cannot transfer dial pulses to the
system.
2. Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal, DTMF telephone, or the Attendant
Console, but not from DP telephones.
3. When the calling party is connected to the Voice Mail System, only DTMF signals can be sent to the
VMS for registering a message. DP telephones cannot be used.
4. Stations can set Call Forwarding - All Calls, Call Forwarding - No Answer, and Call Forwarding –
Busy Line to the VMS. The system sends out a mail box number to the VMS. Calling a station that
has Call Forwarding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS.
5. The DTMF signal pause, Inter-Digit Pause, and DTMF signal width of the station number
automatically sent out to the VMS from the system are as follows:
a. Pause: Variable from 1 second to 12 seconds in 1 second increments
b. Inter-Digit Pause: Variable from 32 milliseconds to 240 milliseconds
c. DTMF signal width: Fixed at 64 milliseconds or 128 milliseconds
6. A special number of up to 4 digits (including an Inter-Digit Pause) can automatically be added, both
before and after, to the station number that is sent to the VMS from the system. This can be used
for a variety of identification codes as required. Two types of Inter-Digit Pauses can be set per
system. One is fixed at 1.5 seconds, and the other is programmable from 1.5 seconds to 16
seconds.
7. The VMS can control the Message Waiting Lamp of the Station set by using the Message
Waiting/Message Reminder feature. The retrieval access code for Message Waiting/Message
Reminder is variable and can be set from 1 to 4 digits, in system programming.
8. When all VMS ports are busy (assuming the following condition):
Station-A (or outside party)....Calling Party
Station-B....Called Party
Station-B sets Call Forwarding - All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to the VMS.
Station-A (or outside party) makes a call to Station-B.
a. Call Forwarding - All Calls :
a. Station A hears reorder tone.
b. Outside party hears busy tone.
b. Call Forwarding - Busy Line
a. Station-A hears busy tone, and can set any busy service to station-B.
b. Outside party hears busy tone.
Page 19- 2
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Service Conditions (Cont.)
c. Call Forwarding - No Answer
a. Station-B continues to ring until the VMS becomes idle regardless of whether the
predetermined time for Call Forwarding - No Answer has elapsed. When the VMS
becomes idle, Station-A is connected to the VMS.
d. Direct access to VMS
a. If station A or outside party accesses the VMS directly, the outside party hears busy tone
and station A can set call back to the VMS.
9. Multiple Call Forwarding to VMS: When the final destination for any combination of Multiple Call
Forwarding is the VMS, calls can be transferred to the VMS. The first forwarded station's number
(forwarded to the VMS) is sent to the VMS. For example, a call is received by Station A, which is
forwarded to Station-B, which is forwarded to Station-C, which is forwarded to VMS. The number of
Station-A is sent to the VMS.
10. Ringing Transfer to an Attendant via the VMS: The system allows the VMS to transfer the station or
outside party to the Attendant and releases before the Attendant answers.
11. When the VMS is recalled, by transferring the call to an unanswered station, the system may be
programmed to send the recalling extension number to the VMS.
12. A maximum of 26 digit extension numbers including DTMF signal after the VMS answered, can be
programmed to a One Touch key of a Multiline Terminal.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 3
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Message Center Interface (MCI)
This feature provides an interface with a NEC supplied Voice Mail System (VMS), which can
send Message Waiting lamp control data to the system. The Message Center Interface (MCI)
can provide the following operations:
1. When terminating the call to the VMS, the system sends call connection status information to the
VMS through the MCI.
2. The VMS sends the Message Waiting Lamp on data to the MCI.
3. The system, upon receiving this control data from the MCI, illuminates the Message Waiting lamp of
the corresponding station.
4. The VMS, upon receiving retrieved message information, will send the Message Waiting lamp
control data requesting the system to extinguish the Message Waiting lamp of the corresponding
station.
5. The MCI interface is a half-duplex, RS232C, asynchronous data link that operates under a specific
message protocol and format. The data link hardware consists of a RS-232C serial interface to the
PBX. The characteristics of the link, the protocol used, and the message text are shown below.
Item
Data Rate
Operating Mode:
Electrical Interface
Characteristic:
Signal Form:
Interface Distance:
Word Framing:
Parity* VRC:
Frame Contents:
Control:
Priority Sequence:
Description
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bps asynchronous, software
selectable
Half duplex
EIA RS-232C electrical standard interface
EIA RS-404
Max. 15 m (49.2 ft.) between PBX and VMS (without modem)
Note: When modems are used, full duplex asynchronous type
modems are required.
10 bits (1 start, 7 data, 2 stop)
No parity, even parity, odd parity; selected by PBX system
data
US ASCII 7-bit codes
Contention
Primary station: PBX
Secondary station: VMS
MCI Service Conditions
1. The UCD or Station Hunting feature is usually provided with the VMS station.
2. One RS-232C port on the MP card or the Application Processor (AP00) is required to make a data
link with a customer supplied VMS.
3. Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal, DTMF telephone, or the Attendant
Console, but not from DP telephones.
Page 19- 4
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
4. The MCI is available to a direct call or a forwarded call from a station/trunk/Attendant to the VMS.
For details of the connecting patterns, refer to the Installation Procedure Manual/Feature
Programming Manual.
5. Stations can set Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding - All Calls, No Answer, and Busy Line to
the VMS. The system sends out incoming call information to the VMS. A call to a station that has
Call Forwarding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS.
6. The MCI can control the LCD display of a Multiline Terminal for “MESSAGE” Indication. The
number of messages is not displayed.
7. When the Message Waiting lamp control is activated with the MCI, the lamp control from the
following equipment will not be provided:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
From the Property Management System (PMS)
From the Station (by dialing the access code)
From the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
From the Hotel/Motel Attendant Console
From the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
From the Attendant Console
8. Only one system should be programmed (via system programming) to control Message Waiting
lamps through the CCIS network.
9. The system controls Message Waiting lamps normally when the time interval between messages is
a minimum of 350 msec. or more.
10. When the VMS interface line does not answer, all of the messages are sent out from the I/O port of
the MP/AP00.
11. If the VMS is not ready for information receiving (Busy Status), the AP00 can temporarily store up to
16 call records in its internal memory. If the maximum of 16 call records is stored and a 17th is
generated, the system will write over the oldest stored record.
12. When the RS port on the MP card is used for the data link to the VMS, the MP can store up to 15
call records. If a 16th call record is generated when the MP stores 15 call records, the system will
write over the oldest stored record.
13. The Voice Mail Integration (In-band) feature can be combined with voice mail through the MCI in
the system. The Voice Mail Integration (In-band) feature and MCI feature can coexist in one
system and either can be selected per VMS (VMS station number) by system programming.
14. When terminating a call with the ANI information to the VMS through the MCI, the system can send
the ANI information to the VMS, if required. This is not available through CCIS interface.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 5
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
NEAXMail AD-8
The NEAXMail AD-8 is a feature rich, completely assembled, self-contained voice processing
system. The NEAXMail AD-8 mounts in the first card slot of the NEAX 2000 IPS (LT00) or any
universal card slot. The NEAXMail AD-8 is available in either 4 or 8 port capacity and provides
120 storage hours with unlimited mailboxes.
The NEAXMailAD-8 (PN-VM00) provides a built-in 14.4 Kbps modem for remote maintenance,
Message Center Interface (MCI) port for networking and a direct connect port for on site
maintenance. The NEAXMailAD-8 (4 port) comes with software installed on the hard drive,
license agreements and CoSession (VM programming) floppy disk 1. Optionally, you can add
a small card (PN-VM01) that plugs into a connector on the NEAXMailAD-8 (4 port) card, which
will provide additional 4 ports for a total of 8 ports.
The NEAXMail AD-8 is simple, compact, and provides seamless digital integration. No
additional computers or bulky boxes are needed, saving your customer valuable space. In
addition, the NEAXMail1 AD-8 can be battery backed-up by the same source which is
providing battery back-up to the phone system (internal or external). Best of all, it is a costeffective solution for your customers voice mail and auto-attendant needs.
PN-VM01 to PN-VM00
The hard drive, built-in modem, 4 digital ports, and COM ports 1 & 2 are contained on the PN-VM00
circuit card. An additional 4 ports may be added to the PN-VM00 by mounting the PN-VM01 circuit card
to the PN-VM00 card as shown below.
Soft-Key Feature
The Soft-Key feature provides NEAX 2000 IPS customers a visual menu on their Dterm telephone. SoftKeys also provide access to functions such as new messages, old messages, create message, pause,
next, back, archive, delete, reply and redirect.
Existing NEAXMail AD-8 voicemail systems can be updated with the NEAXMail AD-8 Soft-Key Upgrade
Kit to provide this productivity enhancing capability. All new orders for NEAXMail AD-8 are shipping
with Soft-Key functionality.
The NEAXMail AD-8 Soft-Key Upgrade Kit includes:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
AP VM-0.7 CA-A
RMT Maintenance for Windows
Hardware Update (FD)
System Update (FD)
Prompt Update (FD)
NEAXMail AD-8 BRU Remote (FD)
Page 19- 6
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
BRU Utility
The NEAXMail AD-8 includes the BRU utility. The BRU utility is a multi-purpose program that lets you
Backup, Restore, and Update your NEAXMail AD-8 voice-messaging system. The BRU makes it
possible to recover quickly in the event of an equipment failure or system down condition.
RNet/AMIS (Option)
RNet is a multi-site messaging feature that lets subscribers at different sites exchange voice messages
as if they were using a single voice messaging system. RNet is useful for communicating with regional
offices, vendors or customers that have their own (other manufacturers) voice messaging systems.
RNet can be used with any voice messaging system that uses the Audio Messaging Interchange
Specification (AMIS) analog protocol. RNet/AMIS is an option not included in the NEAXMail AD-8 or
NEAXMail Soft-Key Upgrade Kit that may be purchased separately.
RNet/AMIS provides essential voicemail functionality/features such as:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Send, receive and reply
Send messages to subscribers
Identify subscribers by extension
Urgent messages*
Return receipt: time of message transmission
Future messages**
Time stamp reflects time of message transmission
Notification of message not received
Error notification: console and voice error notices
* Messages are transmitted immediately, but the recipient is not told the message is urgent.
** The recipient is not told the message was pre-recorded.
Automated Attendant
Most offices are equipped with electronic telephone systems. In some cases, these systems do not
allow an outside caller to directly dial an inside extension. This means that all incoming calls must go
through the receptionist, who transfers them to the applicable extension – a costly and time consuming
method. Also, when there is no receptionist on duty, there is no way to get through to any extension.
NEAXMail AD8 solves these problems with its automated attendant features. It can act as a
receptionist and handle incoming calls on a telephone system. It answers a call, finds out what
extension number the caller wants, and transfers the call to that extension. The system can hold more
than one call for a single extension, informing the callers of how many calls are holding ahead of them
and updating this information periodically. It can screen calls, announce the name of the caller, and wait
for confirmation from the recipient before putting the call through. Automated attendant features can
relieve your receptionist of routine telephone tasks.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 7
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Directory Assistance
People who call your office may not know the extension number of the person they are trying to reach.
In these cases, a caller must find out the extension by speaking to the operator or by looking up the
extension in a directory. To free the operator from answering repetitive requests for extension
numbers, the NEAXMail AD-8 voice mail system offers two kinds of online directory assistance:
ƒ
Automatic directory assistance. The automatic directory provides a list of subscriber names
and extensions. To use this directory, callers need to know only the last name of the subscriber
they want to reach. After the automatic directory is set up, you do not have to do any special
programming to use it. New subscribers can set up their listing in the directory themselves by
telephone, through the enrollment conversation. They can also change their listing later, through
setup options.
ƒ
Numeric directory assistance. The system can also allow callers to press numbers instead of
letters to look up a subscriber extension. Numeric directory assistance involves grouping
subscribers by a common characteristic (such as department, location, or schedule), and
creating a menu of choices that assigns a single touchtone to each directory grouping. To use
numeric directory assistance, the caller presses the touchtone assigned to the directory group to
which the person belongs. The system then plays back the names of people in the group and
their extension numbers. Numeric directory assistance requires special setup at the system
console. Subscribers cannot change their listing in the numeric directory by telephone. You
may use either type of directory assistance, or both.
Live Record
Live Record is a feature of NEAXMail AD8 that allows subscribers to record a telephone conversation
from an outside caller and leave it as a message in a voice mailbox. You can decide how to use Live
Record to balance subscriber needs with system resources and requirements. Here are some
examples.
ƒ
Electronic Message-Taking
A receptionist may use Live Record as an electronic message-taking device, replacing handwritten and hand-delivered messages. Your receptionist can record the conversation live and
then assigns it to a mailbox.
ƒ
Lead Pooling
A growing company receives sales leads throughout the day. The sales staff is often busy.
Rather than keeping potential customers on hold or worrying about distributing leads uniformly,
the receptionist uses Live Record to take the person name and phone number. Then the
receptionist sends this recording to a lead pool message group with dispatch distribution. The
first available salesperson listens to the next-in-line lead message addressed to the lead pool
message group
Page 19- 8
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Limited Recording Time on the Voice Mail System
If a site uses Live Record frequently, System Managers should carefully monitor available recording
time. Recording time appears on the Banner Screen at the top right corner, just below the key-lock
status. It indicates the number of hours and minutes still available for new messages. For example,
1:15 indicates the system has 1 hour and 15 minutes of recording time. If available recording time falls
below 5% of the total possible recording time for your system, NEAXMail AD8 does not permit initiating
a Live Record session. If a subscriber attempts to begin a Live Record session, NEC display
telephones display (OUT OF MSG SPACE) on the LCD.
Message Delivery
The voice mail system can call subscribers to deliver your messages. This feature is called message
delivery. Subscribers can set up the system to call them at home, at their work extensions, or on
pagers or mobile telephones to deliver new messages.
Note: Messages are delivered only after the subscriber enrolls on the system.
The system can make message delivery calls at regular intervals or as soon as each new message is
received. The system can also dial long-distance numbers, both domestic and international. You can
also set the system to call you only when you have an urgent message. Guests may also use message
delivery.
Message Groups
Message groups let you send the same message to a group of people, such as a department. You
send a message to a message group just like you send a message to a subscriber, identifying the
group by name or group number. The System Manager can create and maintain message groups at
the system console. Subscribers can also create and maintain their own message groups from any
touchtone telephone, by accessing setup options. Guests cannot create or send messages to message
groups.
Message Notification and Delivery
The voice mail system can call you to deliver your messages on a regular basis. This feature is called
message notification and delivery. You can set up the system to call subscribers at home, at their work
extension, or on their mobile telephone to deliver messages at regular intervals or on the receipt of
each new message. The system can activate pagers or message waiting lamps to notify subscribers
that new messages are waiting. Guests may also use some of the voice mail system message delivery
features.
Constant Message Count
The NEAXMail AD8 displays the number of new messages on NEC display telephones using a feature
called Constant Message Count. With Constant Message Count, the subscriber looks at the display
telephone LCD to determine how many new messages, if any, there are to check. In addition to
Constant Message Count, any other message waiting indication, such as lamps, used by your
telephone system also notify subscribers of new messages.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 9
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Message Playback
Subscribers retrieve messages by calling the voice mail system and entering their Personal IDs during
the opening greeting or when the system is listening for IDs. In addition to listening to messages, a
subscriber may also redirect, save, or reply to messages. While listening to a message, a subscriber
may move backward through the message to listen to portions of it again, or fast forward it to jump
ahead to a specific part of the message. A subscriber may also change a message playback volume.
Message Volume Control
Subscribers can lower and raise the volume of a message by pressing the 5 key during message
playback. To lower the volume of a message, the subscriber presses 5 once. To raise the volume of a
message, the subscriber presses 5 twice. To return the volume to normal, the subscriber presses 5 a
third time. The volume setting the subscriber chooses lasts only for the current message. The next
message plays at normal volume, unless the subscriber presses the 5 key again. The volume key does
not affect message recording or the system prompts. Prompts are always played at normal volume.
The volume control key is not available for guests.
Message Receipts
The voice mail system can tell you if any messages you sent are received. It can tell you in two ways:
ƒ
ƒ
Return receipt
o A return receipt gives you detailed information about every message you send or each
message you explicitly mark for return receipt.
Receipt summary
o A receipt summary gives you summary information about the messages you sent to a
particular subscriber, guest, or message group.
Opening Greeting
The opening greeting is the system greeting for outside callers. Like other parts of the system
conversation, the opening greeting has phrases and prompts. Each phrase is a set of instructions that
tells the system which prompt (or prompts) to play at a given point in the conversation. Each prompt is
an actual recording the system plays. Here is a sample opening greeting:
“Hello, NEAXMail Messaging System. If you are calling from a touchtone phone, you may enter the extension
anytime. If you don’t know the extension, press 411 for a directory. Otherwise, please stay on the line and an
operator will be right with you.”
You can record different Opening Greeting prompts by port for both Day Mode and Night Mode. This
structure gives you added flexibility for special applications such as dedicating one port as a public
information line, sharing a voice mail system between two organizations, or localizing services in
several languages.
Page 19- 10
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Local/Remote Maintenance
Local or remote maintenance allows a system representative to provide support and solve customer
problems. Representatives can use remote maintenance to link an off-site computer to the voice mail
system and control the console. Local and remote maintenance software allows you to do such tasks
as transfer files between the off-site computer and the NEAXMail AD8, and more. Remote maintenance
allows the off-site computer to monitor or control the execution of programs, which are running on the
system. For complete information on installing and using remote maintenance, refer to the guide that
comes with the Remote Maintenance Package.
Reports
The voice mail system can provide a great deal of information about your organization incoming and
outgoing telephone calls. Use the information to help make decisions about your organization, such as
staffing levels, productivity, and your telephone hardware needs. View reports on the screen or copy
reports to files, and import them into many word processing, database, and spreadsheet programs.
The voice mail system provides 5 different types of reports:
ƒ Usage Reports
ƒ Directory Reports
ƒ Busy Ports Report
ƒ Call Log
ƒ Error Log.
Schedules
Most offices are not open around the clock. You can configure the voice mail system to handle calls
differently during the hours your company is closed. You define for the system the hours and days of
the week your office is open for business. You can also specify holidays when your office is closed.
This topic describes how to set the system schedules and how they affect the system Day and Night
Modes of operation.
Guests
The system also allows subscribers to host guests on the system. Guests are greeted by name and can
exchange messages with their host subscriber. They have limited system privileges.
Security Codes
A subscriber security code provides an additional level of protection to prevent unauthorized callers
from gaining access to confidential messages. For maximum security, the system never displays the
security code on the screen or reads it over the telephone, even to the subscriber. System Managers
cannot change or set a subscriber security code at the console. Only the subscriber may set the code,
and only by telephone.
ƒ Forgotten Security Codes
The System Manager is not allowed to view, set, or change a security code for another
subscriber. The system does indicate if a security code is set by a subscriber by placing the
letters SC on the subscriber Personal Directory Page. The system also records all incidents of
an incorrectly entered security code in the Call Log to alert a System Manager of possible
unauthorized callers. If a subscriber forgets the security code, the only option is for the System
Manager to delete the subscriber security code at the Personal Directory Screen. The
subscriber should then call the system and set a new security code.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 11
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Subscribers
Most people enrolled in the voice mail system are called subscribers. A subscriber can receive
messages from outside callers, leave messages for other subscribers, be a host for guests, create
message groups by telephone, and use many of the system voice mail and automated attendant
features. The system uses a page of the Personal Directory to store each subscriber Personal ID,
Extension # ID, personal greetings, and settings for call transfer and message delivery. Subscribers
can change many of these settings by telephone. The System Manager can also change subscriber
settings at the system console.
The First-Time Enrollment Conversation
The system can be configured to play a special enrollment conversation for new subscribers the first
time they call the voice mail system. The enrollment conversation makes setting up the voice mail
system fast and easy.
Transaction Boxes
A transaction box is a special kind of mailbox. You can use transaction boxes to program special call
routing, create menus, or provide announcements of recorded information. The applications for
transaction boxes can be as simple or complex as you wish. Some organizations use transaction
boxes to route callers to different departments or to provide morning, afternoon, and evening greetings.
Other organizations use transaction boxes to play detailed audio text messages, route callers to other
submenus, and route callers to interview boxes.
Voice Detect Boxes
The voice detect feature uses a special kind of transaction box, called a voice detect box. A voice
detect box is similar to a transaction box, except that callers make selections by voice, instead of using
one key dialing menus. Voice detect boxes are stored in the Transaction Directory. Each system is
shipped with one sample voice detect box already added.
Page 19- 12
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Required Equipment for NEAXMail AD-8
Description
PZ-VM00
PN-VM01
PN-AP00-B
AP VM-0.7 CA-A
RS RVS-4S CA-C
LC, COT card
MAT CA-T
NEAXMail AD-8 System Manual
NEAXMail AD-8 Reference Manual
NEAXMail AD-8 Console
Maintenance Guide
NEAXMail AD-8 Easy Made
Application Manual
Function
The PN-VM00 card consists of a digital signal processor for
port interface (4 ports), central processor unit for controlling
various data, hard disk unit to read/write the voice mail
application program and voice mail information, and
provides an internal modem (14.4 kbps) for remote
maintenance. This card provides 8 ports
Additional 4 Ports - Plugs into connector on PN-VM00 card.
This card is used for expanding the port interface up to 8
ports.
This card continually supervises the status of the
NEAXMail AD-8 on MCI connection, and stores the call
information into its memory if the NEAXMail AD-8 is not
ready. This card stores information for a maximum of 16
calls.
MCI Cable from AD8 to AP00
May be used to directly connect PC to AD8
For remote maintenance using internal modem on the
VM00 card, an LC-COT connection is required on the PBX.
Used to connect a Maintenance Console to the NEAXMail
AD-8 directly
This manual explains the installation procedure and
programming procedure for the NEAXMail AD-8.
This Reference Manual has a format that lets you quickly
find the information you need for a particular system task.
This guide is used for Console Maintenance. Console
Maintenance lets you solve problems on the voice mail
system without visiting a customer site.
Use this manual to set up the NEAXMail AD-8 voice mail
system for a particular application quickly and easily.
Available AD-8 Language Sets
US English (US)
Argentine Spanish (AR)
Australian English (AU)
Global Spanish (ES)
French (FR)
Mandarin Chinese (MA)
Portuguese (PT)
Thai (TA)
UK English (UK)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 13
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
NEAXMail AD-120
The NEAXMail AD-120 Product offers the following two choices for system configuration:
ƒ
Voice Mail Only - provides voice mail only services. Voice mail only systems are
shipped with all software preloaded.
ƒ
Unified Messaging - provides full voice messaging capabilities plus an unlimited seat
license for the View Mail for Outlook (VMO) Unified Messaging client software. Third
Party Fax Integration and Text-to-Speech are available as optional components. Unified
Messaging systems are shipped without software pre-loaded. All software must be
loaded on-site in order to effectively join the customer’s existing Windows network.
The AD-120 offers both analog and digital station port integration.
ƒ
PBX Integration – All AD-120 systems include the NEAX Digital and Serial MCI switch
integrations. The following components provide integration support for Cisco Call
Manager (Version. 2.4 or above) and SMDI Serial systems. T1 integration is not
currently supported with Dual IP/PBX Support. Enhanced NEAX OAI Integration must
be ordered for each AD-120 in the cluster or whenever Live Record is desired in an
analog port configuration.
System Architecture
ƒ
Microsoft® Exchange® 2000/2003 Server ships with AD-120 S/W Port Licenses that include
Exchange. Associates may elect to purchase Exchange through NEC or to provide their own
copies.
ƒ
Microsoft SQL® 2000 Server is the underlying database for AD-120. SQL is provided either in
MSDE or Server Standard 2000 Runtime Edition license versions. MSDE is provided with S/W
Port Licenses from 4 to 28 ports. Port Licenses above 28 ports require the purchase of SQL
Server Standard 2000, Processor License. As a “Processor License,” SQL must be purchased
in quantities equivalent to the number of CPUs in the server. Therefore, a Dell PE2600 with dual
processor’s, requires two licenses. NEC Authorized Associates may elect to provide their own
copies if desired.
Page 19- 14
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Voice Cards
Voice boards must be purchased for all NEAXMail AD-120 orders.
Note: Systems 4 to 24 ports require a minimum of 1GB RAM, 24 ports to 32 require a minimum of 1.5 GB RAM,
above 32 ports require 2GB RAM. Systems above 48 ports require dual processors. Systems with 32 ports or
higher must also purchase the proper quantity of SQL Standard Server 2000 Runtime Edition.
Description
4 Port - D/42-NE2 Digital Voice Board
4 Port - D/4 PCI Analog Voice Board
4 Port – D/41 JCT-LS Analog Voice Board
8 Port – D/82 JCT-U Digital Voice Board
12 Port - D/120JCT-LSU Analog Voice Board
24 Port – D/240PCI-T1R2 T1 Voice Board
Level II Server Software License with Exchange 2000/2003
A NEAXMail AD-120 Software License includes:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
NEAXMail AD-120 Version 2.7 software
SQL MSDE version (4 – 28 ports only)
Exchange 2000/2003 Server (Voicemail Runtime edition)
Designated Voice Port license
Unlimited unified messaging seats (for UM licenses only)
System key & documentation
Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 Server (Voice Mail Run-time edition) satisfies the requirement for
Exchange 2000/2003 Client Access Licenses (CALs) for all ‘voice mail only’ users on the system. CALs
are still required for all “unified messaging” subscribers and may be purchased from NEC or provided
through a third party.
NEC Authorized Associates may elect to provide their own server platform and third party software (i.e.,
Microsoft Windows 2000/2003, PCAnywhere, Exchange 2000/2003, and SQL 2000). The NEC
Associate assumes all responsibility for providing a Microsoft certified Windows 2000/2003 server.
NEC’s warranty excludes any Associate supplied computer platform or software used in conjunction
with the NEAXMail AD-120 system.
Unified Messaging license provides unlimited software seat licenses; however, actual user limitations
are defined by system configuration, platform and network factors.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 15
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Voice boards must be purchased through NEC. Compatibilities must be followed as specified in the
chart below.
Voice Mail only Software Licenses
AD120 4 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 8 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 12 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 16 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 20 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 24 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 28 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 32 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 36 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 40 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 44 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 48 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 52 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 56 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 60 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 64 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 68 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 72 Ports S/W LIC VM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
Unified Messaging Software Licenses
AD120 4 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 8 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 12 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 16 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 20 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 24 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 28 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 32 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 36 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 40 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 44 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 48 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 52 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 56 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 60 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 64 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 68 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
AD120 72 Ports S/W LIC UM & EXCHANGE 2000/2003
Page 19- 16
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Third Party Software
Description
AD-120 Third-Party S/W (Win2K or Win2003 + pcAnywhere)
SQL Server Standard 2000 Runtime Edition (per CPU)
If you wish to purchase the Windows 2000/2003 operating system software package for a new system
order from NEC, you MUST also purchase a Level I or II platform.
Service Pack 4 for Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 is installed on AD-120 voice mail only platforms. If
you elect to purchase only the AD-120 software license and supply your own platform, you must
provide Service Pack 4.
Microsoft SQL Server Standard 2000 Runtime Edition is required for AD-120 configurations of 32-ports
or greater. One copy of SQL Server Standard 2000 Runtime Edition is required for each processor in
the AD-120 platform. For example, a 32-port AD-120 on a Dell Power Edge 2600 (with Dual CPUs)
would require a quantity of two licenses.
Client Access Licenses (CAL)
Available CALs
AD120, Exchange 5.5 CAL (per seat)
AD120, Exchange 2000 CAL (per seat)
AD120, Exchange 2003 CAL (per seat)
Exchange Server 2000/2003 (Voicemail Runtime Edition) included with the AD-120 server licenses (as
designated above) will exempt all voice mail only users from CAL requirements. CALs are still required
for all unified messaging subscribers and may be purchased from NEC or provided from a third party.
If AD-120 Software License is purchased without Exchange Server 2000/2003 (Voicemail Runtime
Edition), Exchange Server 2000 SP3/2003 (Standard Edition) is required to run AD-120. Exchange
Server 2000/2003 (Standard Edition) requires CALs for all users on the AD-120 system, whether they
are voice mail only or unified messaging subscribers. CALs maybe purchased from NEC or provided
from a third party.
Platform Components
The NEAXMail AD-120 provides separate platform components (i.e., individual AD-120 Platforms,
Software Licenses, Voice Boards and Third Party Software), allowing NEC Associates a greater
flexibility in meeting their customer’s requirements. NEC Associates may choose to order “software &
voice boards only” or a combination of software, voice boards and a Level I or II platform. A complete
AD-120 system would include a Level I or II Platform, AD-120 Server Software License, voice boards
and third party software ordered together.
ƒ
If a Unified Messaging Software License is ordered with a Level I or II platform, the system will
ship without pre-loading of software. This is because installation of the AD-120 into an existing
network requires the operating system software (and Exchange) to be loaded while connected
to that Local Area Network (LAN).
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 17
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
ƒ
RAID hard disk drive redundancy (Level II) may only be added at the time of purchase and is
not field-upgradeable. The optional RAID package provides three (3) additional hard drives for
a total of five (5) hard drives in the Level II server and doubles the internal storage capacity.
ƒ
Rack Mount Kits allow the Level II Dell Servers to be mounted in a standard 19” rack.
Description
AD120, Level I, Dell GX280
Dell Level II PE2600 Level II Tower
Dell Level II, 5 Drive RAID Array, (PE2600 only)
Option Dell Level II Rack Mount Kit (PE 2600 only)
Secondary CPU (Dell Level II PE2600, Xeon 2.0GHz)
CPU Option (Dell Level II PE2600, Xeon 2.8GHz)
1GB Memory addition, (Dell GX280 only)
1GB Memory addition, (Dell Level II PE2600 only)
17 Inch Color Monitor
External 56Kbps Modem
Optional Software Feature Packages
ActiveNet, AMIS, VPIM and Third Party Fax Server Integration options may only be installed by an NEC
Certified NEAXMail AD-120 engineer or an AD-120 technician with the assistance of a qualified MCSE.
Description
ActiveNet for Unity/AD-120 (per 1 node)
AD120, AMIS Analog Networking (per server)
AD120, VPIM Digital Networking (per server)
E-Mail Reader (Text-to-Speech)
The AD-120 offers a Text-to-Speech (TTS) Reader. The TTS reads text in English only. TTS is
required for Outlook Calendar Access and is not available on Voice Mail Only systems.
Capacities: Minimum of 2, Maximum of 20 (RealSpeak) simultaneous sessions per system.
Note: 2 to 6 sessions require a total of 512MB RAM, 7 to 10 sessions require a total of 1GB RAM, 11 to 12
sessions require 1.5GB RAM and 13 to 16 sessions require 2GB RAM. Above 8 sessions require a Level ll
platform. 17 to 20 sessions require Dual Xeon 2.8 GHz processor option.
Description
RealSpeak Text To Speech Reader, 1 Session
Third Party Fax Server Integration
The following fax servers are supported: Omtool Fax Sr. v.3, Interstar Technologies LightningFax v.5.5
or higher, Fenestrae FAXination v.4 or higher, RightFax v.6 or higher, Optus FACSys v.4.5 or higher,
FAXCOM for Exchange version 6.19 or higher and Esker FaxGate v.7 or higher.
Page 19- 18
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
PBX Integration Software
All AD-120 systems include the NEAX Digital and Serial MCI switch integrations. The following
components provide integration support for Cisco Call Manager (ver. 2.4 or above) and SMDI Serial
systems. T1 integration is not currently supported with Dual IP/PBX Support. Enhanced NEAX OAI
Integration must be ordered for each AD-120 in the cluster or whenever Live Record is desired in an
analog port configuration.
Description
AD120 Dual Integration (IP + PBX)
AD120 SMDI Serial Integration
AD120 Enhanced NEAX OAI Integration
Platform Specifications
NEAXMail AD-120 Specifications
Dell Level I
Dell Level II (PE2600)
Pentium 4 2.8Ghz
Xeon 2.0Ghz
N/A
Optional (2 or 2.8Hz)
1GB
1GB
3 (all 5-Volt)
7 (one 5-Volt &
six 3.3-Volt)
Chassis Style
Mini-Tower
Tower
Rack-Mount
Not Available
Optional
Maximum Voice Port
24 Analog, 24 Digital
72 Analog or 64Digital
Capacity*
Hours of Storage
Approx. 530
Approx. 1200 or 2400
with RAID
Hard Disk Drive Size
40GB SATA
Dual 36GB SCSI
RAID Array Drive
N/A
5 x 36GB
Size(s)
Tape Backup
Optional SCSI
Optional
Expansion Chassis
N/A
Optional (PCI)
Redundant Power
N/A
Standard
Supplies
Platform Level
CPU Type/Speed
Dual CPU’s
MB RAM Installed
PCI Slots
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 19
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
NEAXMail AD-64
The NEAXMail AD-64 voice/unified messaging system offers a powerful centralized message
solution to meet the communications needs of your business. You can manage your
communications over the telephone or from your personal computer (PC) using the Microsoft®
Outlook®, Lotus® Notes®, and GroupWise® Inbox. The NEAXMail AD-64 offers advanced
unified messaging, voice mail and automated attendant functionality, helping your organization
become more responsive than ever. Through its suite of unified messaging and desktop call
management applications, NEAXMail AD-64 provides you with one of the most complete
unified communications solution available.
These unified communication applications integrate the NEAXMail AD-64 with your Local Area
Network (LAN) to give you control over live telephone traffic and messages – voice, fax* and email – all from your desktop PC. The ViewMail® for Microsoft Messaging module, for example,
works with Microsoft Exchange® to allow you to access your messages from one familiar
inbox. ViewMail® for Lotus Notes and ViewMail for GroupWise are also offered. In addition, the
ViewCall® Plus module enables you to handle your live telephone traffic from your desktop PC
and also works with the applications you use every day such as your Outlook contact list and
your Access® database.
The NEAXMail AD-64 provides a foundation for future growth and customization. Built upon
the Windows 2000 Server platform, the NEAXMail AD-64 leverages the power, reliability and
scalability of the Microsoft Windows® 2000 operating system. By using the new Windowsbased system administration console, the NEAXMail AD-64 can be administered from any
Windows PC on your LAN. This new console is intuitively designed and is accessible via an IP
connection, making system administration easier and more efficient. The Windows 2000
Server also provides many of the disk maintenance utilities you already know, eliminating the
need to learn new software interfaces.
The NEAXMail AD-64 is available in 4 to 96-port configurations with analog or digital
integration to your NEAX® PBX. The NEAXMail AD-64 may be purchased on either a Limited,
Level I, or Level II platform. The specifications for these platforms are listed below, however
system specifications are subject to change without prior written notice.
Page 19- 20
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Level I/Level II Platform Specifications
Level I/Level II Specifications
Level I (Dell GX280)
Pentium 4 2.8GHz
N/A
1GB (4GB)
3 slots total – all are PCI (5Volt)
Mini-Tower
Platform Level
CPU Type/Speed
Dual CPUs
RAM Installed (max)
PCI Slots (voltage)
Chassis Style
Rack-Mount
Cabinet Color
Max. Voice Port Capacity
Storage Hours
Hard Disk Drive Size
RAID Array Drive
Tape Backup
Redundant Power Supplies
Max. Wattage
Note
Not Available
Black
48 Analog or Digital
Approx. 1650
40GB SATA
5 x 36GB
Optional SCSI
Optional
N/A
250 Watts
Standard
853 BTU/hr
Chassis Height
16.7 inches
(42.5 cm)
7.1 inches
(18.1 cm)
17.6 inches
(44.7 cm)
28 lbs
(12.7 kg)
50° to 95°F
10° to 35°C
-40° to 65°C
-40° to 149°F
20% to 80% (noncondensing)
Chassis Depth
Weight
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative humidity
Optional
Black
96 Analog or Digital
Approx. 3200 or 6400
w/RAID
Dual 36GB SCSI
N/A
Heat dissipation
Chassis Width
Level II (Dell PE2600)
Xeon 2.4GHz
Optional (2.4 or 2.8GHz)
1GB (6GB)
7 slots total - 6 PCI-X
(3.3Volt) and 1 PCI (5Volt)
Tower
730 Watts
3100 BTU/hr
17.5 inches
(44.5 cm)
9.125 inches
(23.0 cm)
24.54 inches
(62.3 cm)
90 lb (40.9 kg), max.
configuration
50° to 95°F
10° to 35°C
-40° to 65°C
-40° to 149°F
20% to 80% (noncondensing)
Note: Maximum capacity may require Expansion Chassis
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 21
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Additional Hardware Components
Expansion Chassis
Available in a 7-slot PCI form factor, the Expansion Chassis provide additional card slots for
voice or fax cards.
Note: The Expansion Chassis can be added to any NEC-provided platform. NEC Associate assumes all
responsibility of PCI Expansion Chassis compatibility with all other “Associate-provided” hardware. Up to two
expansion chassis may be connected to a Level II (or equivalent) server platform.
ActiveFax Board
The VFX/41JCT-LS fax card provides 4 fax ports on a single PCI Card. ActiveFax software
licenses are not included and are sold separately.
Tape Backup
Includes: Tape drive, 1 DAT tape, software, cleaning cartridge and documentation.
Note: Level I systems require the addition of a SCSI adapter card, which requires 1 open PCI card slot.
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
In the event of a power failure, the power supply will instantly switch to its internal battery bank.
This keeps the NEAXMail AD-64 in continuous operation and allows the user to work and save
valuable data before the platform shuts down.
Note: NEC strongly recommends the use of a UPS for all NEAXMail AD-64 systems.
Optional Software
Operating System and Utilities Software
The Third Party software includes:
ƒ Windows 2000 Server software (Runtime Edition) with Service Pack 4
ƒ PCAnywhere 10.5 or higher.
Note:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Windows 2000 Server software (Voicemail Runtime Edition) and PCAnywhere may be purchased from
NEC or through a third party provider. If you choose to purchase the Third Party Software from NEC you
MUST also purchase a PC/Server platform or in conjunction with a NEAXMail AD-64 Upgrade order.
If you choose to provide your own Windows 2000 server and PCAnywhere software, it is the Associates
responsibility to install Windows 2000 server software, PCAnywhere and voice messaging software.
Windows 2000 Server (Voicemail Runtime Edition) may only be used to run the NEAXMail AD-64-related
applications on the NEAXMail AD-64 platform.
Optional ActiveFax Software
Maximum ActiveFax Software capacity is 8 in a single system. Fax card(s) (NEC#0161975) are
not included and are sold separately.
Page 19- 22
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Unified Messaging
A NEAXMail AD-64 Port Software License includes 25 seats of ViewMail/ViewMail for Microsoft
Messaging/ViewMail for Lotus Notes/ViewMail for GroupWise and 25 seats of ViewCall Plus.
Additional seats of these applications may be purchased in single or unlimited bundles. The Unlimited
package provides up to 1,250 simultaneous sessions of ViewMail/VMM/VML/VMG and ViewCall Plus.
ViewCall Plus requires either TAPI or TSAPI services for enhanced mode options. Please consult your
NEC Sales Engineer with CTI related questions.
Automated Speech Recognition
The purchase of a NEAXMail AD-64 Port Software License is eligible for one Free Session of ASR,
however you must include the ASR 1st Session part (NEC#0160190) with your order. The FREE
session may only be taken at time of initial system order. Additional sessions are purchased separately.
Notes:
ƒ Speech recognition requires JCT-series voice boards and may NOT be used with D/4 PCI, D/42NE-2 PCI
or ISA voice boards.
ƒ ASR is available in US English, Australian English, UK English, and Dutch. Only one language is
currently supported per system. Default system language must be the same as the speech recognition
language.
Text-To-Speech (TTS) for Exchange and Lotus Notes
TTS is available in US English, Australian English, UK English, and Dutch. Only one language is
currently supported per system. Default system language must be the same as the speech recognition
language.
Feature Descriptions
Analog Voice Card support, offers greater flexibility in the overall NEAXMail AD-64 configuration.
Analog cards allow for a maximum port capacity of 96 ports and allow previous NEC Repartee® OS/2
customers to upgrade to the NEAXMail AD-64’s Windows® 2000 operating system.
Announcement of number and length of messages, NEAXMail AD-64 announces how long
messages last; for example, “You have three new messages totaling three minutes, twenty seconds.
Would you like to hear them?”
Archiving, The message archive feature allows subscribers to save messages longer than the preset
system parameter.
Automated Speech Recognition (ASR) provides subscribers with the ability to navigate their mailbox
options using speech commands. By speaking simple commands into any telephone, you can navigate
your voice mailbox and change personal options. One Free Session of the Nuance® ASR engine is
provided with any new NEAXMail AD-64 version 2.2 S/W Port License (excludes Limited Systems) or
2.2 S/W Version Upgrade.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 23
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Caller ID information is accessible via the telephone. When a user checks a message that has Caller
ID information associated with it, the number will appear on the Dterm LCD display. Caller ID can also
be retrieved through the soft key menu “CID” or through ASR by saying "Caller ID." This feature
requires the Digital Dterm voice card(s) (i.e., D/42-NE2, D/42JCT-U or D/82JCT-U).
Call Return is another new feature that allows a subscriber to callback the sender of a voice message
based upon the Caller ID captured during that message. This feature requires the Digital Dterm voice
card(s) (i.e., D/42-NE2, D/42JCT-U or D/82JCT-U).
Date and time stamp. At the end of every message, NEAXMail AD-64 indicates how long ago a
message was sent, providing subscribers with accurate information about their messaging activity.
Greetings, Each subscriber mailbox can have up to three greetings: standard, busy, or alternate.
Greetings can be rerecorded or switched by the subscriber via their Dterm set, touchtone phone or
through the Mailbox Manager application. If you do not record greetings in your own voice, the system
plays greetings that include your recorded name or your extension.
ƒ
Standard greeting - plays when your extension is unanswered. A typical standard greeting is: “Hello, this
is Pat Green. I am not at my desk right now. Please leave a message.”
ƒ
Busy greeting - plays when your extension is busy. A typical busy greeting is: “Hello, this is Pat Green. I
am on the phone now. Please leave a message.” For callers to hear your busy greeting, you must
activate it.
ƒ
Alternate greeting - plays for special occasions, such as a vacation. A typical alternate greeting is:
“Hello, this is Pat Green. I am out of the office today and will return tomorrow.” When your alternate
greeting is active, the system plays it instead of any of your other greetings.
Guests, A guest is a person who is hosted by a particular subscriber and given a “guest mailbox.”
Guest privileges allow a person to communicate with their host subscriber through voice messages.
Hacker Prevention Features are as follows:
ƒ Mandate a default password on each new box so they are not left “unprotected”.
ƒ Allow system administrators to change the default security code via the administration console.
ƒ Force new subscribers to change the default security code upon first-time enrollment.
Last in-First out/First In-First out (LIFO/FIFO), System administrator can set LIFO/FIFO for entire
categories of messages (e.g., all messages from other subscribers would be played back in either LIFO
or FIFO order; message playback no longer grouped by subscriber name).
ƒ
Message order allows users to hear messages in the order most convenient.
ƒ
Playback order allows the system administrator to set playback order separately for new messages and
old messages for maximum flexibility and convenience.
Live Monitor is a new digital feature that lets a subscriber listen to a caller leaving a message in their
voice mailbox. The subscriber can also pick up the call during the recording to connect. Live monitor is
initiated by pressing a line key on a Dterm® Series (III or higher) phone. This feature requires the Digital
Dterm voice card(s) (i.e., D/42-NE2, D/42JCT-U or D/82JCT-U).
Page 19- 24
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Message editing by both inside and outside callers, With message editing, callers can edit all or
part of a message they’ve just recorded—listen to the message, add to it, delete it, re-record it, etc.
Message-return receipts and receipt summaries. Return receipts give subscribers detailed
information about each message he or she sends, including exactly when the recipient opened the
message. For a group message, return receipts tell when everyone in the group opened the message
(for dispatch groups, it identifies the person who heard the entire message and when). Receipt
summaries quickly tell the user whether or not a particular subscriber opened any or all of the
messages sent and whether he or she left the sender any messages.
Message waiting notification, The NEAX PBX’s message waiting indicator is activated when a
subscriber has new messages. This may be the extension’s Message Waiting Lamp or Stutter dial
tone.
Multiple subscriber interfaces, Individual subscribers on the same system have a choice of using the
easy 1 for Yes, 2 for No interface or the Menu options interface.
ƒ
1 for Yes, 2 for No interface. Using the “1 for Yes and 2 for No” option, users access all functions by
responding to simple yes-or-no questions.
ƒ
Menu options. NEAXMail AD-64 offers a traditional voice mail menu interface, as well as the yes-and-no
interface. Menu options make it easy for experienced users to access all functions quickly.
ƒ
Quick keys. Yes-and-no interface users can utilize the 4 through 7 keys to jump to specific options or
features.
Outside caller group messaging, Outside callers can leave a message for a group of subscribers
instead of a single subscriber. Messages can be left to either a public or private group and will follow
the delivery method assigned to the group.
Personal Mailbox, Each subscriber within an organization can have a private voice mailbox. The
NEAXMail AD-64’s internal database provides up to 65,000 voice mailboxes.
Private Distribution Lists, Subscribers may have an unlimited number of private distribution lists with
an unlimited number of members per list. Only subscribers may send a message to their private lists.
Private Distribution Lists are configured with one of two delivery methods:
ƒ
Broadcast Delivery. All members of the list hear the message when they listen to their messages
ƒ
Dispatch Delivery. Only the first list member to listen to a message receives it. The message is then
automatically deleted from all remaining list members’ mailboxes.
Receipt sent for messages saved as new, Subscribers requesting message receipts will receive a
receipt as soon as the recipient of a message listens to any part of the message, even if the recipient
saves the message as new. Once the recipient has opened a message, the sender cannot cancel the
message or change its special delivery options.
Redirect to Multiple Subscribers with one Introduction (RSI), This feature gives users the ability to
redirect messages to numerous users without having to record an individual introduction for each
recipient.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 25
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Rewind, pause, and fast forward. While listening to a message, users press “7” to move backward,
“8” to pause, or “9” to skip forward in the message. When recording a message, users can press “8” to
pause.
Special delivery options, Users can mark messages with one or more of the following special delivery
options: urgent, private, future, and return receipt requested. Subscribers can also change or add to the
special delivery settings of a message after it’s sent.
ƒ
Future. The sender can mark the voice message for delivery at a later date and time up to one year later.
ƒ
Private. The recipient of a “private” message cannot redirect the message to anyone else.
ƒ
Return receipt requested. The sender of the message is told when the recipient hears the message.
Subscribers can request return receipts for messages sent to individual subscribers or to groups.
ƒ
Urgent. Messages marked with “urgent” will be heard first, before regular messages. Urgent messages
from other subscribers and guests are played before urgent messages from outside callers. The system
also tells subscribers how many new messages are marked urgent.
Speed control during message playback. Subscribers can slow down or increase the speed of each
message during playback using the telephone keypad.
Subscriber-controlled groups, Subscribers can create, name, add, and delete subscriber groups
from their telephone.
Subscriber-controlled message delivery, Messages can be delivered to any telephone—home, work
extension, pager, or mobile telephone. Each subscriber can have up to four separate telephone
numbers and dial-out schedules. The message delivery options can be sequential for each telephone
number and programmed by the subscriber. A subscriber can use any touchtone telephone to turn
message delivery on or off, or change the delivery times.
Subscriber language, The system manager can set which language each subscriber hears.
Subscribers will hear prompts in that language when they call the system to check voice mail.
(Additional languages can be purchased separately.)
Subscriber self-enrollment, Subscribers personalize their voice mailbox— set up their directory
listing, record personal greetings, and set up security codes—through an easy-to-use, touchtone
telephone conversation. Because self-enrollment is so simple, subscribers can begin using NEAXMail
AD-64 immediately.
ƒ
Directory listing. Subscribers control whether they want to be listed in the automated attendant directory
(see automated attendant features). Subscribers record and spell their name for the directory.
ƒ
Personal greetings. Subscribers record their individual personal greetings. Callers hear the greeting
before they are given an opportunity to leave a message. Subscribers can change the content of their
greeting from any touchtone telephone or from their desktop using Mailbox Manager at any time to reflect
changes in their schedule.
Page 19- 26
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
ƒ
Personal ID. This number, which is usually based on the subscriber’s extension number, identifies
subscribers to the voice mail system when they are calling to access their mailbox. The NEAXMail AD-64
allows personal IDs of varying lengths - from one to ten digits.
ƒ
Personal security code. In addition to a personal ID, each subscriber can also set a security code to
safeguard his or her mailbox. The code, which can be any number of digits up to ten, can be changed at
any time from any touchtone telephone or by using their Mailbox Manager from their PC.
Subscriber-to-subscriber messaging, Subscribers can dial NEAXMail AD-64 directly to leave a
message for a fellow subscriber without ringing that extension. In this way, co-workers can exchange
routine information and ask questions without disturbing one another. The co-worker can also be dialed
directly and, if unavailable, the call is automatically forwarded to the co-worker’s voice mail with the
caller being identified automatically.
ƒ
Address messages to multiple subscribers. Subscribers can send a message to many other
subscribers at once without creating a group for them.
ƒ
Immediate reply. NEAXMail AD-64 allows subscribers to reply to a message from another subscriber
immediately after hearing it without using touch tones.
ƒ
Message cancellation. If the recipient has not listened to a message yet, the subscriber sending the
message can delete it and record a new message.
ƒ
Multiple message action. Subscribers can reply to or redirect one message several times. For example,
subscribers can listen to part of a message, interrupt it and reply, then start listening again and forward a
copy of the message to another subscriber.
ƒ
Message redirection. NEAXMail AD-64 allows subscribers to forward a copy of a message to another
subscriber easily. Subscribers can also record an introduction to the forwarded message.
ƒ
Multiple replies to one message. Subscribers can respond to old or new messages as many times as
necessary.
Text-To-Speech for Exchange®, Lotus Notes and GroupWise (TTS) One free session of the
RealSpeak® TTS engine is provided with any new NEAXMail AD-64 version 2.2 S/W Port License or
2.2 S/W Version Upgrade. TTS supports US English, UK English, Australian English, or Dutch
however, only one language can be loaded on the system. TTS is supported with all voice board
models and has a maximum of 32 TTS sessions.
ViewMail® for Lotus® Notes® (VML) integration is similar to the current ViewMail for Microsoft®
Messaging (VMM) application and gives subscribers PC access to their voice messages from their
Notes Inbox. 25 Seats of VML are included with any new NEAXMail AD-64 version 2.2 S/W Port
License or 2.2 S/W Version Upgrade.
ViewMail® for GroupWise® (VMG) integration is similar to the current ViewMail for Microsoft®
Messaging (VMM) application and gives subscribers PC access to their voice messages from their
GroupWise Inbox. 25 Seats of VMG are included with any new NEAXMail AD-64 version 2.2 S/W Port
License or 2.2 S/W Version Upgrade.
Voice sampling rate, The voice-sampling rate (24Kbps @ 6KHz) provides a high standard of voice
messaging.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 27
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Volume control, Subscribers can raise or lower the volume of a message by pressing the “5” key
during message playback.
Automated Attendant
NEAXMail AD-64 acts as an electronic receptionist, answering and routing incoming calls automatically.
Callers hear an opening greeting that gives instructions, information, and options. Using the automated
attendant, callers can reach a subscriber directly by dialing the extension number during the opening
greeting.
The attendant can answer several calls at the same time. It can place callers on hold, inform the caller
how many calls are holding ahead of him or her and update this information periodically. It can screen
calls, announce the name of the caller, and wait for confirmation from the subscriber before putting the
call through.
The automated attendant can also be set to answer a specific set of numbers so subscribers and
outside callers who know the dedicated number can connect directly to the right person, and the
receptionist does not have to waste time transferring calls.
Answer call on first ring, NEAXMail AD-64 can be programmed to answer calls on the first ring so incoming
calls are handled as quickly as possible.
Caller interviewing, NEAXMail AD-64 can interview callers with a series of simple questions (up to 20)
through the use of an interview box.
Call screening, NEAXMail AD-64 has the ability to screen calls that are transferred to a subscriber. The
subscriber can decide whether or not to take a call on the basis of caller identity. When using this feature, the
subscriber hears the caller’s name and is asked to press “1” to accept the call or “2” to transfer the call to voice
mail. Subscribers can turn call screening on and off by telephone.
Daylight-saving time schedule, NEAXMail AD-64 can be programmed to set the clock forward or backward
to automatically adjust for daylight-saving time.
Directory listing, Callers can enter the first three letters of a subscriber’s name (first or last, depending on
how the system is configured) and the system routes the call appropriately. Callers are told the extension
number for future reference. If the extension is not answered or is busy, NEAXMail AD-64 automatically routes
the caller to the subscriber’s voice mailbox.
Holiday schedule, Holiday dates may be programmed into NEAXMail AD-64 each year so the system
automatically runs in night mode on holidays.
Multilingual capability, The system can support up to nine different language prompt sets. One system can
handle several different languages at once. Language choice can be per port or per user. In addition, callers
can choose a language from a language selection box. US English is the default language for all systems,
unless otherwise specified.
American English-US
Argentinean Spanish-AR
Australian English-AU
Cantonese Chinese-CC
Danish-DK
Dutch-NL
Page 19- 28
Available Languages
French Canadian-FC
German-DE
Hebrew-HE
Italian-IT
Latin Am. Spanish-LA
Madrid Spanish-ED
Mexican Spanish-ES
New Zealand English-NZ
Portuguese-PT
Swedish-SE
United Kingdom English-UK
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Numeric directory assistance, NEAXMail AD-64 provides directory assistance for outside callers without
letters on their telephone keypad. It can be set up to guide the outside caller through directory assistance
using numbers.
One-key dialing, this feature allows a caller to press a single touchtone digit instead of a series of touch-tones
to route their calls. For example, you can route calls quickly to directory assistance, subscriber extensions,
transaction boxes, voice-detect boxes, language-select boxes or interview boxes.
Opening greeting, NEAXMail AD-64 plays a pre-recorded greeting to callers when it answers a call. The
system manager usually records the opening greeting. The greeting typically includes the organization’s name;
how to reach an extension, operator, and directory; how to send a fax, etc. During the greeting, callers can
enter extension numbers, access the directory, or hold for assistance.
Operator assistance, Outside callers can press “0” for assistance at any time.
Personal secretary, The personal secretary feature enables individual users to have calls transferred to a
specified extension when temporarily away from their desk or out of the office. In this way, important calls are
handled by a knowledgeable person in the same department rather than by one main operator.
Primary or secondary answering, NEAXMail AD-64’s automated attendant can be programmed to answer
all incoming calls or calls that are not answered by an operator after a pre-set number of rings. Also, the
NEAXMail AD-64 can answer all or selected incoming lines.
Public Group (Distribution) Lists, All subscribers on the system can send messages to open groups. A
subscriber can be restricted from using open groups. Only subscribers can be members of an open group.
Schedules, To accommodate organizations with operating hours that vary from day to day, NEAXMail AD-64
can use up to three different schedules.
Subscriber-controlled call holding, Call holding gives a caller the option to hold for a busy extension to
become available. The system can place callers on hold, inform callers of their holding queue position, and
update this information periodically. Subscribers can turn call holding on and off by telephone. In addition,
certain subscribers can be restricted from being able to turn call holding on and off.
Subscriber-controlled directory listing, Individual subscribers can control whether they want to be listed in
the directory (by telephone).
Transfer to attendant, Callers with touchtone telephones can press “0” to reach a live operator at any time.
Callers using rotary telephones can be transferred to the operator when no touch-tones are entered.
Voice detect, This feature allows outside callers using rotary telephones to access the voice mail system by
speaking, instead of by pressing touch tones. Callers make choices or respond to prompts by saying “yes” or
remaining silent for “no,” rather than pressing touchtone keys on one-key dialing menus.
Voice detect call holding, Voice detect call holding allows callers without touch tones to hold by saying “yes”
instead of pressing “1.”
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 29
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Audiotext
Many offices and organizations want to provide around-the-clock information to clients. NEAXMail AD64 audio text features allow an organization to make this information available to callers at all times.
The voice messaging system can offer callers menu trees and messages that can vary depending upon
the telephone number called or the time of day. Callers use touch-tones to select an item or subject that
they want to hear. Even multilingual services can be provided. The audio text recording can be of any
length, and there is no limit to the number of audio text boxes available with the system.
Mailbox Manager
This application brings many voice mail features to your Microsoft Windows-based desktop PC. The
graphical user interface (GUI) gives subscribers the ability to set up and control personal mailbox
settings in addition to the Telephone User Interface (TUI). With this new tool, subscribers may modify
their greetings, security code, notification methods, groups, conversation preferences, and much more.
Record/Edit From a PC or a telephone, subscribers can record their directory name and record and edit their
personal greetings, which the NEAXMail AD- 64 plays to incoming callers.
Administer private distribution list (groups), subscribers oversee their private distribution lists, adding or
deleting recipients as necessary.
Change directory listing status, individual subscribers can control whether or not they want to be listed in
the directory.
Change telephone password, subscribers can change their telephone password from within the Mailbox
Manager.
Change transfer options, subscribers can turn call transfer on or off, and change the extension or telephone
number to which incoming calls are transferred. When call transfer is turned off, incoming calls are sent
directly to the subscriber’s mailbox. This feature is particularly useful for employees who have offices in
multiple facilities, frequently work at home, or work as part of a team that requires them to spend a significant
amount of time in a colleague’s office. By using Mailbox Manager to change call transfer options, callers and
subscribers are connected quickly to provide improved customer service and efficient personal administration
of call traffic.
Set conversation options, subscribers can specify whether or not they want the default Yes/No or the
alternative Menu Mode conversation, whether they want to hear the date and time stamp before or after a
message, or if they want the voice mail system to greet them by name when they call in to retrieve their
messages.
Set message delivery options, subscribers can establish rules governing message delivery options for the
type and urgency of message or frequency of delivery. For example, a subscriber can set the message
delivery options so that when he or she receives urgent voice messages on Wednesday, the NEAXMail AD-64
will call the subscriber’s home or cellular telephone to deliver them.
Set call screening and holding options, subscribers can set call screening and holding options to handle
incoming calls with ease. Two or more of these options may be combined. The following call screening and
hold options are available.
ƒ
Announce before connecting caller - The system plays a beep before transferring the call.
Page 19- 30
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
ƒ
Screen Name - The system asks the caller’s name before ringing the extension. The system plays “Call
from <caller’s name spoken by the caller>” before transferring the call.
ƒ
Ask me if I want to take the call - The system says “Enter 1 to take the call, or 2 and I’ll take a
message” and then waits for a response from you before transferring the call.
ƒ
Remember screen name - The system asks and plays the caller’s name as above, and if the caller
leaves a message, will append the caller’s name to the beginning of the message.
ƒ
Tell me who the call is for The system says, “Call for <your name>” before transferring the call.
Integration features - NEAXMail AD-64 is capable of delivering the following major features. However,
limitations of the NEAX platform, Telco service or network configuration, may make one or more of
these features unavailable.
Call forward to personal greeting, This feature makes it easy for callers to leave messages for subscribers
who are busy or away from their desks. With this feature, incoming calls routed to an unanswered or busy
extension are automatically forwarded directly to a subscriber’s voice mailbox where the caller can leave a
personal message.
Message waiting indication, NEAXMail AD-64 will light a message waiting lamp, activate a display, or
provide a stutter dial tone on the subscriber’s extension when new messages have been received.
Easy message access, With this feature, subscribers simply press one button on their telephone set to
retrieve new messages from their voice mailboxes without entering a personal ID number. To prevent
unauthorized message access, subscribers may also require a security code to be entered before message
playback.
Live Record, The feature allows the subscriber to record their telephone conversation and save them as voice
messages in their mailbox. Live Record is available on Dterm sets with a properly configured feature button. A
programmable “recording beep tone” may be configured where required by law.
Constant Message Count, Allows Dterm display set users to see messaging information on their LCD. The
message count is updated to provide old, new and urgent message counts when users are connected to their
voice mailbox.
Soft Key Mailbox Navigation, When connected to a NEAX 2000 IVS2 or IPS system, mailbox subscribers
with Dterm Series E and Dterm IP sets have the option of using the four soft key buttons to manage messages
and navigate their mailbox menus. Using these visual menu prompts allows the subscriber to quickly select
and access various mailbox features.
ANI/Caller ID Capture and Display, When using Enhanced MCI integration Automatic Number Identification
(ANI) or Caller ID (CLID) integration displays the telephone number of the outside caller on a desktop PC
(using ViewMail, ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging or ViewCall Plus) or the Dterm set’s display during message
playback.
Immediate disconnect, NEAXMail AD-64 immediately disconnects when callers hang up, so ports free up
immediately.
Line resource management controls out-dialing, This gives priority to incoming call traffic when performing
out-dialing operations.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 31
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
Integration methods – the NEAXMail AD-64 integrates with the NEAX PBX system in one of three
ways. The integration method dictates how the NEAX PBX provides call information when forwarding a
call to a subscriber’s personal greeting and how it receives message-waiting indication from NEAXMail
AD-64. When integrated, both the NEAX PBX and the NEAXMail AD-64 system share information on
the origin and destination of calls. It also notifies subscribers when new messages are pending.
Direct Digital Integration – is established using the Intel®/Dialogic® D/42- NE2 voice board(s) installed in the
NEAXMail AD-64. Each board emulates up to four Dterm sets and transmits digital switch information between
the PBX and the NEAXMail AD-64. The Dialogic board connects to the PBX using one Dterm station port for
each NEAXMail AD-64 voice port. The D/42-NE2 board takes a "snapshot" of the feature set display
information and identifies the display information for caller and calling party information. This integration also
makes the Live Record, Constant Message Count and Soft-Key Navigation features possible.
Message Center Integration (MCI) - is a serial data link between the NEAX PBX and NEAXMail AD-64. The
voice messaging system and the switch share information about each call by passing data over this serial data
link. Message waiting lamp status is sent from the voice messaging system to the telephone system, saving
port usage to handle incoming calls. MCI is used in multi-switch networks whenever Common Channel
Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) networking is used.
Simultaneous MCI & Digital Integration – is a combination of the previously mentioned integrations and is
used whenever multiple NEAX PBXs are networked together via CCIS. With this method the local PBX
subscribers may continue to use the Live Record, Constant Message Count, Soft Keys and ANI Capture &
Display features. All other integration is performed through the MCI link.
Single Point of Entry (SPE)
AIMWorX® Voice Mail SPE is an optional product that lets subscribers manage the most commonly used
voice mail functions from their computers. This product provides single-point-of-entry data management
between information in the AIMWorX database and the NEAXMail AD-64 voice mail system. You can assign
mailboxes, set preferences, and other administrative duties from the Users screen in AIMWorX Manager and
then download it to the voice mail system.
Maintenance
The NEAXMail AD-64 is designed to be as easy to maintain as possible. All system hardware requires
minimal maintenance. Software maintenance, including backup and restore, is designed to be virtually
foolproof.
System Administration Console, By using the Windows-based system administration console, NEAXMail
AD-64 can be administered from any Windows based PC on your LAN. This new console is intuitively
designed and is accessible via an IP connection, making system administrators more efficient when
managing the NEAXMail AD-64 system.
Status Monitor, The Status Monitor utility monitors the voice messaging system as it answers and routes
calls and it dials phone numbers to deliver messages or turn on message waiting indicators. The Status
Monitor utility displays any error messages for ports. The Status Monitor utility can also be used to reset ports
if they become unable to answer or place calls.
Disk full warning, When the number of minutes of message storage left on the system is equal to or less
than a value specified by the system manager, the system asks subscribers to delete unnecessary
messages.
Page 19- 32
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
On-line reports, NEAXMail AD-64 can provide detailed information regarding an organization’s incoming
telephone calls. The information, generated in reports, can be used to help make decisions about the
organization, such as staffing levels, productivity, and telephone equipment needs. Reports can be viewed on
the screen or printed on a printer connected to the voice processing system. Reports can also be copied to
files and imported into many word processing, database, and spreadsheet programs. There are five types of
on-line reports: usage reports, directory reports, busy ports report, call log, and error log.
Usage reports, These reports give an indication of how much the voice messaging system is being used
over time. These reports can be run for an individual guest, subscriber, extension number, or system ID.
Usage of the entire voice messaging system can also be tracked.
ƒ
The Usage Bar Graph Report shows the percentage of each hour that a person or box was using the
voice mail system. The bar graph report for the entire system shows the percentage of each hour that
the voice mail system’s ports were in use. This percentage equals the number of minutes the ports
were busy divided by the number of minutes they could have been busy. The number of minutes they
could have been busy equals 60 minutes multiplied by the number of ports on the system.
ƒ
Usage Table Report may be run for an individual guest, subscriber, extension number ID or system
ID and reports the total number of calls by system port and total duration of calls in minutes. A usage
table for the entire system shows the total number of calls answered by each system port for each
hour of the day and the duration of calls in total number of minutes. The report also includes grand
totals for day, night, and entire 24-hour periods.
Directory reports, Directory reports show the structure of the system, its subscribers, system IDs and
message groups. It is possible to run the report for everyone enrolled in the system, for all extension IDs or
for message groups. Directory reports include a subscriber report, extension list and group reports.
Subscriber Reports, Subscriber reports list each subscriber and guest enrolled in the system. The report
includes each personal ID, the number of new messages waiting, the total number of new and old messages,
the date the person last called the voice mail system, the number of days the system saves the subscriber’s
old and archived messages, and the access code.
Extension List Reports, Extension list reports show every subscriber on the system with the corresponding
extension number ID and the system IDs for any transaction boxes and interview boxes the subscriber owns.
This report does not include guests. For each subscriber, the report lists whether call transfer is currently on
or off, the telephone number that calls will be transferred to, the call transfer type, the number of times the
extension rings, call transfer options, and whether call holding is on or off.
Group Reports, Group reports provide information about message groups in the system. There are three
different group reports: List of Message Groups (lists groups), Group Membership (lists members of groups),
and Groups Including Person (lists all the message groups of which a subscriber or guest is a member).
Busy port report, The busy ports report shows the total number of times all or selected ports were busy. It
also shows the average percentage of time the ports were busy during a specific time period. The busy port
report can be run for all ports on the system or for a selected group of ports.
Call log, The call log provides a record of every call NEAXMail AD-64 answers, dials, or transfers. The call
log can be run for the entire system or an individual subscriber.
Error log, The error log lists system errors. The report lists each error code, the port on which the error
occurred, and the date and time the error occurred. This report can be used to diagnose and solve system
problems. The system manager can look up the error code on line and follow the steps to correct the error.
Remote maintenance, With NEAXMail AD-64’s remote maintenance feature, support and problem solving
can be provided without an on-site visit.
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 33
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
TeLANophy®
TeLANophy is a suite of optional unified messaging and call management modules that can enhance
your NEAXMail AD-64 voice messaging system by linking your telephone and your Local Area Network
(LAN). Using an intuitive Microsoft Windows interface, the TeLANophy modules bring calls and
messages to your desktop PC and make managing them as easy as clicking a mouse. Instead of
listening to calls and messages one-by-one on the telephone, you can visually manage multiple calls or
messages on screen and work more efficiently and effectively than ever before. As your organization
grows, you can add seats of the different modules. Each module—ViewMail, ViewMail for Microsoft
Messaging, ViewMail for Lotus Notes, ViewMail for GroupWise and ViewCall Plus addresses a specific
need and can be purchased to customize your NEAXMail AD-64 as your organization’s requirements
change.
ViewMail
ViewMail organizes messages on screen, making them much easier to manage than on the telephone.
ViewMail displays a list of messages that you can quickly scan for important information. You can see who
sent the message, the date and time it was sent, the length, and a subject if one was included. When used
with Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Caller ID, or when entered manually through NEAXMail AD64 call screening feature, the name and number of the person who sent the message is also included. You
can sort messages in any order and see details about them at a glance. Intuitive buttons and icons make
ViewMail easy to use. You can play and review selected messages, send a message to another subscriber,
send a copy of a message to another subscriber, save a message as a WAV file to a desired location and
delete messages from your mailbox—all with a click of a mouse. ViewMail can be used on Windows 98, NT
3.51, NT 4.0, 2000, and XP. Here’s a quick review of some of these features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Archiving messages
Call return
Copying or pasting messages
Future message delivery
Message cancel
Message status
Multimedia playback and record
Password controlled access
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Push button message control
Return receipt
Save as WAV files
Sorting messages
VCR-style playback controls
Visual and audio message notification
Volume control
ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging/Lotus Notes/GroupWise
ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging/Lotus Notes/GroupWise gives you the flexibility to send and receive
different types of messages interchangeably. With ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging/Lotus Notes/GroupWise,
all types of messages—voice, fax*, and e-mail—are collected in your Inbox and made available from a single
application ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging/Lotus Notes/GroupWise has all the easy-to-use features of you
Inbox, including drop down menus, toolbar buttons, context sensitive help, and tool tips.
With ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging/Lotus Notes/GroupWise, you use intuitive VCR-style buttons for
playing messages. You can use the mouse to click on the Rewind, Pause, or Fast Forward buttons to move
quickly through messages. A position slider shows where you are in the message, and lets you move
immediately to any part of the message. Using the mouse you can redirect a message to any subscriber,
including groups of subscribers. You can also redirect voice over the Internet. ViewMail will save voice
messages as WAV files when you attach them to an e-mail message.
Page 19- 34
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging/Lotus Notes/GroupWise can be used on Windows 98, NT 4.0, 2000, and
XP using Outlook 98, 2000, and 2002. ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging/Lotus Notes/GroupWise gives you
some of the same features as the basic ViewMail, including:
• Save as WAV files
• Message status
• Multimedia playback and record
• Password controlled access
• Push-button message control
• Return receipt
• Rules-based message handling
(with MS Exchange Server)
• Sorting messages
• VCR-style playback controls
• Visual and audio message notification
• Volume control
• Sending messages to the Internet
• Archiving messages
• Copying and pasting messages to
other applications
ViewCall Plus
ViewCall Plus gives you total control over all your incoming, outgoing, external, and internal telephone traffic
by managing calls on a PC via a Windows graphical user interface. ViewCall Plus provides live telephone call
management on your PC in the same way that unified messaging enables you to manage voice mail and
manage data about each caller with the applications—such as Microsoft Office—that you use everyday.
With ViewCall Plus, you simply click a mouse to take calls, send calls to a voice mail box, transfer calls to
other extensions, ask callers to hold or hear the caller’s name. You can do all this from the desktop PC
without picking up the telephone which means you can handle several callers at once without interrupting
conversations. Three completely integrated windows let you control every aspect of your telephone traffic.
The Telephone Control window shows the flow of calls to and from your extension and allows you to interact
with callers without interrupting conversations. The Call Log window records all call activity. You can sort or
print the information in any order, and you can utilize the information to return calls or add contacts to your
database by dragging it to those areas with the mouse. The Contact List manages data about each caller
including multiple telephone numbers and action items and provides you with on-screen information stored in
your personal database before connecting with a caller.
For NEAX PBXs enabled with TAPI services (i.e., TAPI Link or PC Telephony Adaptors), ViewCall Plus also
offers an Enhanced mode that adds powerful new features such as the ability to drag and drop dialing
information. To make a call, simply drag the name from the contact list or Call Log to the telephone window,
and ViewCall Plus will dial the correct number.
ViewCall Plus includes PhoneBASIC® which allows programmers familiar with Microsoft’s Visual Basic to
customize ViewCall Plus in almost unlimited ways. ViewCall Plus can be configured to access and interact
with databases, work with spreadsheets, direct calls according to a set of pre-established rules, handle
predictive dialing functions and more. For example, ViewCall Plus can make calls from within an application
such as Microsoft Access or Outlook. Here are just a few of the features available with ViewCall Plus:
• Built-in Personal Information Manager (PIM)
• Integrates with more than a dozen popular PIMs
• Call log
• Call screening
• Call sorting
• Call status
• Conference calling (Enhanced Mode)
• Multiple call handling
• Drag-and-drop between windows
(in Enhanced mode)
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
• Push-button call management
• Request hold
• Route call
• Sort messages in any order and print
• TAPI/TSAPI telephone support
• Three integrated windows
• Visual Basic scripting
• Caller identification
(when supported by the telephone system)
Page 19- 35
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
NEAXMail IM-16
The NEAXMail IM-16 is a card type voice processing system with various features and is
mounted into the LT slot of the PBX. The basic system of the NEAXMail IM-16 provides 4
ports of voice mail. Adding an additional extension card provides 4, 8, 12 additional ports
yielding a maximum of 16 voice mail ports.
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
Equipment
PZ-VM03-M
Quantity
1
Function
This card consists of a digital signal processor for port interface (4
ports), central processor unit for controlling various data, hard disk unit
to read/write the voice mail application program and voice mail
information, and an internal modem (14.4 Kbps) for remote
maintenance. Moreover, this card can provide 16 ports digital line
circuit interface, and is mounted into the LT00 slot (for CPU card) and
LT01 slot (for DSP card) of the PIM0. One card per PBX is available.
PZ-VM04
1
This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving the
voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface up to 12
ports. It is mounted on the VM03 card.
PZ-VM05
2
This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving the
voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface up to
8/16 ports. Moreover, this card is used for expanding the fax port
interface up to 4 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04 card.
PZ-VM06
2
This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving the
voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface up to
8/16 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04 card.
Page 19- 36
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
IM-16 Limited Packages
NEAXMAIL IM-16 Limited (4 PORT)
NEAXMAIL IM-16 Limited (12 PORT)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM03-M
4 Port S/W License Ltd.
PZ-VM04
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
PZ-VM06
12 Port S/W License Ltd.
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
NEAXMAIL IM-16 Limited (8 PORT)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM06
8 Port S/W License Ltd.
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
NEAXMAIL IM-16 Limited (16 PORT)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM04
PZ-VM06
PZ-VM06
16 Port S/W License Ltd.
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
IM-16 Standard Packages
NEAXMAIL IM-16 (4 PORT)
NEAXMAIL IM-16 (12 PORT)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM03-M
4 Port S/W Lic. TeLANophy
PZ-VM04
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
PZ-VM06
12 Port S/W Lic. TeLANophy
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
NEAXMAIL IM-16 (8 PORT)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM06
8 Port S/W Lic. TeLANophy
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
NEAXMAIL IM-16 (16 PORT)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM04
PZ-VM06
PZ-VM06
16 Port S/W Lic. TeLANophy
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
IM-16 Fax Packages
NEAXMAIL IM-16 (8 PORT+2 FAX)
NEAXMAIL IM-16 (12 PORT + 2 FAX)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM05
PZ-VM04
8 Port S/W Lic. TeLANophy
PZ-VM05
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
12 Port S/W Lic. TeLANophy
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
NEAXMAIL IM-16 (16 PORT + 2 FAX)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM05
PZ-VM06
PZ-VM06
16 Port S/W Lic. TeLANophy
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
NEAXMAIL IM-16 (16 PORT + 4 FAX)
PZ-VM03-M
PZ-VM04
PZ-VM05
PZ-VM05
16 Port S/W Lic. TeLANophy
10GB IBM 2.5" EIDE
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 19- 37
Chapter 20 System Documentation
Chapter 20 System Documentation
NEC offers a full complement of documents for the NEAX 2000 IPS product line. Technical
documentation is available on Compact Disk (CD ROM) or on the WEB through NTAC OnLine. This section lists all documents included on the Compact Disk (CD ROM).
NEAX 2000 IPS Documentation List
NEAX 2000 IPS Technical Manuals
Call CenterWorX Business System Manual
NEAXMail AD-8 Console Maintenance Manual
Call CenterWorX MIS Admin Manual
NEAXMail AD-8 EasyMade Application Maunal
Call CenterWorX MIS Installation Manual
NEAXMail AD-8 Reference Manual
Call CenterWorX MIS Reports Manual
NEAXMail AD-8 System Manual
CCIS System Manual
NEAXMail IM 16 System Manual
Command Manual
OAI System Manual
Configuration Guide
Office Data Programming
Data Interface System Manual
Q-SIG System Maunal
DM Hardware Installation Guide
Q-SIG System Manual (PRT)
DRS Installation and Configuration Gudie
Remote PIM System Manual (Digital Remote)
Feature Programming Manual
Retrofit System Guide
General Description
SMDR/MCI/PMS Interface Specification
INASET Installation Guide
SNMP Implementation
In-Skin Router Installation Guide
System Manual
Installation Procedure Manual
Upgrade Guide
ISDN System Manual
WCS System Manual (PCS)
Maintenance Manual
Wireless System Manual
MatWorX Installation Guide
NEAX 2000 IPS Features and Specification
Business Hotel Features and Specifications
ISDN/Q-SIG Features and Specifications
CCIS Features and Specifications
WCS Features and Specifications
CCWX ACD Features and Specifications
NEAX 2000 IPS User Manuals
Dterm Assistant User Guide
MatWorX User Guide
term
D
Series E Agent Console User Guide
MatWorX Studio User Guide
Dterm Series E Supervisor Console User Guide
NEAXMail AD-8 User Guide
Dterm Series E User Guide
Power Patch Panel User Guide
Dterm Series I User Guide
Request for Proposal
Dterm Series IP User Guide
SN716 Desk Console User Guide
INASET for IPS User Guide
NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal (RFP) Reference Guide
NDA-24349, Issue 4
Page 20- 1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement